Online help

TruTops Laser
Use the subject-index, the bookmark, or the Adobe Reader functions to search for a key word. Information about Adobe Reader In Adobe Reader, you can find the "Search" function under Edit. The "Search" function can also be activated by clicking the binoculars in the icon bar. "Continue search" can be activated using the F3 key. You can use the arrow button in the icon bar as well as the bookmark to navigate through the document.

Online help

Technical telegram
03/2008

TruTops
New in Version 1.2

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. K, Technische Dokumentation Johann-Maus-Strae , D-71254 Ditzingen Phone: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-, Fax: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-5 40 Internet: http//www.trumpf.com E-Mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf

1. 1.1

Product Data Management (PDM) File versions instead of copies

Previously variants of a file had to be saved as copies with different names. Now variants of a file can be kept together as file versions under a single file name. The advantage to you Only the current status of a file is shown in the file list of the TruTops file-browser, file versions are located in the version window.

File-browser function

1 2 3

Hide and show version window Button for creating a file version Directory contents (file list)

4 5

File, of which a version is to be created and archived Version window (archive) Fig. 50219en

File versions in version window

0BProduct Data Management (PDM)

TT138EN.DOC

2. 2.1

TruTops CAD Making actions with the mouse visible directly on the screen

The distance between two points or other actions which are performed with the mouse, can be made visible via the selection preview function (>View). Measurement results for instance are displayed directly on the cursor or on the screen.

Measurement result displayed on the cursor

Fig. 53388 Example Length, point, circle measurements Deleting contours, creating bending lines, stretching Deleting elements, moving, smoothing Creating roundings, bevels, notches Creating points, line 2 points, curve center radius Table 1

Further options

Function Measuring

Screen/cursor display The current measurement result is shown on the cursor Units are highlighted in color The number of selected units is shown on the cursor The corner and both corner elements are highlighted in color Special element points (see following table) are caught and are displayed on the cursor

Unit selection (elements, bendings, contours etc.) Unit selection

Corner selection

Position selection

Selection preview options

TT138EN.DOC

1BTruTops CAD

Special element points:

Point End point Center Intersecting point Center element 0 degree position 90 degree position 180 degree position 270 degree position Other element point Element points Affected elements Line, bevel, curve, rounding Circle, auxiliary circle, curve, rounding All elements Line, bevel, curve, rounding Circle, auxiliary circle, curve, rounding Circle, auxiliary circle, curve, rounding Circle, auxiliary circle, curve, rounding Circle, auxiliary circle, curve, rounding All elements Symbol Square Square Text: "x" and large circle Text: "1/2" Text: "0" Text: "90" Text: "180" Text: "270" Small circle Table 2

Selecting units (point, element etc.) Multiple selection options

Multiple selection has the advantage that several elements can be selected one after another and can then be changed, e.g. deleted. There are two ways to make a selection: multiple selection via the Ctrl key or fixed selection via the Shift key. When making a selection using the Ctrl key, elements that have already been selected can be removed. When using fixed selection, selected elements cannot be removed, the selection must be aborted with End.

1BTruTops CAD

TT138EN.DOC

3. 3.1

TruTops Tube 3D machine and processing simulation

The tube processing simulation is now also displayed in the 3D view (including machine). The 3D view is usually displayed via the 2D layout when a tube is created or opened.

3D machine and processing simulation

Fig. 53349

The viewing position can be changed during a simulation: The simulation can be rotated, shifted, zoomed in or zoomed out. The starting position is that of the machine operator at the control panel. The starting position can be restored at the push of a button.

TT138EN.DOC

2BTruTops Tube

4. 4.1

Nest Separating sheets

It is now possible to separate an individual sheet from a large number of sheets that are the same and modify it as needed. The number of pieces of the nested parts remains the same.

Sheet overview with separated sheets

Fig. 53391en

Advantages

Fast reaction to order changes: Modifications can be carried separately on a sheet. Fast storage: Only the modifications on a sheet are saved.

3BNest

TT138EN.DOC

4.2

Mirroring parts

In order to achieve optimum sheet usage, parts can be mirrored during nesting. Following settings are possible: Mirroring allowed: The part is only mirrored if sheet usage is improved. Mirror always: The part is always mirrored

Sheet with mirrored parts

Fig. 53398en

Advantages during nesting

Reduce sheet waste. Save material and costs. Optimize part quality (e.g. to prevent burr formation on the part side).

TT138EN.DOC

3BNest

5. 5.1

TruTops Punch Specification of magazine stations at risk of collision in the setup plan

Positions in the linear magazine which may not be loaded are shown in the setup plan. This is the case when the sheet would for example collide with the lift pedestals or the light barrier during a tool change.

Fig. 51787en

5.2
Exporting in an XML file Selection of tools

Exporting punching tool data

In addition to being able to import punching tool data from an XML file, it is now possible to export the data of any tools. The tool export mask is used to define whether a single tool, a tool list or all tools of a certain type are to be exported in the file.

Fig. 51788en

4BTruTops Punch

TT138EN.DOC

5.3
Replacing a part

Via the file browser: Replace part and transfer processings

Parts on a sheet can be replaced with similar parts i.e. parts with the same outer contour. The new part can now be on the sheet or can now also be selected via the file browser.

Fig. 51789en

Transferring processing

The same applies to processings which are to be transferred from one part to a similar one: The part from which the processings are to be transferred does not have to already be on the sheet. It is sufficient to select the relevant file via the file browser. It is still the case that contours that are the same are searched for in both parts and only the processings of matching geometries are transferred..

TT138EN.DOC

4BTruTops Punch

5.4

"On element partial"

This processing type enables an element of a contour to be partially processed. Unlike the "At element partial" function the tool center is on the contour.

Machinings with "On element partial"

Fig. 51790

10

4BTruTops Punch

TT138EN.DOC

Software manual

TruTops Laser
version 7.0 2007-04-20

Software manual

TruTops Laser
version 7.0

Edition 2007-04-20

Order Information

Please specify when ordering this document: Software manual TruTops Laser Edition 2007-04-20 Document number S98

Address for orders

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Technische Dokumentation Johann-Maus-Strae 2 D-71254 Ditzingen Fon: +49 (0) 71 56 /3 03-0 Fax: +49 (0) 71 56 /3 03-5 40 Internet: http//www.trumpf.com E-Mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf.com

This document was compiled by the Technical Documentation Dept. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG.

of

All rights, in particular the right to reproduce, distribute or translate this documentation, are reserved to TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG, even in case of patent and industrial rights applications. No part of this documentation may be reproduced, processed, duplicated or distributed by means of electronic systems in any form whatsoever without the prior written consent of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Subject to errors and technical changes. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG cannot be held responsible for possible mistakes in this documentation. Any warranty for direct and indirect damages, arising in connection with the delivery or the use of this documentation, is excluded, as far as this is in conformity with the law.

Table of contents

Chapter 1

Basics
1. 1.1 1.2 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4. 4.1 5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 6. 6.1 6.2 Starting and exiting TruToPs ....................................... 1-5 Starting TruTops .............................................................. 1-5 Exiting TruTops................................................................ 1-5 Online help, software version, tips and tricks from the Internet ............................................................ 1-6 Calling up online help ...................................................... 1-6 Obtaining tips and tricks directly from the Internet .......... 1-6 Displaying software version ............................................. 1-6 Applications in TruTops................................................ 1-7 Closing applications individually and reopening .............. 1-7 Opening applications severally ("copy") .......................... 1-8 Closing application permanently ("delete")...................... 1-8 Renaming application ...................................................... 1-8 Switching language of all applications............................. 1-9 User-defined settings .................................................. 1-10 Copying and transferring user-defined settings............. 1-10 Menus, function browsers and toolbars ................... 1-12 Displaying and hiding the function browser ................... 1-15 Displaying and hiding button texts in the function browser .......................................................................... 1-15 Displaying and hiding quick navigation bar ................... 1-15 Displaying and hiding toolbars....................................... 1-16 Moving or downsizing toolbars ...................................... 1-16 Modifying existing toolbars, creating own toolbars ........ 1-17 Renaming the toolbar .................................................... 1-17 Deleting a toolbar........................................................... 1-18 Resetting toolbars to their original status ...................... 1-18 Modifying the size of the symbols.................................. 1-18 TruTops with PDM (Product Data Management) ...... 1-19 What is PDM? ................................................................ 1-19 TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM a comparison .................................................................... 1-20

S98EN

2007-04-20

Table of contents

0-5

7. 7.1 7.2

Calling up PDM functions via command prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)...................................... 1-21 Calling up help for pdmCLI.exe ..................................... 1-21 Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe........................................... 1-23 TruTops file browser ................................................... 1-26 Opening the TruTops file browser ................................. 1-27 Creating new folders...................................................... 1-28 Deleting folders.............................................................. 1-28 Renaming files or folders ............................................... 1-29 Deleting and restoring files, emptying the recycle bin (PDM)....................................................................... 1-30 Searching for files .......................................................... 1-32 Adding other details to the list field of the files .............. 1-33 Opening files with the Geo Viewer ................................ 1-34 Sending files via email ................................................... 1-34 Zipping files.................................................................... 1-35 Sending files from PDM to "My Documents" in the file system ...................................................................... 1-35 File properties .............................................................. 1-36 Viewing file properties.................................................... 1-36 Importing/exporting files and folders (PDM)............. 1-37 Importing/exporting files using Windows Explorer (PDM)............................................................................. 1-37 Importing files and single folders using the file browser (PDM)............................................................... 1-38 Importing several folders in a single job step (PDM) ..... 1-39 Exporting files using the TruTops file browser (PDM)............................................................................. 1-40 Importing/exporting files using the prompt/script (PDM)............................................................................. 1-41 Dependencies between files....................................... 1-42 Checking dependencies between files (PDM)............... 1-42 Deleting, exporting dependent files, displaying properties ....................................................................... 1-44 Updated status of the files.......................................... 1-45 Checking the updated status of the files automatically when loading and saving in TruTops (PDM)............................................................................. 1-45

8. 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11

9. 9.1 10. 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5

11. 11.1 11.2

12. 12.1

0-6

Table of contents

2007-04-20

S98EN

13. 13.1 13.2

Characteristics: a property of elements and contours........................................................................ 1-46 Switching "Characteristic fixed" on or off - TruTops behavior ......................................................................... 1-46 Notches: Advanced options through the "Characteristic" property ................................................ 1-48 Screen display ............................................................. 1-49 Adapting window size .................................................... 1-49 Modifying color scheme ................................................. 1-49 Moving masks and messages on the interface ............. 1-49 Display of drawings..................................................... 1-50 Restructuring display of drawings.................................. 1-50 Displaying drawing completely ...................................... 1-50 Displaying detail view .................................................... 1-50 Moving screen section ................................................... 1-51 Zooming drawing ........................................................... 1-51 Get last view .................................................................. 1-52 Memorizing and recalling view....................................... 1-52 Displaying and hiding outline points .............................. 1-52 Operating TruToPs with the mouse........................... 1-53 Placing the mouse pointer in masks automatically at OK.............................................................................. 1-53 Operating TruTops using keyboard........................... 1-54 Using Windows keyboard commands and shortcuts..... 1-54 Entering numerical values and coordinates................... 1-54 Entering texts in input fields........................................... 1-54 Using key functions of TruTops ..................................... 1-55 Using "Copy" "Paste".................................................. 1-56 Using keyboard buffer of the command line (repeating entries).......................................................... 1-56 Calculator ..................................................................... 1-57 Deactivating calculator permanently.............................. 1-57 Entering numerical values in input fields ....................... 1-58 Entering X and Y coordinates of points ......................... 1-58 Searching with the help of place holders (wildcards) .................................................................... 1-59

14. 14.1 14.2 14.3 15. 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 15.8 16. 16.1

17. 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6

18. 18.1 18.2 18.3 19.

20. 20.1

TruTops license ........................................................... 1-60 Using TruTops with a limited period license .................. 1-60

S98EN

2007-04-20

Table of contents

0-7

21. 21.1 21.2 21.3 21.4

Printing ......................................................................... 1-61 Printing the textual content of the files........................... 1-61 Printing screen content .................................................. 1-61 Printing Geos as HPGL ................................................. 1-62 Printing labels (optional) ................................................ 1-62

Chapter 2

Setting basic data

1. 2. 3. 4. 4.1 The database as knowledge base................................ 2-4 TRUMPF functions......................................................... 2-4 Opening Data Management .......................................... 2-5 Machine data .................................................................. 2-6 Configuring machine........................................................ 2-6 Configuring "Basic data" of the machine .................... 2-6 Configuring "laser data"............................................ 2-16 Allocating and configuring automation components .............................................................. 2-17 Editing "Options"....................................................... 2-24 Setting production package output ................................ 2-26 Copying a machine ........................................................ 2-27 Material data................................................................. 2-28 Adding materials, blanks, storage items........................ 2-28 Modifying material data.................................................. 2-29 Deleting material....................................................... 2-29 Technology tables ....................................................... 2-30 Names of the technology tables .................................... 2-31 Searching for technology tables .................................... 2-32 Modifying the header data of the technology tables...... 2-34 Copying and creating new technology tables ................ 2-35 Deleting technology tables............................................. 2-36 Displaying and printing technology tables ..................... 2-36 Technology data concerning laser cutting machines in detail........................................................................... 2-37 "General" .................................................................. 2-37 "Cutting" (Siemens) .................................................. 2-40 Piercing..................................................................... 2-42 "Approach" (Bosch) .................................................. 2-44 "Cutting" (Bosch) ...................................................... 2-45

4.2 4.3 5. 5.1 5.2

6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7

0-8

Table of contents

2007-04-20

S98EN

6.8 7. 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6

"Vaporizing" .............................................................. 2-47 "Marking" .................................................................. 2-49 "Punch marking" ....................................................... 2-50 "Others" (Siemens) ................................................... 2-52 "MicroWeld" (Bosch)................................................. 2-54 "Process rules" (Bosch) ............................................ 2-55 Allocating process rules to technology tables................ 2-57 Process rules ............................................................... 2-58 Names of process rules ................................................. 2-58 Searching for process rules ........................................... 2-59 Copying process rules and creating new ones.............. 2-61 Deleting process rules ................................................... 2-64 Displaying and printing process rules............................ 2-64 Rules concerning laser cutting machines in detail......... 2-66 "General 1" ............................................................... 2-67 "General 2" ............................................................... 2-69 "General 3" ............................................................... 2-71 "General 4" ............................................................... 2-72 "Piercing" .................................................................. 2-73 "Approach"................................................................ 2-74 "Cutting".................................................................... 2-77 "Withdrawal" ............................................................. 2-79 "Positioning".............................................................. 2-81 "Rounding"................................................................ 2-82 "Looping" .................................................................. 2-84 "Vaporizing" .............................................................. 2-86 Allocating rules to individual technology tables ............. 2-86 Machine rules (public)................................................. 2-87 Adapting machine-dependent rules............................... 2-87 Modifying public variables in the machine rules ....... 2-87 Copying variables for a selected machine..................... 2-89 Description of the variables in the public machine rules ............................................................................... 2-90 System rules (public) ................................................ 2-101 Modifying public system variables ............................... 2-101 Description of the variables in the public system rules ............................................................................. 2-103 NC output.................................................................... 2-115 Free cycles................................................................... 2-115 Creating free cycles................................................ 2-115 Printing free cycles ................................................. 2-117 Modifying free cycles .............................................. 2-117

7.7 8. 8.1 8.2 8.3

9. 9.1 9.2

10. 10.1

S98EN

2007-04-20

Table of contents

0-9

Copying free cycles ................................................ 2-117 Removing created free cycles from the selection... 2-119 Formulas for time computation ............................... 2-119 11. 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 12. NC post-processing program, external programs .................................................................... 2-120 Entering NC post-processing programs/external programs...................................................................... 2-120 Creating collection call up for several NC post-processing programs ........................................... 2-123 Modifying NC post-processing programs .................... 2-125 Deleting post-processing programs............................. 2-125 User-defined programs ............................................. 2-126

Chapter 3

Nesting parts
1. 1.1 1.2 2. 2.1 "Nest" application.......................................................... 3-4 Activating parts monitoring .............................................. 3-5 Activating catching........................................................... 3-6 Nesting jobs ................................................................... 3-6 Compiling a new nesting job............................................ 3-8 Creating nesting job.................................................. 3-10 Entering parts in a nesting job .................................. 3-11 Deleting parts in the nesting job ............................... 3-14 Modifying parts in the nesting job ............................. 3-14 Defining nesting parameters.......................................... 3-15 Defining sheet data................................................... 3-15 Defining the options of a nesting job ........................ 3-17 Activating common cuts (TwinLine).......................... 3-23 Machine-oriented nesting (free geometry nesting processor) .................................................... 3-24 Modifying sheet name .............................................. 3-25 Starting automatic nesting process ............................... 3-26 Starting automatic nesting process .......................... 3-26 Re-nesting parts or sheets automatically ...................... 3-27 Re-nesting parts or sheets automatically ................. 3-27 Modifying the sheet view .......................................... 3-27 Modifying nesting jobs manually.................................... 3-28 Modifying the number of parts .................................. 3-28 Renesting new parts manually ................................. 3-28 Adding or removing copy of a sheet......................... 3-29

2.2

2.3 2.4

2.5

0-10

Table of contents

2007-04-20

S98EN

2.6

Adding a new (empty) sheet to the nesting job ........ 3-30 Importing and exporting nesting jobs............................. 3-31 Exporting nesting jobs .............................................. 3-31 Importing nesting jobs .............................................. 3-32 Structuring of a job file ('*.DAT') in detail .................. 3-33 Creating sheets and laying out with parts ................ 3-37 Creating new sheet........................................................ 3-37 Renesting parts.............................................................. 3-40 Creating a nesting job from a single sheet .................... 3-41 Laying out single sheets automatically .......................... 3-42 Defining parameters for automatic sheet layout....... 3-42 Laying out parts automatically .................................. 3-42 Laying out sheet sectionally (multi-copy machining) ................................................................ 3-43 Laying out sheet with the number of parts (multi-copy machining) ............................................. 3-44 Modifying sheet layout................................................ 3-46 Defining parameters for manual sheet layout................ 3-46 Moving and rotating parts .............................................. 3-46 Modifying reference point .............................................. 3-48 Modifying the parts quantity........................................... 3-49 Modifying the distance of parts ...................................... 3-50 Copying or cutting parts from one sheet to another ...... 3-50 Placing parts at exact distance for common cuts (TwinLine) ...................................................................... 3-52 Deleting parts................................................................. 3-53 Deleting sheet................................................................ 3-54 Modifying sheet format .................................................. 3-54 Defining remainder sheets.......................................... 3-55 Defining remainder sheets with arbitrary sheet geometry ........................................................................ 3-55 Managing remainder sheets .......................................... 3-56 Taking off remainder sheets .......................................... 3-57 Mini nests ..................................................................... 3-58 Creating mini nests ........................................................ 3-58 Modifying mini nests ...................................................... 3-60 Moving mini nests ..................................................... 3-60 Rotating mini nests ................................................... 3-63 Discarding changes to mini nests automatically....... 3-64

3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 6. 6.1 6.2

S98EN

2007-04-20

Table of contents

0-11

6.3

Distancing single parts of mini nests for common separating cuts (TwinLine)............................................. 3-65 ... by moving ............................................................. 3-65 ... by rotating ............................................................. 3-65 Displaying sheet .......................................................... 3-67 Displaying sheet with the machine environment ........... 3-67 Displaying sheet with automation components ............. 3-67 Information about sheet layout and nesting jobs................................................................................ 3-69 Displaying and hiding geometries of single parts .......... 3-69 Displaying the waste of a sheet or the total sheet waste.............................................................................. 3-70 Displaying result log....................................................... 3-71 Nesting parts in tiles (optional) .................................. 3-72 Defining parameters ...................................................... 3-72

7. 7.1 7.2 8. 8.1 8.2 8.3 9. 9.1

Chapter 4

Machining parts, generating an NC program

1. 2. 3. 3.1 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 "Laser" application........................................................ 4-8 Meaning of colors and symbols................................... 4-8 Changing machine....................................................... 4-10 Changing machine......................................................... 4-10 Opening and editing files............................................ 4-11 Opening drawings, mini nests, sheets and editing them simultaneously ...................................................... 4-11 Allocating part number automatically............................. 4-12 Opening drawings, mini nests, sheets and mirroring them simultaneously ...................................................... 4-12 Opening TwinLine-capable sheet (common cut) and preparing TwinLine ................................................. 4-13 Opening TwinLine-capable sheets (common cut) and preparing TwinLine ..................................... 4-15 Opening single part as blank and machining it immediately.................................................................... 4-16 Opening single part as a blank and machining it immediately............................................................... 4-16

4.5

0-12

Table of contents

2007-04-20

S98EN

4.6

Opening and editing nesting job, generating NC program and production package.................................. 4-18 Opening a nesting order ........................................... 4-19 Parameters for waste grid separation....................... 4-21 Machining single parts or sheets............................... 4-23 Selecting technology table and rules (technology data)............................................................................... 4-23 Selecting from the last used technology data........... 4-23 Selecting "new" technology data .............................. 4-24 Changing rule ................................................................ 4-26 Changing rule ........................................................... 4-26 Displaying the rule with which contours were processed ................................................................. 4-28 Generating machinings.................................................. 4-29 Machining the entire sheet or the entire single part automatically...................................................... 4-29 Selective processing................................................. 4-30 Copying machinings ...................................................... 4-31 Copying machinings ................................................. 4-31 Deleting machinings selectively..................................... 4-32 Deleting machinings selectively................................ 4-32 Disabling machinings selectively ................................... 4-33 Disabling machinings................................................ 4-33 Enabling disabled machinings .................................. 4-34 Collision test .................................................................. 4-35 Checking for collisions.............................................. 4-35 Showing log file of the collision check ...................... 4-36 Showing the technology log........................................... 4-36 Showing technology log............................................ 4-36 Showing single part information..................................... 4-37 Showing single part information ............................... 4-37 Modifying machinings................................................. 4-38 Contour parameters....................................................... 4-38 Showing contour parameters.................................... 4-38 Adopting contour parameters ................................... 4-39 Modifying contour size.............................................. 4-40 Switching contour size within a contour.................... 4-41 Cutting exact circles....................................................... 4-42 Cutting circles with diameter correction, path correction or approach start point............................. 4-44 Cutting contours with high precision (path correction) ...................................................................... 4-45 Cutting contours with high precision (path correction)................................................................. 4-45

5. 5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4 5.5 5.6

5.7

5.8 5.9

6. 6.1

6.2

6.3

S98EN

2007-04-20

Table of contents

0-13

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7 6.8

6.9

6.10

6.11

6.12

6.13

Cutting tool path without correction .......................... 4-46 Modifying piercing.......................................................... 4-47 Modifying piercing..................................................... 4-47 Deleting piercing ....................................................... 4-48 Approaching................................................................... 4-49 Modifying parameters of the approach flags ............ 4-50 Displacing the piercing points manually, modifying the form of the approach flags manually ................................................................... 4-51 Displacing approach flags manually ......................... 4-53 Inverting approach flags ........................................... 4-54 Withdrawal ..................................................................... 4-55 Creating withdrawal flags ......................................... 4-55 Modifying the form of the withdrawal flag ................. 4-56 Optimizing end of cut ..................................................... 4-57 Optimizing the end of cut of contour......................... 4-57 Corner treatment............................................................ 4-58 Rounding corners ..................................................... 4-58 Cooling corners......................................................... 4-58 Moving loopings........................................................ 4-59 Corner treatment in application ..................................... 4-60 Recreating corner treatment..................................... 4-60 Modifying corner treatment....................................... 4-62 Deleting corner treatment ......................................... 4-63 Microjoints...................................................................... 4-64 Setting program microjoints...................................... 4-64 Setting machine microjoints...................................... 4-66 Disabling contours against machine microjoints ...... 4-67 Deleting microjoints .................................................. 4-68 Microwelds ..................................................................... 4-69 Setting microwelds.................................................... 4-70 Deleting microwelds ................................................. 4-72 Cutting up scrap............................................................. 4-73 Defining parameters for cutting scraps..................... 4-73 Cutting scrap automatically ...................................... 4-74 Cutting scrap manually ............................................. 4-75 Deleting cut scrap ..................................................... 4-75 Optimizing the machining time....................................... 4-76 Positioning to cutting distance with path finder ........ 4-76 Preparing machinings ................................................. 4-78 Sheet parting cuts.......................................................... 4-78 Setting sheet parting cut parameters........................ 4-78 Creating sheet parting cuts automatically ................ 4-80 Creating sheet parting cuts manually ....................... 4-80

7. 7.1

0-14

Table of contents

2007-04-20

S98EN

7.2

Deleting polygonal sheet parting cuts step-by-step during creation ..................................... 4-81 Deleting sheet parting cuts ....................................... 4-81 Rearranging the sheet parting cuts ............................... 4-82 Rearranging sheet parting cuts ................................ 4-82 NC cycles...................................................................... 4-83 Inserting and deleting NC cycles ................................... 4-83 Inserting "Text" ......................................................... 4-83 Inserting "Cycle" ....................................................... 4-84 Deleting NC cycles ................................................... 4-85 Modifying machining sequence and positioning paths ............................................................................. 4-86 Modifying machining sequence manually...................... 4-86 Setting a particular part/contour at the beginning of the machining ....................................................... 4-86 Setting a particular part/contour at the end of the machining ........................................................... 4-87 Modifying machining sequence in any way .............. 4-87 Optimizing the machining sequence.............................. 4-89 Setting automatic, machine-dependent process options ...................................................................... 4-90 Presetting automatic path and tipping optimization in a machine-dependent manner ......... 4-93 Automatic, machine-independent optimization......... 4-94 Modifying positioning paths between single parts ......... 4-96 Modifying positioning paths manually....................... 4-97 Resetting the modified positioning paths.................. 4-97 Slats .............................................................................. 4-98 Assembling slats individually and saving them as selection......................................................................... 4-98 Calling up a saved selection and allocating it to a sheet .............................................................................. 4-99 Machinings with FlyLine (optional).......................... 4-100 Machining parts with FlyLine ....................................... 4-103 Showing or deleting FlyLine area ................................ 4-104 Increased acceleration .............................................. 4-105 For machines with an open control system ................. 4-105 Setting increased acceleration ............................... 4-105 Showing increased acceleration............................. 4-106 Deleting increased acceleration ............................. 4-106 Setting the dynamic level for single parts............... 4-107

8. 8.1

9. 9.1

9.2

9.3

10. 10.1 10.2

11. 11.1 11.2 12. 12.1

S98EN

2007-04-20

Table of contents

0-15

12.2

Showing dynamic level ........................................... 4-107 For machines with other control systems .................... 4-108 Setting increased acceleration ............................... 4-108 Simulation................................................................... 4-108 Simulating sheet machining......................................... 4-108 Machinings with two head machines ...................... 4-109 Defining machining with two cutting heads.................. 4-109 Defining machining with one of the two cutting heads ........................................................................... 4-110 Deleting machining with two cutting heads.................. 4-111 Showing machining with two cutting heads ................. 4-111 Creating and modifying simple sheet layout .......... 4-112 Creating simple sheet layout ....................................... 4-112 Moving, rotating parts... ............................................... 4-113 Moving parts horizontally or vertically..................... 4-113 Moving parts through 2 points ................................ 4-114 Moving parts through 2 points ................................ 4-114 Moving parts through the center............................. 4-115 Part groups................................................................. 4-116 Creating part groups .................................................... 4-116 Showing part groups.................................................... 4-117 Screen display ........................................................... 4-118 Activating view options ................................................ 4-118 Highlighting machining................................................. 4-118 Automation components supported by TruTops ... 4-120 Removing parts automatically: setting LiftMaster Sort and SortMaster..................................................... 4-122 Calculating the unloading of parts automatically .... 4-122 Setting SortMaster manually .................................. 4-123 Modifying unloading with the SortMaster ............... 4-125 Setting LiftMaster Sort manually............................. 4-127 Showing parts without unloading............................ 4-128 Loading with LiftMaster Sort ................................... 4-128 Palletizing cut parts (SortMaster) ................................ 4-129 Palletizing nesting job or single sheet .................... 4-130 Palletizing single sheets several times in various ways........................................................................ 4-134 Palletizing any sheet ordering sequences.............. 4-135 Modifying palletizing: moving, merging, rotating stack ... ................................................................... 4-137

13. 13.1 14. 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 15. 15.1 15.2

16. 16.1 16.2 17. 17.1 17.2 18. 18.1

18.2

0-16

Table of contents

2007-04-20

S98EN

Showing information for stacks or stack item ......... 4-139 Graphical display of the created stack.................... 4-140 Adopting total palletizing......................................... 4-141 Displaying palletizing graphic in the setup plan...... 4-141 19. 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 20. 20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 21. 21.1 21.2 21.3 21.4 21.5 21.6 21.7 Setup plan................................................................... 4-142 Selecting a setup plan template individually when generating the NC program ......................................... 4-142 Defining another template as the default template...... 4-143 Integrating your own company logo in the setup plans ............................................................................ 4-143 Outputting setup plan, defining options ....................... 4-144 Showing and printing setup plan ................................. 4-144 Using Microsoft Word as html editor............................ 4-145 Compressing html files ................................................ 4-146 Production package .................................................. 4-147 Generating production packages from several NC programs...................................................................... 4-147 Creating production package from every NC program........................................................................ 4-148 Creating production package from job......................... 4-149 Starting NcLink from TruTops...................................... 4-149

Generating an NC program....................................... 4-150 Making program settings ............................................. 4-150 Defining parameters .................................................... 4-152 Using NC post-processing programs........................... 4-153 Defining the sequence of the machinings.................... 4-154 Measuring sheet position, defining machine loading... 4-155 Defining options for output of the setup plan ............... 4-156 Editing and printing currently generated NC program........................................................................ 4-157 21.8 Editing and printing any NC program .......................... 4-157 21.9 Sending NC program to the machine .......................... 4-158 21.10 Switching time output on and off after each NC block............................................................................. 4-159 22. 22.1 Table alignment ......................................................... 4-160 Transferring data to the machine................................. 4-160

S98EN

2007-04-20

Table of contents

0-17

Chapter 5

Information on machines
1. Machines supported by TruTops Laser ...................... 5-2

Index

0-18

2007-04-20

S98EN

Chapter 1

Basics
1. 1.1 1.2 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4. 4.1 Starting and exiting TruToPs ....................................... 1-5 Starting TruTops .............................................................. 1-5 Exiting TruTops................................................................ 1-5 Online help, software version, tips and tricks from the Internet ............................................................ 1-6 Calling up online help ...................................................... 1-6 Obtaining tips and tricks directly from the Internet .......... 1-6 Displaying software version ............................................. 1-6 Applications in TruTops................................................ 1-7 Closing applications individually and reopening .............. 1-7 Opening applications severally ("copy") .......................... 1-8 Closing application permanently ("delete")...................... 1-8 Renaming application ...................................................... 1-8 Switching language of all applications............................. 1-9 User-defined settings .................................................. 1-10 Copying and transferring user-defined settings............. 1-10

S354EN

2007-04-20

Basics

1-1

5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 6. 6.1 6.2

Menus, function browsers and toolbars ................... 1-12 Displaying and hiding the function browser ................... 1-15 Displaying and hiding button texts in the function browser .......................................................................... 1-15 Displaying and hiding quick navigation bar ................... 1-15 Displaying and hiding toolbars....................................... 1-16 Moving or downsizing toolbars ...................................... 1-16 Modifying existing toolbars, creating own toolbars ........ 1-17 Renaming the toolbar .................................................... 1-17 Deleting a toolbar........................................................... 1-18 Resetting toolbars to their original status ...................... 1-18 Modifying the size of the symbols.................................. 1-18 TruTops with PDM (Product Data Management) ...... 1-19 What is PDM? ................................................................ 1-19 TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM a comparison .................................................................... 1-20 Calling up PDM functions via command prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)...................................... 1-21 Calling up help for pdmCLI.exe ..................................... 1-21 Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe........................................... 1-23 TruTops file browser ................................................... 1-26 Opening the TruTops file browser ................................. 1-27 Creating new folders...................................................... 1-28 Deleting folders.............................................................. 1-28 Renaming files or folders ............................................... 1-29 Deleting and restoring files, emptying the recycle bin (PDM)....................................................................... 1-30 Searching for files .......................................................... 1-32 Adding other details to the list field of the files .............. 1-33 Opening files with the Geo Viewer ................................ 1-34 Sending files via email ................................................... 1-34 Zipping files.................................................................... 1-35 Sending files from PDM to "My Documents" in the file system ...................................................................... 1-35 File properties .............................................................. 1-36 Viewing file properties.................................................... 1-36 Importing/exporting files and folders (PDM)............. 1-37 Importing/exporting files using Windows Explorer (PDM)............................................................................. 1-37

7. 7.1 7.2

8. 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11

9. 9.1 10. 10.1

1-2

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S354EN

10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5

Importing files and single folders using the file browser (PDM)............................................................... 1-38 Importing several folders in a single job step (PDM) ..... 1-39 Exporting files using the TruTops file browser (PDM)............................................................................. 1-40 Importing/exporting files using the prompt/script (PDM)............................................................................. 1-41 Dependencies between files....................................... 1-42 Checking dependencies between files (PDM)............... 1-42 Deleting, exporting dependent files, displaying properties ....................................................................... 1-44 Updated status of the files.......................................... 1-45 Checking the updated status of the files automatically when loading and saving in TruTops (PDM)............................................................................. 1-45 Characteristics: a property of elements and contours........................................................................ 1-46 Switching "Characteristic fixed" on or off - TruTops behavior ......................................................................... 1-46 Notches: Advanced options through the "Characteristic" property ................................................ 1-48 Screen display ............................................................. 1-49 Adapting window size .................................................... 1-49 Modifying color scheme ................................................. 1-49 Moving masks and messages on the interface ............. 1-49 Display of drawings..................................................... 1-50 Restructuring display of drawings.................................. 1-50 Displaying drawing completely ...................................... 1-50 Displaying detail view .................................................... 1-50 Moving screen section ................................................... 1-51 Zooming drawing ........................................................... 1-51 Get last view .................................................................. 1-52 Memorizing and recalling view....................................... 1-52 Displaying and hiding outline points .............................. 1-52 Operating TruToPs with the mouse........................... 1-53 Placing the mouse pointer in masks automatically at OK.............................................................................. 1-53 Operating TruTops using keyboard........................... 1-54 Using Windows keyboard commands and shortcuts..... 1-54

11. 11.1 11.2

12. 12.1

13. 13.1 13.2

14. 14.1 14.2 14.3 15. 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 15.8 16. 16.1

17. 17.1

S354EN

2007-04-20

Basics

1-3

17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6

Entering numerical values and coordinates................... 1-54 Entering texts in input fields........................................... 1-54 Using key functions of TruTops ..................................... 1-55 Using "Copy" "Paste".................................................. 1-56 Using keyboard buffer of the command line (repeating entries).......................................................... 1-56 Calculator ..................................................................... 1-57 Deactivating calculator permanently.............................. 1-57 Entering numerical values in input fields ....................... 1-58 Entering X and Y coordinates of points ......................... 1-58 Searching with the help of place holders (wildcards) .................................................................... 1-59

18. 18.1 18.2 18.3 19.

20. 20.1 21. 21.1 21.2 21.3 21.4

TruTops license ........................................................... 1-60 Using TruTops with a limited period license .................. 1-60 Printing ......................................................................... 1-61 Printing the textual content of the files........................... 1-61 Printing screen content .................................................. 1-61 Printing Geos as HPGL ................................................. 1-62 Printing labels (optional) ................................................ 1-62

1-4

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S354EN

1. 1.1

Starting and exiting TruToPs Starting TruTops

Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >TruTops.

1.2

Exiting TruTops
.

Select Exit TruTops

S354EN

2007-04-20

1BStarting and exiting TruToPs

1-5

2. 2.1
Displaying the software manual

Online help, software version, tips and tricks from the Internet Calling up online help

1. Select >Help >Help or press the <F1 > key. The software manual of the relevant application (CAD, Nest, Laser, Punch...) opens (.pdf-file with bookmarks). 2. Select >Help >Readme.

Displaying readme

2.2

Obtaining tips and tricks directly from the Internet

TruTops offers the option of accessing the Internet and thus the TRUMPF homepage directly. The homepage among other things has tips and tricks for programming and useful information about the product.

Select >Help >TruTops on the Internet. Internet Explorer with the CAD/CAM info service is started.

2.3

Displaying software version

1. Select >Help >Info.... The "Version" mask is displayed. 2. Select the "Version" tab.

1-6

2BOnline help, software version, tips and tricks from the Internet

2007-04-20

S354EN

3.

Applications in TruTops

After the installation of TruTops, every application is separately available as a separate "tab". Every application can be opened several times, closed and reopened individually, closed permanently ("delete"), renamed individually or moved. All individual modifications (including modifications to the interface, such as background color, adapted toolbars ...) are saved user-specifically and are loaded automatically when opening TruTops. Applications currently available in TruTops: TruTops CAD: drawing parts or loading them from other CAD systems, setting basic data (e.g. material). Nest: nesting parts, setting basic data (e.g. material). TruTops Laser: defining laser processing, setting basic data for the laser processing (e.g. slat layout, Cateye ...). TruTops Punch: defining punching or multi-purpose processing, setting basis data for the punching or multi-purpose processing (e.g. clamp data, repositioning cylinders ...).

3.1

Closing applications individually and reopening

Note If an application is closed, the individual user settings of the application are retained.

Closing application

1. Right click on the tab of the application to be closed. The context menu is displayed. 2. Select >Close. 3. Right click on the tab of any open application. The context menu is displayed. 4. Select >Open. 5. Select application to be opened.

Reopen application?

S354EN

2007-04-20

3BApplications in TruTops

1-7

3.2

Opening applications severally ("copy")

1. Right click on the tab of any application. The context menu is displayed. 2. Select >New. All available applications are displayed in another submenu. 3. Mark the application that is to be opened once more (i.e. copied). The copied application is opened. The name is extended by an additive.

3.3

Closing application permanently ("delete")

Notes If an application is closed permanently, it is no longer opened automatically when TruTops is started. The individual user settings are lost. The application can be reopened using the context menu (right click on the tab of any open application, select >New).

1. Right click on the tab of the application to be closed permanently. The context menu is displayed. 2. Select >Delete.

3.4

Renaming application

1. Right click on the tab of the desired application. The context menu is displayed. 2. Select >Rename. 3. Enter the new name of the application. 4. Select OK.

1-8

3BApplications in TruTops

2007-04-20

S354EN

3.5

Switching language of all applications

1. Select Languages . The "Language selection" mask is displayed. 2. Select the desired language. Note In the Korean, Chinese, Japanese, Polish and Russian languages, observe the operating system on which TruTops has been installed. Example: "Korean": For Korean operating system. "Korean (West)": For western operating system. 3. Select OK. The new language becomes effective the next time TruTops is started.

S354EN

2007-04-20

3BApplications in TruTops

1-9

4. 4.1

User-defined settings Copying and transferring user-defined settings

User-defined settings (e.g. type and number of applications that are opened, personal interface settings in the single applications) can be copied and transferred as follows: Copy settings of a user and provide them to another user. Transfer the settings of a user from one workstation (computer) to another workstation (computer). Copy interface settings of an application (e.g. of "CAD 1" ) and transfer them to the "CAD 2" application (on the same computer).

Conditions Administrator rights and copyrights are required in all user folders in order to copy the user-defined settings. User-defined settings of TruTops can be copied and transferred to another computer only for the same user.

1. Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >TruTops Administration >TruTops Config. The Microsoft Windows Explorer is started. The folder in which the user settings are saved is displayed automatically. Example: English operating system with "millerha" as user path 'C:\Documents and Settings\millerha\Application Data\TRUMPF'" is opened. The 'TRUMPF' folder has one subfolder for TruTops and one more for every application. In addition, the data is stored as per the product versions. 2. Either To transfer the settings to another computer: copy the entire 'TRUMPF' folder and paste it in the appropriate folder on another computer. or To provide the settings to another user on the same computer: copy the entire 'TRUMPF' folder and store it in the intermediate storage at a suitable location.

1-10

4BUser-defined settings

2007-04-20

S354EN

Log in another user on to the computer. Paste the entire 'TRUMPF' folder in the appropriate folder of another user. or To copy (e.g.) the settings of the "CAD 1" application and transfer them to "CAD 2" application: copy the 'x.usr' file in the folder of the "CAD 1" application and paste it in the folder of the "CAD 2" application.

S354EN

2007-04-20

4BUser-defined settings

1-11

5.

Menus, function browsers and toolbars

1 2

Voice switchover Application

4 5

Main menu bar with main menu and submenus Function browser

7 8

Status bar and message line Command and input line (can be moved to the desired position using the sizing tool)

Toolbars (can be customized, can be moved to the desired position using the sizing tool)

Exiting TruTops

Command block

TruTops user interface (here: CAD application is open)

Fig. 50209en

Main menus and submenus

The main menus and submenus contain all functions available in the relevant application (CAD, Nest, Laser, Punch ...).

1-12

5BMenus, function browsers and toolbars

2007-04-20

S354EN

Function browser

Function category (corresponding to an entry in the main menu)

Pin, pressed (function group is permanently open)

Function group (corresponding to a submenu)

Pin, open (function group is closed as soon as another one is opened)

3 4

Multi-function button Quick navigation bar (can be displayed and hidden)

7 8

Button text (can be displayed and hidden) Scrolling with the wheel mouse Fig. 50208en

Function browser

The function browser contains the most important (TruTops-specific) functions. The function browser is subdivided into separate function categories (e.g. "Modify"). The function categories are further divided into function groups (e.g. "Move"). The function browser can be dragged to the desired width. Frequently used function groups within a function category can be "pinned", i.e. can be opened permanently.

S354EN

2007-04-20

5BMenus, function browsers and toolbars

1-13

Multi-function buttons

Some of the buttons in the function browser function as multi-function buttons or options buttons. Multi-function buttons are marked with a triangle in the bottom right. They display their current function in the function browser. The current function can be changed with a right click (submenu). Options buttons switch functions on or off.

1 2

Multi-function button Displays the current function (here: create 1 copy and move by 2 points)

3 4

Options button Green: Function is activated. Gray: Function is deactivated Fig. 50212en

Multi-function buttons, Options buttons

Toolbars

Toolbars allow quick access to the most important functions. Depending on the user, they can be created individually, can be added to commands, can be moved and downsized. The toolbars can thus be adapted to typical programming tasks at any time. The current X and Y position of the mouse pointer is displayed in the status bar (including the measuring unit). The message line displays the ongoing action. Examples: Reading of file.... finished Drawing deleted! The command line gives instructions about what is to be done. Examples: Enter first point Identify object to be rearranged Mark element or click on "OK" The required data can be entered in the input line. Each entry must be confirmed with the enter key ( ). Examples of entries: X and Y coordinates of points. Angle.

Status bar and message line

Command line and input line

1-14

5BMenus, function browsers and toolbars

2007-04-20

S354EN

5.1

Displaying and hiding the function browser

Activate or deactivate >View >Toolbars >Function browser.

5.2

Displaying and hiding button texts in the function browser

The button texts in the function browser can be hidden and displayed again. If the button texts are hidden, one can only work with icons and tool tips.

1. Either Select >Tools >Options.... or Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt.... Select the "Options" tab. 2. Activate or deactivate "Show icon and text". 3. Select Close.

5.3

Displaying and hiding quick navigation bar

Function groups can be opened very quickly with the quick navigation bar (4) (see "Fig. 50208", pg. 1-13).

1. Either Select >Tools >Options.... or Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt.... Select the "Options" tab. 2. Activate or deactivate "Show Quick navigation bar". 3. Select Close.

S354EN

2007-04-20

5BMenus, function browsers and toolbars

1-15

5.4

Displaying and hiding toolbars

Sizing tool

Button Fig. 50210

"File" icon bar

1. Select >View >Toolbars. 2. Activate or deactivate the desired toolbars.

5.5
Moving toolbars

Moving or downsizing toolbars

1. Using the mouse, move the toolbar to the desired position with the sizing tool (= vertical lines on the left side). 2. To downsize the toolbar on the left: use the mouse to move the toolbar with the sizing tool (= vertical lines on the left side) to the left until the toolbar on the left is downsized. or Using the mouse, move the toolbar with the sizing tool (= vertical lines on the left side) to the right until the toolbar is downsized. Two arrows are displayed on the right side of the downsized toolbar (>>).

Downsizing toolbars

Arrows to select the hidden functions Fig. 50211

Minimized "File" icon bar

3. To select the functions that are (now) hidden: click > > and select the desired function.

1-16

5BMenus, function browsers and toolbars

2007-04-20

S354EN

5.6

Modifying existing toolbars, creating own toolbars

In addition to the already existing toolbars, the user can create his own toolbars and equip them with the required buttons. Alternatively, unnecessary buttons can be deleted and missing buttons can be added to the existing toolbars.

Creating a toolbar

1. Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt.... 2. In the "Toolbars" tab, select New. 3. Enter the name of the user-defined toolbar and select OK. The toolbar that is (still) empty is automatically displayed under the main menu bar. 4. Select the "Commands" tab. 5. In the "Categories" field, click on the desired category. 6. Drag the desired command from the "Commands" field to the new toolbar. 7. After creating all the desired toolbars, select Close. 8. If the "Adapt" mask is no longer open: select >View >Toolbars >Adapt... again. 9. Drag the buttons to be removed with the mouse out of the toolbar and drop them.

Adding a button to the toolbar

Removing a button again?

5.7
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Renaming the toolbar

Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt.... In the "Toolbars" tab, mark the toolbar to be renamed. Select Rename. Enter the new name of the toolbar and select OK. Select Close.

S354EN

2007-04-20

5BMenus, function browsers and toolbars

1-17

5.8
1. 2. 3. 4.

Deleting a toolbar

Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt.... In the "Toolbars" tab, mark the toolbar to be deleted. Select Delete. Select Close.

5.9

Resetting toolbars to their original status

All individual modifications (e.g. user-defined toolbars, moved toolbars) are cancelled when resetting the toolbars. The originally installed status is restored. (Exception: size of the symbols.)

1. Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt.... 2. In the "Toolbars" tab, select Reset....

5.10 Modifying the size of the symbols

The size of the symbols in the toolbars and the function browser can be modified. (However, the size of the symbols in the menus and the quick navigation bar cannot be modified.)

1. Either Select >Tools >Options.... or Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt.... Select the "Options" tab. 2. Activate or deactivate "Large symbols". 3. Select Close.

1-18

5BMenus, function browsers and toolbars

2007-04-20

S354EN

6. 6.1

TruTops with PDM (Product Data Management) What is PDM?

With the PDM Data Management, files can be saved and managed centrally for all products.

Data Management with PDM

Fig. 47164

The advantages of PDM

PDM is a central storage location for any number of TruTops workstations and various TruTops products. All TruTops products work using PDM. The dependencies between files are displayed for all products. You can delete and export files, recognize dependencies and view file properties with one mouse click. You can use the new TruTops file browser to search for parts quickly and specifically using the advanced search criteria in PDM. There are three options available as interfaces to older TruTops versions and other software products which are not PDM-compatible: Importing and exporting files and directories via the TruTops file browser. Importing and exporting files and directories with the Windows prompt or automated by means of a script. Direct access via an enabled Windows folder or network drive.

S354EN

2007-04-20

6BTruTops with PDM (Product Data Management)

1-19

6.2

TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM a comparison

TruTops with PDM Yes Yes Yes, fast TruTops with file system Yes, slowly

Property The system checks whether the files are up to date. The dependencies between files are monitored for all products. Searching for and displaying files by means of TruTops specific characteristics (e.g. material) is supported.

Heterogeneous data management (metric Yes and inch) is supported. File attributes ("Properties") created with different character sets (European, Japanese, ASCII) can be saved (display in TruTops still not correct). Yes

Yes -

Comparison of TruTops with PDM and TruTops with file system

Tab. 1-1

When working without the PDM, all functions of the TruTops file browser are available.

1-20

6BTruTops with PDM (Product Data Management)

2007-04-20

S354EN

7.

Calling up PDM functions via command prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)

The following PDM functions can be called up via the Windows command prompt or can be executed in an automated manner via script files (*.bat).
Function Exporting files/directories from a directory Importing files into a folder Deleting files from a folder Listing files in a folder Generating lists of attributes Creating a new (sub) folder Deleting an empty (sub) folder Copying a file or folder into a target folder Moving a file or folder into a target folder Determining file properties and dependencies again Executing commands contained in a script file Command Get Put Delete List ListAttributes Mkdir Rmdir Copy Move Rescan Batch Comment (see "Importing/exporting files and folders (PDM)", pg. 1-37) (see "Importing/exporting files and folders (PDM)", pg. 1-37) (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1-23) (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1-23) (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1-23) (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1-23) (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1-23) (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1-23) (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1-23) (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1-23) (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1-23) Tab. 1-2

7.1

Calling up help for pdmCLI.exe

1. Start Windows command prompt. 2. Change to the ':\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin' folder. 3. Enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe h Help for pdmCLI.exe is displayed:

S354EN

2007-04-20

7BCalling up PDM functions via command prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)

1-21

Help for pdmCLI.exe

Fig. 43561

4. To call up help for a specific command (e.g. "Put"), enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe h Put Help for the specific command is displayed:

Help on the "Put" command

Fig. 43562

1-22

7BCalling up PDM functions via command prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)

2007-04-20

S354EN

7.2

Examples of PDM functions which can be performed with pdmCLI.exe

Notes When entering the commands in the prompt or in the script files, write everything in a single line. Be sure that slashes or backslashes and spaces are correct. Replace server name with the actual name of the server. The commands listed in the examples are distinguished only by the parts highlighted in bold. Everything before and after it remains the same.

Opening prompts, creating script files

1. Either Start prompt from Windows. Go to the ':\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin'' folder. or Write cd C:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin in self-written BAT script file (*.bat). Add the following (exemplary) command lines.

Deleting file

2. To delete the 'box.mi' file in the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/' folder, enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe Delete /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/ box.mi --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-addre ss=servername:9999 3. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 4. To list all files in the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1' folder, enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe List /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --servi ce-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername: 9999 5. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 6. To create a list of attributes, enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe ListAttributes --service-name= TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:9999 7. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ).

Listing files in a folder

Creating a list of attributes

S354EN

2007-04-20

7BCalling up PDM functions via command prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)

1-23

Creating a new (sub) folder

8. To create a folder '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1', enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe Mkdir /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --serv ice-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address =servername:9999 9. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 10. To delete the folder '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1', enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe Rmdir /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --serv ice-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address =servername:9999 11. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 12. To copy the 'box.mi' im Ordner '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1' file into the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2' folder, enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe Copy /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1/ box.mi --target-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2 -service-name=TruTopsPDM2 -- port-address =servername:9999 13. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 14. To copy all files from the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1'' folder into the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2' folder, enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe Copy /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --targe t-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2 --service-n ame=ToPs_PDM --port-address =servername:9999 15. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 16. To move the 'box.mi' file from the '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1/' folderto the '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2' folder, enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe Move /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/ box.m i --target-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2 -service-name=TruTopsPDM2 -- port-address =servername:9999 17. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 18. To move the '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1' folder to the '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2' folder, enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe Move /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1 --targ et-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2 --servicename=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address =servername:9999 19. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ).

Deleting a (sub) folder

Copying a single file into a different folder

Copying several files into a different folder

Moving a single file into a different folder

Moving a folder

1-24

7BCalling up PDM functions via command prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)

2007-04-20

S354EN

Redefining file properties and dependencies

20. Enter the following command: pdmCLI.exe Rescan --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 -port-address=servername:9999 21. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ).

S354EN

2007-04-20

7BCalling up PDM functions via command prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)

1-25

8.

TruTops file browser

The TruTops file browser features the following functions: Convenient and simple operation with a user-friendly interface (Windows standard). Advanced search functions: various additional configurable search criteria assist you in systematic part management. All files in the TruTops file browser are displayed in a folder structure. The dependencies between files are displayed. Simple import and export of files.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Navigate back Navigate forwards Go to the next higher directory Filter view (search) Folder view Create new folder

7 8 9

Update view Navigator Current path

10 Directory contents 11 Show directories from which a file has already been opened

TruTops file browser (here via Open file, with PDM)

Fig. 41363en

Last selected folder

TruTops shows the current path under the toolbar (9). To display folders from which a file has already been loaded: open current path with (11).

1-26

8BTruTops file browser

2007-04-20

S354EN

File sorting options

The files displayed can be sorted according to the required detail by clicking on the detail (e.g. "File size"). The detail according to which the sorting is to be done, is marked gray. Clicking on the detail repeatedly modifies the sorting direction (upward/downward).

Context menu of the TruTops file-browser

Context menu Fig. 41364en

Context menu of TruTops file browser (here via Open file, with PDM)

Note Menu items that cannot be selected at the relevant point are grayed out.

8.1

Opening the TruTops file browser

The TruTops file browser is automatically opened when, for example, a file is opened with >File >Open or a file is saved with >File >Save. Additionally, the TruTops file browser can be opened independent of the loading or saving of a file:

In an arbitrary TruTops application: select >File >File browser.... or Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM browser.

S354EN

2007-04-20

8BTruTops file browser

1-27

8.2

Creating new folders

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Either Select (Create new folder). or Open the context menu with the right mouse button. Select >New. 3. Enter name of the new folder. 4. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 5. If required, refresh view with (Refresh) or <F5 >.

8.3

Deleting folders

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Mark the folder to be deleted. 3. Either Press <Entf > or <Del >. or Open the context menu with the right mouse button. Select >Delete. 4. Confirm the query with OK.

1-28

8BTruTops file browser

2007-04-20

S354EN

8.4

Renaming files or folders

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Either Change to the folder to be renamed. Mark the folder. or Change to the folder in which files are to be renamed. Mark a file. 3. Either Left click once on the folder or file name. or Open the context menu with the right mouse button. Select >Rename. 4. Enter the new name. 5. Confirm the new name with <Enter > or <Return > ( ) or left click outside the folder or file name.

S354EN

2007-04-20

8BTruTops file browser

1-29

8.5

Deleting and restoring files, emptying the recycle bin (PDM)

When working with PDM, deleted files are moved to the recycle bin of the file browser. It is possible to restore files from the recycle bin if required (including all attributes such as material, material thickness etc.). The folder name of the recycle bin is 'RecycleBin' and can be modified (at the PDM server) through the PDM administrator. When working in the file system, only a query appears asking whether the file should be deleted permanently.

Deleting files

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Change to the folder from which files are to be deleted. 3. Mark the file(s) to be deleted. To mark several files: press <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed. 4. Either Press <Entf > or <Del >. or Open the context menu with the right mouse button. Select Delete. 5. Confirm query. When working with PDM, the files (including the path specifications and the extension '.trash.zip') are moved to the recycle bin of the file browser. Tip To delete files permanently (then they are not moved to the recycle bin and can not be restored): press the Shift key when deleting files. 6. Change to the recycle bin of the TruTops file browser ('RecycleBin'). 7. Mark the file to be restored (i.e. the complete file specification with the file names and the extension '.trash.zip'). To mark several files: press <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed. 8. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 9. Select >Restore. 10. Change to the recycle bin of the TruTops file browser ('RecycleBin').

Restoring deleted files

Emptying recycle bin

1-30

8BTruTops file browser

2007-04-20

S354EN

11. To delete single files in the recycle bin permanently: mark the files. To mark several files: press <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed. 12. To delete all files in the recycle bin permanently: mark files with <Strg >+<A > or <Ctrl >+<A >. 13. To delete the complete recycle bin permanently: mark the recycle bin ('RecycleBin'). Note If the entire recycle bin is deleted (folder including its content), it is automatically recreated the next time a file is deleted. 14. Either Press <Entf > or <Del >. or Open the context menu with the right mouse button. Select >Delete. 15. Confirm query. Renaming the recycle bin 16. 17. Note The recycle bin can be renamed only at the PDM server. Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM Administration >PDM Admin. Double click in the RECYCLE_BIN_NAME line in the table cell of the "ParamValue" column (default content of the cell: RecycleBin). Rename RecycleBin as desired. Select Exit. Select >Start >Settings >Control Panel >Management >Services. Mark TruTopsPDM2. Select Restart service.

18. 19. 20. 21. 22.

S354EN

2007-04-20

8BTruTops file browser

1-31

8.6

Searching for files

Note 1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Either Select . or Open the context menu with the right mouse button. Select Search.... 3. Set filters (the filters can be combined) and enter the searched names (case insensitive). If required, use a place holders (see "Searching with the help of place holders (wildcards)", pg. 1-59). 4. Open "Search in:" list field with . 5. Select the folder where the search should be started. 6. If required, select "Search sub-folder". 7. To start the search : select Search. 8. To switch on the folder view again: select .

1-32

8BTruTops file browser

2007-04-20

S354EN

8.7

Adding other details to the list field of the files

The TruTops file browser by default displays the "File names", the "File size" and the "Last write access" (sorted in ascending order of the file names) in the file view. The displayed details can be added to (e.g. with "Machine name" or with "Sheet thickness"). Note The more details the TruTops file browser displays, the more time it requires to create the view.

Standard information in the list header

List field of the files Fig. 41788en

TruTops file browser

Adding details

1. To add details: right click in the list header (1). 2. Either Select the desired detail. or Select >More. Select the desired details. Select OK.

S354EN

2007-04-20

8BTruTops file browser

1-33

Setting details at the desired place in the list field

3. Hold down the mouse button and drag the details one after another to the desired position. 4. To sort files as by a specific detail: click on the detail. The detail, according to which the sorting is to be done, is marked in gray. Clicking on the detail repeatedly modifies the sorting direction (upward/downward).

8.8

Opening files with the Geo Viewer

File formats from TruTops (e.g. *.GEO, *.TMT, *.ROT ) can be opened with the Geo Viewer in PDM. The appropriate link required to open them with the Geo Viewer is created automatically when installing TruTops.

Opening a file with the Geo Viewer

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Search for the file to be opened with the Geo Viewer. 3. Mark the file. 4. If the file browser was opened via >File >Open or >File >Save: right click to open the context menu, select >Open. 5. If the independent file browser is opened: double click on the file. 6. Close Geo Viewer with OK.

Closing Geo Viewer

8.9

Sending files via email

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Search for the file(s) to be sent. 3. Mark the file(s). 4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 5. Select >Send to.... 6. Select >Mail recipient. An email mask containing the selected file as an attachment is displayed. The email can be further processed and sent.

1-34

8BTruTops file browser

2007-04-20

S354EN

8.10 Zipping files

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Search for file(s) to be zipped. 3. Mark the file(s). 4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 5. Select >Send to.... 6. Select >Zip file. A zip file containing all the selected files is created in PDM. The name of the zip file comprises the name of the file selected first (without the file extension) and the new file extension: '.tpdm.zip'. In one more step, the zip file can, for example, be exported into the file system or be sent to a mail recipient (see relevant sections).

8.11 Sending files from PDM to "My Documents" in the file system
1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Search for file(s) to be zipped. 3. Mark the file(s). 4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 5. Select >Send to.... 6. Select >My Documents.

S354EN

2007-04-20

8BTruTops file browser

1-35

9. 9.1

File properties Viewing file properties

Note The properties of files which have been written on an operating system with a different language and which contain special characters may be displayed incorrectly.

Either (With PDM) Display the properties of a file when checking the dependencies (see "Dependencies between files", pg. 1-42). or Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). Search for the file whose properties are to be displayed. Mark the file. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. Select >Properties. The "Properties..." mask and the "General" tab is displayed. To display all the information regarding a file: select the "File info" tab. If required, select "Mask attributes that are not occupied".

1-36

9BFile properties

2007-04-20

S354EN

10.

Importing/exporting files and folders (PDM)

10.1 Importing/exporting files using Windows Explorer (PDM)

The PDM file storage can be used like a normally enabled Windows folder or enabled network drive. This enables for example, saving drawings from a CAD system directly in PDM.

Connecting the PDM network drive

1. Either Start Windows Explorer. Select >Tools >Connect network drive. Select the drive. Under "folder", enter \\Servername\trumpf_pdm2 or through Search, search for '\\Servername\trumpf_pdm2'. (Server name = name of the server on which the PDM has been installed.) Select Finish. or Start the Windows prompt with >Start >Programs >Accesories >Command prompt. Enter NET USE P: \\Servername\trumpf_pdm2. (Server name = name of the server on which the PDM has been installed.) Any free drive letter can be selected as the drive letter.) 2. Use the selected drive to store files and directories in PDM or read them out from PDM.

Importing/exporting files

S354EN

2007-04-20

10BImporting/exporting files and folders (PDM)

1-37

10.2 Importing files and single folders using the file browser (PDM)
Files and folders are imported using the TruTops file browser as follows: PDM adopts the folder structure from the file system and ensures the correct sequence. All sub-folders are also imported and their structures are adopted. The target folder in the PDM can be located anywhere. TruTops determines existing dependencies between the files and saves them.

Notes If a *.GEO file is moved to a different folder after being imported, TruTops deletes the dependency to all sheets to which the *.GEO was nested. Dependencies can only be established to files that are also in the PDM. No dependencies are generated if, for example, a nested sheet (*.TAF) is imported before the parts (*.GEO) are imported. Depending on the file format, not all dependencies between the files can be determined when importing. For example, dependencies to .pdf files are set in TruTops when they are created. When exporting from PDM or Re-importing into PDM, no dependencies from .PDF files can be read.

Selecting an import folder

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Change to the folder into which files are to be imported. 3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 4. Select >Import directory. The "Import directory" mask is displayed. 5. Change to the folder which is to be imported. 6. Mark folder.

Import folder?

Import file?

Note To enable establishing dependencies between files, always import files in the sequence of their creation or import them folder by folder. 7. Select >Import file. The "Import file(s)" mask is displayed. The mask has the same functions as the file browser (e. g. adding further details to the list field of the files, searching for files in the filter view...; see section "TruTops file browser").

1-38

10BImporting/exporting files and folders (PDM)

2007-04-20

S354EN

8. To restrict the file selection in the folder view ( ): open the "File type" list field with . 9. Select file type. 10. Marked searched files. To mark several files: press <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed. 11. Select OK.

10.3 Importing several folders in a single job step (PDM)

Several folders (that are independent of each other) can be imported into the TruTops PDM in a single job step via the "PDM importer". Additionally, a different target folder can be selected in the TruTops PDM for each folder. TruTops determines existing dependencies between the files and saves them.

Selecting a folder

1. Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM Importer. 2. In the "PDM directory import" mask, mark the folder to be imported. . 3. Transfer the folder to the right list field with 4. To import other folders: repeat steps 2 and 3. 5. Right click on the folder symbol under "Target path". The "Selection of PDM target path" mask is displayed. 6. Select target folder. 7. Select OK. 8. Mark the folder to be deleted. 9. Select . Note When importing folders, the dependencies between files are automatically checked and entered in the PDM. A '.TAF', for example, knows which '.GEO' it uses. A '.GEO', however, does not know the '.TAF' in which it is being used. If all '.TAF' files are imported from one folder first and then the corresponding 'GEO' files belonging to them are imported from another directory, the dependencies cannot be entered during the import. 10. To set the dependencies correctly after the import: select "Update file dependencies after import".

Defining target paths

Delete folder from the import list? Updating file dependencies after import

S354EN

2007-04-20

10BImporting/exporting files and folders (PDM)

1-39

Starting import

11. If all folders to be imported have been transferred to the right list field and the target folders have been defined: select Start directory import. 12. After the import: select Exit.

10.4 Exporting files using the TruTops file browser (PDM)

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Either Change to the folder to be exported. or Change to the folder from which files are to be exported. Mark the file(s) to be exported.To mark several files: press <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed. 3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 4. Select > Export. The "Target path for export..." mask is displayed. 5. Change to the folder into which the files are to be exported. 6. Mark folder. 7. Select OK.

1-40

10BImporting/exporting files and folders (PDM)

2007-04-20

S354EN

10.5 Importing/exporting files using the prompt/script (PDM)

Files and folders can also be imported into PDM or exported from PDM using the Windows prompt or an automated procedure using script files (*.bat) (see "Calling up PDM functions via command prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)", pg. 1-21).

Exporting/importing using the prompt Exporting a file

1. Start the Windows command prompt. 2. Change to the ':\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin' folder. 3. To export files, enter the following command (enter everything in one line, and observe slashes or backslashes and spaces!). Replace highlighted example names with actual names: pdmCLI.exe Get --service-name=ToPs_PDM --portaddress=servername:9999 --target-directory=C:\ target directory/source directory/example file.geo 4. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 5. To export directories, enter the following command (enter everything in one line, and observe slashes or backslashes and spaces!). Replace highlighted example names with actual names: pdmCLI.exe Get --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --po rt-address=servername:9999 --recursive --use-e ntity-directory --target-directory=C:\target directory/source directory/example directory 6. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 7. To import files, enter the following command (enter everything in one line, and observe slashes or backslashes and spaces!). Replace highlighted example names with actual names: pdmCLI.exe Put --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --po rt-address=servername:9999 --target-directory= /target directory C:\source directory\ example file.geo 8. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 9. Write cd C:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin self-written BAT script file (*.bat). 10. Add the above (exemplary) command lines. in a

Exporting a directory

Importing files

Automated export/import using script files

S354EN

2007-04-20

10BImporting/exporting files and folders (PDM)

1-41

11.

Dependencies between files

11.1 Checking dependencies between files (PDM)

A file can, on the one hand, form the basis for other files and, on the other hand, be based on other files. Checking these dependencies is important whenever, for example, a file needs to be modified or deleted. Example: The file is the basis for other files On which sheets ('*.TAF') has a particular part ('*.GEO') already been nested? In which NC programs ('*.LST') does a particular GEO file ('*.GEO') occur?

Example: The file uses the other following files: Which parts ('*.GEO') have been nested on a particular sheet ('*.TAF')?

Note If a *.GEO file has been moved to a different folder after being imported, TruTops deletes the dependency to all sheets on which the *.GEO was nested.

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Search for the file whose dependencies are to be checked. 3. Mark the file. 4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 5. Select >Dependencies (if >dependencies have been grayed out, the file has no dependencies.) 6. To check which other files the files uses: select the "Used..." tab. 7. To check which other files are based on the file, select the "Basis for..." tab.

1-42

11BDependencies between files

2007-04-20

S354EN

Fig. 41785en

8. To group the display according to file types: select "Group according to file type". 9. To view a preview of dependent files: select "Preview" (self-holding) and mark the desired file.

S354EN

2007-04-20

11BDependencies between files

1-43

11.2 Deleting, exporting dependent files, displaying properties

Viewing the "Dependencies" mask 1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Search for the file whose dependencies are to be checked. 3. Mark the file. 4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 5. Select >Dependencies (if >dependencies have been grayed out, the file has no dependencies.) 6. In the "Dependencies" mask, mark the file to be deleted. 7. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 8. Select >Delete. 9. Mark the file(s) which are to be exported.To mark several files: press <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed. 10. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 11. Select > Export. The "Target path for export..." mask is displayed. 12. Switch to the directory to which you want to export. 13. Mark the directory. 14. Select OK. 15. Mark the file(s) whose properties are to be displayed. To mark several files: press <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed. 16. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 17. Select >Properties. The properties of the file are displayed.

Delete dependent files?

Export dependent files?

Displaying properties of dependent files?

1-44

11BDependencies between files

2007-04-20

S354EN

12.

Updated status of the files

12.1 Checking the updated status of the files automatically when loading and saving in TruTops (PDM)
To automatically check the updated status of the files when loading them in TruTops: set the value of the "PDMWarningMode" variables in the public system rules to the desired value (see TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch software manual, chapter "Setting basic data"): 0 = Do not check updated status. 1 = Check updated status when loading. 2 = Check updated status when saving. 3 = Check updated status when loading and when saving.

S354EN

2007-04-20

12BUpdated status of the files

1-45

13.

Characteristics: a property of elements and contours

A characteristic is a property which one or more elements or one or more contours possess. Characteristics are created in TruTops CAD, saved in the geo file and can be evaluated in other TruTops applications. Advantages: Rows of holes and hole grids can be machined more easily: Rows of holes that have been created in TruTops CAD through >Create >Macros >Row of hole can also be evaluated in other TruTops applications. The conversion into rows of holes is no longer required. As a result, it is also possible to create rows of holes which are not axially parallel. The NC program is shortened. In TruTops CAD, Geometries with the characteristic Property are interpreted as a unit. All actions are applied to the entire unit, reducing the drawing effort considerably.

13.1 Switching "Characteristic fixed" on or off - TruTops behavior

"Characteristic fixed" is active: Certain elements are combined to form a unit with the characteristic property. If the "Characteristic fixed" is active, then a certain action is applied either to the complete unit (i.e. to all elements) or the action is rejected. For example, a single element of the "Single square hole" unit cannot be deleted. The entire single hole is deleted. All impermissible actions result in the contour or the element being displayed in pink. The colored highlight is kept up to the next redrawing. Examples: A single stroke cannot be stretched. The single stroke is displayed in pink. It is not possible to shorten elements for single strokes. The elements are displayed in pink. Clicking on an element results in the selection of the entire unit (all elements). When boxing in an element using the mouse, an action is executed only if the entire unit has been boxed in.

1-46

13BCharacteristics: a property of elements and contours

2007-04-20

S354EN

"Characteristic fixed" is not active: If "Characteristic fixed" is not active, the elements of contours can be arbitrarily modified with the Property characteristic. A single element of the single square hole can be deleted, for example. During modification, the Property characteristic is lost and the display color "orange" is reset to the normal line color.
Example "Characteristic fixed" Active Single square hole X X X X Not active. Delete Effect

Element Contour X X The entire single hole is deleted. The entire single hole is deleted. The single element of the single hole is deleted. The display color changes from orange to the normal line color. The characteristic is dissolved. X X X The entire single hole is deleted. The entire row of holes is deleted. The row of holes remains unchanged. The clicked contour of the row of holes is displayed in pink. If the drawing is updated ( ), the original state is restored. The clicked element of the contour is deleted. The remaining holes are assembled into smaller rows of holes. (Example: row of holes with 10 holes, an element of hole 3 is deleted: one of the new rows of holes consists of holes 1 and 2, the other consists of holes 4 to 10.) X The clicked contour is deleted. The remaining holes are assembled into smaller rows of holes. (Example: row of holes with 10 holes, an element of hole 3 is deleted: one of the new rows of holes consists of holes 1 and 2, the other consists of holes 4 to 10.) Tab. 1-3

X Row of square holes X X

Switching "Characteristic fixed" on and off

1. Select >Edit >Characteristic fixed. or Select Fix characteristics . (If "Characteristic fixed" is activated, the button is pressed). 2. Select Highlight characteristics . The characteristics are displayed in orange. 3. Select >Edit >Delete >Characteristics. or Select Delete characteristics .

Highlighting characteristics

Removing characteristics

S354EN

2007-04-20

13BCharacteristics: a property of elements and contours

1-47

13.2 Notches: Advanced options through the "Characteristic" property

The "Characteristic" property automatically increases the number of options for shaping and processing notches: Notches can be enhanced by roundings, bevels or sub-notches. Roundings, bevels, separating cuts or sub-notches can be removed from a notch. TruTops CAD joins adjacent notch elements automatically. If a notch is deleted entirely, the adjacent elements are joined again. Notches can be copied, moved, rotated, mirrored and stretched. The length of end elements of notches can be changed.

1-48

13BCharacteristics: a property of elements and contours

2007-04-20

S354EN

14.

Screen display

14.1 Adapting window size

The window size can be adapted in a stepless manner. This is advantageous, for example, when working with online documentation simultaneously, or when the start bar lies over the TruTops command bar.

Drag the window frame to the desired size with the mouse.

14.2 Modifying color scheme

The following color schemes are possible: Bright (white) background. Dark (black) background. Blue background. Gray background. Each color scheme affects only the current application (CAD, Nest, Laser, Punch ...).

1. Either Select >Tools >Options.... or Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt.... Select the "Options" tab. 2. Open the color scheme with and mark the desired color scheme.

14.3 Moving masks and messages on the interface

In TruTops, masks and messages can be freely moved on the interface. This is advantageous, for example, when a message and the objects under the message need to be visible.

1. Click on the title bar of the mask or the message. 2. Holding down the mouse button, move to the desired position.

S354EN

2007-04-20

14BScreen display

1-49

15.

Display of drawings

15.1 Restructuring display of drawings

Either Select >View >Zoom >Update. or Press <F5 > button. or Select Update drawing .

15.2 Displaying drawing completely

Either Select >View >Zoom >All. or Press <Ctrl >+<T >. or Select Total view .

15.3 Displaying detail view

Boxing in desired detail 1. Either Select >View >Zoom >Detail. or Select Detail view . 2. Click on the first point in the box using the mouse pointer (cursor). 3. Click on the opposite point in the box. 4. Right click on the desired detail in the graphics area. The graphics is zoomed in on. The pick point in the graphics area becomes the new center.

Zooming in (detailing)

1-50

15BDisplay of drawings

2007-04-20

S354EN

Zooming out

5. Use the middle mouse button to click on the desired detail in the graphics area. (If a wheel mouse is used: press the wheel of the wheel mouse). The graphic is zoomed out from. The pick point in the graphics area becomes the new center.

15.4 Moving screen section

Either Select >View >Zoom. Select >Up, >Down, >To the left or >To the right. or Position the mouse pointer (cursor) as sizing tool in the working area. Keep the wheel of the wheel mouse (or the middle button) pressed. Move the mouse pointer. Tip Depending on the usual method, the <Ctrl> button can be pressed. This however is not necessary.

15.5 Zooming drawing

Either To zoom steplessly: position the mouse pointer (cursor) in the working area. Keep the right mouse button pressed. Push the mouse downwards (zoom out) or upwards (zoom in). or To zoom stepwise: position the mouse pointer (cursor) in the working area. Keep the <Ctrl > button pressed. Zoom in on or zoom out from the drawing using the wheel of the wheel mouse.

S354EN

2007-04-20

15BDisplay of drawings

1-51

15.6 Get last view

TruTops memorizes the last view that was set through a button or using the mouse.

Either Select >View >Zoom >Last zoom. or Select Show last view .

15.7 Memorizing and recalling view

Memorizing view 1. Set Total view or Detail view that is to be saved using the mouse or the buttons. 2. Either Select >View >Zoom >Memorize zoom. or Select Memorize view . 3. Either Select >View >Zoom >Get zoom. or Select Get view .

Getting saved view

15.8 Displaying and hiding outline points

Either Select >View >All points or >View >Open points. or Select Show all points or Show open points .

1-52

15BDisplay of drawings

2007-04-20

S354EN

16.

Operating TruToPs with the mouse

16.1 Placing the mouse pointer in masks automatically at OK

1. Select >Tools >Modify data.... 2. Select >User >Configuration. The "Configuration" mask is displayed. 3. Select "Place mouse pointer at OK". 4. Select Modify.

S354EN

2007-04-20

16BOperating TruToPs with the mouse

1-53

17.

Operating TruTops using keyboard

17.1 Using Windows keyboard commands and shortcuts

TruTops can now be operated using the usual Windows keyboard commands or shortcuts: All menu items linked with a shortcut have been appropriately marked (e.g. >File >Open...: <Ctrl >+<O >). The keyboard commands for the Command block (9) (see "Fig. 50209", pg. 1-12) are displayed in the appropriate tool tip: Total view: <Ctrl >+<Enter > ( ) or <Ctrl >+<Return > ( ). End: <Esc >. Ok: <Enter > or <Return > ( ).

Example 1

1. To save a file: press <Ctrl >+<S > (instead of selecting >File >Save). 2. To undo an action: press <Ctrl >+<Z > (instead of selecting >Edit >Undo).

Example 2

17.2 Entering numerical values and coordinates

Entering decimal values 1. When entering decimals, use a point as separator. (Example: enter 30.5.) 2. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). 3. Enter X and Y coordinates separated by a comma. (Example: enter X = "10 mm", Y = "20,5 mm": 10,20.5.) 4. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ).

Entering coordinates

17.3 Entering texts in input fields

1. Click into the input box with the mouse pointer (cursor). 2. Enter characters one after the other. 3. To confirm the input: Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ).

1-54

17BOperating TruTops using keyboard

2007-04-20

S354EN

17.4 Using key functions of TruTops

During initial installation and update of TruTops, the Windows key functions are automatically set in the individual applications. However, one can also work with the TruTops key functions on request. Note The key functions must be separately set in each existing application.

1. Select the application in which the TruTops key functions are to be set. 2. Select >Tools >Modify data.... 3. Select >User >Configuration. The "Configuration" mask is displayed. 4. Select "Set TruTops key functions". 5. Select Modify.
Key < >, < > <SHIFT >+<Backspace > <Tab > <Tab >+< > or <Tab >+< > Keep <SHIFT > pressed, mark the area using < > or < >. Keep <SHIFT > pressed + <Pos 1 > (German keyboard) or <Home > (English keyboard). Keep <SHIFT > pressed + <End > (German keyboard) or <End > (English keyboard). (Field contents are marked) <Entf > (German keyboard) or <Del > (English keyboard) (Field contents are marked) Press desired character. <SHIFT >+<Tab > <Esc > TruTops or Windows key functions Configuration TruTops key functions Jump to next input field.. Delete characters in input fields. Windows key function Confirm mask; is the same as pressing Ok. Delete characters in input fields. Delete characters in input fields.

Jump to next input field. All the field contents are automatically marked. Jump to next input field. Automatic marking of all the field contents is removed. Mark selected field contents from the cursor position onwards. Mark from the cursor position to the start of the input field.

Mark from the cursor position to the end of the field.

Delete marked field contents.

Marked field contents are replaced with the character pressed. Delete characters in input fields. Jump to previous input field. Close mask; is the same as pressing: Cancel. Tab. 1-4

S354EN

2007-04-20

17BOperating TruTops using keyboard

1-55

17.5 Using "Copy" "Paste"

The "Copy and Paste" function is available in all TruTops input fields. Depending on the position of the cursor in the input field, the contents are copied either completely or only partly into the intermediate memory. When pasting, the copied contents appear at the point where the cursor is located. Contents of the intermediate memory can be pasted from other programs and into the TruTops input fields and vice versa.

Copy and paste as described in the following table.

Copying Cursor position Example 123 Example123 Example123 Copying and pasting Key combination <CTRL > + <C > or <Strg > + <C > Pasting into empty input field Key combination <CTRL > + <V > or <Strg > + <V > Result Example123 Example123 ple123 Tab. 1-5

17.6 Using keyboard buffer of the command line (repeating entries)

Repeated entries and functions do not need to be reentered. The keyboard buffer saves entries or functions which have been entered into the command line or which have run in the background. The last commands can be opened and scrolled through using : 1. Open the list field of the command line with . 2. Mark the desired command or the desired entry. 3. Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ). The command or the entry is repeated.

1-56

17BOperating TruTops using keyboard

2007-04-20

S354EN

18.

Calculator

You can carry out the following actions using the calculator: Entering numerical values and coordinates. Executing arithmetic operations and entering the result of the arithmetic operations simultaneously.

The calculator is automatically activated during a new installation and a TruTops update. It can be operated with the mouse as well as (to some extent) with the keyboard in all modules. It gets automatically displayed on double clicking in an input field.

Calculator function Opening the calculator

Operation using the mouse Double click in an input field for numerical values. C / Cl Cancel

Operation using the keyboard (Not possible)

Deleting an entry Exiting the calculator without adopting entries

(Not possible) <Esc > (Possible only if the Windows key functions have been set) (Not possible) (Not possible) (Not possible) <* > </ > <+ > <- > Tab. 1-6

Exiting calculator, adopting entry Squaring pi Multiplying Dividing Adding Subtracting Result Calculator functions

OK x2 Pi * / + =

18.1 Deactivating calculator permanently

The calculator is automatically activated during a new installation and a TruTops update.

To deactivate the calculator permanently: set the value of the "ST_NumInputWithMouse" variable in the public rules to 0 (under >Tools >Modify data... >Rules >System).

S354EN

2007-04-20

18BCalculator

1-57

18.2 Entering numerical values in input fields

1. Position the mouse pointer (cursor) in the input field for numerical value. 2. Double click. The "easy" calculator is displayed:

Fig. 20085en

3. Click on the desired figures and arithmetic operations or enter them using the keyboard. 4. Select OK. The calculator is closed.

18.3 Entering X and Y coordinates of points

1. Select Calculator (on the left near the command line). The calculator extended by "coordinate" is displayed. 2. Enter the numerical value of the X coordinate in the upper input field. 3. Select X. The value is adopted in the lower input field. 4. Enter the numerical value of the Y coordinate in the upper input field. 5. Select Y. The value is adopted in the lower input field. 6. Select OK. The calculator is closed.

1-58

18BCalculator

2007-04-20

S354EN

19.

Searching with the help of place holders (wildcards)

Place holders simplify the search, when a designation (e.g. a file name) or a number (e.g. a technology table) is not exactly known. The following place holders can be used in the TruTops file browser: ? = 1 arbitrary character. * = arbitrary character string. In case of database accesses (under >Tools >Modify data...) and when selecting the technology table, the percent sign ("%") is a place holder for arbitrary characters: 1% = 1, subsequently none, one or several arbitrary characters. %1 = none, one or several arbitrary characters, subsequently 1.

S354EN

2007-04-20

19BSearching with the help of place holders (wildcards)

1-59

20.

TruTops license

20.1 Using TruTops with a limited period license

If TruTops has to be used for a limited period without Dongle, a limited period license can be applied for. The running time of the limited period license is 30 days. After expiry, a new limited period license can be generated only in exceptional cases. Conditions A network card is present (required for unequivocal identification of the system). The user has administrator rights when entering the system identification and the license key.

Applying for a limited period license

1. Start TruTops. A "System identification" mask is displayed. As soon as this mask is displayed, the running time of 30 days begins. 2. Either Copy the digit and letter sequence of the "System identification" and send it to the TRUMPF Software Support by email. or If no emails can be sent from the TruTops computer: select Display form. The default text editor displays a file. Save the file and send it to the TRUMPF Software Support from another computer. 3. To close the mask: select Cancel (selecting OK could lead to an error message!). TRUMPF Software Support sends the license key and other information. 4. Start TruTops. A "System identification" mask is displayed. 5. Enter the license key (copy from the email and paste). 6. Select OK.

Entering license key

1-60

20BTruTops license

2007-04-20

S354EN

21.

Printing

21.1 Printing the textual content of the files

The textual content e.g. of the following file types can be printed: Drawings ('*.GEO'). NC programs ('*.LST'). Mini nests ('*.MTL'). Processed geometry ('*.GMT'). Others such as '*.TAF' or '*.TMT'.

1. Select >File >Print >File.... The TruTops file browser opens. 2. Select file type (e.g.: '*.EIN'). All the files in the selected format that are located in the current directory are displayed. 3. Mark a file. 4. Select OK. The contents of the file are displayed. 5. Select Print. 6. Select Ok to close the mask.

21.2 Printing screen content

The present screen can be printed with this function.

1. Load the file whose screen content is to be printed. 2. Select >File >Print >Screen.... The standard printer mask is displayed. 3. If required, modify the settings. 4. Select OK. The screen content is printed.

S354EN

2007-04-20

21BPrinting

1-61

21.3 Printing Geos as HPGL

TruTops CAD can print GEO files in the '*.HPGL' format (= graphical output of plotters).

1. Load the desired file in the '*.GEO' or '*.DXF' format. 2. Select >File >Print >Plotting.... The "Plotting" mask is displayed. 3. Make the desired settings. 4. Select OK. The 'GEO' is printed in the '*.HPGL' format.

21.4 Printing labels (optional)

Using the Prepare-Label NC post-processing program, information can be saved to be able to print it on labels later using the Label-Printer program. A label can contain, for example, a barcode, a part drawing or other information.

1. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. The Generate "NC program" mask is displayed. 2. Select "Setup plan". 3. Select "Graphic (*.HTML)". 4. Select "Single part graphic" if the single part graphic is to be printed on the label. 5. Select "Parameters", "NC post-processing program". 6. Open selection with . 7. Select Prepare_Label. 8. Select OK. As long as the NC post-processing program is active, information for all NC programs is collected. The information is deleted only the next time a label is printed. 9. If all programs are generated: select >File >Execute >LabelPrinter. "LabelPrinter - output settings" is displayed. Label-Printer makes available information from the currently generated NC program.

1-62

21BPrinting

2007-04-20

S354EN

Chapter 2

Setting basic data

1. 2. 3. 4. 4.1 The database as knowledge base................................ 2-4 TRUMPF functions......................................................... 2-4 Opening Data Management .......................................... 2-5 Machine data .................................................................. 2-6 Configuring machine........................................................ 2-6 Configuring "Basic data" of the machine .................... 2-6 Configuring "laser data"............................................ 2-16 Allocating and configuring automation components .............................................................. 2-17 Editing "Options"....................................................... 2-24 Setting production package output ................................ 2-26 Copying a machine ........................................................ 2-27 Material data................................................................. 2-28 Adding materials, blanks, storage items........................ 2-28 Modifying material data.................................................. 2-29 Deleting material....................................................... 2-29

4.2 4.3 5. 5.1 5.2

S98EN02.DOC

Data Management

2-1

6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7

6.8 7. 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6

Technology tables ....................................................... 2-30 Names of the technology tables .................................... 2-31 Searching for technology tables .................................... 2-32 Modifying the header data of the technology tables...... 2-34 Copying and creating new technology tables ................ 2-35 Deleting technology tables............................................. 2-36 Displaying and printing technology tables ..................... 2-36 Technology data concerning laser cutting machines in detail........................................................................... 2-37 "General" .................................................................. 2-37 "Cutting" (Siemens) .................................................. 2-40 Piercing..................................................................... 2-42 "Approach" (Bosch) .................................................. 2-44 "Cutting" (Bosch) ...................................................... 2-45 "Vaporizing" .............................................................. 2-47 "Marking" .................................................................. 2-49 "Punch marking" ....................................................... 2-50 "Others" (Siemens) ................................................... 2-52 "MicroWeld" (Bosch)................................................. 2-54 "Process rules" (Bosch)............................................ 2-55 Allocating process rules to technology tables................ 2-57 Process rules ............................................................... 2-58 Names of process rules ................................................. 2-58 Searching for process rules ........................................... 2-59 Copying process rules and creating new ones.............. 2-61 Deleting process rules ................................................... 2-64 Displaying and printing process rules............................ 2-64 Rules concerning laser cutting machines in detail ........ 2-66 "General 1" ............................................................... 2-67 "General 2" ............................................................... 2-69 "General 3" ............................................................... 2-71 "General 4" ............................................................... 2-72 "Piercing" .................................................................. 2-73 "Approach"................................................................ 2-74 "Cutting".................................................................... 2-77 "Withdrawal" ............................................................. 2-79 "Positioning".............................................................. 2-81 "Rounding"................................................................ 2-82 "Looping" .................................................................. 2-84 "Vaporizing" .............................................................. 2-86 Allocating rules to individual technology tables ............. 2-86 Machine rules (public)................................................. 2-87 Adapting machine-dependent rules............................... 2-87 Modifying public variables in the machine rules ....... 2-87

7.7 8. 8.1

2-2

Data Management

S98EN02.DOC

8.2 8.3

Copying variables for a selected machine..................... 2-89 Description of the variables in the public machine rules ............................................................................... 2-90 System rules (public) ................................................ 2-101 Modifying public system variables ............................... 2-101 Description of the variables in the public system rules ............................................................................. 2-103 NC output.................................................................... 2-115 Free cycles .................................................................. 2-115 Creating free cycles................................................ 2-115 Printing free cycles ................................................. 2-117 Modifying free cycles .............................................. 2-117 Copying free cycles ................................................ 2-117 Removing created free cycles from the selection... 2-119 Formulas for time computation ............................... 2-119 NC post-processing program, external programs .................................................................... 2-120 Entering NC post-processing programs/external programs...................................................................... 2-120 Creating collection call up for several NC postprocessing programs ................................................... 2-123 Modifying NC post-processing programs .................... 2-125 Deleting post-processing programs............................. 2-125 User-defined programs ............................................. 2-126

9. 9.1 9.2

10. 10.1

11. 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 12.

S98EN02.DOC

Data Management

2-3

1.

The database as knowledge base

Technological knowledge that TRUMPF has developed over the years for TRUMPF machines, and which has been continuously optimized, has been integrated into the TruTops database. It contains all data that TruTops accesses in the different programming phases. Machine data. Material data. Technology tables. Rules NC output data (NC cycles, formats, times ...). Customer cycles.

Current application parameters

The technology tables and rules contain the current application parameters approved by the Process Development Department at TRUMPF. Data collection updates are output at regular intervals. The database is an expandable knowledge basis. New knowledge in the field of machining technology can be input here. This data is then available to TruTops the next time you create an NC program. The database provides the following options: Creating data records (creating completely new ones or copying). Modifying data records (modifying entries). Deleting existing data records.

Knowledge base

Working with the database

Maintaining data

Adding data of separate materials. Creating separate technology tables and rules. Checking the values stored in the database.

The database must be configured in the Data Management for the individual machine. It is only then that all the required functions for machining are available to TruTops.

2.

TRUMPF functions

Certain functions are protected by a password. This data can be opened and modified only under the guidance of the TRUMPF Software Support.

2-4

1BThe database as knowledge base

S98EN02.DOC

3.

Opening Data Management

All default values for machines and components have already been defined. The available options depend on the machine selected. Note Modifications to the masks are automatically saved as soon as you exit with Continue or End. 1. Start TruTops. 2. Open TruTops laser, select" (Laser"). 3. Change machine if required (through Tools >Change machine). Note The Data Management is usually opened for the currently active machine. The machine cannot be changed within the open Data Management. Opening Data Management 4. Select Tools Modify >Data....

S98EN02.DOC

3BOpening Data Management

2-5

4.

Machine data

The machine data is the basis for NC program creation. TruTops can be configured for different machines with an NC interface. The technical data for the machine, the laser cutting head and the control system is stored in the database. TruTops accesses this data when creating an NC program.

Incorrect values in the machine data can lead to inoperable NC programs! Be sure that your inputs and modifications are correct. Caution Consult TRUMPF Software Support in case of doubt.

4.1

Configuring machine

Configuring "Basic data" of the machine

The following data is included in the "basic data". It can be viewed and/or modified here. TruTops shows the smallest and the largest value possible in each case. Note The Data Management is usually opened for the currently active machine. The machine cannot be changed within the open Data Management. "Dimensions" Working range. Travel limits. Maximum sheet size.

"Limit values" You can define the following for the NC program output in the "Limit values" mask: Maximum number of digits in the main program name and the subroutine number. Note The digits are counted together.

2-6

4BMachine data

S98EN02.DOC

Maximum values for the X, Y, I and J coordinates. (I and J coordinates: radius and end point for arcs). Block number: Maximum number of digits for the row numbering in the NC text. Name of the machine drawing. Name of transfer path: Into which directory should the NC programs for the data transfer be copied? Maximum number of digits for program names. Laser table format. Output program names with leading zeros? Subroutine technique with programmable single part rotation? Admit alphanumeric program names?

With Siemens control systems Configuring NC program output

1. Open the desired machine. 2. Select Tools Modify >data >Machine >Basic data >Limit values. The "Limit values" mask is displayed. 3. Modify the desired data. 4. Select Modify.

Exit the mask "Limit values"

5. Switch to another mask or another menu.

Configuring slats Slats NC programs using which slats for the machine can be cut individually are provided with the laser cutting machine. The form of the slats depends on the configuration of your machine (e.g. TruLaser 5030 with LiftMaster) and the type of material you are machining on your machine (e.g. V2A). As default, slats for all machines that are supported by TruTops Laser are stored in TruTops with the following information: Name Support point distance. Material that can be cut on it. Note The slats that are used for St37 are also used for all other TRUMPF materials by default.

S98EN02.DOC

4BMachine data

2-7

For creating new slats, modifying or deleted data, see page 9 ff. Slat layout Depending on the machine, TruTops already contains various slat layouts. (The slat layouts do not depend on the type of slats.) In addition to these, you can also define individual slat layouts in TruTops for every laser cutting machine within the defined grid of the pallet and save them as a selection (see page 11). You can configure the slat layout in the Data Management (e.g. define as standard layout; see page 11). Note If you have set tipping optimization for the machining of a sheet or a nesting job (see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program"), TruTops takes into account the offset of the slats as well. Selecting slat layouts and slats In the Data Management, you can define a slat as the standard slat for the machining of a material (see page 2-10) and a slat layout as the standard layout for a machine (see page 2-11). TruTops then offers the standard slat layout with the standard slat for the current material during the machining of the parts. During the machining of the parts, you can naturally select another slat layout and other slats as well (see page 14).

2-8

4BMachine data

S98EN02.DOC

Creating, modifying and deleting slats Creating a new slat 1. Open the Data Management for the desired machine. 2. Select Machines >Data >Basic data >Workpiece support. The following mask is displayed:

"Workpiece support" mask

Fig. 33387en

3. Select "Support web" Create. The following mask is displayed:

"Define support web" mask

Fig. 33389en

4. Enter the name, support point distance and (for offset slats) the support point offset of the new slats. 5. In the right selection field, mark the material that can be machined with the slat and transfer it to the left selection field with . 6. Repeat step 5 until all the materials are allocated.

S98EN02.DOC

4BMachine data

2-9

7. To use the slat as the standard slat for machining for the respective material: see the following section. 8. When all data has been entered: select OK.

Modifying the data of a slat

1. Open the Data Management for the desired machine. 2. Select Machines >Data >Basic data >Workpiece support. The "Workpiece support" mask is displayed (see Fig. 33387, page 9). 3. Mark the slat in the (lower left) selection field. 4. Select Modify. The "Change support web" mask is displayed.

Define as standard slat?

1. To use the slat as the standard slat for machining for the respective material: select "use as standard". Note Only one slat should be defined as standard slat for every material. 2. If needed, modify the between the support point distance and/or support point offset. 3. To delete or supplement materials which can be machined on the slat: mark the material in the appropriate selection field, delete with Remove or transfer into the left selection field with . 4. When the desired data have been modified: select OK.

Deleting a slats

1. Open the Data Management for the desired machine. 2. Select Machines >Data >Basic data >Workpiece support. The "Workpiece support" mask is displayed (see Fig. 33387, page 9). 3. Mark the slat in the (lower left) selection field. 4. Select Delete.

2-10

4BMachine data

S98EN02.DOC

Assembling the slat layout Prerequisite A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The machine for which the sheet layout should be created has been loaded. Assembling the slat layout 1. Open TruTops laser "(Close Data Management through >Exit, select "Laser"). 2. Select Optimize >Slats >Set. All slats that are possible for the active machine are displayed. Set slats are displayed in red. Removed slats are displayed in blue. 3. One after the other, click on all slats that the machine's operator is to remove. The color of the removed slats changes from red to blue. Note TRUMPF slats may not be overwritten. 4. If all the desired slats are marked: select Optimize >Slats >Save allocation.... The "Save support web assignment" mask is displayed. 5. Enter the assignment name. 6. Select OK. The slat layout is saved and can be configured (e.g. as standard layout). Configuring slat layouts 1. Select Tools Modify >Data. 2. Select Machines >Data >Basic data >Workpiece support. The following mask is displayed:

S98EN02.DOC

4BMachine data

2-11

"Workpiece support" mask

Fig. 33387en

Defining standard layout

3. Mark the slat layout that is to be defined as standard layout. 4. Check "Standard layout". 5. Select Modify.

Offer slat layout during machining?

6. Mark the slat layout that is to be offered during machining of parts. 7. Check "Visible". 8. Select Modify.

Modifying the position of the first slat

9. Mark web allocation. 10. Enter new position. 11. Select Modify.

Deleting slat layout

12. Mark the slat layout that is to be deleted. 13. Check Delete. 14. Select Modify.

2-12

4BMachine data

S98EN02.DOC

Creating a new slat layout

1. Open the Data Management for the desired machine. 2. Select Machines >Data >Basic data >Workpiece support. The "Workpiece support" mask is displayed (see Fig. 33387, page 9). 3. Select "Web allocation" Create. The following mask is displayed:

"Define support web" mask

Fig. 38437en

4. Enter name, grid, maximum number of usable slats, position relative to the first web and support web offset (see Fig. 38710, page 13).

1 2

Position of first slat Grid

Support web offset Fig. 38710

5. When all data has been entered: select OK. The new slat layout is saved and can be used when machining the parts.

S98EN02.DOC

4BMachine data

2-13

Selecting a slat layout when machining parts

(See chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program".) 1. Open TruTops laser "(Close Data Management through >Exit, select "Laser"). 2. Load sheet. 3. Select Machining, Modify, "Workpiece support" Selection. The following mask is displayed:

Fig. 33169en

The mask contains all slat layouts for the current machine that are configured as "visible" in the Data Management and all slats that are suitable for the current material. 4. Open selection fields using >. 5. Mark the slat layout and slat type. 6. Select OK. The selection is allocated to the loaded machine. Set slats are displayed in red and the slats to be removed are displayed in blue. 7. To allocate the slat layout to a loaded sheet: select Optimize >Slats >Load allocation.... The "Support web occupation selection" mask is displayed. It contains the All set, every second set selections and the newly assembled and saved combinations of slats by default. 8. Mark the selection. 9. Select OK.

2-14

4BMachine data

S98EN02.DOC

Defining dynamics Positioning speed of the cutting head in the X, Y and Z directions. Consider Z axis when performing time calculation Yes/No? Acceleration in the X, Y and Z directions. Jerk limitation Yes/No? With "jerk limitation", the machine approaches full acceleration of the axes through a gradient (= "Pitch"). Jerk limitation affects the time calculation and is preset for all machines with Siemens control systems: When the gradient > 0 m/s3: new time calculation including consideration of the jerk limitation. When the gradient = 0 m/s3: new time calculation without consideration of the jerk limitation. Note The modification of the jerk limitation has an influence on time calculation and should not take place before consulting Software Support at TRUMPF. Modifying dynamics 1. Open the Data Management for the desired machine. 2. Select Machines >Data >Basic data >Dynamics. The following mask is displayed:

Fig. 38704en

3. Modify the desired data and select Modify.

S98EN02.DOC

4BMachine data

2-15

Configuring "laser data"

The following data is included in the "Laser data". It can be viewed and modified here. The smallest and the greatest possible value is always displayed:

"Laser data" Rounding (contouring mode): The control system processes the following NC blocks in advance in contouring mode. When the tangent direction is modified, it rounds the transitions. Path slope (acceleration-braking ramp): Path slopes allow a constant speed through the block transitions, so that the laser travels along the workpiece contour at constant speed (see also the current programming manual for machines with path slope). Height regulation on/off? Note Do not change this setting! Work with high pressure? Feed forward. SprintLine yes/no? Reduced piercing with SprintLine yes/no? Activate/deactivate measuring cycles 0, 1, 2 or 3 for defining the sheet thickness when piercing.

Modify laser data?

1. Select Machines >Data >Laser data ... The "Laser data" mask is displayed. 2. Modify data. 3. Select Modify. The modifications will be saved.

Exiting "Laser data"

Go to another mask or another menu.

2-16

4BMachine data

S98EN02.DOC

Allocating and configuring automation components

The following machines are allocated to automation components as standard see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program"): TruLaser 5030 / TC L 3050. TruLaser 5040 / TC L 4050.

Configuring Lifts The allocation of the automation components or the data of the allocated automation components (configuration) can be modified as follows: 1. Open the Data Management for the desired machine. 2. Select Machines >Data >Automation >Lifts. The "Lift configuration" mask is displayed. It contains the automation components allocated to the active machine. Delete allocation? 3. To delete the allocation of an automation component: mark component. 4. Select Delete. Allocate a different automation component? 5. Select Allocate. The "Lift selection" mask is displayed. It contains all the automation components that can be allocated to the active machine: LiftMaster, only loaded. LiftMaster sort (LiftMaster) with 24 or 36 suction cups. SortMaster, not rotatable, no rails. SortMaster, rotatable, two rails (optional). 6. Mark desired components and select OK. The "Lift configuration" mask is displayed again. Configuring the allocated components 7. Mark the automation components that are to be configured and select Modify. Another "Lift configuration" mask is displayed:

S98EN02.DOC

4BMachine data

2-17

Example: configuring SortMaster

Fig. 33386en

The data contained in the mask corresponds to the standard configuration of the allocated components. 8. Modify the data if necessary (select desired box; for the safety factor when selecting the suction cups automatically, see section 8.3, page 90 ff.). Modify traversability of the SortMaster? 9. Select "Traversability" Modify. The "Modify traversability" mask is displayed. The data contained in the mask corresponds to the standard traversability of the SortMaster. To set the lift bars to any position, check "Rails continuously traversible". 10. If necessary, modify data and select OK. Exiting configuration 11. Select Back.

Defining and configuring the unloading areas for the palletizing For every machine with automation 1, you can define your own unloading area configurations for palletizing. When palletizing (see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program"), one can select from the previously defined unloading area configurations.

Currently TruLaser 5030, TruLaser 5040.

2-18

4BMachine data

S98EN02.DOC

TruTops laser already contains the following standard configuration for palletizing: "Configuration 1"
P1 P2 P3

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

K1 K7 Unloading platform with seven buckets (ID: 2) "Configuration 1"

P1 Unloading platform "Unit 3" (ID: 3) P2 Unloading platform "Unit 4" (ID: 4) P3 Unloading platform "Unit 5" (ID: 5) Fig. 34859

Several pallets can be respectively assigned to all "Units". Configuration for double cart Example of an unloading area configuration with double cart. The double cart is an automation component which comprises of two carts for unloading finished parts. The parts are removed from the pallet changer using SortMaster.
P1

P2

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

K1 K7 Unloading platform with seven buckets (ID: 2) "Configuration for double cart"

P1 Lower cart P2 Upper cart Fig. 42601

S98EN02.DOC

4BMachine data

2-19

Prerequisites An automation component is allocated to the machine. The allocated automation component is configured according to its actual data (see page 17 ff.). The unloading area application data of your machine is adapted to the respectively selected unloading area configuration in TruTops. That means: the zero points of the "Units" need to be adjusted to match the machine (no automatic data matching between the machine and TruTops).

1. Open the Data Management for the desired machine. 2. Select Machines >Data >Automation >Palletizing. The "Unloading area" mask is displayed:

Unloading area configurations

Fig. 33170en

Creating self-defined unloading configuration

3. Select Create (next to "Configurations"). The "Configuration" mask is displayed. 4. Enter ID for the configuration (can be selected freely; TruTops automatically suggests the next free number). 5. Enter the new name of the configuration in "Remark" and select OK. The "Unloading area" mask is displayed again.

Defining the associated units

One unit picks up a group of pallets. It can be movable or stationary. All pallets on all unloading platforms belong, for example, to one unit. When a unit is deleted, all pallets which are allocated to this unit are deleted at the same time. Pallets always have an unequivocal reference to a unit.

2-20

4BMachine data

S98EN02.DOC

6. Mark new unloading area configuration. 7. Select Create (next to "Units"). The "Unit" mask is displayed:

Defining units

Fig. 38711en

In the mask, all input fields and buttons that are not relevant for TruTops laser have been grayed out. 8. Enter the ID of the unit (see Fig. 34859, page 19; ID 2 to ID 16 is possible). 9. Enter a remark if necessary. 10. Enter Position X and Y (reference point: zero point of the pallet changer). 11. If the speed and acceleration are to be programmed, select Yes. 12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until all units have been defined. Unloading area with double cart 13. If the pallets on the upper and lower cart are identical: select Yes. The pallets must only be entered for the upper cart. The pallets for the lower cart are generated automatically. or If the pallets are not identical, select No. The number and size of the pallets can be different on the upper and lower carts.

S98EN02.DOC

4BMachine data

2-21

14. Select Lift for the Y sorting motion. With TruTops laser, the Y sorting motion is executed by Lift (SortMaster) and not by the double cart. 15. Enter 4 as lower cart ID. (For the upper cart ID, the number ID is adopted from the first row.) Allocating pallets and buckets to the units A pallet is a location where lift stock is deposited. A pallet can, for example, be an allocated location, a standard Europallet or scrap bucket. Pallets always have an unequivocal reference to a unit. When a unit is deleted, all pallets which are allocated to this unit are deleted at the same time. 16. Mark the unit that is to be allocated to the pallets or buckets. 17. Select Create (next to "Pallets"). The "Pallet" mask is displayed:

Defining pallets

Fig. 33385en

In the mask, all input fields and buttons that are not relevant for TruTops laser have been grayed out. 18. Enter data: "Pallet number (ID)": freely selectable. "Position X, Y": reference point: zero point of the pallet changer. "Pallet edge X, Y": edge area of the pallet in which no palletizing is to take place. 19. Select "Container" Yes or No: To allocate a standard pallet select: No. To allocate a bucket select: Yes.

2-22

4BMachine data

S98EN02.DOC

20. Enter maximum stack height (by default: 200 mm). 21. Select OK. The "Unloading area" mask is displayed again. The pallet is allocated to the unit. 22. Repeat steps 16 to 21 until all desired pallets and buckets have been allocated to all units.

Copying unloading area configuration

If you often need similar configurations, then you can copy and adapt an available unloading area configuration: 1. Select Machines >Data >Automation >Palletizing. The "Unloading area" mask is displayed (see Fig. 33170, page 20). 2. Mark unloading area configuration. 3. Select Copy. The "Configuration" mask is displayed. 4. Enter ID for the configuration (can be selected freely; TruTops automatically suggests the next free number). 5. Enter the new name of the configuration in "Remark" and select OK. 6. Select OK. The unloading area configuration is saved and you can adapt it in the Data Management.

S98EN02.DOC

4BMachine data

2-23

Editing "Options"
General options The following general options can be set for machines: Sheet alignment with height regulation Yes/No? Defining loading corner. (The terms upper left, upper right, lower left and lower right relate to the screen display. The machine zero point is in the lower left of this display.) Sheet alignment with CatEye Yes/No? Reduced approaching II Yes/No? Gas flushing Yes/No? Set Microweld Yes/No? Define the "Cutting head collision area" for the tipping optimization.

Modifying general options

1. Open the Data Management for the desired machine. 2. Select Machines >Data >Options >General. The options for the selected machine are displayed:

Fig. 38435en

3. Modifying data for the machine. 4. Select Modify.

2-24

4BMachine data

S98EN02.DOC

Two-head machines Two-head machines have the following additional machine data: Two-head mode Yes/No? Offset in X Yes/No? If yes: minimum X distance to the cutting head (= minimum distance between the two cutting heads in X direction). Offset in Y Yes/No? If yes: minimum Y distance to the cutting head (= minimum distance between the two cutting heads in Y direction). Single-head mode possible with the second cutting head? Note Only the TC HSL 2502, TruLaser 7025 / TC HSL 2502 C and the TruLaser 7040 / TC HSL 4002 C can operate with the second cutting head in single-head mode as well. Time calculation for head adjustment Yes/No? (The time taken to bring the two cutting heads to the desired distance from each other can be included in time calculation.) Head adjustment speed. Park position possible Yes/No? On all water jet cutting machines, the second cutting head can be moved to parking position when the machine is in singlehead mode. This way, the second cutting head is "out of the way" and does not restrict the working range of the first cutting head. Note If you are working with only one cutting head and do not bring the other cutting head into parking position, the working range of the first cutting head is restricted.

Only with water jet cutting machines

Modifying data for two-head mode?

1. Select Machines >Data >Options >Two-head. The "Two-head" mask is displayed. 2. Modify data. 3. Select Modify. The modifications will be saved.

Exiting "Two-head"

Go to another mask or another menu.

S98EN02.DOC

4BMachine data

2-25

4.2

Setting production package output

Several NC programs generated one after the other can be assembled in the sequence of their generation to make a production package. If the NC programs are to be interlinked to a production package in random sequence, use the NcLink program after TruTops installation. Depending on the machine and automation, a corresponding type of production package is used. Each type takes into account a different individual machine constellation. To make sure that the correct type of production package can be selected in TruTops, it must first be defined at the machine. After TruTops installation, there is a program with which the correct production package type can be easily defined at the machine. The production package is supported only by machines with open control system and machines with cell server links: TC L 3050, TC L 3030 with Siemens control system: as of software update V4.75. TC L 4050, TC L 4030 with Siemens control system: as of software update V4.75. TC L 6050, TC L 6030 with Siemens control system: as of software update V4.75. TruLaser series 5000. TruLaser series 3000. Defining production package type See "Software manual NcLink, TubeLink".

2-26

4BMachine data

S98EN02.DOC

4.3

Copying a machine

In order to be able to create various configurations from a machine, it can be copied (several times). The various configurations of a machine can be selected in the laser application and the relevant Data Management independently. 1. Start Windows Explorer. 2. Change to the following directory: '<LW>\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\DbTools\MachineCopy' 1. 3. Start script file 'machineCopy.bat' (double click). The "Copy machine" mask is displayed. 4. Mark the desired language and select OK. 5. Mark the ODBC entry in which a copy of the machine is to be stored (here, for example, T100_V45_V600) and select OK. The "Copy/Delete machine" mask is displayed. 6. Mark the machine to be copied. 7. Select Copy. The machine is copied. A number is attached in front of the type no. ("Type") and increases consecutively (number for the first copy: "1"). 8. Select Exit. 9. Open Data Management with the copied machine (Select Tools Modify>Data). 10. Configure the machine (see section 4.1, page 6 ff.).

LW = drive letter.

S98EN02.DOC

4BMachine data

2-27

5.

Material data

Material data is independent of the machine. When you modify or add material data, it is not overwritten when TruTops is updated.

5.1

Adding materials, blanks, storage items

"Material"

TruTops Laser makes a distinction between "materials" and "blanks": Material specification (e.g. glass) with physical properties, ISO material specification, international designation in accordance with AMTS, EURO Standard designation, tensile strength and weight. Material with a particular sheet thickness. Material with stock ID. The Stock ID information allows the warehouse management to unequivocally determine the storage place of a blank and prepare it for machining. The stock ID is outputted in the NC program and in other TRUMPF proprietary data formats (examples: *.taf, *.pdf, *.gmt, *.tmt...).

"Blank"

1. Select Material. 2. The "Material Management" mask is displayed. It contains all the materials and blanks which are already contained in the database. 3. To add a material (e.g. foam): select "Material". 4. To add material ID, material and stock ID to a blank: select "Blank". 5. Mark one of the materials/blanks in the selection field. The data is entered in the mask head. Tip Mark a material or a blank which is similar to the new one. 6. Enter or modify data. Note The following characters are not permitted when modifying the material ID: " \ and $. 7. Select Create. The material is added in the selection field.

2-28

5BMaterial data

S98EN02.DOC

5.2

Modifying material data

1. Select Material. 2. The "Material Management" mask is displayed. It contains all materials contained in the database. 3. Select "Material" or "Blank". 4. In the selection field, mark the material whose data is to be modified. The material data is entered in the mask head. 5. Modify the desired data. 6. Select Modify.

Deleting material
If original material data from TRUMPF is deleted, TruTops may no longer be able to allocate materials and technology tables! Caution Do not delete original material files from TRUMPF. 1. Select Material. The "Material Management" mask is displayed. It contains all materials contained in the database. 2. Select "Material" or "Blank". 3. In the selection field, mark the material to be deleted. The material data is entered in the mask head. 4. Select Delete . 5. Confirm the query with Delete. The material is deleted in the selection field as well as in the database.

S98EN02.DOC

5BMaterial data

2-29

6.
What is the purpose of technology tables?

Technology tables

In order to be able to run an NC program on a machine, the technology data (e.g. piercing time, gating frequency, kerf width ...) for laser and water jet cutting must be accessible. The technology data is dependent on the machine, the material and the material thickness. These are all to be found in technology tables. The technology data only appears in the NC program if the technology table is sent to the machine control system together with the NC program. If the NC program is sent without the technology table, the NC program will only contain the names of the technology tables. Machines of the same type and the same group use the same technology tables. The technology data has been determined and approved by TRUMPF for the respective machines.

How does the control system of the machine access the technology data?

The original TRUMPF technology tables have already been stored in the control system of the machine. The control system reads in the technology data from the technology tables. Technology tables which you have created yourself must be transferred with the NC program to the control system (send NC programs to the machine, see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program").

If you create your own technology tables ...

... also allocate one or more process rules to every technology table (see page 57). The original TRUMPF technology tables have already been allocated one or more process rules.

Information concerning the process rules Creating your own technology tables

(see page 2-58 ff). (see section 6.4, page 35).

2-30

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

6.1

Names of the technology tables

The names of the numeric technology tables have four digits and are consecutive. The names of alphanumeric technology tables (only for open control systems) have seven characters and are consecutive: Examples
Numeric 3527 3528 3529 ... Alphanumeric T2D-5100 T2D-5101 T2D-5102 ... Table 1

Note The technology tables created by TRUMPF are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are modified, the modifications are lost with each TruTops update. Modifying original TRUMPF tables? Permissible names for technology tables
numeric:

If the data in a technology table is to be modified permanently, the technology tables supplied by TRUMPF must first be copied and saved under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35).
Names 1000 to 4999 5000 to 9999 alphanumeric (open control systems only): T ... K ... Names of original technology tables created by TRUMPF Names that you may allocate. Names of original technology tables created by TRUMPF Recommended for your tables. Table 2

Data collection

Further information regarding technology tables can be found in the current data collection of your machine. The technology tables are stored in the data collection that you received with your machine under the same number as in the TruTops database.

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-31

6.2

Searching for technology tables

1. Select Tables. The selection of all technology tables for the active machine group is displayed:

Selection of technology tables for the active machine

Fig. 27620en

2. Either Search for the technology table using the scroll bar. Mark the technology table. or Search for the technology table on the basis of the search criteria (see following description). Searching for a technology table on the basis of search criteria You can search for technology tables according to the following criteria: Table number ("Table"). Machine group ("Group"). TruTops offers the technology tables for the active machine group by default. For Laser cutting machines: laser output ("power"). Material type ("Material"). Material thickness ("Thickness").

2-32

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

Entering search criteria

1. Click in the input field under the button for the desired search criteria. 2. Enter the search value. Tip If the key functions of TruTops are used, the contents of the input field can be deleted using <Esc>. (For description of the key functions of TruTops, see chapter "Basics".) 3. Click on the button for the criterion as per which the selection should be sorted. Tip To filter for laser power and material thickness values according to whether they are greater/equal, left click on the button for the search criterion. To filter according to the exact value for laser power, right click on the button for the search criterion. 4. If necessary enter further search values and then click on the button for the additional search criterion. The selection is limited further. 5. Mark the desired technology table. The name of the technology table is entered in the mask head.

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-33

6.3

Modifying the header data of the technology tables

The following data is included in the header data: Name of the technology table. Comment text. Machine group to which the technology table belongs. Laser power. Focal length lens. Material thickness. Material type. Note The technology tables created by TRUMPF are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and save under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35). 1. Search for the technology table to be modified (see section 6.2, page 32). 2. Mark the desired technology table. The name of the technology table is entered in the mask head. 3. Select Modify. The "Modify Laser Table" mask is displayed. The mask is filled with the technology table header data. 4. Modify the desired header data. 5. Select Modify. The technology table header data is modified. Closing "Modify laser table" mask 6. Select Back. The selection of the technology tables is displayed again.

2-34

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

6.4

Copying and creating new technology tables

Note Always create technology tables based on existing tables. 1. Select Tables. The selection of all technology tables for the active machine group is displayed. 2. Search for the technology table to be copied (see section 6.2, page 32). Tip Select a technology table which has data similar to that of the new technology table. 3. Mark the desired technology table. The name of the technology table is entered in the mask head. 4. Select Copy. The "Copy Laser Table" mask is displayed. 5. Change the name of the technology table, if necessary. Note The first character in the name can be a "K" for alphanumerical technology tables and go from 5000 upwards for numerical ones. 6. Select Copy. A copy of the technology table is created under the new name. or Select Back. The selection of all technology tables for the active machine group is displayed again. 7. Mark the copied technology table. 8. Select Continue. 9. Modify the desired technology data in the individual tabs (see section 6.7, page 37 ff). The new technology table is added to the database (and thus to the selection).

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-35

6.5

Deleting technology tables

1. Select Tables. The selection of all technology tables for the active machine group is displayed. 2. Search for the technology table to be deleted (see section 6.2, page 32). 3. Mark the desired technology table. The name of the technology table is entered in the mask head. 4. Select Delete. The "Delete Laser Table" mask is displayed. 5. Select Delete. The technology table is deleted from the database and also from the selection. Closing the "Delete Laser Table" mask 6. Select Back. The selection of the technology tables is displayed again.

6.6

Displaying and printing technology tables

1. Select Tables. The selection of all technology tables for the active machine group is displayed. 2. Search for a technology table that is to be displayed or printed (see section 6.2, page 32). 3. Mark the desired technology table. The name of the technology table is entered in the mask head. 4. Select Output. The "Print/File output" mask is displayed. The selected table is displayed under "Table No.". Display technology table? 5. Under "Output form", select Display. A viewer displays the contents of the technology table. 6. Close the viewer again using the Cross button. Print technology table? 7. Under "Output form", select Printer. The technology table will be printed on your standard printer in the format that the viewer outputs. 8. Select OK.

Closing "Print/File output"

2-36

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

6.7

Technology data concerning laser cutting machines in detail

1. Select Tables. The selection of all technology tables for the active machine group is displayed. 2. Search for the technology table whose data is to be displayed (see section 6.2, page 32). 3. Mark the desired technology table. The name of the technology table is entered in the mask head. 4. Select Continue. An overview of the individual tabs for the technology table is displayed.

"General"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual tabs of the technology table is displayed (see section 6.7, page 37). Select General. The General pulldown menu is displayed. It contains the following submenus: Process rules for the technology table. Information for the technology table compiler. Piercing of the cutting head. Accelerations Times for gas flushing and corner cooling. Settings for the laser.

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-37

Showing process rules

Select General >Process rules. The "Process rules" mask is displayed:

Fig. 38433en

The "Process rules" mask contains the following data: TRUMPF process rules assigned to the technology table. Customer process rules assigned to the technology table. Note The original TRUMPF process rules supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. The customer process rules remain in force. Showing Infos

Select General >Info. The "Info" mask is displayed. It contains the following data: Programmer Underlying technology table. Technology table creation date. Date of modification. Remark on the technology table.

Showing data concerning the cutting head

Select General >Cutting head. The "Cutting head" mask is displayed. It contains the following data: Nozzle type. Cutting head No./FocusLine characteristic curve.

2-38

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

Showing accelerations

Select General >Accelerations. The "Accelerations" mask is displayed. It contains the following data: Acceleration cutting: divided up into reduced, normal and high. Acceleration 2nd Y axis. Acceleration marking, punch marking and vaporizing.

Showing the times

Select General >Times. The "Times" mask is displayed. The "Times" mask contains the following data: Gas flushing cutting/piercing. Gas flushing piercing/cutting. Corner cooling.

Showing laser data

Select General >Laser. The "Laser" mask is displayed. It contains the following data: Piercing Piercing with PierceLine. Cutting small contour. Cutting medium contour. Cutting large contour. Marking Point marking. Vaporizing Spot welding.

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-39

Modifying technology data

Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and save under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35). (For permissible names for technology tables, see Section 6.1, page 31) 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

"Cutting" (Siemens)
Prerequisite The overview of the individual tabs of the technology table is displayed (see section 6.7, page 37). Select Cutting. The Cutting pulldown menu is displayed. It contains the following submenus: General data concerning cutting. Settings for contour cutting. Settings for laser power control. Settings for plasma sensor system.

Displaying data concerning cutting

Select Cutting >General. The "Cutting: General" mask is displayed. It contains the following data: Reduced speed while cutting. Reduced speed from punch hole. Type of gas for cutting, here a distinction is made between normal and reduced cutting.

2-40

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

Cutting the contour

Select Cutting >Contour. The "Cutting: Contour" mask is displayed. It contains the following data: Kerf width. Setting value. Laser power. Laser beam gating frequency. Cutting speed. Cutting head nozzle standoff. Gas pressure

A distinction is made in each case between small, medium and large contours and between normal and reduced cutting:

Displaying laser power control

Select Cutting >LPC. The "Laser power control" mask is displayed. It contains the following data: Upper limit speed. Power up to upper limit speed. Lower limit speed. Power up to lower limit speed. Laser frequency control. Upper limit speed. Frequency with the upper limit speed. Lower limit speed. Frequency with the lower limit speed. Set analog value control for the following machines to 1 (see corresponding data collection): TruLaser 2525 / TCL 2530: as of software update V7.00. TC L 3020, TC L 3030, TC L 4030, TC L 6030: As of software update V6.01. TruLaser series 3000.

Displaying plasma sensor system

Select Cutting >Plasma sensor system. The "Plasma sensor system" mask is displayed. It contains the following data: Threshold value 1. Threshold value 2. Plasma sensor system active for large, medium or small contours.

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-41

Machines with YAG laser

Power pulse and power pause. Time pulse and time pause. Select YAG.

Modifying technology data

Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and send under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35 and section 6.1, page 31.) 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

Piercing
Prerequisite The overview of the individual tabs of the technology table is displayed (see section 6.7, page 37). Select Piercing. The Piercing pulldown menu is displayed.

Piercing without PierceLine

Select Piercing >without PierceLine. The "Piercing without PierceLine" mask is displayed. It contains the following data: SprintLine time. Setting value of the cutting head when piercing. Piercing time for normal and reduced piercing. Ramp number (normal/reduced). Nozzle standoff at the cutting head for normal or reduced piercing. Blow-out time for normal or reduced piercing. Gas pressure for normal or reduced piercing. Oil spraying during piercing Yes/No. Sensor type during piercing. Gas type for piercing.

Additionally for machines with Bosch control systems

Relative piercing distance for normal, reduced approach speed and reduced approach speed II.

2-42

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

Piercing with PierceLine

Select Piercing >with PierceLine. The "Piercing with PierceLine" mask is displayed. It contains the following data: Setting value of the cutting head when piercing. Transverse blowing during piercing, yes or no. Maximum piercing time for normal or reduced piercing. Maximum piercing time expected for normal or reduced piercing. Ramp number (normal/reduced). Nozzle standoff at the cutting head for normal or reduced piercing. Blow-out time for normal or reduced piercing. Gas pressure for normal or reduced piercing. Oil spraying during piercing yes or no. Sensor type during piercing. Gas type for piercing.

Modifying technology data

Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and send under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35 and section 6.1, page 31.) 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-43

"Approach" (Bosch)
Prerequisite The overview of the individual tabs of the technology table is displayed (see section 6.7, page 37). Select Approach. The "Approach" tab is displayed:

Fig. 22680en

The "Approach" tab contains the following data. A distinction is made between "Approaching" (= normal approaching with full laser power) and "Approaching II" (= reduced approaching with reduced laser power) : (Reduced) cutting speed when approaching. (Reduced) gas pressure. (Reduced) laser power. (Reduced) gating frequency. (Reduced) type of approach.

2-44

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

Modifying technology data

Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and save under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35). (For permissible names for technology table, see section 6.1, page 31) 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

"Cutting" (Bosch)
Prerequisite The overview of the individual tabs of the technology table is displayed (see section 6.7, page 37). Select Cutting. The "Cutting" mask is displayed:

Fig. 38357en

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-45

The "Cutting" mask contains the following data: Laser power. Gating frequency. Cutting speed. Kerf width. Delay time. Cutting gas pressure. Gas change time. Setting value.

Distinctions are made between large, medium and small contours respectively. Further data: Type of cutting gas. Cutting distance. Acceleration with cutting.

Modifying technology data

Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and save under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35). 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

2-46

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

"Vaporizing"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual tabs of the technology table is displayed (see section 6.7, page 37). Select Vaporizing. The "Vaporizing" mask is displayed:

Fig. 22535en

The "Vaporizing" mask contains the following data: Additionally for machines with Siemens control systems Additionally for machines with Bosch control systems Laser power during vaporizing. Gating frequency. Speed Nozzle standoff during vaporizing. Gas pressure. Gas type during vaporizing. Setting value. Vaporizing time.

Kerf width. Delay time Gas change time.

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-47

Machines with YAG laser

Power pulse power and power pause. Time pulse and time pause. Select YAG.

Modifying technology data

Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and save under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35). (For permissible names for technology table, see section 6.1, page 31.) 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

2-48

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

"Marking"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual tabs of the technology table is displayed (see section 6.7, page 37). Select Marking. The "Marking" mask is displayed:

Fig. 22536en

The "Marking" tab contains the following data: Laser power. Gating frequency. Cutting speed. Nozzle standoff. Gas pressure. Gas type.

Additionally for machines with Siemens control systems Additionally for machines with Bosch control systems

Setting value.

Kerf width. Delay time. Gas change time. Positioning height of the cutting head when marking.

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-49

Machines with YAG laser

Power pulse and power pause. Time pulse and time pause. Select YAG.

Modifying technology data

Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and save under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35). (For permissible names for technology table, see section 6.1, page 31.) 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

"Punch marking"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual tabs of the technology table is displayed (see section 6.7, page 37). Select Punch marking. The "Punch marking" mask is displayed:

Fig. 22531en

2-50

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

The "Point marking" mask contains the following data: Laser power. Gating frequency. Cutting speed. Nozzle standoff. Gas pressure. Piercing time. Ramp number. Gas type.

Additionally with Siemens control systems Additionally with Bosch control systems

Setting value.

Kerf width. Delay time. Gas change time. Piercing height. Blow-out time.

Machines with YAG laser

Power pulse and power pause. Time pulse and time pause. Select YAG.

Modifying technology data

Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and save under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35). (For permissible names for technology table, see section 6.1, page 31.) 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-51

"Others" (Siemens)
Prerequisite The overview of the individual tabs of the technology table is displayed (see section 6.7, page 37). Select Others. The Others pulldown menu is displayed. It contains the following data: Settings for Microweld. Settings for machines with YAG lasers.

Setting Microweld

Select Others >Microweld. The "Microweld" mask is displayed:

Fig. 38434en

The "Microweld" mask contains the following data: Setting value with Microweld. Time to set the weld point to soft or hard. Ramp number. Nozzle standoff. Gas pressure. Gas type.

2-52

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

Machines with YAG laser

Select Others >YAG. Power pulse and power pause. Time pulse and time pause.

Modifying technology data

Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and save under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35). (For permissible names for technology table, see section 6.1, page 31.) 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-53

"MicroWeld" (Bosch)
Prerequisite The overview of the individual tabs of the technology table is displayed (see section 6.7, page 37). Select Microweld. The "Microweld" mask is displayed:

Fig. 22530en

The "MicroWeld" mask contains the following data: Time for positioning weld point. Ramp number. Nozzle standoff. Gas pressure. Gas type.

Machines with YAG laser

Power pulse and power pause. Time pulse and time pause. Select YAG.

2-54

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

Modifying technology data

Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and save under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35). (For permissible names for technology table, see section 6.1, page 31.) 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

"Process rules" (Bosch)

Prerequisite An overview of the individual tabs for the technology table is displayed. Select Process rules. The "Process rules" mask is displayed:

Fig. 27630en

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-55

The "Process rules" mask contains the following data: Cutting head No. Focus position. Nozzle ID number and diameter. Lens ID number. Technology table creation date. Technology table programmer. Plasma sensor system on/off. Threshold values 1 and 2 of the plasma sensor system. Gas flushing Yes/No with ... ... changing from cutting to piercing. ... changing from piercing to cutting. Remark on the technology table. TRUMPF process rules allocated to the technology table. Customer process rules allocated to the technology table. Underlying technology table.

Allocating process rules

1. Under the "Rule name ..." in the customer column, enter the names of the process rules that are to be allocated to the technology table. 2. Select Modify.

Modifying technology data

Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and save under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35). (For permissible names for technology table, see section 6.1, page 31.) 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

2-56

6BTechnology tables

S98EN02.DOC

6.8

Allocating process rules to technology tables

Prerequisite A machine suitable for a technology table is present when opening the Data Management. (The Data Management is usually opened for the currently active machine. The machine cannot be changed within the open Data Management.) Note The original TRUMPF technology tables supplied with TruTops are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. If the TRUMPF technology tables are to be modified: copy and save under a different name (see section 6.4, page 35). (For permissible names for technology table, see section 6.1, page 31.)

1. Select Tables. 2. Search for the technology table to which to process rules are to be allocated (see section 6.2, page 32). 3. Mark the technology table. 4. Select Continue. 5. For laser cutting machines with Siemens control systems: select "General: Rules" mask. 6. For machines with Bosch control systems: select "Rules" mask. 7. Enter the names of the customer process rules in the "Customer" column that is to be allocated to the technology table. (For permissible names for process rules, see section 7.1, page 58.) 8. Select Modify.

S98EN02.DOC

6BTechnology tables

2-57

7. 7.1

Process rules Names of process rules

The name of the process rules can be made up of different characters: letters of the alphabet, numbers or a combination of the two. Maximum length of the name: 14 characters. TRUMPF process rules Examples The process rules that we have already stored in the database can be identified by the fact that they do not begin with a "K".
"Old" laser process rules: 50001 50002 50003 ... 50101 ... "New" laser process rules: T2D-3832-5 ... T2D-4304-6 ... T2D-4307-4 ... Table 3

Note The process rules created by TRUMPF are automatically overwritten with each TruTops update. The copied customer process rules remain in effect with updates. Modify original TRUMPF process rules? Original process rules from TRUMPF cannot be modified: 1. Copy a process rule and save under a permissible name (for copying process rules, see section 7.3, page 61, for permissible names, see below). 2. Modify desired values (for technology data in the process rules, see section 7.6, page 66). Name of your process rules The first character in the name of your process rules can be a "K". (The process rules that we have already stored in the database can be identified by the fact that they do not begin with a "K".) K4711 KPR1 K0001 Standard process rules have the topmost priority during selection. The previous system of numbering the places 1-10 no longer applies. For machines with PierceLine, PierceLine default process rules are always at the top of the table list.

Examples

Sequence and designation of the process rules

2-58

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

Default standard process rules possess up-to date functions such as SprintLine, ContourL, etc.
Standard Evaporating (scale) contour Evaporating (foil) dot
1

PierceLine: Standard PierceLine: vaporizing (scale) contour PierceLine: vaporizing (film) dot1 PierceLine: NitroLine (Plasma), Standard PierceLine: NitroLine (Plasma), vaporizing (film) contour PierceLine: FlyLine, Standard 2 PierceLine: Without approaching (NC post-processing program) PierceLine: HIGH-QUALITY, Standard PierceLine: HIGH-QUALITY, vaporizing (film) contour Table 4

NitroLine (Plasma), Standard NitroLine (Plasma), vaporizing (film) contour FlyLine, Standard
2

Without approaching (NC post-processing program) HIGH-QUALITY, Standard HIGH-QUALITY, vaporizing (foil) contour Designation of the process rules

7.2

Searching for process rules

1. Select Rule >Data. The selection of all process rules for the active machine group is displayed:

Selection of rules for the active machine

Fig. 27631en

1 2

For T2D-*FO* sheet tables From control, version 4.70

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-59

2. Either Look for the process rule using the scroll bar. Mark the process rule. or Search for the process rule on the basis of search criteria (see following description).

Searching for process rules on the basis of search criteria

You can search for process rules by the following criteria: Process rule name ("Rule name"). Machine group ("Machine") TruTops offers the process rules for the active machine group as default. For laser cutting machines: laser output ("power"). Material type ("Material ID."). Material thickness ("Material thickness").

Entering search criteria

1. Click in the input field under the button for the desired search criterion. 2. Enter the search value. Tip If the key functions of TruTops are used, the contents of the input field can be deleted using <Esc>. (For description of the key functions of TruTops, see chapter "Basics".) 3. Click on the button for the criterion as per which the selection should be sorted. Tip To filter the laser power and the material thickness values according to greater/equal: left click on the button for the search criterion. To filter according to the exact value for laser power, right click on the button for the search criterion. 4. If necessary enter further search values and then click on the button for the additional search criterion. The selection is limited further. 5. Mark the desired process rule. Enter the name of the process rule in the mask head.

2-60

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

7.3

Copying process rules and creating new ones

Note Process rules from TRUMPF cannot be modified, they can only be copied and saved under a different name (for permissible names, see section 7.1, page 58). When you create your own process rules, you must allocate them to at least one technology table (see section 6.4, page 35). NC programs created with PierceLine-specific data should not be run on machines without PierceLine! Risk of damage to the machine. Caution Only allocate PierceLine-specific process rules to PierceLine laser technology tables.

Copying process rules for laser cutting machines

1. Select Rule >Data. A list of process rules is displayed. Search for the process rule to be copied (see section 7.2, page 59). 2. Mark the process rule. The data of the process rule is entered in the mask head. 3. Select Copy. The "Copy process rule" mask is displayed:

Fig. 38359en

The mask contains the header data for the process rule that is to be copied. The source contains the original name of the copied process rule. The name of the copied process rule with a leading "K" is suggested as the name of the copy.

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-61

4. Change the name of the process rule if necessary. Tip The first character in the name should be a K. 5. Select Copy. 6. Either Respond to the query whether the process rules should be allocated to a technology table with Yes. A message concerning selection of the technology tables is displayed. or Select No. The selection of all process rules for the active machine group is displayed with the copied process rule. Allocating a process rule to a laser technology table 7. Mark the technology table to which the copied process rule should be allocated. 8. Select OK. The "Set customer process rule" mask is displayed:

Fig. 38358en

Note Copied process rules can only be entered in the area of the customer process rules. 9. Select position for the copied process rules in the "Set customer process rule" mask. 10. Select OK.

2-62

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

Copying process rules for water jet cutting machines

1. Select Rule >Data. The selection of all process rules for the active machine group is displayed. 2. Search for the process rule to be copied (see section 7.2, page 59). Tip Search for process rule whose data is similar to that of the new process rules. 3. Mark the desired process rule. Enter the name of the process rule in the mask head. 4. Select Copy. The mask "Copy Rule" is displayed. 5. Select Read. The mask is filled with the header data of the process rule. 6. Change at least the name of the process rule. 7. Select Copy. A copy of the process rule is generated under the new name. 8. Select Back. The selection of all process rules for the active machine group is displayed again. 9. Mark the copied process rule. 10. Select Continue. 11. Modify the desired data in the individual tabs of the copied process rule (see section 7.6, page 66).

Modifying process rules

1. Mark the copied process rule. 2. Select Continue. 3. Modify the desired data in the individual tabs in the copied process rule (see section 7.6, page 66).

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-63

7.4

Deleting process rules

Note Original process rules from TRUMPF cannot be deleted. You can only delete process rules which you yourself have created (for creating process rule, see section 7.3, page 61). 1. Select Rule >Data. The selection of all process rules for the active machine group is displayed. 2. Search for the process rule to be deleted (see section 7.2, page 59). 3. When you have found the process rule: mark process rule. Enter the name of the process rule in the mask head. 4. Select Delete. The "Delete Rules" mask is displayed. 5. To delete the rule: select Delete. The process rule is deleted from the database as well as from the selection list. or To close the mask without deleting: select Back. The selection of the process rules is displayed again.

7.5

Displaying and printing process rules

1. Select Rule >Data. The selection of all process rules for the active machine group is displayed. 2. Search for the process rule that is to be output as a file or is to be printed (see section 7.2, page 59). 3. Mark the desired process rule. Enter the name of the process rule in the mask head. 4. Select Output. The "Print/File output" mask is displayed. The selected process rule is displayed under "Table number".

2-64

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

Show rules?

5. Select Display under "Output form". A viewer displays the content of the rule. 6. Close the viewer again using the button .

Print rule?

7. Select Printer under "Output form". The rule is printed at your default printer in the format that the viewer outputs. 8. To close "Print/File output", select: OK.

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-65

7.6

Rules concerning laser cutting machines in detail

1. Select Rule >Data. The selection of all process rules for the active machine group is displayed. 2. Search for the rule whose data is to be displayed (see section 7.2, page 59). 3. Mark the desired rule. The name of the rule is entered in the mask head. 4. Select Continue. TruTops informs you that TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. 5. Select OK. An overview of the individual tabs for the rule are displayed:

Overview of the individual tabs of the rule

Fig. 27632en

2-66

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

"General 1"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual rule tabs for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules, see section 7.3, page 61). Select General 1. The "General 1" tab is displayed:

Fig. 47936en

Data in "General 1" Info and remark regarding the rule: The texts that you enter here are displayed by TruTops during the selection of the rule in "Machining parts, generating an NC program". The "Info" text is already laid out in all original rules from TRUMPF. Open contour: Open contours should be cut as small, medium and large contours. Piercing with the open contour reduced, full or rapid. Underlying TRUMPF rule: The "underlying rule" can be entered later into the copied rules from the previous TruTops versions. New parameters are automatically added later to the copied rule in the course of future updates.

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-67

Contour surfaces with min. and max. values for determining contour size. Part positioning. Note "Part positioning" must always be set to Yes. Cross. height (= height that the cutting head adopts when positioning between contours). Priority corner treatment "Rounding" or "Looping"? Corner cooling time. PierceLine required? PierceLine is able to regulate every piercing procedure practically regardless of the material type and thickness (see Technical telegram "PierceLine" of 11.10.2002). Cutting with SprintLine? SprintLine means: Quick positioning of the laser head during cutting and marking with height regulation switched off. Marking with SprintLine? To position faster between the marking, the laser beam for SprintLine is not switched off, but rather the laser power is reduced. Acceleration programming (i.e. reduced acceleration)? Note The acceleration programming is not evaluated in the case of machines with open control systems not even when the switch is set to Yes. For machines with open control systems, the machine control system obtains the value for the "Reduced acceleration" from the technology table: To activate the acceleration programming: enter X and Y values. The acceleration programming is used above all with aluminum (4-6 mm) and stainless steel (4-10 mm): Effect: reduction of acceleration (m/s2). Although the reduction applies to the whole contour, it particularly affects corners and approaching. No special corner treatment with roundings or loopings is necessary thereafter. The reduction causes the corners to be cut sharply. Contours which would have to be approached with a banana without acceleration programming can be approached linearly. Acceleration programming is generated automatically and independently of the contour size, and it affects all contours.

2-68

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

If only certain individual contours should be machined with acceleration programming, you must allocate rules without activated acceleration programming to these contours and generate the machining of these contours selectively (for changing and selectively processing rules, see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program").

Modifying data in the rule

1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

"General 2"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual tabs of the rule for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules, see section 7.3, page 61). Select General 2. The "General 2" tab is displayed:

Fig. 27634en

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-69

Data in "General 2" "Cutting: text" Define contour size of the texts which are cut. When cutting the texts, TruTops does not generate approach or withdrawal flags. The beam pierces directly into the contour. Machining cannot be rearranged. This could result in uncontrolled scrap (depending on the font). "Marking: text" Contour size of texts which are marked. Note Texts to be marked must have the line color "yellow" (for more on line colors, see "TruTops CAD software manual"). "Marking: contour": Contour size of contours which are marked. Previously vaporize marked contours/points? "Dot marking: point": Contour size when dot marking. Previously vaporize dot-marked contours/points? "Dot marking: symbol": Form of the dot marking (piercing point (point) or 2 circles around the dot mark point (2 circles). For 2 circles: enter diameter of both circles. Notes Points to be dot marked must have the line color "cyan" (for more on line colors, see "TruTops CAD software manual"). If you program dot marking for a machine with Bosch control system (which corresponds to "soft piercing"), you must modify the following values in the technology table: Piercing distance Piercing gas pressure Gas type

(For values, see the current data collection for your machine). Handling of non machined contours: marking or dot marking? TruTops automatically calculates which contours cannot be machined during machining definition. You can have these parts marked as follows: "Marking", "Geometric contour": TruTops marks all contours that cannot be machined.

2-70

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

"Marking", "Center of gravity: default": TruTops marks the center of gravity of all standard contours (rectangle, circle, oblong hole). "Marking", "Center of gravity: selected": TruTops marks the center of gravity of any contours. "Dot marking": TruTops dot marks the center of gravity of the contours. Note If both dot marking in the center of gravity and marking in the center of gravity are activated, dot marking in the center of gravity has priority.

Modifying data in the rule

1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

"General 3"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual rule tabs for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules, see section 7.3, page 61). Select General 3. The "General 3" tab is displayed:

Fig. 22497en

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-71

Data in "General 3" Common cuts? (For description of parameters see "Machining parts, generating an NC program"). Length for reduced approaching in the case of blanks and sheet parting cuts and piercing type (for an overview of piercing and approaching for various materials, see the current data collection). Microwelds? (For description of parameters of Microwelds see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program") "Use as a suggestion?": TruTops offers the shape of the weld points that you select here when machining the parts as suggestion.

Modifying data in the rule

1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

"General 4"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual rule tabs for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Select General 4. The "General 4" tab is displayed. Data in "General 4" Clockwise sense of rotation: The quality of the cut holes is better for certain when they are cut counter-clockwise and better for others when cut clockwise, depending on the material. Yes = The contours are machined clockwise. No = The contours are machined counter-clockwise.

Modifying data in the rule

Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules, see section 7.3, page 61). 1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

2-72

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

"Piercing"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual rule tabs for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules, see section 7.3, page 61). 1. Select contour type (small, medium or large). 2. Select Piercing. The "Piercing" mask is displayed. Data in "Piercing" Selected contour type. Piercing Yes/No. yes, "Piercing type" reduced, full or fast? Note Fast piercing is available only on machines without open control systems (see your machine's current programming manual).

Reduced piercing: the beam pierces with reduced laser power during ramp operation. Full piercing: the beam pierces with full laser power during ramp operation.

Determine sheet thickness by means of measuring cycle? Radius of spatter circle. The radius of spatter circle is a safety range in which no contours can lie that could get damaged. TruTops takes this safety range into account during the collision check.

Modifying data in the rule

1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-73

"Approach"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual rule tabs for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules, see section 7.3, page . 61). 1. Select contour type (small, medium or large). 2. Select Approach. Page 1 of the "Approach" mask is displayed:

"Approach", page 1

Fig. 27637en

Data in "Approach", page 1 Selected contour type. Approach Yes/No? If yes, select the type of approach (reduced, reduced II, full). Notes Reduced approach II is only available for machines with Bosch control systems from software update 7.0. "Reduced approach II" makes reduced approaching for high-pressure cutting of aluminum and special steel faster than it has been hitherto, because the control system no longer needs to switch to a different technology table.

2-74

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

1. To activate Reduced approach II for machines with a Bosch control system: select Machines >Data >Basic data 3. 2. Activate reduced approach II. 3. Select Modify. The modifications in the basic data are saved. Precision stop. Height regulation Yes/No? Note The height regulation must be either activated or deactivated in all the tabs in the rule. Further tabs with "Height regulation": "Approach", "Cutting", "Withdrawal" Path slope. Feed forward. Reduction: by what percentage should the linear part of the approach path be reduced? Precut for approaching thick sheet? Defining path and speed of the precut: 1. Select Back >General 1. 2. Enter "Precut path" and "Speed". 3. Select Modify. Setting dimension offset: The floating switch over of the setting dimension can be defined for every contour size. Set Variable "FocusOffsetAllowed" in the public machine rules to 1 (see section 8.3, page 90 ff.). Inside and outside approach angles. 0: -20: +20: TruTops generates an approach flag in the angle 1 of 90 (90-0) vertical to the contour. TruTops generates an approach flag in the angle 2 of 70 (90-20). TruTops generates an approach flag in the angle 3 of 110 (90+20).

Approach angle

Fig. 27686

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-75

Strategy: Determine where the approach should be positioned: At corner: the cutting head travels exclusively to corners. If TruTops finds no corners, then the contour is not machined. At element: the cutting head travels exclusively to elements (= lines or arcs). If TruTops finds no elements, then the contour is not machined. Corner/Element: the cutting head approaches by preference at corners. If TruTops cannot find any corners, the cutting head approaches a suitable element. Element/corner: the cutting head approaches elements by preference. If TruTops cannot find any elements, the cutting head approaches a suitable corner. When approaching an element: for shape and length of the elements which are approached, see second tab "Approach" (open with Continue). When approaching a corner: for shape, angle and length of the elements in front of or behind a corner, see second tab "Approach" (open with Continue).

Path (approach path) and radius. Note The approach path and the radius must be smaller than web width.

Data in "Approach", page 2 1. Open page 2 through Continue.

"Approach", page 2

Fig. 43067en

2-76

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

"Approach at element": "Form", "Form preferred". "Length" "Approach at corner". "Form" "Angle" "Length element before/after corner": minimum and maximum path before/after the corner at which the approach may be made. "Minimum" prevents elements of the contour which are lying too close from being damaged during the approach. If the free path before the corner is too short or too long, the approach is not made at the corner.

2. To return to page 1: select Back.

Modifying data in the rule

1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

"Cutting"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual rule tabs for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules see section 7.3, page 61). 1. Select contour type (small, medium or large). 2. Select Cutting. The "Cutting" tab is displayed. Data in "Cutting" Selected contour type. Cutting type. Precision stop. Height regulation Yes/No? Note The height regulation must be either activated or deactivated in all the tabs in the rule.

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-77

Further tabs with "Height regulation": "Approach" (see page 2-74). "Withdrawal" (see page 2-79).

Path slope. Feed forward. Path correction. Automatically generate microjoints on outside or inside contours during machining? Specify the following: Contours where microjoints are to be created. Length of the microjoints. (For description of microjoints see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program").

Beam end before contour end Yes/No? If Yes, enter length. In case of "Beam end before contour end", the laser beam will be switched off just before the contour end. The laser beam however still cuts the contour completely. When you activate "Beam end before contour end", no indents appear at the end of the contour when machining aluminum and stainless steel.

Modifying data in the rule

1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

2-78

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

"Withdrawal"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual rule tabs for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules, see section 7.3, page 61). 1. Select contour type (small, medium or large). 2. Select Withdrawal. The "Withdrawal" tab is displayed:

Fig. 27639en

Data in "Withdrawal" Selected contour type. Withdraw to outer and/or inner contours? If yes, enter "Distance" (see following list item). "Distance": safety distance from contours that must not be damaged. TruTops takes this safety range into account during the collision check.

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-79

Inside and outside withdrawal angles. 0: -20: +20: TruTops generates a withdrawal flag in the angle 1 of 90 (90-0) vertical to the contour. TruTops generates a withdrawal flag in the angle 2 of 70 (90-20). TruTops generates a withdrawal flag in the angle 3 of 110 (90+20).

Withdrawal angles

Fig. 27687

Form corner/form element? Defines the form of the withdrawal flags at corners or at elements: Line: the withdrawal flag comprises only a linear path. Line/arc: the withdrawal flag is made up of a straight path and an arc. Path (withdrawal path) and radius. Note The withdrawal path and the radius must be smaller than web width. Precision stop. Path slope. Height regulation Yes/No? Note The height regulation must be either activated or deactivated in all the tabs in the rule. Further tabs with "Height regulation": "Approach" (see page 2-74). "Cutting" (see page 2-77). "Withdrawal" (see page 2-79).

Feed forward.

Modifying data in the rule

1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

2-80

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

"Positioning"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual rule tabs for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules, see section 7.3, page 61). 1. Select contour type (small, medium or large). 2. Select Positioning. The "Positioning" tab is displayed. Data in "Positioning" Selected contour type. Positioning between contours. Note "Positioning between contours" must always be set to Yes. Cross. height (= height that the cutting head adopts when positioning between contours).

Modifying data in the rule

1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-81

"Rounding"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual rule tabs for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules, see section 7.3, page 61). 1. Select contour type (small, medium or large). 2 Select Rounding. The "Rounding" tab is displayed:

Fig. 27641en

Data in "Rounding" Selected contour type. Round or cool corners? If yes: select the corners to be rounded / cooled. Note The cooling time which is output here cannot be adjusted except for machines with Bosch control systems. Type of corner treatment.

2-82

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

Rounding radius. Note When TruTops is supposed to maintain the rounding radius exactly, then the minimum "radius" needs to correspond to the maximum "radius". "Tolerance". These values give the tolerance range within which the rounding is permitted to lie. Angle range in which the corners should be rounded. When you enter an angle, TruTops only rounds those corners which are within the entered angles. Length of elements before or after a corner: "Minimum...": This allows you to avoid the corner treatment affecting elements that lie too close to the contour. If the "free path" before or after the corner is too short, the corner is not treated. "Maximum ...": if the path before or after the corner is longer than the entered value, the corner is not treated.

(For more information about the corner treatment, see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program").

Modifying data in the rule

1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-83

"Looping"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual rule tabs for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules, see section 7.3, page 61). 1. Select contour type (small, medium or large). 2. Select Looping. The "Looping" tab is displayed:

Fig. 27642en

Data in "Looping" Selected contour type. Loop corners? If yes: select shape of the looping: Bisecting line angle: the cutting head moves out of the first half of the corner with the head tilted up, turns around, and moves into the second half of the corner. Loop: The cutting head moves in a straight line out from a corner, makes a looping, and moves into the second half of the corner in a straight line.

2-84

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

Radius Note The radius is relevant only for the Loop form of looping. If you wish TruTops to keep an exact looping radius, you must set the minimum "Radius" equal to the maximum "Radius".

Length Note The length is relevant only for the bisecting line angle form of looping. Angle range within which TruTops is to generate loopings at corners. When you enter an angle, TruTops only forms a looping on those corners which are within the entered angles. Note The angle is relevant only for the bisecting line angle form of looping. Length of elements before or after looping: "Minimum...": This allows you to avoid the corner treatment affecting elements that lie too close to the contour. If the "free path" before or after the corner is too short, the corner will not be treated. "Maximum ...": if the path before or after the corner is longer than the entered value, the corner is not treated.

(For more information about the corner treatment, see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program").

Modifying data in the rule

1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

S98EN02.DOC

7BProcess rules

2-85

"Vaporizing"
Prerequisite The overview of the individual rule tabs for the laser cutting machine is displayed (see section 7.6, page 66). Note Original TRUMPF rules cannot be modified. You can only modify rules which you yourself have created (for creating rules, see section 7.3, page 61). 1. Select contour type (small, medium or large). 2. Select Vaporize. The "Vaporizing" tab is displayed. Data in the "Vaporizing" tab Vaporizing Yes/No? Type of vaporizing: Point: only vaporize piercing point? Contour: vaporize entire contour?

Modifying data in the rule

1. Modify the desired data. 2. Select Modify.

7.7

Allocating rules to individual technology tables

(see section 6.8, page 57).

2-86

7BProcess rules

S98EN02.DOC

8.

Machine rules (public)

In addition to the TRUMPF-internal, password-protected machine rules, public machine rules (Rule>Machine) are also available. In the public machine rules you can make very specific settings for your machine. Notes The displayed variables depend on the machine selected. In the internal, password-protected process rules, you can only modify variables in cooperation with TRUMPF Software Support.

8.1

Adapting machine-dependent rules

Modifying public variables in the machine rules

Deleted or incorrect variables can lead to NC programs that cannot be run! Do not delete variables. Caution Whenever you modify variables: check the entries and modifications. Consult TRUMPF Software Support if in doubt.

1. Load the machine whose settings are to be modified. 2. Select Rules >Machine. A "Machine rules in customer responsibility" mask is displayed: Note The number of displayed variables depends on the machine selected.

S98EN02.DOC

8BMachine rules (public)

2-87

"Machine rules in customer responsibility"

Fig. 31758en

Modifying the value of a variable

1. Mark a variable in the selection field. The value will be adopted in the entry field "Value" . The "Value" shows the current coding of the marked variable. (After installation of TruTops, all variables have default values). This "Value" must be modified so that individual settings become effective. The comment text contains information on what is hidden behind the marked variables. Note Modifications in the openly accessible rules are retained for future initial installations or updates of TruTops. 2. Modify "Value". 3. Select Modify. The modifications will be saved.

2-88

8BMachine rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

8.2

Copying variables for a selected machine

Variables which are used on other machines and are supported by your machine can be copied and used on your machine. 1. In TruTops Laser, select the machine for which a variable is to be copied. Note The Data Management is usually opened for the currently active machine. The machine cannot be changed within the open Data Management. 2. Open Data Management (select Tools Modify >Data). 3. Select Rules >Machine. 4. Select Create. The "Selection" mask is displayed. This contains variables that are already stored in the database for other machines but are not yet defined for the active machine. 5. Select variable. 6. Enter the "value" (for description, see page 2-90 ff). 7. Select Create. The variable is adopted in the display field. 8. Select Back. Displaying the details of a variable? 1. Select Rules >Machine. 2. Mark a variable in the selection field. 3. Select Info. The details for the variable are displayed.

Delete the variable you created?

1. Mark the variable in the selection field, which you have created and is to be deleted. Note Always delete only those variables that you created yourself! The value will be adopted in the entry field. 2. Select Delete.

S98EN02.DOC

8BMachine rules (public)

2-89

8.3

Description of the variables in the public machine rules

The following table gives an overview of the variables of all machines supported by TruTops. (The number of displayed variables depends on the machine selected.) A more detailed description of most variables can be found on page 2-93 ff. "No." "Comment text" Consecutive number of the more exact description of a variable. The comment text contains information on what is hidden behind the variables. The "value" corresponds to the coding of a variable. After TruTops is installed, the default values are displayed. To make your individual settings effective, the value must be modified.
No. Variable machine rules 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AuflagestegpunkteNichtErzeugen AuflagestegWerkstoffIgnorieren Beladegeraet DrawingCleanTolerance EinrichteplanFormular EinrichteplanOptionen EpZeitAusgabeFormat FlyCuttingEndLength FlyCuttingEndRadius FlyCuttingEndRadius FlyCuttingEndRadius FocusOffsetAllowed FunktionBSSEnabled FunktionPosiAufSchneidabstandEnabled FunktionPosiAufSchneidabstandEnabled FunktionPosiAufSchneidabstandEnabled FunktionTcPosModeEnabled LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMaxX Comment text Part support display: support web points are not generated. Allocation of material to support web is ignored. LoadMaster present. Tolerance value for geometry preparation during loading. Name for default set-up plan form. Bit field for set-up plan options during NC generation. Output format the machine time in the set-up plan and in the production plan overview. 1=decimal, 2=h:m:s, 3=both Length for flying cutting end Length for flying cutting end Radius for flying cutting end Radius for flying cutting end Focus offset during approach (0=no, 1=yes). Machine can FlyLine (1 = yes, 0 = no). Machine can position at cutting distance (Laser_off(4))[1=yes, 0=no] Machine can position at cutting distance (Laser_off(4))[1=yes, 0=no] Machine can position at cutting distance (Laser_off(4))[1=yes, 0=no] Machine can TC_POS_MODE (flying switch-off) [1=yes, 0=no]" Right-hand upper corner X: window for searching for the machining starting point. Laser cutting (in %)

2-90

8BMachine rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

No. Variable machine rules 10 11 12 13 14 MachineExchangeDir 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 MachineExchangeDirUser MachineExchangeDirUserPwd MaschCtrlVersion MaschDiasVersion MaschinenMicrojoint MaschinenMicrojointMitAnfahren MaschLasVersion MaschMmcVersion MaschNcVersion MaschPlcVersion maxElemLenSecAx_x maxElemLenSecAx_y MiJoFixierenderSpaltFaktor 23 24 NcLinkLiteModus NcLinkProduktionsPlanTyp NcOutputContourNumber NcSaveProcessedPlusFile 25 NestDefaultStartingCorner PalletizingShowPosLines Sc_BAHNK_ONOF Sc_EINS_ONOF LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMaxY LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMinX LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMinY LST_PfadModal

Comment text Right-hand upper corner Y: window for searching for the machining starting point. Laser cutting (in %) Left-hand lower corner X: window for searching for the machining starting point. Laser cutting. (in%) Left-hand lower corner Y: window for searching for the machining starting point. Laser cutting. (in%) Default directory for NC programs. Absolute path to the machine's exchange directory (TOPSMANU.DIR) User name for logging in User password for logging in Current control version of machine. (See machine control system. Empty field = independent of version). Current DIAS version of the machine. (See machine control system. Empty field = independent of version). Microjoints possible on the machine? (1 = yes, 0 = no). Microjoints with approach flag possible on the machine? (1 = yes, 0 = no). Current laser control system version of the machine. (See machine control system. Empty field = independent of version). Current MMC version of the machine. (See machine control system. Empty field = independent of version). Current NC version of the machine. (See machine control system. Empty field = independent of version). Current PLC version of the machine. (See machine control system. Empty field = independent of version). Working range of the auxiliary axis in X direction (= 0 if an auxiliary axis is not active). Working range of the auxiliary axis in Y direction (= 0 if an auxiliary axis is not active). Factor for computation of the minimum Microjoint length from the kerf, in order to evaluate MiJo as binding. NcLink: simple mode active (1). Configured NcLink production plan type. Should the contour number be output in NC? (1 = yes, 0 = no) 0=Reject two-axis program, 1=Save two-axis program, 2= Overwrite one-axis program. Standard start corner during nesting: 0=no standard start corner, 1=lower left, 2=upper left, 3=lower right, 4=upper right Display positioning lines with unloading units with position programming in the palletizing graphics? 0=no, 1=yes Laser cutting: cutting with active path correction at control system (1:YES / 0:NO). Multi-purpose machine laser cutting: Default: 0: Prepunch, 1: Piercing, 2: Beam on.

S98EN02.DOC

8BMachine rules (public)

2-91

No. Variable machine rules 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Sc_LAS_UMLAUF_AK Sc_LAS_UMLAUF_IK Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_ART Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_LEN Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_RED_LEN Sc_TAFCUT_GEOKATEGORIE Sc_TAFCUT_MESSABST_KANTE Sc_TAFCUT_SCHN_LEN_OHNE_HR Sc_TAFCUT_WEGF_LEN Sc_VRSTNZ_MAX_DURCHMESSER Sc_VRSTNZ_MIN_DURCHMESSER Sc_VRSTNZ_MIN_LEN_RED_SCHN Sc_ZUENDPKT_KANTE secondaryAxis_x secondaryAxis_y SicherheitSaugeranwahl SortedPartInhibitForMicrojoint SortmasterKollisionsbereichMinX SortmasterLeisteMindestverstellposition T1MSrNcL_AnfahrMuldeStartPkt T1MSrNcL_AnfahrMuldeStartPkt T2MSrNc_Opt_Abs_X T2MSrNc_Opt_Abs_Y T2MSrNcL_DoOutputTcPartEnd T2MSrNcL_HPKennung T3MrGuiL_AutoTransferPrpAktiv T3MrNcL_NC_AusgabeTyp VaporizingWithSprintLas WerkstueckauflageAusZeichnung

Comment text Multi-purpose machine laser cutting.: processing cycle outer contour (CLW / CCLW). Multi-purpose machine laser cutting: processing cycle inside contour (CLW/CCLW). Sheet cut (laser): Approach mode (1: full; 2: reduced) Sheet cut (laser): Approach path (mm) to edge of the sheet Sheet cut (laser): Approach path (mm) reduced Sheet cut (laser): Size (0: open 1: small; 2: medium; 3: large) Sheet cut (laser): Distance (mm) from the measuring point in the sheet to the edge of the sheet Sheet cut (laser): Path (mm) cutting near the edge without active height regulation. Sheet cut (laser): Withdrawal path (mm) from edge of the sheet Laser cutting: max. outer circle (mm) prepunching tool Laser cutting: min. outer circle (mm) prepunching tool Min. path (mm) for reduced approaching from pre-punching hole Laser cutting: Cutting from pre-punching hole: distance (mm) from ignition point to the punching edge Auxiliary axis present (1=yes, 0=no) Auxiliary axis present (1=yes, 0=no) Safety factor during automatic suction cup selection. Automatic disable of machine mircojoints at contour end for parts with unloading processes. Specifies where the collision range lies in X min (e.g. machine stands 147 mm to the left of the pallet to be sorted enter 147 here). Minimum adjustment position of the strip for SortMaster. Approach dimple contour start point. 1=Center, 2=Before rounding, 3=After rounding. Default=1. Approach dimple contour start point. 1=Center, 2=Before rounding, 3=After rounding. Default=2. X value for sheet alignment with height regulation. Y value for sheet alignment with height regulation. Output of TC_PART_END() 0=No / 1=Yes. Main program ID. Release transfer for production plans without enquiry.[1=Yes;0=No]. Output type: 1 NC output; 2 TCAPT output; 3 TC260+SC with parameter blocks Flag, whether vaporizing with SprintLas will be carried out. Workpiece support is read from machine drawing (= 1) or from the database (= 0). Table 5

Variables: overview of the public machine rules

2-92

8BMachine rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

Description of variables No. 1 AuflagestegpunkteNichtErzeugen This variable shows the support web points. Value = 0: Displaying support web points. Value = 1: Hiding support web points No. 2 AuflagestegWerkstoffIgnorieren Value = 0: Allocation of material to support web is checked and an error message occurs. Value = 1: Allocation of material to support web is ignored. Note When this variable is set (1), there is no monitoring of material allocation. Then the standard support web is set. No. 3 DrawingCleanTolerance: This variable is used to set the tolerance value for the preparation in the machine rules for each machine. Geometries are thereby prepared ready for production during loading, i.e. mini lines are eliminated, degenerated arcs on the line are converted into lines, etc. Note The tolerance value for the preparation can only be set by the programmer in the machine rules for each machine. No. 4 EinrichteplanFormular File name of the default set-up plan in '*.HTML' format for: Laser machines = 'ReportLaser.html' The files are stored in the '...\TRUMPF.NET\Templates\HTML' directory. No. 5 EinrichteplanOptionen: This variable may not be modified or deleted. It is in the public machine rules so that it is not overwritten when TruTops is updated.

S98EN02.DOC

8BMachine rules (public)

2-93

No. 6

EpZeitAusgabeFormat The variables entered here determine how the machine time will appear on the set-up plan:

Configuring machine time

Value = 1: Machine time issued as decimal. Value = 2: Machine time issued in hours, minutes and seconds. Value = 3: Machine time issued as decimal and in hours, minutes and seconds. FocusOffsetAllowed: Using this variable, the focus offset function (floating switch over of the setting dimension FocusLine when approaching) can be switched on.

No. 7

No. 8

FunktionBSSEnabled: Using this variable, the FlyLine can be switched on for machines with Siemens control.

No. 9

LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMaxX Variable for defining the processing start point of a contour during laser cutting. Variable for internal calculations ("right upper corner X"). The default value is given in %.

No. 10

LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMaxY Variable for defining the processing start point of a contour during laser cutting. Variable for internal calculations ("right upper corner Y"). The default value is given in %.

No. 11

LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMinX Variable for defining the processing start point of a contour during laser cutting. Variable for internal calculations ("left lower corner X"). The default value is given in %.

No. 12

LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMinY Variable for defining the processing start point of a contour during laser cutting. Variable for internal calculations ("left lower corner Y"). The default value is given in %.

2-94

8BMachine rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

No. 13

LST_PfadModal: If TruTops is supposed to save the actual file (master file of the NC text) always in the directory last used when machining the parts, the "LST_PfadModal" variable must first be created for each machine. The value entered is arbitrary, but must consist of at least three characters.

No. 14

MachineExchangeDir The path must be specified in UNC (Universal Naming Convention) format.

Example

If the machine is named "TC5000R1" in the network, the correct path would be: \\TC5000R1\topsmanu.dir. If the path is set and the machine is integrated into the network, TruTops can query data directly from the machine.

No. 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20

MaschCtrlVersion MaschDiasVersion MaschLasVersion MaschMmcVersion MaschNcVersion MaschPlcVersion

These variables may not be modified or deleted. They are in the public machine rules so that they will not be overwritten when TruTops is updated. No. 21 MaschinenMicrojoint Value = 0: Creating microjoints is not possible at machine. Value = 1: Creating microjoints is possible at machine. Note Machine microjoints could be created with the TruLaser series 3000, series 5000, series 2000, TruLaser 7025, TC L 3030, TC L 4030, TC L 6030, TC L 3050, TC L 4050, TC L 6050, TC L 2530, TC L 2510 and HSL 2502 C so far. No. 22 MaschinenMicrojointMitAnfahren Future machines support machine microjoints with approach.

S98EN02.DOC

8BMachine rules (public)

2-95

No. 23

NcLinkLiteModus If production plans are to be created in TruTops and the machine(s) are linked to CELL-SERVER or TC-CELL, TruTops must output the part information (= allocation of nesting customer part) in the production plan. (The part information is usually not output.)

Output part job information in production package?

Modify value for the variable NcLinkLiteModus from 1 to 0 (to modify the value of a variable see page 2-87). Value = 0: Rigid output of part job information: The allocation of nesting customer part / nesting customer drawing number is retained (drawing numbers in drawing data are mandatory). Value = 1: Simplified output of part job information. The allocation of nesting customer part/nesting customer drawing number is lost (standard setting; drawing numbers in drawing data are not necessary). NcLinkProduktionsPlanTyp The production package type in TruTops is set as default to the "Value" 17. If data is missing in the production packages: read the production package type at the control system and enter it in TruTops (see section 4.2, page 26). (To modify the value of a variable see page 2-87).

No. 24

No. 25

Sc_EINS_ONOF Value = 0: (Pre-punching) Value = 1: Piercing Value = 2: Beam on

No. 26

Sc_LAS_UMLAUF_AK In which direction should the outer contour be machined? Value = CCLW: Value = CLW: Counter-clockwise. Clockwise

No. 27

Sc_LAS_UMLAUF_IK In which direction should the inside contour be processed?

2-96

8BMachine rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

No. 28

Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_ART (Not evaluated in this TruTops version.) Sheet parting cut: how to approach? Value = 1: Approach full Value = 2: Approach reduced

No. 29

Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_LEN Sheet parting cut: approach path at the edge of the sheet.

No. 30

Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_RED_LEN (Not evaluated in this TruTops version.) Sheet parting cut: length of the path that is to be cut in the "Reduced" approach mode.

No. 31

Sc_TAFCUT_GEOKATEGORIE Sheet parting cut: Size definition means: machining sheet parting cuts as open contours or with the rules for small, medium and large contours. Value = 0: Open contour Value = 1: Small contour Value = 2: Medium contour Value = 3: Large contour

No. 32

Sc_TAFCUT_MESSABST_KANTE Sheet parting cut: the distance from the edge of the sheet to the measuring point within the sheet can be defined.

No. 33

Sc_TAFCUT_SCHN_LEN_OHNE_HR Sheet parting cut: cutting without active height regulation DIAS III. When cutting close to the edge of the sheet, the length of the path can be defined which is to be cut without active height regulation.

No. 34

Sc_TAFCUT_WEGF_LEN Sheet parting cut: the withdrawal path from the edge of the sheet can be defined.

S98EN02.DOC

8BMachine rules (public)

2-97

No. 35

SicherheitSaugeranwahl: For the calculation of the number of required suction cups (see Fig. 33386, page 18) TruTops multiplies the calculated, minimum number with this safety factor.

No. 36

SortmasterKollisionsbereichMinX: In the machine rules, the distance of the machine to the pallet to be sorted can be entered. When unloading with the SortMaster, a yellow line appears and a check is conducted for possible collisions.

No. 37

SortedPartInhibitForMicrojoint For parts with unloading processes, an automatic disabling can be set for machine microjoints at the end of the contour.

No. 38

T1MSrNcL_AnfahrMuldeStartPkt:

Approach in the center of the dimple

Approach after the dimple, before the rounding

Approach after the dimple, after the rounding Fig. 34822

2-98

8BMachine rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

No. 39

T2MSrL_DoOutputTcPartEnd This variable can set the "Stop after part x" function and the unload automation or the registration in TcCell. Value = 0: Deactivate the "Stop after part x" function. Value = 1: Activate the "Stop after part x" function. Note The variable is set to 0 at delivery. With the TruLaser 3030 / TC L 3030 S, function can only be used from the control version 4.70 onwards. With the TruLaser 5030 / TC L 3050, the variable is always activated, meaning set to 1.

No. 40

T2MSrNc_Opt_Abs_X Dimension traveled by the cutting head in the X direction from zero point in order to measure sheet position.

No. 41

T2MSrNc_Opt_Abs_Y Dimension traveled by the cutting head in the Y direction from zero point in order to measure sheet position.

No. 42

T2MSrNcL_HPKennung The value entered here serves as identification for the main program names in the NC text. The identification is placed before the alphanumeric program number. The maximum length of the value is limited to 25 characters for alphanumerical program number output.

No. 43

T3MrNcL_NC_AusgabeTyp Output mode: Value = 1: NC output. Value = 2: TCAPT output. (The NC output is carried out through the TRUMPF postprocessor.) Value = 3: TC260+SC with parameter blocks Note The machines can be programmed only in the preset output mode.

S98EN02.DOC

8BMachine rules (public)

2-99

No. 44

VaporizingWithSprintLas: Vaporizing with SprintLine is possible on the following machines with a Siemens control system: TC L 2520, TC L 2530: V7.00. TC L 3020: with software update V5.00 and higher. TC L 3030, TC L 4030, TC L 6030 with Siemens control system: starting with software update V5.00. TC L 3050, TC L 4050: with software update V3.00 and higher. TruLaser 3030 classic. TruLaser 3030 / 3040 / 3060. TruLaser 5030 / 5040. Value = 0 Vaporizing without SprintLine. Value = 1 Vaporizing with SprintLine.

No. 45

WerkstueckauflageAusZeichnung The variable entered here ignores configurable workpiece supports.

2-100

8BMachine rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

9.

System rules (public)

In addition to the TRUMPF-internal, password-protected system rules, public system rules are also available. In the public system rules you can make settings which apply to all machines and the whole of TruTops.

9.1

Modifying public system variables

Deleted or incorrect system variables can lead to inoperable NC programs. Do not delete system variables. Caution You modify system variables: check inputs and modifications. Consult TRUMPF Software Support if in doubt. Note In the internal, password-protected process rules, you can only modify variables in cooperation with TRUMPF Software Support. 1. Open Data Management for any machine. 2. Select Rule >System. The "System rules in customer responsibility" mask is displayed:

"System rules in customer responsibility"

Fig. 31759en

S98EN02.DOC

9BSystem rules (public)

2-101

Modifying the value of a variable

1. Mark a system variable in the selection field. The value will be adopted in the entry field "Value" . 2. Modify "Value" (see the following table). 3. Select Modify. The modification is saved.

Displaying the details of a variable

1. Mark a system variable in the selection field. 2. Select Info. The details for the system variable are displayed.

2-102

9BSystem rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

9.2

Description of the variables in the public system rules

The following table lists all system variables. (For a more detailed description of selected system variables, see page 2-108 ff.) "No." "Comment text" Consecutive number of the more exact description of a system variable. The comment text contains information on what is hidden behind the marked variables. The "value" corresponds to the coding of a system variable. After TruTops is installed, the default values are displayed. To make your individual settings effective, the value must be modified.
No. System variable 1 2 3, 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BarcodeCommon BarcodeEncoding BarcodeFont BarcodeSinglePart BarcodeSize CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_FsMode CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_PdmMode CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_Option ClickZoomFactor CompanyLogo DbComprSplitSizeInKb DimensioningColor EnableRedrawAcceleration LabelPrinterLayoutFile LabelPrinterModeCommon LabelPrinterModePart LicenceServerPeekTimeSpanInSeconds LOG_PATH MaterialInchMetricSelection
1 2

Comment text Inter-modi barcode in set-up plan (0=out, 1=ProgNummer). Barcode coding Barcode font Modus single part specific barcode in setup plan (0=off, 1=drawing number, 2=drawing name). Font size for barcodes. 3=Disabled; 2=Only gmt's suggested, which have a dependency to geo; 1=Only gmt rec. in geo directory.; 0=Only in the geo directory; -X=gmt X Direct.-steps higher rec. search. Valid key names, see output of "ToPsPDM_CLI.exe ListAttributes". Factor for Zoom when clicking with center and right mouse click Company logo (with path) for HTML set-up plan. Split archive size in [kb] for DB backup or e-mail transmission. Dimensioning color (1=white;2=red;3=yellow;4=green;5=cyan;6=blue;7=magenta). Activating accelerated Redraw. (1=on; 0=off). Layout file for printing labels. Label printer mode for general data (0=off, 1=on) Label printer mode for parts data (0=off, 1=on) Time span in seconds in which the TruTops network license server is to be queried (0 = No cyclic query of the license server). The path where log files of the backup are placed. 0=Only display materials in the corresponding measuring system;1=Display All materials.

1 2

When working with TruTops in the file system. When working with TruTops in the PDM system.

S98EN02.DOC

9BSystem rules (public)

2-103

No. System variable 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 NcLinkLiteParameter NcLinkLogType NestAutosaveJobfile NestContourFilter_OnlyWhiteSolid NestDefaultProfile NestEnableRotationOfPartWithRemoval NestOrderMgmt_Create1 NestOrderMgmt_Create2 NestProfilePath NestStoreInternalLogfiles NrOfFilesInCadRingBuf pa_def_auftrenn_mitte pa_def_klin_a pa_def_klin_c pa_def_klin_d pa_def_klin_lu pa_def_umlaufsinn_in pa_def_umlaufsinn_out pa_flag_multipleSheetCutParts pa_flag_pruefe_aussenkont Palettierung_GrafikEinheitAusgabe Palettierung_KonfigTextAusgabe Palettierung_StapelTextInfoAusgabe PalletizingDefaultMaxTotalInTheStack PalletizingDefaultStackShiftOffsetX PalletizingDefaultStackShiftOffsetY PalletizingShowAllStackItems PalletizingStackDefaultParts

Comment text Call-up parameter for NcLink in LiteModus (without customer information). Output format, production plan overview (0=standard, 1=TXT, 2=HTML, 3=XML) 1: job file is automatically saved when nesting 0: job file is not automatically saved. Only solid white elements are given to the free geometry nestings. Name of the default nesting profile. Release rotation of Gmts with removal [Parameter]: 0=query whether job is to be created, 1=always create. [Enter]: 0=query whether job is to be created, 1=always create and enter [Parameter], 2=create and do not enter [Parameter]. Path and mask for nesting profile files. Write internal log files when nesting? 0=no, 1=yes Size of the ring buffer in the CAD part Piercing at the cut separating the sheet (0 in the kerf, 1 between two parts) Measuring from margin. Approach path to the sheet. Withdrawal path from the sheet. Distance of the HR switch-over point from the margin. Revolving direction of the inside contour. Revolving direction of the outer contour. Flag, whether each sheet cut is generated in its own part (0=No/1=Yes). Flag, whether parts with several outer contours are disabled. Output of standard frame in palletizing graphics 0=no 1=yes. Configuration text output in palletizing graphics 0=no 1=yes. Output of stack text information in palletizing graphics 0=no 1=yes 2=only number of parts. Default value of max. number of parts in the stack. Default value X offset for the offsetting of parts within a stack Default value Y offset for the offsetting of parts within a stack Display stacked goods in all angular positions in the stacked good data mask 0=no 1=yes. Presetting for stacking specification of finished parts (1=depositing mandatory;2=depositing optional;3=soft drop;4=drop;5=drop dynamically).

2-104

9BSystem rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

No. System variable PalletizingStackDefaultScrap

Comment text Presetting for stacking specification of waste parts (1=depositing mandatory;2=depositing optional;3=soft drop;4=drop;5=drop dynamically). Presetting for stacking specification of sheet skeleton (1=depositing mandatory;2=depositing optional;3=soft drop;4=drop;5=drop dynamically). Permissible stacking modes for containers (1=all, 2=soft dropping + normal dropping, 3=normal dropping). Minimum required database memory (MB). Minimum required hard disc memory on the file repository (MB). 0= no warnings;1=load; 2=save (3=both). Printing behavior for set-up plan (1=printer dialog, 3=Windows default printer). Style sheet for production package (machines without table output). Evaluation of the laser rules info for non-machined geometries. Evaluate geometry color and type. Number of last files that are to be examined for the default suggestion Number of last files that are to be examined for the default suggestion Number of last files that are to be examined for the default suggestion Number of last files that are to be examined for the default suggestion Max. number of entries in the selection field for "Customer/job no." 1 Sorting for the "Customer/job no."1 selection field. Max. number of entries in the "Drawing note"1 selection field. Sorting for the "Drawing note" 2 selection field. Max. number of entries in the selection field for "Customer/job no."1 Sorting for the "Customer/job no."1 selection field. Max. number of entries in the "Parts ID"1 selection. Sorting for the "Parts ID"1 selection field. Max. number of entries in the "Programmer"1 selection field. Sorting for the "Programmer"1 selection field. Format for total time in the set-up plan. Format for the single part time in the set-up plan. Type of waste calculation: 0-effective part surface (presetting), 1-outer contours, 2-circumscribing rectangle. Flag whether the approach flag for rectangles is to be created with angle contour (for APS). Attaches bending line menu into the CAD module.

PalletizingStackDefaultSkeleton

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 24 25 24 25 24 25 24 25 -

PalletizingStackingModeContainer PDM_minimalDatabaseSpace PDM_minimalDiscSpace PDMWarningMode PrinterDialog ProduktionsplanFormular Sc_KennzNotBearbGeo Sc_KRIT_GEO ScrollcustomerNameDefaultOf ScrollmaterialIDDefaultOf ScrolltruMachineNameDefaultOf ScrolluserDefaultOf ScrollCustomerNameMaxNumber ScrollCustomerNameSortOrder ScrollDrawingNoteMaxNumber ScrollDrawingNoteSortOrder ScrollOrderNumberMaxNumber ScrollOrderNumberSortOrder ScrollPartIdNumberMaxNumber ScrollPartIdNumberSortOrder ScrollUserMaxNumber ScrollUserSortOrder SetupPlanTimeformatGeneralData SetupPlanTimeformatSinglePart Sheet_WasteType SRW-T1Sr_APPROACH_WITH_ANGLE ST_AktiviereBiegeMenue

1 2

TruTops CAD, "File information" mask. TruTops CAD, "File information" mask.

S98EN02.DOC

9BSystem rules (public)

2-105

No. System variable 26 27 28 29 30 ST_CadCoordinateColor ST_DwgfPathModal ST_DwgPath ST_DxfPath ST_DxfPathModal ST_FsLoaderMask ST_GeoGmtPath ST_GeoGmtPathModal ST_GraPath ST_GraPathModal ST_IgsPath ST_IgsPathModal ST_IgsSaveExt ST_IgsSelect ST_LAS_LttRingBufAnz ST_LAS_NcEinrPlanMaxAnzLines ST_LAS_NcEinrPlanUnterProgBin ST_LAS_NcProgNrLikeFileName ST_LAS_NcProgNrFilterByRegExpression ST_LAS_NcZeitausgabe ST_LAS_NoSprintlasWarning ST_MiPath ST_MiPathModal ST_MiSaveExt ST_MiSelect ST_NoHilfsGeoOnInit ST_NumInputWithMouse ST_ReplaceArcWithLineError

Comment text Determines the color of the coordinate system in the drawing module (red, green, blue, yellow, cyan, magenta, white). The file type will memorize its own 'LastUsedDirectory'. If set, this path is always fixed If set, this path is always fixed. The file type will memorize its own 'LastUsedDirectory'. File selector with preceding command line. If set, this path is always fixed. The file type will memorize its own 'LastUsedDirectory'. If set, this path is always fixed. The file type will memorize its own 'LastUsedDirectory'. If set, this path is always fixed. The file type will memorize its own 'LastUsedDirectory'. Extension when file is saved. Reg. expr. for the file display. Number of LTT ring buffer entries in techno module of ToPs100/400. Maximum number of lines in the text set-up plan. Output subroutine information in the old set-up plan (*.EIN) : yes=4, no=0. Preallocate alphanumeric program names with the names of the NC file (c_no = no, c_yes = yes). Generate numeric program names from the names of the NC file. NC time output (0-none, 1-times after each block, 2-timer, 3-all). No warning message for machines without SprintLine. If set, this path is always fixed. The file type will memorize its own 'LastUsedDirectory'. Extension when file is saved. Reg. expr. for the file display. Prevents the generation of auxiliary lines for 0/0 when loading the files in the drawing component. Activates number input using mouse. (D=0.001) Replace arcs with a single line during loading of a drawing if the maximum chord error is smaller than the given tolerance value. (D=0.001) Indicates the maximum admissible error for the replacement of an arc with a large radius (see ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonRadius). If this value is reduced, more lines are generated. (D=4.0) This value indicates the minimum length of a line when replacing an arc that is too large with continuous lines. (see ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonRadius). During loading of a drawing replaces arcs with line features if the radius of the arc is larger than the stated radius. (D=10000) The fewest possible lines will be generated on a permanent basis. If the replacement fails, then the arc will remain in effect.

ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonDistance

ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonMinLength

ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonRadius

2-106

9BSystem rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

No. System variable 31 32 33 34 35 36 ST_SchachtelAuftragTafelWalzRichtung ST_SelRingBufAnz ST_TAF_MatSelectMaschine ST_TtfPath ST_TtfPathModal ST_VlgSelRingBufAnz ST_WindowPanFaktor T1Sr_APPROACHING_LINE_MIDDLE T1Sr_IGNORE_FORM_PREFERRED TcPartBitmapCreateAlways TcPartBitmapGraphicFormat TcPartBitmapHeight TcPartBitmapMonochrome TcPartBitmapWidth TcSheetCreateAlways TcSheetBitmapGraphicFormat TcSheetBitmapHeight TcSheetBitmapMonochrome TcSheetBitmapWidth TeileAutoID TeileAutoIDAusGeoFilename TextFarbeTeileNummer TextPosition_TafelInfo_Y TimeOutputPlusAxis TOPS_PWD ToPsEasyAutoStart TxSrTafC_WRITE_CRG_EXT

Comment text Presetting for sheet grain (1-X, 2-Y, 3-arbitrary). Ring buffer size. Material selection in sheet part with machine filter. If set, this path is always fixed. The file type will memorize its own 'LastUsedDirectory'. Ring buffer size for templates. Factor and direction of the panning arrows for graphics window. Flag whether linear part of the approach flag is lying central to the line element. Flag whether preferred element during Approach (LINE/ARC) ignored is to be ignored for APS. If 1, BMP are always created. (Preparation for the production package) Graphic format for set-up plan. BMP=fast+large; JPG=slow and small. (BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG, SVG) Size of the single part graphics in the Html set-up plan in Y direction. Single part graphics (HTML set-up plan). Black/White (single color) = 1, colored = 0. Size of the single part graphics in the Html set-up plan in X direction. If 1, BMP are always created. (Preparation for the production plan) Graphic format for set-up plan. BMP=fast+large; JPG=slow and small. (BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG, SVG) Size (pixel) setup plan graphics (html) in Y direction. Setup plan graphics. Black/White (single color) = 1, colored = 0. Size (pixel) set-up plan graphics (html) in X direction. Part ID number that is automatically allocated to parts without drawing number. = 1: automatic drawing number is created from the geo file name and not from the variable TeileAutoID. Text color for sheet information 1- white. Text position for sheet information. 1: Time for plus machine is output in the set-up plan 0: time for plus machine is not output Directory for TruToPs. Overwrite ini-file entry TOPS_PWD. Simple programming should be started for entry of applications. If not empty, a Cell result file is created with this extension. Table 6

Overview of the public system variables

S98EN02.DOC

9BSystem rules (public)

2-107

Description of the system variables No. 1 BarcodeCommon Value = 0 TruTops does not issue a barcode for the program names in the set-up plan 1 (default setting). Value = 1 TruTops issues the program name as a barcode in the set-up plan1. BarcodeSinglePart Value = 0 TruTops does not issue barcodes for the single parts in the setup plan1 (default setting). Value = 1 TruTops outputs the drawing numbers of each single part as a barcode in the setup plan1. Value = 2 TruTops outputs the drawing numbers of each single part as a barcode in the setup1. CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_FsMode 2 CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_PdmMode

No. 2

No. 3, 4

When loading non machined part (*.GEO), TruTops checks whether the non machined parts have already been machined. For this, TruTops uses the following (non changeable) test criteria: ID No. File type. File name. Notes Only those files are offered that completely meet the test criteria. Value = 0 Value = 1 Value = 2 TruTops searches for '*.GMT' files that are in the same directory as .GEO (without subdirectories). TruTops searches for '*.GMT' files that are in the same directory as '.GEO', including all subdirectories. TruTops suggests '*.GMT' that have a dependency to '.GEO'. (Not relevant in the file system, because no dependencies are present there. In the PDM system, this value is the quickest way to leading to a result.) Deactivated, i.e. TruTops does not search for files.

Value = 3

Value = -X Negative values specify from how many higher directories matching '*.GMT' files are to be searched for (including all subdirectories). The selection of detected files can also be influenced by the variable "CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_Option" (refer to next no.).

1 2 3

'*.html', '*.pdf' When working with TruTops in the file system. When working with TruTops in the PDM system.

2-108

9BSystem rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

No. 5

CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_Option If fewer matching files are to be displayed, the conditions can be removed. To be able to also display '.GMT' files, which have arisen from '.GEO' files for another machine: remove value machineName=ST_MaschinenName; CompanyLogo If your company logo is to be integrated into the set-up plans, the path and the file name of the company logo are defined using this variable (also see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program").

No. 6

No. 7

DimensioningColor You can change the color of the dimensioning using the value of the "DimensioningColor" variable (see "TruTops CAD software manual"). Value = 1 Value = 2 Value = 3 Value = 4 Value = 5 Value = 6 Value = 7 White Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta

No. 8, 9

LabelPrinterModeCommon LabelPrinterModePart the The NC variable program,

Variables for label printing. "LabelPrinterModeCommon" relates to "LabelPrinterModePart" relates to the part. Value = 1 Value = 0

Data is collected for the relevant block (NC program or part). Data is not collected (NC program or part). for the relevant block

S98EN02.DOC

9BSystem rules (public)

2-109

Example: To generate a label per part, but none for the NC program: Set LabelPrinterModeCommon to 0. Set LabelPrinterModePart to 1. MaterialInchMetricSelection This variable controls the material selection during the machining of the parts: "All materials" or materials with the dimension metric or inch. Value = 0 Display materials only in the corresponding measurement system. Value = 1 Show all materials. No. 11 NcLinkLogType The file format of the production package is determined through the values of the "NcLinkLogType" variables. Value = 0 If Internet Explorer Version 5.0 is installed, the production package is output in the file format *.xml, otherwise in file format *.txt. Value = 1 The production package is output in the file format *.txt. Value = 2 The production package is output in the file format *.html. MSXML must also be installed. The value corresponds to the default setting. Value = 3 The production package is output in the file format *.xml. The browser used must support XML (e.g. Internet Explorer >= 5.0). pa_def_umlaufsinn_in Value = 1 Value = -1 TruTops machines inner contours in a counterclockwise direction (default setting). TruTops machines inner contours in a clockwise direction.

No. 10

No. 12

No. 13

pa_def_umlaufsinn_out Value = -1 Value = 1 TruTops machines outer contours in a clockwise direction (default setting). TruTops machines outer contours in an counterclockwise direction.

2-110

9BSystem rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

No. 14

pa_flag_multipleSheetCutParts Value = 1 Value = 0 TruTops defines each sheet parting cut as a separate part. They can be rearranged in any way. TruTops creates all sheet parting cuts as one part and processes them one after the other.

No. 15

pa_flag_pruefe_aussenkont Value = 1 Value = 0 TruTops does not machine parts without outer contours (default setting). TruTops machines parts without outer contours.

No. 16

PalletizingDefaultMaxTotalInTheStack Define max. possible number of parts in the stack.

No. 17

PalletizingShowAllStackItems Value = 0 Value = 1 Display stacked goods only once for each type of part. Show stacked goods in all angular positions in the stacked goods data mask

No. 18

PDMWarningMode Specification when PDM warnings are to be output. Value = 0 No warnings if files which are being used are no longer current, or if files which are overwritten have many dependencies. Warns if files touching upon files which have meanwhile been changed should be loaded (e.g., if a sheet ('*.TAF') which meanwhile refers to a changed drawing ('*.GEO') is loaded). Warns when saving whether other files are affected by this (e.g., if a drawing ('*.GEO') is to be saved on which many sheets ('*.TAF'), mini nests ('*.MTL') etc. touch. Where necessary, a new name for the '*.GEO' is better than overwriting the old version). Both

Value = 1

Value = 2

Value = 3 No. 19

PrinterDialog Value = 1 Value = 3 TruTops displays the printer dialog. TruTops uses the Windows default printer without query.

S98EN02.DOC

9BSystem rules (public)

2-111

No. 20, 21, 22, 23

ScrollcustomerNameDefaultOf ScrollmaterialIDDefaultOf ScrolltruMachineNameDefaultOf ScrolluserDefaultOf

The last n files are searched by the customer name, material, machine or the user. n corresponds to the number of files that are to be searched. The entry that is found most often is suggested as the default entry. No. 24 ScrollXXXNumber Max. number of entries in the selection field for the attribute XXX. Value = 0 Show all entries (can take time!) No. 25 ScrollXXXOrder Sorting for the selection field XXX. The entries last used are always sorted. (For number of entries last used, see variable ScrollXXXNumber). The following three sortings can be set: Value = AZ Value = ZA Alphabetically sorted Alphabetically sorted backwards. (Useful for numbers which are continued. The newest (highest) number is thus always at the top.) The values last used stand at the top of the list.

Value = TIME No. 26

ST_LAS_NcProgNrLikeFileName Value = c_no "Program name" and "Name of NC file" are independent of one another.

Value = c_yes "Program name" and "Name of the NC file" are aligned to each other. No. 27 ST_LAS_NcProgNrFilterByRegExpression For machines with Bosch control system, a program name from the last used or new program number can be generated for the NC program. Value = c_no Last used program number is entered as "Program name".

Value = c_yes A new program number is allocated as "Program name" for every NC program.

2-112

9BSystem rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

No. 28

ST_LAS_NcZeitausgabe Value = 0 Value = 1 Value = 2 Value = 3 Time output is switched off Time output is switched on after every NC block. Timer All

No. 29

ST_MiSelect Value = '*.mi' The TruTops file browser only displays files in the '*.mi' format. Value= * The TruTops file browser displays the files in all formats (default setting).

No. 30

ST_NumInputWithMouse Value = 1 Value = 0 The calculator is switched on. The calculator is switched off

No. 31

ST_SchachtelAuftragTafelWalzRichtung Value = 1 Value = 2 Value = 3 Sheet grain in the "Nesting parameters", "Sheet data" tab is preset to X direction. Sheet grain in the "Nesting parameters", "Sheet data" tab is preset to Y direction. The sheet grain is arbitrary.

No. 32

TcSheetBitmapHeight Height in pixels of the sheet graphic bit map in the set-up plan in the printout of the HTML set-up plan. TcSheetBitmapMonochrome Should the bit map in the HTML set-up plan be issued in black/white or in color? Value = 1 Value = 0 The graphic is displayed in black and white. The graphic is displayed in color.

No. 33

No. 34

TcSheetBitmapWidth Width in pixels of the sheet graphic bit map in the set-up plan in the printout of the HTML set-up plan.

S98EN02.DOC

9BSystem rules (public)

2-113

No. 35

TeileAutoID Parts ID numbers are attached automatically using this variable to parts that lack a drawing number.

No. 36

TeileAutoIDAusGeoFilename Value = 0 Automatic creation of the part ID number (drawing number) from the system rules variables "TeileAutoID" + consecutive number. Value = 1 Creation of the automatic part number from the '*.geo' file.

2-114

9BSystem rules (public)

S98EN02.DOC

10.

NC output

You can insert NC texts that you have written yourself into the processing of a sheet. TruTops will then insert this NC text into the NC program in the course of its generation. Enter an NC text either directly during the machining of the parts or call up an NC cycle that you have created in the Data Management and stored in he database. NC cycles you create yourself are called "customer cycles".

10.1 Free cycles Creating free cycles

Notes TruTops always creates a free cycle for the machine currently active. The Data Management is usually opened for the currently active machine. The machine cannot be changed within the open Data Management. 1. Select NC output >Customer cycles. The "Customer cycles" mask is displayed:

Fig. 22681en

S98EN02.DOC

10BNC output

2-115

Allocating name to the free cycle

2. Select Create. The "Create cycle" mask is displayed. 3. Enter the name of the free cycle to be created under "Cycle name". Note The name is not permitted to contain any special characters, umlauts or accents. These characters are not displayed in the drawings during machining of the parts. 4. Select Create. 5. Confirm the message that the target cycle has been created by with OK. 6. Select Back. The "Customer cycles" mask is displayed again.

Entering the NC text of the free cycle

7. Mark the name of the new free cycle in the "Customer cycles" mask. 8. Enter the NC text of the free cycle in the input field under "Cycle". TruTops interprets all entries when generating the NC program. For example, the so-called "$ variables" (= place holders) are automatically transformed into values by TruTops. The syntax of the NC text is not checked. 9. Enter "Area of application" for the new free cycle. 10. Under "Total cycle time", enter how long the machining of the free cycle should take. Note "Properties" are not relevant for TruTops Laser. 11. Select Modify. The new free cycle is provided for selection during the machining of the parts.

2-116

10BNC output

S98EN02.DOC

Printing free cycles

Note Free cycles cannot be printed individually, but only all at once. 1. Select NC output >Customer cycles. The "Customer cycles" mask is displayed. 2. Select Output. The contents of all free cycles is displayed in an editor (Editor here: Notepad). 3. Select Print. The free cycles are printed. Closing Editor 4. Select OK.

Modifying free cycles

1. Select NC output >Customer cycles. The "Customer cycles" mask is displayed. 2. Mark the name of the free cycle to be modified. Enter the text of the free cycle in the input field under "Cycle". 3. Modify text of the free cycle. 4. Select Modify. The modifications of the free cycle are saved.

Copying free cycles

Application Creating a similar free cycle. Using the same free cycle on other machines.

1. Select NC output >Customer cycles. The "Customer cycles" mask is displayed.

S98EN02.DOC

10BNC output

2-117

2. Mark the free cycle to be copied. 3. Select Copy. The "Copy cycle" mask is displayed. The "source" and the "target" of the free cycle to be copied is displayed in it. "Source" = the machine to which the free cycle is currently allocated and the name of the free cycle which you want to allocate to the other machine. "Target" = the machine to which the copied free cycle is to be allocated.

Fig. 22682en

Selecting the target machine

4. Open "Machine" with >. The "Select machine" mask is displayed. 5. Mark machine. 6. Select Continue. 7. Mark the name in "Selection of cycle". The name is entered under "Cycle name" and can be modified there. Note Under "Selection of cycle", all the available names of the free cycles are displayed independent of the source machine. They are the names of all free cycles, without their contents.

2-118

10BNC output

S98EN02.DOC

8. Modify the name of the free cycle as required. 9. Select Copy. The copied free cycle is allocated to the target machine.

Removing created free cycles from the selection

A free cycle that you have created should be deleted again so that it is no longer available for the active machine (for deleting the free cycles set in the NC text, see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program"). 1. Select NC output >Customer cycles. The "Customer cycles" mask is displayed. 2. Mark the free cycle to be deleted. 3. Select Delete. The "Delete cycle" mask is displayed. This shows the machine for which the free cycle was created and the name of the free cycle. 4. Select Delete. The free cycle is deleted.

Formulas for time computation

You can now access the formulas for time calculation with a daily password. The daily password is available from TRUMPF Software Support. 1. Open the Data Management for the desired machine. 2. Select NC output >Formulas. 3. Enter the password and select Continue.

S98EN02.DOC

10BNC output

2-119

11.

NC post-processing program, external programs

11.1 Entering NC post-processing programs/external programs

NC post-processing programs or external programs can be entered and used in TruTops. The possible settings are explained on the basis of the following example for an NC post-processing program. Example Edit '.LST' after the generation of every NC program with Word.

1. Select User >Programs. The "External Program Settings" mask is displayed.

"External Program Settings" mask

Fig. 43265en

2. Enter "User" trumpf. 3. Enter "Designation" of the NC post-processing program (arbitrary name which has not yet been allocated). 4. Activate "Modal" if the NC post-processing program/external program (here: Microsoft Word) should stay open or the modified file should be imported back into the PDM Data Management. If you do not want to or have to wait for the result of the external program (e.g. when printing), then "Modal" No can be selected.

2-120

11BNC post-processing program, external programs

S98EN02.DOC

Note TruTops can no longer be operated as soon as an external program is opened from TruTops modal or a file from TruTops is opened in an external program. The external program must firstly be closed. 5. Activate "Window" if the NC post-processing program/external program (here: Microsoft Word) is to be opened in its own window (required in the example, because editing has still to take place. It would not be necessary for printing). 6. Where necessary, activate "Show log" ("Modal" must also be activated). If the NC post-processing program/external program creates a protocol file ("Logfile", file format '.log'), then this can be displayed in TruTops by "Show log". 7. If "Show log" is activated: enter the following under "Parameters": "-l " (in words: minus L, blank), followed by absolute path onto the log file. Example: -l C:\TRUMPF.NET\workfiles\user1\logfile.log If the 'C:\TRUMPF.NET\workfiles\user1\logfile.log' log file is created by the external program (must be programmed in such a way), TruTops will display the log file automatically after the external program has been ended. TruTops with PDM, version 2 8. If the external program operates with UNC paths (Windows standard): do not activate "Export" and "Re-import" . (Export and re-import are not required in this case). 9. If the external program does not operate with UNC paths: activate the desired function under "PDM settings", which activates or prevents the Export/Reimport of data and auxiliary data from or in PDM. Activate "Export". Example: '\\PC4711\TRUMPF.PDM2\TRUMPF.NET/WORKFILES/U SER1/SAMPLE.LST'). The files in PDM, which are to be accessed, are, for this purpose, exported into a temporary directory in the file system. The variables $(D) and $(P) (see Fig. 43230, page 122) are automatically adjusted and contain the temporary directory export '\TRUMPF.NET\TEMP\ToPsProcess####\PDM_export' 1.

"Re-import": (Only possible if "Modal" and "Export" are activated.) Activate if the exported files are to be modified and then be available again in PDM. The modified files are (without any further query) reimported in PDM as soon as the NC postprocessing program/external program has ended.

#### show place holders for the TruTops process ID.

S98EN02.DOC

11BNC post-processing program, external programs

2-121

"Export help files": (Only possible if "Export" is activated.) Activate if the NC post-processing program/external program requires the files which have been used for creating the NC program ('*.GEO', '*.MTL', '*.GMT' ).

9. To tell Microsoft Word the position of LST: enter the following variables under "Parameters": '$(U) '. If, for example, the NC program '/TRUMPF.NET/WORKFILES /USER1/SAMPLE.LST' is created on the PC4711 computer and TruTops with file system, the contents of the variables read '\\PC4711\TRUMPF.PDM2\TRUMPF.NET\WORKFILES\USER 1 \SAMPLE.LST. (For more on this, see the following graphics.) Contents of the variables in the file system

C:\TRUMPF.NET\WORKFILES\USER1\SAMPLE.LST $(D) $(P)

$(D) Directory = absolute directory $(N) Name = file name (without file extension) $(E) Extension = file extension $(P) Path = complete path to file Fig. 42508

$(N)

$(E)

Contents of the variables in PDM operation

/TRUMPF.NET/WORKFILES/USER1/SAMPLE.LST $(D) $(P)

$(D) Directory = absolute directory $(N) Name = file name (without file extension) $(E) Extension = file extension $(P) Path = complete path to file $(U) UNC Path of file (not included in the graphics) Fig. 43230

$(N)

$(E)

$(U) reads: \\PC4711\TRUMPF.PDM2\TRUMPF.NET/WORKFILES/USER 1/SAMPLE.LST' 10. Enter path and program name (here: path and program name of Microsoft Word) under "Program". Example: 'C:\Programme\Microsoft Office\OFFICE11\Winword.exe'

2-122

11BNC post-processing program, external programs

S98EN02.DOC

11. Enter the working directory (directory where the program is to be executed) (normally '$D'). 12. Select Create. The NC post-processing program or external program is added in the selection field. Executing external programs Activate NC post-processing program see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program". Note The file name may not be modified exported files can be reimported from PDM.

11.2 Creating collection call up for several NC post-processing programs

Several single NC post-processing programs can be called up one after the other in a defined sequence with the help of the NC postprocessing program 'PostprocessorCollection.bat'. You can create any amount of 'PostprocessorCollection.bat' according to how many different collection call ups you require. 1. Start Windows Explorer. 2. Switch to the directory '\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\Macros'. Copying template 3. Copy and rename 'PostprocessorCollectionTemplate.bat' in the required amount (e.g. 'PostprocessorCollection1.bat', 'PostprocessorCollection2.bat' ). Note The copies must also be in the '\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\Macros' directory. 4. Open copy (e.g. 'PostprocessorCollection1.bat') using an Editor. 5. Enter NC post-processing programs to be called up in the desired sequence (see highlighted sections in the following example). The entered NC post-processing programs can be deactivated when required by means of Comments (i.e. ; set at the beginning of the line):

Changing template

S98EN02.DOC

11BNC post-processing program, external programs

2-123

Example for NC post-processing programs which are to be consecutively called up: First NC post-processing program: execute 'customer.pl' Then open NC program using an editor (LST_Editor) Finally, print NC program using the standard printer (STD_PRINTER). Corresponding entries in the .bat rem ---------------------------------------------------rem Here comes the list of postprocessors rem ---------------------------------------------------rem -------------------------------------------rem own PERL-application: customer.pl rem -------------------------------------------%A_TC_PERL_PATH%\bin\perl %A_TC_TOOL_PATH%\cust omer.pl %A_LST_FILENAME_STRING% rem -----------------rem LST_EDITOR rem -----------------notepad %A_LST_FILENAME% rem -----------------rem STD_PRINTER rem -----------------notepad/p %A_LST_FILENAME% 6. Save changes.

Entering collection call up as NC post-processing program

1. Open Data Management for the machine for which the NC post-processing program is to be used. 2. Select User >Programs. 3. Enter "User" trumpf. 4. Enter "Designation" (example!). 6. Select "Modal" YES. 7. Select "Window" YES. 8. Select "Show log" NO. 9. Under "Parameters" enter "$(P)" $(P) $(TOPS_PERL_PATH)$(TOPS_APP_UTILS_ PATH). These transfer parameters are adapted to the 'PostprocessorCollectionTemplate.bat' template and mean the following in the above-mentioned example:

PostprocessorCollection1

5. Select WINDOWS operating system.

"$(P)": name of the generated NC program in the string format.

2-124

11BNC post-processing program, external programs

S98EN02.DOC

$(P): name of the generated NC program. $(TOPS_PERL_PATH): path to PERL. $(TOPS_APP_UTILS_PATH): path to the product-specific tools. Note The list must, where necessary, be enlarged or shortened according to the entered post-processing program.

10. Under "Program": enter $(TOPS_MACROS_PATH)\PostprocessorCollection1.b at. 11. Select Create. The NC post-processing program is added in the selection list. Activate NC post-processing program? (See chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program".)

11.3 Modifying NC post-processing programs

1. Select User >Programs. The "External Program Settings" mask is displayed. 2. Mark the NC post-processing program that is to be modified. 3. Modify parameters. (For description, see section 11.1, page 120). 4. Select Modify.

11.4 Deleting post-processing programs

Note NC post-processing programs that are supplied with TruTops should not be deleted. 1. Select User >Programs. The "External Program Settings" mask is displayed. 2. Mark the post-processing program that you have created and is to be deleted. The data of the post-processing program is entered in the mask head. 3. Select Delete. The post-processing program is added in the selection field.

S98EN02.DOC

11BNC post-processing program, external programs

2-125

12.

User-defined programs

Note User-defined programs are available from TRUMPF Software Support on request. 1. Select User >TruTops functions. The "User-defined TruTops functions" mask is displayed. Entering user-defined programs 2. Enter "Command name" (= arbitrary name for the program) and "Script file" (= path and file name of the program which you received from TRUMPF). Note The standard path for the user-defined programs is '\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\UserFunctions'. Since TruTops Laser still doesn't contain any user-defined programs, this path is not yet available. 3. Select the desired applications under "Modules with visible command". 4. Select Create. 5. If necessary, repeat steps 2 to 4. Modifying user-defined programs 6. Mark the desired program in the selection field. 7. Modify "Command name" and/or "Script file" and/or "Modules with visible command" . 8. Select Modify. 9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 if required.

Executing user-defined programs

Prerequisite You have entered the user-defined programs in the Data Management. 1. Select File >Execute in the desired application. 2. Select user-defined program. TruTops executes the program.

2-126

12BUser-defined programs

S98EN02.DOC

Chapter 3

Nesting parts
1. 1.1 1.2 2. 2.1 "Nest" application.......................................................... 3-4 Activating parts monitoring .............................................. 3-5 Activating catching........................................................... 3-6 Nesting jobs ................................................................... 3-6 Compiling a new nesting job............................................ 3-8 Creating nesting job.................................................. 3-10 Entering parts in a nesting job .................................. 3-11 Deleting parts in the nesting job ............................... 3-14 Modifying parts in the nesting job ............................. 3-14 Defining nesting parameters.......................................... 3-15 Defining sheet data................................................... 3-15 Defining the options of a nesting job ........................ 3-17 Activating common cuts (TwinLine).......................... 3-23 Machine-oriented nesting (free geometry nesting processor) .................................................... 3-24 Modifying sheet name .............................................. 3-25 Starting automatic nesting process ............................... 3-26 Starting automatic nesting process .......................... 3-26 Re-nesting parts or sheets automatically ...................... 3-27

2.2

2.3 2.4

S354EN

2007-04-20

Nesting parts

3-1

2.5

2.6

Re-nesting parts or sheets automatically ................. 3-27 Modifying the sheet view .......................................... 3-27 Modifying nesting jobs manually.................................... 3-28 Modifying the number of parts .................................. 3-28 Renesting new parts manually ................................. 3-28 Adding or removing copy of a sheet......................... 3-29 Adding a new (empty) sheet to the nesting job ........ 3-30 Importing and exporting nesting jobs............................. 3-31 Exporting nesting jobs .............................................. 3-31 Importing nesting jobs .............................................. 3-32 Structuring of a job file ('*.DAT') in detail .................. 3-33 Creating sheets and laying out with parts ................ 3-37 Creating new sheet........................................................ 3-37 Renesting parts.............................................................. 3-40 Creating a nesting job from a single sheet .................... 3-41 Laying out single sheets automatically .......................... 3-42 Defining parameters for automatic sheet layout....... 3-42 Laying out parts automatically .................................. 3-42 Laying out sheet sectionally (multi-copy machining) ................................................................ 3-43 Laying out sheet with the number of parts (multi-copy machining) ............................................. 3-44 Modifying sheet layout................................................ 3-46 Defining parameters for manual sheet layout................ 3-46 Moving and rotating parts .............................................. 3-46 Modifying reference point .............................................. 3-48 Modifying the parts quantity........................................... 3-49 Modifying the distance of parts ...................................... 3-50 Copying or cutting parts from one sheet to another ...... 3-50 Placing parts at exact distance for common cuts (TwinLine) ...................................................................... 3-52 Deleting parts................................................................. 3-53 Deleting sheet................................................................ 3-54 Modifying sheet format .................................................. 3-54 Defining remainder sheets.......................................... 3-55 Defining remainder sheets with arbitrary sheet geometry ........................................................................ 3-55 Managing remainder sheets .......................................... 3-56 Taking off remainder sheets .......................................... 3-57 Mini nests ..................................................................... 3-58 Creating mini nests ........................................................ 3-58 Modifying mini nests ...................................................... 3-60

3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 6. 6.1 6.2

3-2

0BNesting parts

2007-04-20

S354EN

6.3

Moving mini nests ..................................................... 3-60 Rotating mini nests ................................................... 3-63 Discarding changes to mini nests automatically....... 3-64 Distancing single parts of mini nests for common separating cuts (TwinLine)............................................. 3-65 ... by moving ............................................................. 3-65 ... by rotating ............................................................. 3-65 Displaying sheet .......................................................... 3-67 Displaying sheet with the machine environment ........... 3-67 Displaying sheet with automation components ............. 3-67 Information about sheet layout and nesting jobs................................................................................ 3-69 Displaying and hiding geometries of single parts .......... 3-69 Displaying the waste of a sheet or the total sheet waste.............................................................................. 3-70 Displaying result log....................................................... 3-71 Nesting parts in tiles (optional) .................................. 3-72 Defining parameters ...................................................... 3-72

7. 7.1 7.2 8. 8.1 8.2 8.3 9. 9.1

S354EN

2007-04-20

Nesting parts

3-3

1.

"Nest" application

Nesting jobs can be created and managed in the "Nest" application. The nesting processor can apply different strategies to calculate the sheet layout with identical or assorted single parts. There are two different nesting processors. v Both processors function according to the principle of "free geometry" (optional) or "enlarged rectangle.

1 2

Minimum number of pieces Actual number of pieces

3 4

Maximum number of pieces Part drawing

5 6

File name Part dimensions Fig. 50650en

Nest application

3-4

1B"Nest" application

2007-04-20

S354EN

Changing the parts display - all parts are displayed either in the maximum size or relative to one another

Modifying the parts sorting - as per the name or size

Hanging the part on the mouse

In case of single sheet view: mark all identical parts on the sheet

Selecting a new part

Opening the mask with part parameters Fig. 51009

Functions in nest

1.1

Activating parts monitoring

When positioning parts manually, the allowed position on the sheet is determined. At the same time, the parts to be nested are attached to the mouse and colored green. When moving parts over one another, when positioning them outside the sheet or in case of an excessively less sheet distance, Nest displays the parts at the mouse in red. These parts can not be positioned. 1. Activate >Tools >Consider parts. 2. Activate >Tools >Consider sheet margin. The allowed position is determined on the sheet and the cut parts are displayed in green . For critical positions, such as when there is too little space between the parts or when parts are positioned outside the sheet, the copied parts are displayed in red. These parts cannot be positioned.

S354EN

2007-04-20

1B"Nest" application

3-5

1.2

Activating catching

Activate >Tools >Catching. When picking using the mouse pointer, the pick point on a nearby point is corrected (provided one exists).

2.
Nesting processors

Nesting jobs

Two nesting processors are integrated into the "Nest" application, which nest the part drawings (single part drawings or mini nests) on the sheet according to various criteria: The rectangle nesting processor uses the circumscribing rectangle of the parts as part limits. The free geometry nesting processor takes into account the actual geometry of the single part or mini nest drawing (optional). The parts to be nested and the quantities in which they are to be nested are defined in the nesting job. In order to achieve optimum sheet usage, Nest takes into account all parts and their possible combinations when nesting (which are always between a minimal and a maximum number of pieces). The nesting job can be created with Nest or can be read in by a higher-level system (ASCII file).

Nesting job

Example 1: Nesting identical parts

Fig. 19814

3-6

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

Example 2: Nesting different parts

Fig. 19813

Defining nesting options

Various nesting options can be selected (e.g. release internal surfaces for layout, degree of optimization of the nesting process, positioning direction of the parts... ). The optimal strategy can be selected depending on the geometry of the different parts to be nested. Either the part geometry or the circumscribing rectangle is the basis for the nesting. The sheets with the nesting result are graphically displayed on the screen. The result log (file) contains the following information about the total number of parts that were nested, number of sheets that were generated, etc. Messages regarding why nesting single parts was not possible are also displayed if required. If remainder sheets are left over after machining, these remainder sheets can be additionally used when nesting. Sample parts can be nested using the free geometry nesting processor (optional). The quality of the cut parts can be checked with the sample part at the beginning of the production. Sample parts can only be manufactured with the selected parts of a nesting job. When parts are entered in a nesting job, they can be allocated to a customer. When the same part has to be produced for several customers within a nesting job, it can be allocated to several customers. The generated sheets can be arbitrarily modified: Deleting individual parts on the sheet. Adding parts to the sheet. Changing the position of single parts. ...

Result log

Nesting remainder sheets Creating sample parts

Allocating nesting job to customer

Influencing sheet layout manually

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-7

2.1
Defining angle for possible rotation

Compiling a new nesting job

When nesting with the free geometry nesting processor, an incremental angle by which the parts may be rotated when nesting, can be allocated to parts for which any rotation is possible. In case of an incremental angle of 45, for example, Nest examines the absolute angles 0, 45, 90, 135, ..., 315. The more precisely the incremental angle is selected, the greater the computational effort required by Nest. Tip Selecting the angle of rotation increment depending on the geometry of the relevant part: rotation makes no noticeable difference in the nesting result for parts that are almost circular. For parts that are mainly square or rectangular, an angle of rotation increment of 90 often suffices.

If a part is suitable for common cuts (TwinLine)

When nesting with the rectangle nesting processor or with the free geometry nesting processor, Nest can place a part that is suitable for common cut on the sheet either in groups (see "Fig. 15454", pg. 3-8) or in a specific number in X and Y direction(see "Fig. 15455", pg. 3-9).

Sheet layout with several groups of each TwinLine part

Fig. 15454

3-8

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

Sheet layout with one group per TwinLine part

Fig. 15455

Nesting part in grid

On selecting "Lay in grid", Nest divides the sheets into grids according to the size and form of the part and lays the parts regularly in them. In case of different parts, various grid divisions can appear within a sheet. "Lay in grid" is suitable for L-shaped, rectangular and C-/V- shaped parts. Parts with a circular outer contour are unsuitable. With "Lay in grid", material utilization can be improved and more homogenous nesting images can be generated.

Part not laid in grid

Fig. 43221

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-9

Parts displaced in grid

Fig. 43220

Allocating priority

When nesting using the free geometry nesting processor, a place value can be allocated to each single part. The lower the number, the higher the priority and thus the likelihood that Nest will nest that part first. Examples: A part with priority two is preferred over a part with priority three during sheet layout. Parts with the same priority are sorted according to their area. (One starts with the part with the largest area.)

Creating nesting job

1. Select >File >New >Job.... The "Job - File names" mask is displayed. Note The file name can contain up to 35 characters. Digits, letters or a combination of the two are permitted. 2. Enter the name of the new nesting job under "Job". 3. Open "Job path" with . The TruTops file browser is displayed.

3-10

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

4. Select the directory. 5. If the individual sheet should have a name different from that of the job or if the job path is not the same as the sheet path: check "Sheet name" and enter the name of the new sheet. 6. Open "Sheet path" with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. 7. Select the directory. 8. Select OK. The "(Job name) - Parts" mask is displayed.

Entering parts in a nesting job

Condition The "(Job name) - Parts" mask is displayed (see section "Creating nesting job").

Note A sheet that is laid out only contains references to the single parts which are nested on it. When a single part is modified after a sheet has been laid out with it, the single part is modified automatically on the sheet. Mini nests cannot be entered directly into a nesting job. The relevant part can be entered and "Mini nest" can be checked in the part properties for this.

Selecting the part

1. To enter a new part in the nesting job: select Add. or Right click in the selection field. Select Add. The TruTops file browser is displayed. 2. Mark the part that should be adopted in the nesting job. or To adopt several parts in the job: press <Ctrl > or <Shift > and left click. 3. Select OK. The mask with the part parameters is displayed.

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-11

Fig. 46431en

Defining the number of the parts

4. Enter the desired number of pieces under "Min". or Check "Max". Enter the minimum and maximum number of pieces. 5. To read in information from the 'File': check "Entries from file". Nest reads in the following drawing data of the '*.GEO' or. '*.GMT' file into the nesting job: "Mini nest": If there is a mini nest for the part, Nest nests the mini nest. If there is no mini nest, Nest forms a mini nest internally. In case of '*.GMT'-files, no mini nests can be entered in the job. Any rotation possible: If this is active, Nest rotates the single part when nesting with the free geometry nesting processor by the angle increment selected under "Angle". In the rectangle nesting processor, Nest rotates the part by 90. The direction of rolling of the sheet remains unconsidered. Direction of rolling: Nest places the part on the sheet according to the selected direction of rolling. The part is placed on a remainder sheet only when it has the same direction of rolling. If only the standard sheets have been defined with a direction of rolling, Nest places this part on standard sheets.

Reading in information from 'File'

3-12

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

Defining the angle for rotation Nesting mini nests

6. If Any rotation possible is selected: enter the angle. Note In case of '*.GMT' files, no mini nests can be entered in the job. 7. Check "Mini nest": If there is a mini nest for the part, Nest nests the mini nest. If there is no mini nest, Nest forms a mini nest internally. 8. To place the part for using common cuts on the sheet: check "Suitable for TwinLine". 9. Enter the number of parts of a group in X and Y direction under "Block X, Y". 10. If a part is to be nested in a grid-shaped arrangement, check "Lay in grid". 11. Enter priority. 12. If one or more sample parts are to be created, enter the desired number of sample parts under "Number of sample parts". 13. A part can be allocated to one or more customers: right click in the "Customer" selection field. 14. Select "Add". The "Customer" mask is displayed. 15. To enter a customer: open "Customer/order no." with and select customer. 16. Enter number of pieces for the customer. 17. In case of several customers for the same part, repeat steps 13 to 16. 18. If required, enter the machining cycle number. 19. When several parts are marked and the same settings are valid for all parts: check "Transfer to all parts". 20. Select OK. The mask with the part properties of the next part is displayed until the properties have been defined for all the selected parts.

Common cuts

Nesting part in grid

Allocating priority Creating sample part

Allocating to a customer

Allocating machining cycle number

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-13

Deleting parts in the nesting job

1. Select >Job >Modify parts... . The "(Job name) - Parts" mask is displayed. 2. Mark the part(s) to be deleted in the selection field. Select (X) Delete . or Right click to open the context menu. Select Delete. 3. Select OK.

Modifying parts in the nesting job

1. Select >Job >Modify parts... . The "(Job name) - Parts" mask is displayed. 2. Mark the part(s) to be modified in the selection field. Select (X) Modify. or Right click to open the context menu. Select Modify. 3. The "Modify parts" mask is displayed. 4. Modify the desired parameters. 5. Select OK.

3-14

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

2.2

Defining nesting parameters

Nesting parameters are dependent on the selected nesting processor and can be either compiled during the nesting job or can be defined after it.

Defining sheet data

Various nesting variants can be generated with the three nesting modes "Multi-format", "Optimum sheet format" and "Sequence". (This option is possible only with the free geometry nesting processor.) Multi-format: With the Multi-format nesting mode, nesting jobs can be nested on sheets of various sizes. One only needs to select the different sheet formats and Nest determines the best sheet combination. Optimum sheet format: With the Optimum sheet format nesting mode, Nest selects the optimum sheet format for the nesting job and lays out sheets only with this sheet size. Sequence: With the Sequence nesting mode, Nest adheres to a specified sequence of the sheets when nesting.

Condition A nesting job, whose parameters have to be defined, is present. (See section "Compiling a new nesting job".)

Opening sheet data

1. Select >Job >Parameters >Free geometry... or >Ext. Rectangle.... The "Nesting parameters" mask is displayed. 2. Select the "Sheet data" tab. Sheets from the material selection, from the remainder sheet management and the last entered sheets are listed in the selection field. 3. Open "Blank designation" with . The "Select material" mask is displayed. 4. Mark the desired material. 5. Open "Nesting mode" with . 6. To use different sheet formats when nesting nesting jobs: select Multi-format . or To use the optimum sheet format for the nesting job: select Optimum sheet format. or

Selecting nesting mode

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-15

To adhere to the specified sequence of the sheets when nesting: select Sequence. Adding new sheet 7. To add new sheets in the selection field: select Add. The "Sheet" mask is displayed. 8. Check "Rectangular sheet". 9. Select blank designation. 10. Enter dimensions and number of sheets. 11. To select sheet geometries e.g. remainder sheets of the 'TRG' format: open "Arbitrary sheet geometry" with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. 12. Mark desired file and Select OK. 13. To select material and dimensions of the sheet through storage items: select "Storage item". The "Select material" mask is displayed. 14. Select the desired storage item. 15. To add a remainder sheet from the remainder sheet management: select "Remainder sheet management"(see "Defining remainder sheets", pg. 3-55). The "Remainder sheet" mask is displayed. 16. Mark desired remainder sheet and Select OK. 17. To modify the sheet data of an existing sheet: mark the desired sheet in the selection field. 18. Select Modify. 19. Modify desired data for the sheet. 20. Select OK. 21. Mark the sheet to be rearranged in the selection field. 22. With the arrows next to the selection field: move the sheet up or down. 23. To delete a sheet from the selection field: mark the sheet in the selection field. 24. Select Delete.

Entering sheet material and dimensions manually

Adding sheet with arbitrary sheet geometry

Selecting storage items

Adding remainder sheet

Modifying existing sheet

Modifying the sequence of the sheets

Deleting sheet

3-16

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

Defining the options of a nesting job

Condition A nesting job, whose parameters are to be defined, is present. (See section "Compiling a new nesting job".)

Opening options

1. Select >Job >Parameters >Free geometry... Rectangle.... The "Nesting parameters" mask is displayed. 2. Select the "Options" tab.

or

>Ext.

Entering the part distance

3. In case of free geometry nesting processor: enter the minimum distance between the parts. or In case of ext. rectangle nesting processor: enter the distances in X and Y direction.

Defining sheet margins

1 2

Left margin Upper margin

3 4

Right margin Lower margin Fig. 21867

Margins of a sheet

4. If all the sheet margins have a consistent distance: check "Consistent" and enter distance. or If sheet margins have varying distance: enter distances for "Left", "Right", "Top" and "Bottom". 5. To define the entered edge and part distances for this material as default: check "Adopt as default".

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-17

Filling last sheet

6. Check "Filler parts only until nesting height". The last sheet is filled with more parts only in the occupied section. A remainder sheet can, for example, be defined from the empty section.

Fig. 50653

7. If the minimum number of parts is less than the maximum number of parts: check "Fill last sheet". Select Complete sheet: The last sheet is completely occupied with the maximum possible number of parts. Select Until nesting height: The last sheet is occupied only until the defined nesting height (see "Fig. 50653", pg. 3-18). Occupying internal surfaces

Internal surfaces Fig. 4776

8. Check "internal surfaces". The internal surfaces of a part are enabled for sheet layout with parts. This strategy is available for parts with large internal surfaces.

3-18

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

Placing several parts in internal surfaces which become continuously free

Fig. 9121

In such a case, the internal surfaces are automatically enabled for several planes. Occupying external surfaces

Outer surface of parts Fig. 4778

Note This option is possible only with the rectangle nesting processor. 9. Under external surfaces, select how the external surfaces should be occupied: "Do not use": No external surfaces are occupied. "Use partwise": The external surfaces of a part are enabled for the sheet layout with parts. This strategy is available for parts with large external surfaces. "Use sheetwise": The external surfaces of several parts are practically complied into one residual surface and occupied with parts. (This strategy is available when a mixture of large and many small parts is to be nested.)

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-19

External surface, over the entire sheet

Single parts Fig. 29880

Determining the start part

Note This option is possible only with the rectangle nesting processor. 10. Select the desired box: "Area": Nest starts with the part with the largest area. "Dimension in X direction": Nest starts with the part with the largest dimension in X direction. "Dimension in Y direction": Nest starts with the part with the largest dimension in Y direction. "Dimension in X or Y direction": Nest starts with the part with the largest edge lengths. "Part priority first": Nest takes into account the part priority set in the nesting job. The nesting processor begins nesting with the part that has been defined as the start part. Note This option is possible only with the free geometry nesting processor. 11. Select "Generate identical sheets". When only identical sheets are generated, correspondingly fewer NC programs must be manually modified / optimized. The generated NC program can only be repeated n number of times on the machine. 12. Enter minimum utilization. The tolerated waste can be entered with the utilization rate.

Generate identical sheets

3-20

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

Defining start corners

13. Click on "Start corners". Start corner = corner of sheet at which the sheet layout is started. The selected start corner remains unaffected when the sheet formats are changed.
2 3

TruLaser Serie 3000 1 TruLaser Serie 5000 TruLaser 2025 TruLaser 2030
Start corner in the example of some machines

4 TruLaser 2525

Fig. 50376

Observing the direction of rolling of the sheet

14. Under "Direction of rolling", open the selection field with . 15. Select direction of rolling: X direction: part is not rotated or is rotated by 180. Y direction: part is rotated by 90 or 270. Do not consider: Direction of rolling is not observed. The selected direction of rolling is displayed as follows in the sheet overview: with (*) do not consider direction of rolling. with (X) direction of rolling in X direction. with (Y) direction of rolling in Y direction. 16. Select the positioning direction: X direction: The sheet is laid out horizontally from the start corner. Y direction: The sheet is laid out vertically from the start corner. Automatic: The positioning direction is defined automatically.

Defining positioning direction

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-21

Positioning direction vertical

Positioning direction horizontal Tab. 3-1

Defining nesting accuracy

Note This option is possible only with the free geometry nesting processor. Greater the nesting accuracy selected, higher the computational effort or memory required. A freely defined nesting accuracy is particularly recommended in case of filigree parts or small part distances. 1/5 to 1/10 of the part distance can be used as the standard value. Material utilization can vary up to 10% depending on the nesting accuracy. 17. Under "Nesting accuracy", open the selection field with . Low: If the nesting accuracy is the lowest, the calculation is fastest. ... High: If the nesting accuracy is the highest, the calculation takes the longest. or Check "Freely defined" and enter the grid for the optimization. Note This option is possible only with the free geometry nesting processor. 18. Under "Nesting profile", open the selection with . The "Nesting profile selection" mask is displayed. 19. Select the nesting profile from the list (relevant description is given in the right-hand text field). 20. Select OK.

Nesting with nesting profiles

3-22

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

Creating an optimization

21. Check "Optimizer". The nesting result can be improved with the optimization. In this case, Nest calculates the various nesting strategies to attain the best sheet waste. Using the optimizer can increase computing time requirements for nesting by up to a factor of 40 in comparison with nesting without the optimizer. 22. If the optimization is not to exceed a specific period: enter the time limit in seconds. The estimated time for the nesting operation is displayed in the status bar. The nesting operation can be aborted with <Esc >. 23. A different positioning direction can be defined for the last sheet of the nesting job, in order to, for example, create a remainder sheet with a special format: select the positioning direction. X direction: The sheet is laid out horizontally from the start corner. Y direction: The sheet is laid out vertically from the start corner. 24. Select OK. Nest nests the parts with the defined parameter settings of the relevant nesting profile.

Activating common cuts (TwinLine)

Conditions The nesting job can be processed using only common cuts when the rectangle nesting processor is used for nesting. The nesting job contains TwinLine-suitable parts.

1. Select >Job >Parameters >Free geometry... or >Ext. Rectangle.... The "Nesting parameters" mask is displayed. 2. Select the "TwinLine" tab. 3. Check "Activate common cuts". Tip As soon as the "Activate common cuts" selection has been selected, the <TAB > key can be used to go from one input field to the next. 4. Select Selection. The "Machine selection" mask is displayed. 5. Mark the machine with which the nesting job is to be processed. 6. Select OK. The "Selection of Technology Tables" mask is displayed.

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-23

7. Select technology table and rule. The kerf width (and thus the part distance between the contours, which is to be cut using common cuts) is now established. 8. Select OK. Note The part distances must correspond to the kerf width from the technology table with which the nesting job will be processed later. (Description of the technology tablesSee chapter "Setting basic data"). 9. Under "Distance in X" and "Distance in Y", enter the part distance in X and Y directions. 10. Enter minimal edge length (= edge length that a part must have, so that it can be placed on common cuts). 11. When all settings are definedSelect OK.

Machine-oriented nesting (free geometry nesting processor)

1. Select >Job >Parameters >Free geometry.... The "Nesting parameters" mask is displayed. 2. Select the "Technology" tab. 3. Under "Machine selection", select Selection and mark the desired machine. 4. Select OK. Nest adopts the data for the machine and the control system. 5. When a laser cutting machine has been selected: under "Technological settings" check "Prevent tilting of parts". Nest nests the parts in such a manner that they do not fall through the slats or tip over. 6. If a punching or multi-purpose machine has been selected: under "Technological settings" check "Consider clamp dead area". or Check "Consider clamp dead area" and select the loading position.

3-24

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

Modifying sheet name

Nest always suggests the job name as the sheet name. If the nesting job contains several sheets (irrespective of whether the same or different), Nest counts up the sheet names as follows: Example: Name of the nesting job: Sheet. Name of the first sheet: Tafel_1.TAF. (...) Name of the n-th sheet: Tafel_n.TAF.

1. Select >Job >Parameters >Free geometry... or >Ext. Rectangle.... The "Nesting parameters" mask is displayed. 2. Select the "File names" tab. Note The file name can contain up to 35 characters. Digits, letters or a combination of the two are permitted. 3. Check "Sheet name". Modify the sheet name if required. 4. Open "Sheet path" with . The "Select directory" mask is displayed. 5. Modify directory if necessary. 6. Select OK.

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-25

2.3

Starting automatic nesting process

Starting automatic nesting process

Condition A nesting job is displayed.

1. Select >Job >Start >Ext. Rectangle. When nesting, Nest orients itself to the part boundaries as a circumscribing rectangle (rectangle nesting processor). or Select >Job >Start >Free geometry. When nesting, Nest takes into account the actual geometry of the single part or the mini nest (free geometry nesting processor). The "Nesting result" mask is displayed. 2. Close the "Nesting result" mask. The nested sheets of the nesting job are displayed as the sheet overview. The geometries are displayed with their circumscribing rectangles (each type of part in a different color).

3-26

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

2.4

Re-nesting parts or sheets automatically

Re-nesting parts or sheets automatically

Conditions A nesting job has been loaded. Parts that are not nested yet are loaded.

1. Select >Job >Renesting >Free geometry... or >Ext. Rectangle.... The "Renesting of job parts that still need to be placed" mask is displayed. 2. Activate the desired box. 3. Open selection fields with . 4. When everything is set: Select OK. The desired parts and/or sheets are added to the nesting job.

Modifying the sheet view

Condition A nesting job has been loaded.

Showing all sheets

1. Select >Job >All sheets. All sheets of a nesting job are displayed. 2. Either Mark the sheet. Select >Job >Single sheet.... or Double click on the sheet using the mouse. The single sheet is displayed. 3. Select >Job >Next sheet or >Previous sheet.

Showing single sheet

Browsing in the view

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-27

2.5

Modifying nesting jobs manually

Manually adding parts to the nesting job. Copying or deleting the sheet of a nesting job. Adding new sheet.

Modifying the number of parts

Conditions A nesting job has been loaded. The single sheet view is displayed.

1. Click on the part name of the part to be renested in the part overview. The mask with the part parameters is displayed. 2. Enter the desired number of pieces. 3. Select OK. 4. To restart the automatic nesting process: select >Job >Start >Ext. rectangle or >Free geometry.

Renesting new parts manually

The following parts can be manually added to a job: Unprocessed single parts ('*.GEO'). Processed single parts ('*.GMT'). Mini nests ('*.MTL').

Conditions A nesting job has been loaded. The single sheet view of the sheet is displayed.

1. Select >Parts >New.... The TruTops file browser is displayed. 2. Change the file format if required ('*.MTL' or '*.GMT'). 3. Change the directory if required. 4. Mark the searched file.

3-28

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

5. Select OK. The mask with the part parameters is displayed. 6. Enter the desired number of pieces and if required the name of the customer and the number of the machining cycle. 7. Either Select OK. The part hangs on the mouse. To rotate the part before depositing: rotate part with the wheel mouse. Deposit part on the desired position (click with the mouse; repeat if necessary). or Select Automatic. The desired parts are added to the nesting job.

Adding or removing copy of a sheet

Any number of copies of the sheet of a nesting job can be made. Conditions A nesting job has been loaded. The single sheet view of the sheet is displayed.

1. Select >Sheet >Add/remove copies. 2. Either To create a copy of a selected sheet: select 1. or To create several copies: select More.... The "Quantity" mask is displayed. Enter the desired number of copies and Select OK. or To remove the created copies: select -1. To delete several copies: select More.... The "Quantity" mask is displayed. Enter the desired number of copies and Select OK.

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-29

Adding a new (empty) sheet to the nesting job

Condition A nesting job has been loaded.

1. Select >Sheet >New.... The "Insert empty sheet" mask is displayed. This contains all the sheet formats that are used in the current nesting job. 2. Mark the sheet with the desired sheet format. 3. Select Add. The new sheet is displayed in the sheet overview.

3-30

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

2.6

Importing and exporting nesting jobs

Exporting nesting jobs

To store job data in another directory or to save it in a storage medium, the nesting job can be exported. A file is created with the '*.ZIP' format here. The export of the nesting job is particularly useful for job data that does not need to be updated on a daily basis and is to be archived. Example: the nesting job Zahnrder becomes 'Zahnrder.job.tpdm.zip'. This job file can be managed in Explorer. The ZIP file for an entire nesting job is made up of the following files: '*.JOB' '*.TAF' '*.GEO' '*.GMT' '*.MTL' '*.ERG' (if present).

1. Select >File >Export.... The "Data export" mask is displayed. 2. Open "Job or sheet" with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. 3. If required, search for the nesting job that is to be exported. 4. Mark nesting job. 5. Select OK. The "Data export" mask is displayed. 6. Open "Target directory" with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. 7. Mark the target directory. 8. Select OK. A message list with all exported files is displayed.

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-31

Importing nesting jobs

Foreign jobs (e.g. from higher-level systems) or already created ZIP files of nesting jobs can be imported and modified. To import old nesting jobs ('*.DAT' format) into new '*.JOB' format, a data import must be carried out.

1. Select >File >Import.... The "Data import" mask is displayed. 2. Open "File to be opened" with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. 3. Mark the file to be imported and Select OK. 4. Open "Target directory" with . 5. Mark the target directory for the imported file. 6. If the existing local GEO/GMT files are to be used, then: under "Options", check "Use GEO/GMT files from original folder". 7. If the imported file is to be loaded immediately, then under "Options", check "Load imported files immediately". 8. Select OK. A message list with all imported files is displayed 9. If a defective file has been imported, a line message list is outputted. In TruTops, a material is defined as unknown if one or more of the following information points are unknown or entirely missing: blank designation, material thickness, unit ([mm], [inch]). 10. To be able to import a nesting job with unknown material: create material under >Tools >Modify data... >Material >Blank(See chapter "Setting basic data").

3-32

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

Structuring of a job file ('*.DAT') in detail

File format The job file that TruTops is to read in needs to be structured in accordance with a fixed diagram. Job files that were created with previous TruTops versions, can continue to be read in. The job file is divided into the following blocks:
Block Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Designation #~11 #~25 #~40 #~35 Explanation General information Job data Sheet data and data concerning remainder sheets Parts designation Tab. 3-2

Beginning of the block: #~n (n = block designation). End of block: #~END. End of file: #~EOF. The job file must always begin with #~11 (Block 1). No empty lines are permitted within individual blocks.

Example

#~11 PCNN C:\TRUMPF 2.3 11-2000-3 TruLaser 3030/ TCL3030 1 Sin 840D 1 Codepage #~END #~25 teil1 teil1 St37-20 2000.000000 1000.000000 10.000000 10.000000 20.000000 20.000000

Begin Block 1 PC name Directory root Version no. of the DAT file, (ToPs 100 V5.00 and after) Stock ID (from version no. 2.0) Machine name (Version no. 2.1 and after) Machine type (Version no. 2.1 and after) Control system (Version no. 2.1 and after) Control system type (Version no. 2.1 and after) Codepage for number sets (Version no. 2.3 and after) End Block 1 Begin Block 2 Job name Sheet name Material ID no. Sheet length Sheet width Web in X Web in Y Top edge Bottom edge

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-33

20.000000 20.000000 1 1 1 5.000000 5.000000 1 1 1 0 2 1 1 1 2.000000 C:\TRUMPF\PARTS 3 1 1 0 1 2 1 65.000000 5.000000 70.000000 0.000000 0.000000 PCNN #~END #~40 St37-20 2 500 500 taf1.geo

Left edge Right edge Internal surfaces (1/0=Y/N) External surfaces (0=No, 1=Part, 2=sheet) Start corner (1=LU, 2=LO, 3=RU, 4=RO) TwinLine distance X TwinLine distance Y TwinLine number of parts in the block in X TwinLine number of parts in the block in Y Lay out remainder sheets (1/0=Y/N) TwinLine layout (1/0=Y/N) Resolution (1=small, 2=medium, 3=large) Sorting criterion (1=surface, 2=extent) Fill last sheet (1/0=Y/N) Start part (1=surface 2=X 3=Y 4=X/Y) Material thickness Sheet geometry name Sheet path name Direction of rolling (1=X, 2=Y, 3=Unknown) Positioning direction (1=Y, 2=X) MasterPlate (1/0=Y/N) Exact distances (1/0=Y/N) Sheet is not rectangular (1/0=Y/N) Number of MasterPlates (1=one, 2=more than one) Eliminate last sheet (1/0 or 52/2=Y/N) Min. %-layout MasterPlate Min. %-improvement of mini nests Max. %-limit of new computation of last sheet Min. element length for TwinLine Min. distances for securing corners with TwinLine PC name for sheets End Block 2 Begin Block 3 Material of the remainder sheets Sheet thickness (Z) Sheet length (X) Sheet width (Y) Sheet name

3-34

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

C:\TRUMPF ...USER_JO2 2 2 3 1 5 rest1 1 1 Part 1 20.000000 20.000000 20.000000 20.000000 PCNN |~ : : |~ #~END #~35 C:\TRUMP ...USER_JO2\GEO_ MTL\SZ600PLA.GEO 30 100 1 4 0 C:\TRUMPF\TEILE\USER_JO2\ GEO_MTL\SZ600PLA.GEO 5 90.000000 3 2 0 MiniNest 0 1 1

Sheet path Number of remainder sheets Residual number of remainder sheets Direction of rolling (1=X, 2=Y, 3=Unknown) Positioning direction (1=X, 2=Y) Priority of sheet Name of the remainder sheet/storage place (see Stock ID) Sheet is not rectangular (1/0=Y/N) Start corner (1=LU, 2=LO, 3=RU, 4=RO) Job name of the remainder sheet Top edge Bottom edge Left edge Right edge PC name for sheets

End Block 3 Begin Block 4 Part name with path specification Minimum number Maximum number Rotate (0=No, 1=arbitrary, 2=direction of rolling) Mini nest (0=No, 1=Horizontal, 2=Vertical, 3=Auto, 4=MTL, currently only 0 and 4 are supported) TwinLine-suitable (1/0=Y/N) Parts path name Priority Angle of rotation increment (0) Direction of rolling (1=X, 2=Y, 3=Unknown) Nesting fit type (1=FirstFit, 2=center of gravity) Part in the mini nest (1/0=Y/N) Name of the mini nest Place part in coil Number of rows in the coil Number of columns in the coil

S354EN

2007-04-20

2BNesting jobs

3-35

PCNN None Work cycle no. 1 |~ #~END #~EOF

PC name for parts Customer for the part (not an empty line!!) Working procedure designation (Version no 2.0 and after) Number of sample parts(Version No. 2.2 and after) End Block 4 End of the file Tab. 3-3

3-36

2BNesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

3. 3.1
Creating new sheet

Creating sheets and laying out with parts Creating new sheet

1. Select >File >New >Sheet.... The "Sheet selection" mask is displayed. This is filled with the values of the last used sheet. Note To be able to select a storage item here, enter the stock ID under >Tools >Modify data >Material >Blanks. 2. Check "Stock ID". The "Select material" mask is displayed. The material, dimensions and storage location of a sheet is fixed during selection made with the "Stock ID". 3. Mark the desired storage item. The "Sheet selection" mask is displayed again. 4. Open Material ID with . The "Material selection" mask is displayed. 5. Mark the desired material. 6. Enter sheet dimensions. 7. To use a remainder sheet: select "Remainder sheet with arbitrary sheet geometry".. Tip Remainder sheets with arbitrary geometry can be laid out in "Nest" ('*.TRG', '*.GEO'). The remainder sheet need not be saved in the remainder sheet management. Thus, for example, remainder sheets can be used directly from other storage media (diskette, etc.). 8. Open file name with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. 9. Mark the remainder sheet to be laid out and Select OK. The "Sheet selection" mask is displayed again. 10. Select Parameters. The "Parameters for sheet layout" mask is displayed. 11. Define parameters and Select OK. 12. Select OK. The TruTops file browser is displayed. 13. Mark the part to be used to lay out the sheet. 14. Select OK. The mask with the part parameters is displayed.

Selecting material and dimensions of the sheet with the storage item

Entering the material and dimensions manually

Using a remainder sheet

Defining the parameters of the sheet layout

Select a part

S354EN

2007-04-20

3BCreating sheets and laying out with parts

3-37

15. To nest only one part manually: Select OK. or To nest several parts automatically: execute the following steps. Defining the number of parts 16. Enter the desired number of parts under "Min". or Check "Max". Enter the minimum and maximum number of parts. 17. To read in information from the 'File': check "Entries from file". The following drawing data of the '*.GEO' or '*.GMT' is read in: "Mini nest": If there is a mini nest for the part, Nest nests the mini nest. If there is no mini nest, Nest forms a mini nest internally. In case of '*.GMT' files, no mini nests can be entered on the sheet. Any rotation possible: If this is active, Nest rotates the single part when nesting with the free geometry nesting processing by the angle increment selected under "Angle". In the rectangle nesting processor, Nest rotates the part by 90. The direction of rolling of the sheet remains unconsidered. Direction of rolling: Nest places the part on the sheet according to the selected direction of rolling. The part is placed on a remainder sheet only if it has the same direction of rolling. If only the standard sheets have been defined with a direction of rolling, Nest places this part on standard sheets. 18. If Any rotation possible is selected: enter angle. Note In case of '*.GMT' files, no mini nests can be entered in the job. 19. Check "Mini nest". If there is a mini nest for the part, Nest nests the mini nest. If there is no mini nest, Nest forms a mini nest internally. 20. To place the part on the sheet for using common cuts: check TwinLine-suitable. 21. Enter the number of parts of a group in X and Y direction under "Block X, Y". 22. If a part is to be nested in a grid-shaped arrangement, check "Lay in grid".

Reading in information from 'File'

Defining the angle for rotation Nesting mini nests

Common cuts

Nesting part in grid

3-38

3BCreating sheets and laying out with parts

2007-04-20

S354EN

Allocating priority Creating sample part

23. Enter priority. 24. If one or more sample parts are to be created, enter the desired number of sample parts under "Number of sample parts". 25. A part can be allocated to one or more customers: right click in the "Customer" selection field. 26. Select "Add". The "Customer" mask is displayed. 27. To enter a customer: open "Customer/order no." with and select customer. 28. Enter number of parts for the customer. 29. In case of several customers for the same part, repeat steps 26 to 29. 30. If required, enter number of the machining cycle. 31. Select OK. Note Automatic positioning is only possible with the free geometry nesting processor (optional). If the mask is exited only with OK (i.e. not with Automatic), the part is not deposited in the desired number on the sheet, but only hangs on the mouse. 32. Select Automatic. The first part with the desired number of pieces is placed on the sheet and also hangs on the mouse. 33. If required, deposit part further (click using the mouse). 34. Finally press End or <Esc >. 35. Select >File >Save or <Ctrl > + <S >. or Select >File >Save as.... The TruTops file browser is displayed. 36. If required, change the directory. 37. Enter the name of the new sheet under "File name". 38. Select OK.

Allocating a customer

Allocating number of machining cycle Positioning the first part with number of pieces

Saving new sheet

S354EN

2007-04-20

3BCreating sheets and laying out with parts

3-39

3.2
Opening sheet

Renesting parts

1. Select >File >Open... or <Ctrl > + <O >. The TruTops file browser is displayed. 2. Load the laid out sheet. 3. To load a new part: select >Parts >New.... or Click on the empty field in the parts preview. The TruTops file browser is displayed. 4. Mark the desired part and Select OK. The mask with the part parameters is displayed. 5. Enter the desired number of pieces under "Min". or Check "Max". Enter minimum and maximum number of pieces. 6. Open Any rotation possible with . If the part has to be rotated in any way: select Any rotation possible and enter the desired angle of rotation. If the part is not to be rotated: select Not rotatable. 7. Modify desired part properties. 8. Either Select Automatic. The part with the desired number of pieces is placed on the sheet and also hangs on the mouse. or Select OK. The part hangs on the mouse. Rotate part with the wheel mouse and deposit at the desired position on the sheet (click using the mouse; repeat if required.) 9. Click on the part in the parts preview, which is to be renested. The selected part hangs on the mouse. 10. Rotate the part with the wheel mouse and deposit on the sheet as many times as desired. 11. Select End or <Esc >.

Renesting new part

Defining number of pieces

Defining information about the part

Renesting already existing part

3-40

3BCreating sheets and laying out with parts

2007-04-20

S354EN

3.3

Creating a nesting job from a single sheet

If a single sheet has been created and laid out with parts, a nesting job can be created from this.

1. Regenerate or reload sheet. 2. Select >Sheet >Generate job.... The "Create job" mask is displayed. 3. Modify the desired parameters and Select OK. The sheet is saved in the 'JOB' format.

S354EN

2007-04-20

3BCreating sheets and laying out with parts

3-41

3.4

Laying out single sheets automatically

Defining parameters for automatic sheet layout

1. Select >Sheet >Parameters. The "Parameters for sheet layout" mask is displayed. 2. Select the "Sheet data" and "Automatic" tabs. 3. Adapt the desired parameters: Distance of the parts from one another. Margins of the sheet. Direction of rolling. Sheet layout of the internal surfaces with other parts (yes/no). Positioning direction of the parts. Nesting accuracy. The greater the degree of nesting accuracy, the greater the computation effort and memory required. A freely defined nesting accuracy is particularly recommended in case of filigree parts or small part distances. Selection of the nesting profiles. Start corner (sheet corner, at which Nest starts laying out the sheet). 4. Select OK.

Laying out parts automatically

Conditions Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27). The free geometry nesting processor is present.

Laying out a section

1. Mark or, using the mouse, box in the part with which the section on the sheet should be laid out. The part is displayed in magenta. 2. Select >Parts >Automatic sheet layout >Section >More.... 3. Enter the desired number of parts and Select OK. 4. Using the mouse, box in the section to be laid out with the part. The section is automatically laid out with the selected number of pieces. 5. To finish, click on End.

3-42

3BCreating sheets and laying out with parts

2007-04-20

S354EN

Laying out sheet

6. Double click to mark the part with which the sheet is to be laid out. The part hangs on the mouse. 7. Select >Parts >Automatic sheet layout >Sheet >More.... 8. Enter the desired number of parts and Select OK. The entire sheet is automatically laid out with the selected number of pieces. 9. To finish, click on End.

Laying out sheet sectionally (multi-copy machining)

Multi-copy machining means that at least one single part is placed in a section on the sheet several times. When nesting, Nest determines whether multi-copy machining can be automatically allocated. Conditions Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27).

1. Mark or, using the mouse, box in part(s) with which the sheet should be laid out sectionally. The part is displayed in magenta. 2. Select >Parts >Multi-copy machining >Fill section.... The "Data for sectional placing of parts on the sheet " mask is displayed. 3. Enter the minimum distance of the parts in X and Y direction. 4. Select the strategy with which the section is to be laid out with the part: "Exact distances between parts": The entered distances between the parts are adhered to. Unoccupied strips can be left over on the edge of the sheet. "Filling the rectangle": if required, the distances between the parts are increased, so that they fill the entire section. 5. Select OK. 6. Using the mouse, box in the section to be filled with the part. The section filled with the part "hangs" on the mouse pointer. 7. Using the wheel mouse, turn the section by an incremental angle of rotation.

S354EN

2007-04-20

3BCreating sheets and laying out with parts

3-43

8. To change the strategy/part distances before depositing the parts: select >Parts >Multi-copy machining >Fill section... again. The "Data for sectional placing of parts on sheet" mask is displayed again. The Last box button is now active. 9. Modify minimal distances of the parts and/or change the strategy. 10. Select Last box. 11. The section with the modified part distances and/or strategies hangs on the mouse pointer again. 12. Enter destination for the section. or Position section with the mouse. or Enter the angular position of the section. Enter the destination for the section or position the section with the mouse. The selected section is filled with the part. 13. To finish, click on End.

Laying out sheet with the number of parts (multi-copy machining)

Conditions Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27).

1. Mark or, using the mouse, box in part(s) with which the sheet should be laid out sectionally. The part is displayed in magenta. 2. Select >Parts >Multi-copy machining >Place number of pieces.... The "Data for piecewise placing of parts on sheet" mask is displayed. 3. Enter the number of parts in X and Y direction. 4. Enter absolute distance between parts in X and Y direction. 5. Select OK. The parts hang on the mouse. Note Only the number of copies of a part that are hanging on the mouse can be increased or decreased.

3-44

3BCreating sheets and laying out with parts

2007-04-20

S354EN

6. To modify the number of parts hanging on the mouse: select >Parts > Multi-copy machining. 7. To increase the number of parts: Select >+X Add column. or Select >+Y Add row. 8. To reduce the number of parts: Select >-X remove column. or Select >-Y remove row. 9. Enter the destination for the parts that are hanging on the mouse. or Position parts with the mouse. or Enter the angular position of the parts. Enter the destination for the parts or position parts with the mouse. 10. To finish, click on End.

S354EN

2007-04-20

3BCreating sheets and laying out with parts

3-45

4.

Modifying sheet layout

The sheet layout of a single sheet or a sheet from a nesting job can be modified.

4.1

Defining parameters for manual sheet layout

1. Select >Sheet >Parameters. The "Parameters for sheet layout" mask is displayed. 2. Select the "Manual sheet layout" tab. 3. Adapt the desired parameters: Select "Automatic multi-copy machining identification". Multi-copy machining means that at least one single part in an area is placed on the sheet several times. During nesting, Nest determines whether a multi-copy machining can be allocated automatically. Select "Accuracy during manual nesting". Greater the nesting accuracy selected, higher the computational effort or memory required. A freely defined nesting accuracy is particularly recommended in case of filigree parts or small part distances. 4. Select OK.

4.2

Moving and rotating parts

When positioning parts manually, the allowed position on the sheet is determined automatically. At the same time, the parts to be nested are attached to the mouse and colored green. When moving parts over one another, when positioning them outside the sheet or in case of an excessively less sheet distance, the parts at the mouse are displayed in red. Conditions Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27).

3-46

4BModifying sheet layout

2007-04-20

S354EN

Moving original part

1. To move the original: mark the part by double clicking. The part hangs on the mouse and can be moved freely and can be rotated using the wheel mouse. or Using the mouse, box in several parts and double click on a marked part. The selected parts hang on the mouse and can be moved freely and can be rotated using the wheel mouse. or Mark part(s) on the sheet (to mark several parts, keep <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed). Select >Parts >Original. 2. Either Select >Move freely. The marked part hangs at the mouse and can be moved freely on the sheet. or Select >Move horizontally. The marked part hangs at the mouse and can be moved only horizontally. or Select >Move vertically. The marked part hangs on the mouse and can be moved only vertically. 3. To copy a part and move it on the sheet: mark the part on the sheet (to mark several parts, keep <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed). 4. Select >Parts >Copy. 5. Either Select >Free copy or <Strg > + <F > or <Ctrl > + <F >. The marked part hangs at the mouse and can be moved freely on the sheet. or Select >Copy horizontally. The marked part hangs at the mouse and can be moved only horizontally. or Select >Copy vertically. The marked part hangs at the mouse and can be moved only vertically.

Copying and moving parts

S354EN

2007-04-20

4BModifying sheet layout

3-47

Moving all identical parts

6. To mark all identical parts on the sheet: click on the number of parts in the preview. 7. Select >Parts >Original >Move freely. The parts hang at the mouse and can be moved freely on the sheet. Note When rotating, parts should not overlap with other parts (allowed position is displayed in green). 8. Either To rotate an original or a copy: mark the part by double clicking and rotate using the wheel mouse (to mark several parts, keep <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed). or Select >Parts >Original >Rotate to the left or >Rotate to the right >More.... Enter the desired angle of rotation. The angle of rotation is automatically adapted if the part distance is too little.. The reference point is used as point of center of rotation.

Rotating parts

4.3

Modifying reference point

Note When you hang one or more parts on the mouse pointer, the mouse cursor is always oriented to the last pick point.

1. To modify the reference point: select >Parts >Original >Modify reference point. 2. Click on the new position of the reference point.

3-48

4BModifying sheet layout

2007-04-20

S354EN

4.4

Modifying the parts quantity

If several parts in a block are hanging to the mouse, the block increases or decreases by entire rows or columns. In doing so, Nest identifies identical parts which are arranged uniformly on the sheet as one part. Conditions Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27). The part/parts are now hanging on the mouse. The number of parts and/or the number of rows and columns with parts which hang from the mouse can be increased or decreased in stages in either X or Y direction. The absolute part distance is used as the distance between the parts (see section "Sheet layout through the number of parts").

Increasing the number of parts stepwise in the +X and +Y direction

Fig. 51006

Increasing the number of parts stepwise in the +Y and +X direction

Fig. 51007

Note You can only raise or lower the number of copies of a part hanging on the mouse. 1. Select >Parts >Multi-copy machining. 2. To increase the number of parts: Select >+X Add column. or Select >+Y Add row. 3. To decrease the number of parts: Select >-X Remove column. or Select >-Y Remove row.

S354EN

2007-04-20

4BModifying sheet layout

3-49

4.5

Modifying the distance of parts

Conditions Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27). The part/parts are now hanging on the mouse.

1. Select >Parts >Multi-copy machining. 2. Select the desired modification for the part distance: -dx Reduce column spacing. +dx Increase column spacing. -dy Reduce row spacing. +dy Increase row spacing. Parts hanging on the mouse can be modified stepwise by a specified distance. This distance is always added to the absolute part distance (= incremental distance). 3. Select more... and enter the incremental distance in mm. 4. Select OK.

4.6

Copying or cutting parts from one sheet to another

A part or a group of parts can be copied or cut and can be pasted on sheets in the same or another nesting job. Conditions Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27).

Copying parts

1. Either Click on a part on the sheet. or To mark several parts: keep <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed and left click on the parts. or Box in the part or the part group using the mouse. The marked parts are displayed in magenta.

3-50

4BModifying sheet layout

2007-04-20

S354EN

2. Select >Edit >Copy. or Press <Strg >+<C > or <Ctrl >+<C >. 3. Switch to the sheet onto which the copied parts are to be placed. 4. Select >Edit >Paste. or Press <Strg >+<V > or <Ctrl >+<V >. The copy of the part/parts is attached to the mouse. Note If Consider parts and Consider sheet margin are switched on, the allowed position on the sheet is determined and the copied parts are displayed in green. For critical positions, such as when there is too little space between the parts or when parts are positioned outside the sheet, the copied parts are displayed in red. These parts cannot be positioned. 5. Store part/s using the mouse. 6. To finish, click on End. Cutting parts 7. To cut parts: select >Edit >Cut. or Press <Strg >+<X > or <Ctrl >+<X >. 8. Switch to the sheet onto which the cut parts are to be placed. 9. Select >Edit >Paste. or Press <Strg >+<V > or <Ctrl >+<V >. The part/parts are now hanging on the mouse. Note If Consider parts and Consider sheet margin are switched on, the allowed position on the sheet is determined and the cut parts are displayed in green . For critical positions, such as when there is too little space between the parts or when parts are positioned outside the sheet, the copied parts are displayed in red. These parts cannot be positioned. 10. Store part/s using the mouse. or Rotate the part with the wheel mouse and store it. 11. To finish, click on End.

S354EN

2007-04-20

4BModifying sheet layout

3-51

4.7

Placing parts at exact distance for common cuts (TwinLine)

In case of common cuts (TwinLine), the contours of contiguous parts are cut at the same time. A sheet skeleton is not formed. If you want to cut parts using common cuts, the distance between the parts (web width in X and Y directions) must correspond to the kerf width in the technology table. ("Technology table and TwinLine preparation", see chapter "Machining parts and generating an NC program".) Conditions Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27). The sheet contains parts which are suitable for common cuts.

Adjusting distance between parts to kerf width via two points

1. Select >Parts >Distance >Distance of 2 points.

Fig. 5990

Note It is not sufficient just to click on the sides of those parts you wish to move to the exact distance for common cuts. 2. Click precisely on the first point (P1) or enter the coordinates for (P1). 3. Click precisely on the second point (P2) or enter the coordinates for (P2). 4. Enter kerf width in mm. The parts are adjusted to kerf width by moving them.

3-52

4BModifying sheet layout

2007-04-20

S354EN

Adjusting part distance to kerf width by rotating

5. Select >Parts >Distance >Distance rotate.

Before rotating ...

...and afterwards Fig. 50982

6. Click on the first geometry element (1.). 7. Click on the second geometry element (2.). Note It is not sufficient just to click on the sides of those parts you wish to move to the exact distance for common cuts. 8. Click precisely on the first point (P1) or enter the coordinates for (P1). 9. Click precisely on the second point (P2) or enter the coordinates for (P2). 10. Enter kerf width in mm. The parts are adjusted to kerf width by rotating them.

4.8

Deleting parts

Conditions Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27).

1. Click on the part(s) to be deleted (to mark several parts, keep <Strg > or <Ctrl > pressed). 2. To cancel the marking: select >Edit >Cancel marking. or Press <Esc >. 3. Select >Parts >Delete marked parts.

S354EN

2007-04-20

4BModifying sheet layout

3-53

4.9

Deleting sheet

Conditions Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27).

Select >Sheet >Delete sheet.

4.10 Modifying sheet format

The sheet format can be modified only if its dimensions have been manually entered during creation. If the sheet has been created using a storage item, the sheet format cannot be modified. (The dimensions of the sheet are included in the storage item. They cannot be modified.)

1. Select >Sheet >Format.... The "Redefine Sheet Format" mask is displayed. The sheet dimensions suggested in the mask represent the maximum expansion of the parts on the sheet (surrounding rectangle, zero point at 0.0 ...), including sheet margins and a "safety allowance". These are the smallest dimensions that can be selected for the new sheet format. 2. Enter the new sheet dimensions. 3. Select OK.

3-54

4BModifying sheet layout

2007-04-20

S354EN

5. 5.1

Defining remainder sheets Defining remainder sheets with arbitrary sheet geometry

If sheets that are not completely laid out remain after a processing (as a rule, these are the last sheets of a nesting job), these can, for example, be used again when nesting a new job. Note Remainder sheets can only be nested using the free geometry nesting processor (optional). 1. Load nesting job after whose processing remainder sheets are left over. 2. Display single sheet view of the remainder sheet. 3. Select >Sheet >Generate remainder sheet... The "Enter remainder sheet" mask is displayed.

Fig. 50652en

4. If required, modify the name of the remainder sheet under "File name". (Nest automatically suggests the name of the nesting job sheet with the '*.TRG' file format). 5. Enter storage location and number of remainder sheets (the number can only be reduced). 6. Select OK. The new remainder sheet is defined. This can be used later in another nesting job.

S354EN

2007-04-20

5BDefining remainder sheets

3-55

5.2

Managing remainder sheets

When remainder sheets are created, these sheets can be modified, deleted, added with more sheets afterwards.

1. Select >Tools >Manage remainder sheets.... The "Remainder sheet management" mask is displayed.

Fig. 50651en

2. Open "Blank designation" with . 3. Mark material in the selection. 4. Enter the sheet dimensions of the new remaining sheet under "Dimension X,Y". 5. If existing remainder sheets are to be adopted in the management: check "Random sheet geometries". 6. Open "File name" with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. 7. Select desired remainder sheet. 8. Enter the storage location and number of remainder sheets. 9. Select Enter. The new remainder sheets are defined and can be used in another nesting job later.

3-56

5BDefining remainder sheets

2007-04-20

S354EN

10. To modify a remainder sheet: mark the remainder sheet to be modified in the selection field. 11. If required, modify the file name or the storage location or the number of remainder sheets. 12. Select Modify. 13. To delete an existing remainder sheet: mark the remainder sheet in the selection field. 14. Select Delete.

5.3

Taking off remainder sheets

If parts of a nesting job are nested on remainder sheets, these remainder sheets must be actively taken off from the remainder sheet management. Condition A nesting job whose parts have been nested on remainder sheets is loaded.

1. Select >Job >Take off remainder sheets. A message list with the remainder sheets that have been taken off from the management is displayed. 2. Select OK.

S354EN

2007-04-20

5BDefining remainder sheets

3-57

6. 6.1

Mini nests Creating mini nests

Mini nests are single parts nested with themselves and are created as two-part nests. The nesting processor can compute better sheet utilization with certain parts that are properly combined into a mini nest. (The nesting processor always uses a part drawing as the basis for nesting. A part drawing can be either a single part or a mini nest). All single parts are suitable for mini nests whose exterior geometries can be fitted inside one another, such as with L-shaped geometries. Mini nests are not practical with rectangular single parts. Condition The parts geometry is suitable for mini nests.

1. Select >File >New >Mini nest.... The TruTops file browser is displayed. 2. If necessary, search for the single part. 3. Mark the single part. The name of the file is entered under "File name". or Enter the name of the searched single part under "File name" 4. Select OK. The "Data for creating a mini nest" mask is displayed. Note At this distance, nesting cannot be carried out to the separating cut width for processing with common separating cuts (TwinLine). 5. Enter distance separating the single parts. 6. Select OK. The mini nest is created and the original is displayed in magenta. The mini nest is automatically saved under the name of the '*.GEO' file in the '*.MTL' format.

3-58

6BMini nests

2007-04-20

S354EN

Example of a mini nest

Fig. 29783

S354EN

2007-04-20

6BMini nests

3-59

6.2

Modifying mini nests

Mini nests can be modified as follows: Moving mini nests horizontally or vertically through 2 points (see following section). Rotate mini nests around a center or two points. Distance positioning of single parts in mini nests for common separating cuts (TwinLine).

Moving mini nests

When you move the mini nests, the original and the copy of the mini nest are "torn apart". Note A mini nest consists of the original (magenta) and a copy of the single part (white). Only the copy can be modified. The original cannot be modified.

Moving mini nests through 2 points

1 P1 2 P2

Copy

Original Fig. 29863

Move the copy by 2 points

1. Load mini nest. 2. Select >Modify >Move 2 points. 3. Click on a reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates for (P1). 4. Click on the target point (P2) or enter the coordinates for (P2). 5. Click on the element in the copy. or Box in the entire geometry using the mouse.

3-60

6BMini nests

2007-04-20

S354EN

Move mini nests horizontally

Copy

Original Fig. 29784

Moving the copy horizontally

6. Select >Modify >Move horizontally. 7. Either Enter distance for horizontal movement. or Click on a reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates for (P1). Click on the target point (P2) or enter the coordinates for (P2). 8. Click on the element in the copy. or Box in the entire geometry using the mouse. Move mini nests vertically

Copy

Original Fig. 29862

Moving the copy vertically

S354EN

2007-04-20

6BMini nests

3-61

9. Select >Modify >Move vertically. 10. Either Enter distance for vertical movement. or Click on a reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates for (P1). Click on the target point (P2) or enter the coordinates for (P2). 11. Click on the element in the copy. or Box in the entire geometry using the mouse. Saving changes 12. Select >File >Save or <Ctrl > + <S >.

3-62

6BMini nests

2007-04-20

S354EN

Rotating mini nests

Note A mini nest consists of the original (magenta) and a copy of the single part (white). Only the copy can be modified. The original cannot be modified. Rotate mini nest round a midpoint

Fig. 29864

1. Load mini nest. 2. Select >Modify >Rotate center. 3. Click on a center point of rotation (P1) or enter the coordinates for (P1). 4. Enter angle of rotation, e.g.: -90. or Enter 1st and 2nd point for the angle of rotation. 5. Click on any geometry element in the copy. or Box in the entire geometry with the mouse (P3, P4). Rotating mini nests around 2 points

Fig. 29867

S354EN

2007-04-20

6BMini nests

3-63

6. Select >Modify >Rotate 2 points. 7. Click on a reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates for (P1). 8. Click on the target point (P2) or enter the coordinates for (P2). 9. Enter angle of rotation, e.g.: -90. or Enter 1st and 2nd point for the angle of rotation. 10. Click on any geometry element in the copy. or Box in the entire geometry with the mouse (P3, P4). 11. Select >File >Save or <Ctrl > + <S >.

Discarding changes to mini nests automatically

Manually modified mini nests can be recreated automatically.

1. Load manually modified mini nests. 2. Select >Modify >Start.... The "Data for creating a mini nest" mask is displayed. Note At this distance, nesting cannot be carried out to the separating cut width for processing with common separating cuts (TwinLine). 3. Enter distance separating the single parts. 4. Select OK.

3-64

6BMini nests

2007-04-20

S354EN

6.3

Distancing single parts of mini nests for common separating cuts (TwinLine)

... by moving
If you wish to process single parts of mini nests with common cuts, then you must bring the parts together in clearance width to one another. Note A mini nest consists of the original (magenta) and a copy of the single part (white). Only the copy can be modified. The original cannot be modified.

Fig. 5990

1. Load mini nest. 2. Select >Modify >Distance of 2 points. 3. Click on the point (P1) in the copy or enter the coordinates for (P1). 4. Click on point (P2) in the original (magenta) or enter the coordinates for (P2). 5. Enter distance (e.g. 0.15).

... by rotating
If you wish to process single parts of mini nests with common cuts, then you must bring the parts together in clearance width to one another. Note A mini nest consists of the original (magenta) and a copy of the single part (white). Only the copy can be modified. The original cannot be modified.

S354EN

2007-04-20

6BMini nests

3-65

Place the mini nest on the clearance width before rotating

Fig. 30339

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Load mini nest. Select >Modify >Rotate distance. Click on copy (1st, white). Click on original (2nd, magenta). Click on point (P1) in the copy. Click on point (P2) in the original. Enter distance (e.g. 0.15).

3-66

6BMini nests

2007-04-20

S354EN

7. 7.1

Displaying sheet Displaying sheet with the machine environment

To be able to position the sheet in a true to life manner on the machine, the sheet can be displayed with the machine environment for the laser cutting machines. Conditions A single sheet or a nesting job has been recreated or is opened. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27).

1. Open the machine selection in the menu bar with . The "Machine selection" mask is displayed. 2. Mark the desired machine (Machine environment is only possible in case of laser cutting machines). 3. Select OK. 4. To display the machine environment: select >View >Machine layout >Display. 5. To display the slats: select >View >Machine layout >Display slats. The sheet is displayed with the machine environment, the slats and the support points.

7.2

Displaying sheet with automation components

When working with automation components, nesting sheets such that the parts can be removed properly and automatically is advantageous. When doing so, LiftMaster and SortMaster can be displayed as optical support. Conditions Automation components are allocated to the machine and configured (for "Allocating automation components to the machine and configuring", See chapter "Setting basic data"). Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed (see "Modifying the sheet view", pg. 3-27).

S354EN

2007-04-20

7BDisplaying sheet

3-67

Displaying LiftMaster

Note The LiftMaster is used only for optical support, the settings cannot be saved and cannot be considered in the nesting processors.

1. If a single sheet or a nesting job containing large parts for unloading is created for a machine with LiftMaster Sort, the LiftMaster Sort can be displayed. It is thus possible to manually ensure that the large parts are under at least three fixed-position suction cups. Check >View >Machine layout >Show LiftMaster. Displaying SortMaster Note The SortMaster is used only for optical support, the settings cannot be saved and cannot be considered in the nesting processors. Check >View >Machine layout >Show SortMaster. The SortMaster is displayed. To move the SortMaster on the sheet: select >View >Machine layout >Move SortMaster. The SortMaster hangs on the mouse. Rotate SortMaster with the wheel mouse gradually. Position SortMaster above a part and click.

2. 3.

4. 5.

3-68

7BDisplaying sheet

2007-04-20

S354EN

8. 8.1

Information about sheet layout and nesting jobs Displaying and hiding geometries of single parts

The circumscribing rectangles of the nested single parts or the geometries of the single parts can be displayed in the sheet overview. Each group of identical single parts is displayed in a different color. Condition The sheet overview is displayed with the nesting job.

1. To display the geometry of the single parts: select >View >Single part >Display.... 2. Use the mouse to click on or box in the circumscribing rectangle of the single parts one after the other. 3. To display all identical parts: click on a single part and select All. 4. To hide the geometry of the single parts: select >View >Single part >Hide.... 5. Use the mouse to click on or box in single parts one after the other.

S354EN

2007-04-20

8BInformation about sheet layout and nesting jobs

3-69

8.2

Displaying the waste of a sheet or the total sheet waste

Condition Al sheet or a nesting job has been loaded.

The waste of a sheet includes all scrap areas, i.e. not only the sheet skeleton, but all waste parts that were separated. The utilization of material is the difference between the sheet and the waste. There are three types of calculation to ascertain the material utilization:

Arithmetically exact (all internal contours are subtracted in the calculation)

Outer contour (internal contours are added to it in the calculation)

Circumscribing rectangle (calculation of the circumscribing rectangle) Fig. 50556

Types of calculation for the material utilization

Displaying waste of a sheet: select >Sheet >Display waste. or Displaying total sheet waste of a job: select >Job >Display waste. A message with the waste and the material utilization of the sheet or the nesting job is displayed.

3-70

8BInformation about sheet layout and nesting jobs

2007-04-20

S354EN

8.3

Displaying result log

The result log contains: General specifications: job name, sheet path, material, machine, number of sheets. Information about the single parts: part name, number, mirrored, ... Information about the sheets: sheet size, number of sheets with identical layout, direction of rolling. Information about the sheet layout: total number of sheets created, number of parts in a sheet, sheet dimension, waste, part names and path.

Condition A nesting job has been loaded.

Select >Job >Result log.

S354EN

2007-04-20

8BInformation about sheet layout and nesting jobs

3-71

9.

Nesting parts in tiles (optional)

The tile nesting processor is especially suitable for nesting a large number of parts. It can especially be used in the area of rapid prototyping production. The nesting processor places the parts in a defined sequence and in regular tiles on the sheet. When nesting, Nest orients itself towards the part borders as circumscribing tiles.

Part in tile

Fig. 36533

9.1

Defining parameters

Condition A nesting job has been loaded.

1. Select >Job >Parameters >Tiles.... Tip As a rule, a large number of parts are nested. It is therefore practical to store the parts in a directory. 2. Select the "Sheet data" tab and define the sheet data. Note The part name may differ only in its number and it must end with a number. The number is separated from the part name with an underscore _. 3. Enter consistent part names: part name, underscore, number. Example: PartA_101.geo, PartA_102.geo, PartA_103.geo, ... 4. In the "Options" tab, check "Grid""Use". Note The distance of the parts can never be less than the distance of the specified webs.

3-72

9BNesting parts in tiles (optional)

2007-04-20

S354EN

5. Enter the size of the grid under "Distances X, Y". Note If all parts are of the same size, then the selection of the tile size has no effect. 6. The tile size depends on the tile surface and orients itself according to the largest part. Select the desired area under "Determination of tile size": "Per job": the tile size orients itself according to the largest part of the job. "Per sheet": the tile size orients itself according to the largest part of a sheet. "Per row/column": the tile size orients itself according to the largest part of a row or column.

Different part surfaces with identical tile size

Fig. 36531

7. Select OK. 8. Select >Job >Start >Tiles.

S354EN

2007-04-20

9BNesting parts in tiles (optional)

3-73

3-74

9BNesting parts in tiles (optional)

2007-04-20

S354EN

Chapter 4

Machining parts, generating an NC program

1. 2. 3. 3.1 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 "Laser" application........................................................ 4-8 Meaning of colors and symbols................................... 4-8 Changing machine....................................................... 4-10 Changing machine......................................................... 4-10 Opening and editing files............................................ 4-11 Opening drawings, mini nests, sheets and editing them simultaneously ...................................................... 4-11 Allocating part number automatically............................. 4-12 Opening drawings, mini nests, sheets and mirroring them simultaneously ...................................................... 4-12 Opening TwinLine-capable sheet (common cut) and preparing TwinLine ................................................. 4-13 Opening TwinLine-capable sheets (common cut) and preparing TwinLine ..................................... 4-15

S98EN

2007-04-20

Machining parts, generating an NC program

4-1

4.5

4.6

Opening single part as blank and machining it immediately.................................................................... 4-16 Opening single part as a blank and machining it immediately............................................................... 4-16 Opening and editing nesting job, generating NC program and production package.................................. 4-18 Opening a nesting order ........................................... 4-19 Parameters for waste grid separation....................... 4-21 Machining single parts or sheets............................... 4-23 Selecting technology table and rules (technology data)............................................................................... 4-23 Selecting from the last used technology data........... 4-23 Selecting "new" technology data .............................. 4-24 Changing rule ................................................................ 4-26 Changing rule ........................................................... 4-26 Displaying the rule with which contours were processed ................................................................. 4-28 Generating machinings.................................................. 4-29 Machining the entire sheet or the entire single part automatically...................................................... 4-29 Selective processing................................................. 4-30 Copying machinings ...................................................... 4-31 Copying machinings ................................................. 4-31 Deleting machinings selectively..................................... 4-32 Deleting machinings selectively................................ 4-32 Disabling machinings selectively ................................... 4-33 Disabling machinings................................................ 4-33 Enabling disabled machinings .................................. 4-34 Collision test .................................................................. 4-35 Checking for collisions.............................................. 4-35 Showing log file of the collision check ...................... 4-36 Showing the technology log........................................... 4-36 Showing technology log............................................ 4-36 Showing single part information..................................... 4-37 Showing single part information ............................... 4-37 Modifying machinings................................................. 4-38 Contour parameters....................................................... 4-38 Showing contour parameters.................................... 4-38 Adopting contour parameters ................................... 4-39 Modifying contour size.............................................. 4-40 Switching contour size within a contour.................... 4-41 Cutting exact circles....................................................... 4-42 Cutting circles with diameter correction, path correction or approach start point............................. 4-44

5. 5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4 5.5 5.6

5.7

5.8 5.9

6. 6.1

6.2

4-2

0BMachining parts, generating an NC program

2007-04-20

S98EN

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7 6.8

6.9

6.10

6.11

6.12

6.13

Cutting contours with high precision (path correction) ...................................................................... 4-45 Cutting contours with high precision (path correction)................................................................. 4-45 Cutting tool path without correction .......................... 4-46 Modifying piercing.......................................................... 4-47 Modifying piercing..................................................... 4-47 Deleting piercing ....................................................... 4-48 Approaching................................................................... 4-49 Modifying parameters of the approach flags ............ 4-50 Displacing the piercing points manually, modifying the form of the approach flags manually ................................................................... 4-51 Displacing approach flags manually ......................... 4-53 Inverting approach flags ........................................... 4-54 Withdrawal ..................................................................... 4-55 Creating withdrawal flags ......................................... 4-55 Modifying the form of the withdrawal flag ................. 4-56 Optimizing end of cut ..................................................... 4-57 Optimizing the end of cut of contour......................... 4-57 Corner treatment............................................................ 4-58 Rounding corners ..................................................... 4-58 Cooling corners......................................................... 4-58 Moving loopings........................................................ 4-59 Corner treatment in application ..................................... 4-60 Recreating corner treatment..................................... 4-60 Modifying corner treatment....................................... 4-62 Deleting corner treatment ......................................... 4-63 Microjoints...................................................................... 4-64 Setting program microjoints...................................... 4-64 Setting machine microjoints...................................... 4-66 Disabling contours against machine microjoints ...... 4-67 Deleting microjoints .................................................. 4-68 Microwelds ..................................................................... 4-69 Setting microwelds.................................................... 4-70 Deleting microwelds ................................................. 4-72 Cutting up scrap............................................................. 4-73 Defining parameters for cutting scraps..................... 4-73 Cutting scrap automatically ...................................... 4-74 Cutting scrap manually ............................................. 4-75 Deleting cut scrap ..................................................... 4-75 Optimizing the machining time....................................... 4-76 Positioning to cutting distance with path finder ........ 4-76

S98EN

2007-04-20

Machining parts, generating an NC program

4-3

7. 7.1

7.2

Preparing machinings ................................................. 4-78 Sheet parting cuts.......................................................... 4-78 Setting sheet parting cut parameters........................ 4-78 Creating sheet parting cuts automatically ................ 4-80 Creating sheet parting cuts manually ....................... 4-80 Deleting polygonal sheet parting cuts step-by-step during creation ..................................... 4-81 Deleting sheet parting cuts ....................................... 4-81 Rearranging the sheet parting cuts ............................... 4-82 Rearranging sheet parting cuts ................................ 4-82 NC cycles...................................................................... 4-83 Inserting and deleting NC cycles ................................... 4-83 Inserting "Text" ......................................................... 4-83 Inserting "Cycle" ....................................................... 4-84 Deleting NC cycles ................................................... 4-85 Modifying machining sequence and positioning paths ............................................................................. 4-86 Modifying machining sequence manually...................... 4-86 Setting a particular part/contour at the beginning of the machining ....................................................... 4-86 Setting a particular part/contour at the end of the machining ........................................................... 4-87 Modifying machining sequence in any way .............. 4-87 Optimizing the machining sequence.............................. 4-89 Setting automatic, machine-dependent process options ...................................................................... 4-90 Presetting automatic path and tipping optimization in a machine-dependent manner ......... 4-93 Automatic, machine-independent optimization......... 4-94 Modifying positioning paths between single parts ......... 4-96 Modifying positioning paths manually....................... 4-97 Resetting the modified positioning paths.................. 4-97 Slats .............................................................................. 4-98 Assembling slats individually and saving them as selection......................................................................... 4-98 Calling up a saved selection and allocating it to a sheet .............................................................................. 4-99 Machinings with FlyLine (optional).......................... 4-100 Machining parts with FlyLine ....................................... 4-103 Showing or deleting FlyLine area ................................ 4-104

8. 8.1

9. 9.1

9.2

9.3

10. 10.1 10.2

11. 11.1 11.2

4-4

0BMachining parts, generating an NC program

2007-04-20

S98EN

12. 12.1

12.2

Increased acceleration .............................................. 4-105 For machines with an open control system ................. 4-105 Setting increased acceleration ............................... 4-105 Showing increased acceleration............................. 4-106 Deleting increased acceleration ............................. 4-106 Setting the dynamic level for single parts............... 4-107 Showing dynamic level ........................................... 4-107 For machines with other control systems .................... 4-108 Setting increased acceleration ............................... 4-108 Simulation................................................................... 4-108 Simulating sheet machining......................................... 4-108 Machinings with two head machines ...................... 4-109 Defining machining with two cutting heads.................. 4-109 Defining machining with one of the two cutting heads ........................................................................... 4-110 Deleting machining with two cutting heads.................. 4-111 Showing machining with two cutting heads ................. 4-111 Creating and modifying simple sheet layout .......... 4-112 Creating simple sheet layout ....................................... 4-112 Moving, rotating parts... ............................................... 4-113 Moving parts horizontally or vertically..................... 4-113 Moving parts through 2 points ................................ 4-114 Moving parts through 2 points ................................ 4-114 Moving parts through the center............................. 4-115 Part groups................................................................. 4-116 Creating part groups .................................................... 4-116 Showing part groups.................................................... 4-117 Screen display ........................................................... 4-118 Activating view options ................................................ 4-118 Highlighting machining................................................. 4-118 Automation components supported by TruTops ... 4-120 Removing parts automatically: setting LiftMaster Sort and SortMaster..................................................... 4-122 Calculating the unloading of parts automatically .... 4-122 Setting SortMaster manually .................................. 4-123 Modifying unloading with the SortMaster ............... 4-125 Setting LiftMaster Sort manually............................. 4-127 Showing parts without unloading............................ 4-128 Loading with LiftMaster Sort ................................... 4-128

13. 13.1 14. 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 15. 15.1 15.2

16. 16.1 16.2 17. 17.1 17.2 18. 18.1

S98EN

2007-04-20

Machining parts, generating an NC program

4-5

18.2

Palletizing cut parts (SortMaster) ................................ 4-129 Palletizing nesting job or single sheet .................... 4-130 Palletizing single sheets several times in various ways........................................................................ 4-134 Palletizing any sheet ordering sequences.............. 4-135 Modifying palletizing: moving, merging, rotating stack ... ................................................................... 4-137 Showing information for stacks or stack item ......... 4-139 Graphical display of the created stack.................... 4-140 Adopting total palletizing......................................... 4-141 Displaying palletizing graphic in the setup plan...... 4-141 Setup plan................................................................... 4-142 Selecting a setup plan template individually when generating the NC program ......................................... 4-142 Defining another template as the default template...... 4-143 Integrating your own company logo in the setup plans ............................................................................ 4-143 Outputting setup plan, defining options ....................... 4-144 Showing and printing setup plan ................................. 4-144 Using Microsoft Word as html editor............................ 4-145 Compressing html files ................................................ 4-146 Production package .................................................. 4-147 Generating production packages from several NC programs...................................................................... 4-147 Creating production package from every NC program........................................................................ 4-148 Creating production package from job......................... 4-149 Starting NcLink from TruTops...................................... 4-149

19. 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 20. 20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 21. 21.1 21.2 21.3 21.4 21.5 21.6 21.7

Generating an NC program....................................... 4-150 Making program settings ............................................. 4-150 Defining parameters .................................................... 4-152 Using NC post-processing programs........................... 4-153 Defining the sequence of the machinings.................... 4-154 Measuring sheet position, defining machine loading... 4-155 Defining options for output of the setup plan ............... 4-156 Editing and printing currently generated NC program........................................................................ 4-157 21.8 Editing and printing any NC program .......................... 4-157 21.9 Sending NC program to the machine .......................... 4-158 21.10 Switching time output on and off after each NC block............................................................................. 4-159

4-6

0BMachining parts, generating an NC program

2007-04-20

S98EN

22. 22.1

Table alignment ......................................................... 4-160 Transferring data to the machine................................. 4-160

S98EN

2007-04-20

Machining parts, generating an NC program

4-7

1.

"Laser" application

The following is possible in this application: Defining laser machining. Modifying and optimizing machinings. Generating an NC program. Creating production packages and sending them directly to the machine. TruTops Laser automatically creates a setup plan for each NC program. This contains all the information needed for machining.

2.

Meaning of colors and symbols

Colors and symbols in TruTops Laser and in the "Simple drawing" module (TruTops CAD) have the following meanings in the default setting:
Color Geometries Cyan Cyan Yellow Yellow Red Red Red Red White or black White or black White or black Line type: solid Star Line type: solid Line type: dotted All line types Line type: dashed Frame Line Line type: solid Line type: solid Line type: dashed '*.GMT', highlighted, Point to be point marked. Marking and/or engraving (adjustable). Vaporizing (adjustable). Geometry that is not to be machined. Slats of the pallet (show/hide through >View >Slats). Only "Simple drawing": The following action is related to the object framed in red. Only "Simple drawing": Automatic suggestion that can be confirmed or rejected. Sheet, geometry. Geometry that is to be machined normally (approaching and cutting). Geometry that is to be cut without approaching. Symbol, line type Explanation

4-8

1B"Laser" application

2007-04-20

S98EN

Color Machinings Blue

Symbol, line type Line type: solid

Explanation

Positioning paths between the contours (except in case of SprintLine). Common cut using TwinLine preparation.

Blue Cyan Cyan Yellow Yellow Yellow Green

Line type: dashed Line type: dashed Line type: solid Line type: solid Circle Star Line type: solid

Positioning paths between the contours: in case of SprintLine. Positioning paths between the parts: in case of SprintLine. Positioning paths between the parts (except in case of SprintLine). In case of common cut: overlapping cut. Collision point in case of machining definition. Corner cooling.

Laser machining. Approach flag in case of laser machining: precut. In case of common cut: preparatory cut. Precut in thick sheet. Contour part (no common cut). Approach flag in case of laser machining: reduced approach.

Magenta Magenta Magenta Magenta Red

Line type: solid Line type: dashed Line type: dotted Star Line type: solid

Positioning paths between the contours taking place at the cutting distance (path finder). Vaporizing machining type (without cutting). Piercing point: reduced piercing (laser).

In case of common cut: "Scrap area" which will be cut out coherently. Geometry and machining of the first part in the positioning sequence. Approach flag in case of laser machining: normal approach.

Red Red Red Red White

Star Circle Frame Line Line type: dashed

Piercing point: normal piercing (laser). Radius of spatter circle in case of piercing. Only "Simple drawing": The following action is related to the object framed in red. Only "Simple drawing": Automatic suggestion that can be confirmed or rejected. Positioning paths without path finder. Tab. 4-1

Colors and symbols

S98EN

2007-04-20

2BMeaning of colors and symbols

4-9

3.

Changing machine

During the TruTops installation, all data regarding the machines supported by TruTops is stored in the database provided. If there are different control systems for the same machine, a separate machine is entered for each control system.

3.1

Changing machine

1. Select >Tools >Change machine. "Machine Selection" is opened. 2. Select "All". A list of all the installed machines is displayed. 3. Select machine. 4. Select OK.

4-10

3BChanging machine

2007-04-20

S98EN

4. 4.1

Opening and editing files Opening drawings, mini nests, sheets and editing them simultaneously

Drawings, mini nests, and laid-out sheets are loaded and edited during loading. The files are loaded and edited "in a slide". The editing must not be actively "activated". You save time if you always work with the same materials and thus the same technology data. If a technology table has not been selected yet, you will be automatically led through the selection process.

Condition Appropriate files have been created and saved in TruTops CAD. (See "TruTops CAD software manual"). 1. Select >File >Open and >Edit.... The TruTops file browser is displayed. 2. Select the desired file type (single part: '*.GEO', mini nest: '*.MTL', sheet: '*.TAF'). 3. Change the directory if necessary. 4. Mark the searched file. or Enter the name of the searched file under "File name". 5. Select OK.

S98EN

2007-04-20

4BOpening and editing files

4-11

4.2

Allocating part number automatically

When opening a sheet, TruTops automatically assigns a part number for part that had no part number up to now. The part number will then be e.g. "@NOID_1". The assignment of the part number can be modified in the system rules. You can make a setting here to tell TruTops to automatically generate the part number from the GEO file names. Allocating part number from GEO file names 1. Set the value of the TeileAutoIDAusGeoFilename variable in the public system rules to 1 (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >System). 2. Enter the desired part number profile as the value of the TeileAutoID variable in the public system rules (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >System).

Allocating part numbers automatically

4.3

Opening drawings, mini nests, sheets and mirroring them simultaneously

1. Select >File >Open and >Mirror.... The "Load file" mask is displayed. 2. Select the desired axis around which mirroring is to be done. 3. Select OK. The TruTops file browser is displayed. 4. Select desired file type (single part: '*.GEO', mini nest: '*.MTL', sheet: '*.TAF'). 5. Select OK.

4-12

4BOpening and editing files

2007-04-20

S98EN

4.4

Opening TwinLine-capable sheet (common cut) and preparing TwinLine

With common cuts, the contours of parts lying next to each other are cut at the same time. The parts are laid out in such a way that the distance between them corresponds to the kerf width. Sheet skeletons are not formed.

Single part

Sheet Fig. 17142

What is TwinLine preparation: TruTops creates a common cut for all contours which are separated from each other by a distance corresponding to the kerf in the active technology table. In TwinLine preparation, the sequence of cuts is defined (common cut, preparatory cut in the neighboring contour, overlapping cut, withdrawal ...). If the sheet also contains sheet parting cuts, the preparatory cuts are integrated into the TwinLine preparation. Length of preparatory cut The preparatory cut goes over and beyond the parting cut to the neighboring contour:

S98EN

2007-04-20

4BOpening and editing files

4-13

Preparatory cut Fig. 29043

Length for overlapping

The length for overlapping extends the preparatory cut. It prevents the formation of slats when the preparatory cut and the actual cutting of the contour later "come together". The length for overlapping is thus cut "twice". The length for overlapping is dependent on the material.

Preparatory cut

Length for overlapping Fig. 29044

Length of preparatory cut: Length for overlapping: Total length of the cut into the neighboring contour: Example

15 mm 1 mm 16 mm Tab. 4-2

Minimum length of element for preparation Length of the reduced approach path Currently set kerf

This value ensures that a workpiece will not be already cut out by two preparatory cuts. The reduced approaching is mainly used for stainless steel and aluminum. TruTops reads out the value from the rules. TruTops merely displays the kerf in this mask. It cannot be modified here. (For "Modifying kerf", See chapter "Setting basic data").

4-14

4BOpening and editing files

2007-04-20

S98EN

Opening TwinLine-capable sheets (common cut) and preparing TwinLine

Conditions TwinLine-capable sheets or TwinLine-capable mini nests were created during nesting. The web widths in the X and Y directions match the kerf from the active technology table. (Ideally, the technology table that was selected in the nest for the TwinLine preparation is active. If required, modify the kerf in the technology table (See chapter "Setting basic data")). Note The distance between the parts must correspond to the kerf in the technology table. Always carry out TwinLine preparation before machining a sheet. 1. Select >File >Open and >Prepare TwinLine.... The TruTops file browser is displayed. 2. Select desired file type. 3. Mark the desired file. 4. Select OK. 5. If a technology table is not active: select the technology table and the rules (see "Changing rule", pg. 4-26). The "Parameters for Common Slitting Cuts" mask is displayed. The parameters entered are the default values recommended by TRUMPF from the active rules. They can be modified temporarily here. Note The modifications are lost as soon as a new rule is selected. The parameters can be permanently modified only in the rules (See chapter "Setting basic data"). 6. Modify parameters if necessary. 7. Add sheet parting cuts if required (see "Preparing machinings", pg. 4-78). 8. Start TwinLine preparation: Select OK. The sheet is prepared for common cuts. 9. Select >Technology >Machining >Generate >Start.

S98EN

2007-04-20

4BOpening and editing files

4-15

4.5

Opening single part as blank and machining it immediately

During blank machining, one single part is produced from a sheet. The dimensions of the raw sheet correspond to the dimensions of the single part's circumscribing rectangle. The outer contour of the single part is not machined completely because the contour of the raw sheet corresponds in sections to the outer contour of the single part.

Fig. 29051

Opening single part as a blank and machining it immediately

Opening file 1. Select >File >Open and >Prepare blank.... The TruTops file browser is displayed. 2. Select the desired file type ('*.GEO', '*.MTL', '*.TAF'). 3. Mark the searched file. 4. Select OK. 5. If a technology table is not active: select the technology table and the rule (see "Changing rule", pg. 4-26). The "Parameters for Blank Processing" mask is displayed. The parameters entered here are the default values recommended by TRUMPF from the active rule. They can be modified temporarily here. The modifications are lost as soon as a new rule is selected. ("For Modifying parameters permanently", See chapter "Setting basic data".)

4-16

4BOpening and editing files

2007-04-20

S98EN

Selecting contour type

6.

Selecting approach mode

Selecting settings for approach and withdrawal

Select "Contour type", "Open". The contour type is read out from the rule present. Depending on the rule, "open contour" means small, medium or large contours. or Select contour type "Small", "Medium" or "Large". The contour type is allocated, independent of the specification in the rule. 7. Select "Approach mode", "Normal" or "Reduced". (For an overview of piercing and approaching for various materials, refer to the current data collection for your machine). 8. Enter the "measuring distance" (1). At this distance (starting from the sheet edge), the height regulation system measures the position of the sheet surface.

1 2

Measuring distance Approach path to the sheet

Reduced approach path in the sheet

4+5 Travel without height regulation 5 Withdrawal path from the sheet Fig. 29678

2+4 Travel without height regulation Settings for approach and withdrawal

9. Enter "Travel without height regulation" (2+4 or 4+5): the height regulation system is not to be switched on when the beam moves into the sheet from outside. (Risk of collision: the cutting head would move down to its lowest point and hit the sheet when it moves to cut into it.) The machine switches the height regulation system on only when the laser has covered the "Travel without height regulation".) 10. To approach with laser beam cutting machines with reduced laser power ("Approach mode", "Reduced" are in effect): enter "Reduced approach path in the sheet" (3).

S98EN

2007-04-20

4BOpening and editing files

4-17

Selecting raw sheet

Resetting parameters to values from the rules

11. Enter "Approach path to the sheet" (2). (= Distance between the switch-on position of the beam (outside the sheet) and the sheet edge. The height regulation system is switched off.) 12. Enter "Withdrawal path from the sheet" (5). (Distance between the sheet edge and the switch-off position of the beam. The height regulation system is switched off.) 13. If the precut sheet is exactly the size of the single part's circumscribing rectangle: select "Circumscribing rectangle of the part". Note Note The sheet blank must be present as a drawing in *.GEO format. 14. To place the single part on a sheet blank: select "Load drawing". 15. If at least one edge of single part corresponds to the outer edge of the raw sheet: select "Blank" and enter the dimensions of the sheet. The sheet is placed at the zero point of the single part. 16. Select Set. 17. Select OK. If "Load drawing" has been selected, the "Open file" mask is displayed. 18. Select sheet blank and Select OK. The blank is loaded and machined using the active technology data. The technology log is outputted automatically.

4.6

Opening and editing nesting job, generating NC program and production package

Overview of the section: TwinLine-preparing the nesting job. Automatically creating sheet parting cuts to separate the sheet skeleton. Create machinings. Generate an NC program. Print out the setup plan automatically. Load machined sheets as '*.TMT'. Creating production package directly from the job (only on machines with Siemens control system).

4-18

4BOpening and editing files

2007-04-20

S98EN

Opening a nesting order

Condition Nesting job was created in nest. Opening a nesting job 1. Select >Job >Open job.... 2. Mark the desired nesting order and Select OK. The "Sheet job processing defaults" mask is displayed. Note The actions are valid for each single sheet of the nesting job. 3. Mark the desired actions. If "Create machining" and "Generate NC program" are deselected, the nesting job can be machined only sheet by sheet and no production package is generated. If "Display NC mask" is deselected, the NC mask is displayed only for the first sheet of the job and the NC programs are created one after the other with the settings for the first sheet. If "Display NC mask" is checked, the NC mask is displayed one after the other for all sheets of the job. If "Save Tmts TMT" is selected, *.TMT is displayed when loading a sheet provided it is present in the file browser. If no *.TMT is found for the selected sheet, a *.TAF is displayed. If a production package is to be created and the machine is connected to CELL-SERVER or TC-CELL: set the value of the NcLinkLiteModus variable in the public machine rules to 1 (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >Machine, See chapter "Setting basic data", machine-dependent rule). If the data in the production packages is missing: modify the value of the NcLinkProduktionsPlanTyp variable in the public machine rules (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >Machine, See chapter "Setting basic data"). 4. To execute the nesting job completely: select "Execute job completely". or To load the single sheets of a nesting job one after the other and to execute them one after the other: select "Execute job sheet by sheet".

S98EN

2007-04-20

4BOpening and editing files

4-19

TwinLine-preparing the nesting job Separating waste grid

Executing nesting job completely

Executing nesting job sheet by sheet

5. To create a production package from a nesting job: select "Create production package from job". 6. Select OK. 7. If technology data is not present: select the technology table and the rule. 8. If "TwinLine preparation" has been selected, the "Parameters for Common Slitting Cuts" mask is displayed. 9. Modify parameters for common cuts if required and Select OK. 10. If "Separate waste grid" has been selected, the "Parameters for waste grid separation" mask is displayed. Note If the sheet parting cuts for separating the waste grid are executed before the machining of the sheet, these cannot be combined with the common cuts (TwinLine). 11. Modify parameters if necessary and Select OK. 12. If "Execute job completely" has been selected, the entire nesting job is executed, the NC program is created and in the end, the last sheet of the nesting job is displayed. If "Create production package" has also been selected, the production package is created and opened with the editor. 13. If "Execute job sheet by sheet" has been selected, the first sheet of the nesting job is loaded. 14. If "Create machining" has been deselected: machine sheet through >Technology >Machining >Create >Start. 15. If "Generate NC program" has been deselected: select >NC program >NC program >Start, enter the parameters for the NC program and Select OK. 16. Select >Job >Next sheet or >Previous sheet. 17. Repeat steps 14 to 16 until all sheets have been machined.

4-20

4BOpening and editing files

2007-04-20

S98EN

Parameters for waste grid separation

The parameters entered in the "Parameters for waste grid separation" mask are the default values recommended by TRUMPF from the active rules. They can be modified temporarily here. The modifications are lost as soon as a new rule is selected. (For modifying parameters permanently, See chapter "Setting basic data".) Selecting contour type 1. Select "Contour type""Open". The contour type is read out from the rule present. Depending on the process rule, "open contour" means small, medium or large contours. or Select contour type "Small", "Medium" or "Large". The contour type is allocated, independent of the specification in the rule. 2. Select "Approach mode", "Normal" or "Reduced". (For an overview of piercing and approaching for various materials, refer to the current data collection for your machine). 3. Enter the "measuring distance" (1). At this distance (starting from the sheet edge), the height regulation system measures the position of the sheet surface.

Selecting approach mode

Selecting settings for approach and withdrawal

1 2

Measuring distance Approach path to the sheet

Reduced approach path in the sheet

4+5 Travel without height regulation 5 Withdrawal path from the sheet Fig. 29678

2+4 Travel without height regulation Settings for approach and withdrawal

S98EN

2007-04-20

4BOpening and editing files

4-21

Resetting parameters to values from the rules

4. Enter "Travel without height regulation" (2+4 or 4+5): the height regulation system is not to be switched on when the beam moves into the sheet from outside. (Risk of collision: the cutting head would move down to its lowest point and hit the sheet when it moves to cut into it.) The machine switches the height regulation system on only when the laser has covered the "Travel without height regulation". 5. To approach with laser beam cutting machines with reduced laser power ("Approach mode", "Reduced" are in effect): enter "Reduced approach path in the sheet" (3). 6. Enter "Approach path to the sheet" (2). (= Distance between the switch-on position of the beam (outside the sheet) and the sheet edge. The height regulation system is switched off.) 7. Enter "Withdrawal path from the sheet" (5). (Distance between the sheet edge and the switch-off position of the beam. The height regulation system is switched off.) Note If the sheet parting cuts for separating the waste grid are executed before the machining of the sheet, these cannot be combined with the common cuts (TwinLine). 8. Select desired "Settings for sheet separating cuts" (before or after machining the sheet?). 9. Enter the web widths in X and Y. 10. Enter the "web width" and the "Distance to sheet margin". 11. Select Set. 12. Select OK.

4-22

4BOpening and editing files

2007-04-20

S98EN

5. 5.1

Machining single parts or sheets Selecting technology table and rules (technology data)

The active machine, the technology table and the rules are displayed in the menu bar:

1 2

Active machine Active technology table

Associated rules Fig. 50654en

Selecting from the last used technology data

Condition The machine with which the sheet or the single part is to be machined is active. 1. Open the selection field Activate tool with . The mask with the last used technology tables and rules is displayed. 2. Mark the technology table with the associated rules, which is suitable for the active machine. (If the selected technology table is not suitable for the active machine, a message to this effect is displayed.) The technology table and the rules are displayed in the selection field.

S98EN

2007-04-20

5BMachining single parts or sheets

4-23

Selecting "new" technology data

Condition The machine with which the sheet or the single part is to be machined is active. Selecting a technology table 1. Select >Tools >Select.... The "Selection of technology tables" mask is displayed.

Fig. 51001en

Defining the number of the technology table Defining the machine group

2. If required, search for the desired technology table depending on the various selection criteria. The selection criteria can be selected individually or combined. 3. Check the "Table No.". 4. Enter the number of the technology table. 5. Check the "Group". or Enter the desired machine group in the input field. or Open the selection field Group with . The "Selection of group" mask is displayed. 6. To sort the selection of group for the next search for a technology table, click on "Machine group", "Sorting" or "Machine name", "Sorting". The desired sorting is offered during the next search. 7. To search for a machine or a machine group, enter filter and select Search. 8. Mark the desired machine group and Select OK.

4-24

5BMachining single parts or sheets

2007-04-20

S98EN

Defining material type

Defining the maximum laser power Defining the material thickness Starting a search for the suitable technology table

Selecting the corresponding rule

9. Select "Material ID". Tip Using the MaterialInchMetricSelection variable, the American measuring system in the material selection can also be activated for tables and rules. Set the value of the MaterialInchMetricSelection variable in the public system rules to 1(See chapter "Setting basic data"). 10. Enter the desired material. or Open the selection field with . The "Select material" mask is displayed. 11. Mark the material type. The "Selection of Technology Tables" mask now contains the new material type. Tip If there is no separate technology table for a material, TruTops filters for a corresponding material with the same sheet thickness in the first step. If TruTops does not find a corresponding material, then it filters only for the sheet thickness in the second step. Advantage: it is now possible to use default technology tables for several materials. 12. Select "Power". 13. Enter the power in watts. 14. Select "material thickness". (The material thickness search criteria will then remain in effect from one session to the next.) 15. Enter the material thickness in mm. 16. When the search criteria are established, left click on Search .... For laser power, one filters for small/equal values. or Right click on Search.... For laser power, one filters for precisely the power value entered. 17. Mark the desired technology table. The "Select Process Rule" mask is displayed. 18. Select "TRUMPF" or "Customer" depending on whether an original rule to be allocated is of TRUMPF or of a customer. (For "Copying rules and creating new ones", See chapter "Setting basic data"). 19. Select the desired rule. 20. Select OK. The "Selection of Technology Tables" mask now shows the name of the rule as well.

S98EN

2007-04-20

5BMachining single parts or sheets

4-25

Showing contents

21. To show the contents of the technology table, select Laser table. The technology table is opened with an editor. 22. To show the contents of the rule, select Rules. The rule is opened with an editor. 23. Select OK.

5.2

Changing rule

Select another rule that fits the technology table. To subsequently machine the entire sheet or the entire single part with the new rule Use a rule which is not allocated to the active technology table. To subsequently machine single contours with the new rule.

Changing rule
Opening sheet 1. Open the machined sheet in which another rule is to be set. 2. Select >Tools >Set rules.... The "Select Process Rule" mask is displayed.

Fig. 51002en

4-26

5BMachining single parts or sheets

2007-04-20

S98EN

Searching for rule

Defining the rule name Defining the machine group

Defining the maximum laser power Defining material type

Defining the material thickness Defining gas pressure Searching for suitable rule

3. The desired rule can be searched for as per various selection criteria. The selection criteria can be selected individually or combined. "Group" and "Material ID" are activated by default. Tip The percent sign (%) is a place holder for arbitrary characters. This makes searching easier when the exact designation or number is not known. Example: 1% = 1, then no character or one or more arbitrary characters. %1 = no character or one or more arbitrary characters, then 1. 4. Select "Rule name". 5. Enter the rule name. 6. Either Check "Group". Enter the desired machine group into the input field. or Open selection field "Group" with . The "Select group" mask is displayed. Mark the desired machine group. The "Select Process Rule" mask is displayed again. It now contains the new machine group. 7. Select "Power". 8. Enter the power in watts. 9. Select "Material ID". 10. Enter the desired material. or Open selection field with . The "Material selection" mask is displayed. 11. Mark the material type. The "Selection of Technology Tables" mask now contains the new material type. 12. Select "material thickness". (The material thickness search criteria will then remain in effect from one session to the next.) 13. Enter the material thickness in mm. 14. Select the "gas pressure". 15. Select "Standard" or "High". 16. When the search criteria are established, left click on Search .... For laser power, one filters for small/equal values. or Right click on Search.... For laser power, one filters for precisely the power value entered. 17. Mark the desired rule.

S98EN

2007-04-20

5BMachining single parts or sheets

4-27

Displaying the contents of the rule

18. Under "Show contents", select Rule. The contents of the rule are displayed. 19. To print the rule, select: Print. 20. To close the displayed rule: Select OK. 21. Select OK. The new rule is now active. TruTops uses this rule as soon as a new machining is created.

Displaying the rule with which contours were processed

Condition A machined sheet or a machined processed single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Tools >Show rules. 2. Click on contour. The message displays with which rule the contour has been machined.

4-28

5BMachining single parts or sheets

2007-04-20

S98EN

5.3

Generating machinings

Overview of the section: Machine the entire sheet or the entire single part automatically. Machine the machined sheet or the machined single part using different technology data. Machine selectively. Show rules with which the contours have been machined. Copy machinings. Delete machinings. Disable machinings, enable disabled machinings. Check for collisions. Show the machining and error status of the parts and the contours.

Machining the entire sheet or the entire single part automatically

Condition A sheet or a single part has been loaded. Note If a sheet/a single part is to be machined, the entire sheet/the entire single part is machined using the active technology table and the active rules. Manual modifications and optimizations of already machined sheets or single parts are lost during remachining. 1. Select technology table and rules. The technology table and the rules are displayed in the mask head. 2. Select >Technology >Machining >generate >Start. The single part or the sheet is processed using the active technology data. If the machining proceeds without problems, this is displayed on the screen:

S98EN

2007-04-20

5BMachining single parts or sheets

4-29

Fig. 51003en

3. If the machining does not proceed without problems (e.g. due to disabled contours or collisions), the technology log is displayed. The technology log contains information as to why the machining did not proceed without problems (see "Showing the technology log", pg. 4-36).

Selective processing
Application examples: Machining machined contours or single parts using a different technology table or a different rule. Machining non machined contours or single parts only partially. Conditions A sheet or a single part has been loaded. The technology data to be used for machining is available. Note Only the original part and all its copies can be processed selectively. Impermissible areas of applications are grayed out. 1. Select >Technology >Machining >Create.

4-30

5BMachining single parts or sheets

2007-04-20

S98EN

2. Mark the area of application: Contour: one contour in all identical parts is selectively processed. Part + Copies: one single part and all its copies are selectively processed. Sheet: Everything is machined (as in case of >Technology >Machining >Generate >Start). 3. One after the other, click on the contours or parts that are to be selectively machined. 4. To finish, click on End.

5.4

Copying machinings

Copying machinings
The machinings can be copied and transferred to identical contours. When copying machinings, all contour parameters are also transferred. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Machining >Copy. 2. Click on the contour whose machining is to be copied. The "Copy machining" mask is displayed. 3. Open "Use for" with . 4. Select the area of application: To transfer the machining to a single, identical contour: select Contour. To transfer the machinings to all identical contours: select All identical contours in the part. To transfer the machinings to all identical contours on the sheet: select All identical contours on the sheet. 5. Select OK. 6. Depending on the area of application, click on or, in case of single parts, box in contours using a mouse, to which the machining should be transferred. The relevant contours are displayed in yellow for a short period. 7. Then Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

S98EN

2007-04-20

5BMachining single parts or sheets

4-31

5.5

Deleting machinings selectively

"Delete" deletes the machining of the selected contours. All manual modifications to the machining, including the optimizations, are lost.

Deleting machinings selectively

Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Note Only the machining of an original part/an original contour and all their copies can be deleted selectively. 1. Select >Technology >Machining >Delete. Tip If machinings are not deleted but only disabled, all manual modifications and optimizations are retained. 2. Mark the area of application: Contour: the machining of a contour is deleted in all identical parts. Part+copy: the machining of a single part is deleted. Sheet: all machinings are deleted. 3. If the >Contour or >Part + Copies area of application has been selected, one after the other, click on contours or single parts whose machining is to be deleted. 4. To finish, click on End.

4-32

5BMachining single parts or sheets

2007-04-20

S98EN

5.6

Disabling machinings selectively

Disabling machinings
Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. What effect does "Disable machining" have? The machining of the disabled contours, including all manual modifications and optimizations, are retained but not carried out. 1. Select >Technology >Machining >Disable. Note Disabled machinings in the >Until part area of application cannot be enabled again. 2. Mark the area of application: Contour: The machining of a contour is disabled in all identical parts. Single part: The machining of a single part is disabled. Until part: The machining up to a certain part is disabled. Sheet: All machinings are disabled. 3. If the >Contour or >Single part area of application has been selected, click on contours or single parts one after the other whose machining is to be disabled. 4. To finish, click on End.

S98EN

2007-04-20

5BMachining single parts or sheets

4-33

Enabling disabled machinings

Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The sheet or single part contains disabled machinings. 1. Select >Technology >Machining >Enable. 2. Mark the area of application: Contour: The machining of a contour is enabled in all identical parts. Single part: The machining of a single part is enabled. Sheet: All machinings are enabled. 3. If the >Contour or >Single part area of application has been selected, click on contours or single parts one after the other whose machining is to be enabled. 4. To finish, click on End. The machinings including the manual modifications are displayed again.

4-34

5BMachining single parts or sheets

2007-04-20

S98EN

5.7
What are collisions?

Collision test

Collisions are violations of a contour. Example: Piercing holes are larger than the contours to be cut. Example: Approach flags are too close to other contours.

Checking for collisions

Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Checking for collisions Selecting parameters 1. Select >Technology >Check for collisions. The "Collision check" mask is displayed. 2. Click on the desired parameters under "Check": "None": can be used to disable the collision check for specific machinings (e.g. for piercing). "Correct": the machining strategies leading to collisions (example: the length of the approach flag is reduced) are modified. The specifications from the rules are adhered to here. "Delete if correction impossible": collisions which cannot be avoided are not machined. The machining is deleted. 3. If required, select "Generate logfile". 4. To check collisions within a part, select "Internal collision". To additionally limit the check to a certain part, check "Apply only to part to pick". Confirm with OK and click on the part. 5. To check collisions between parts, select "External collision". To limit the check additionally to two specific parts, select "Apply only to two parts to pick". Confirm with OK and click on the two parts. 6. To check collisions within and between all parts, select "Internal and external collisions" and Select OK. The collision points are displayed on the screen using yellow circles and the log file is outputted if required.

Generating log file

S98EN

2007-04-20

5BMachining single parts or sheets

4-35

Showing log file of the collision check

The log file of the last collision check can be displayed and printed here. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Collision log. The log file created last is displayed. 2. Select Print. 3. To close the log file: Select OK.

5.8

Showing the technology log

Showing technology log

If the machining of a part or a sheet does not proceed problem-free (e.g. a part was not completely machined), then this is recorded in the technology log. The technology log contains the following specifications: Name of the sheet and path under which the sheet is saved. Machining strategy (.g. "Grid machining" or "TwinLine"). Number of nested, processed and disabled parts and contours on the sheet. Name of the parts and path under which the parts are saved. Rules used when machining the parts. Overview of contour machinings (e.g. "Vaporizing", "Marking" ...). Name of the part where collisions have occurred. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Machining >Technology log. The technology log is displayed. 2. Select Print. 3. Select OK.

4-36

5BMachining single parts or sheets

2007-04-20

S98EN

5.9

Showing single part information

Showing single part information

The single part information contains the following details: Geo file name. Geo file path. Number of the drawing. Customer name from the drawing. Dimensions of the part. Area of the part. Rule with which the part has been machined. Number of identical parts on the sheet. Whether the Geo has been prepared. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >View >Information >Part. 2. Click on the contour. The "Part info" mask is displayed. 3. Select OK.

S98EN

2007-04-20

5BMachining single parts or sheets

4-37

6. 6.1

Modifying machinings Contour parameters

Showing contour parameters

The following parameters can be displayed together with the corresponding values from the rule used: Contour size. Rule used. Surface area of the contour, associated value range from the rule. Diameter "d" of a projected circle with the surface area of the affected contour. Will cutting be carried out with the path correction? Were program microjoints programmed at the end of the contour? If yes: with which length? Piercing type. Length, radius, angle and type of approach flag (with associated value range from the rule). Length, radius, angle and type of withdrawal flag (with associated value range from the rule). Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Contour parameters >Show. The "Show contour parameters" mask is displayed. 2. If required, change to the "Approach/Withdrawal parameters" tab. 3. To end the display: Select OK.

4-38

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

Adopting contour parameters

The contour parameters of a contour (e.g. the values from the rule) can be transferred to other contours. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Contour parameters >Adopt.... 2. Click on the contour whose contour parameters are to be adopted. The "Adopt contour parameters" mask is displayed. 3. Open "Use for" with . 4. Select the area of application: To transfer the contour parameters to a single contour: select Contour. To transfer the contour parameters to all identical contours: select All identical contours in the part. To transfer the contour parameters to all contours with identical contour size: select All contours with identical contour size in the part. To transfer the contour parameters to all contours: select All contours in the part. To transfer the contour parameters to all identical contours on the sheet: select All identical contours on the sheet. To transfer the contour parameters to all contours with identical contour size on the sheet: select All contours with identical contour size on the sheet. To transfer the contour parameters to all contours on the sheet: select All contours on the sheet. 5. Select OK. 6. Depending on the area of application, click on or, for single parts, box in the contours using the mouse, upon which you wish to transfer the contour parameters. The relevant contours are displayed in yellow for a short period. 7. Then Press <Enter > or <Return > ( ).

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-39

Modifying contour size

Overview of the section: Modify contour size so that the contour is machined with the technology data for the new contour size. Manual modifications (e.g. to the form of the approach flag) remain in effect thereby. Modify contour size and adopt the parameters for the new contour size. The manual modifications for piercing and in the form of the approach and withdrawal flags are discarded and are reset to the specifications from the rule for the new contour size. Modify contour size and set all contour parameters to the default values from the rule for the new contour size. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Contour parameters >Set contour size. 2. Click on the contour whose contour size is to be modified. The "Change contour size" mask is displayed. 3. Open "Contour size" with . 4. Select the new contour size desired. 5. Open "Use for" with . 6. Select the area of application: To change only the contour size of the selected single contour: select Contour. To change the contour size of all identical contours: select All identical contours in the part. To change the contour size in all contours with identical contour size: select All contours with identical contour size in the part. To change the contour size of all contours: select All contours in the part. To change the contour size of all identical contours on the sheet: select All identical contours on the sheet. To change the contour size of all contours with identical contour size on the sheet: select All contours with identical contour size on the sheet. To change the contour size of all contours on the sheet: select All contours on the sheet.

4-40

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

7. Check "Transfer process rule parameters". Manual modifications to the contour parameters (e.g. modified piercing type, activated approach and withdrawal flag ) are discarded and reset to the specifications from the rule for the new contour size. 8. Select OK. The "Change contour size" mask is displayed again. 9. Select OK. 10. Depending on the area of application, either click on or, for single parts, box in the contours using the mouse, whose contour size (and if required contour parameters) are to be set to the (same) value. The relevant contours are displayed in yellow for a short period. 11. Then Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Switching contour size within a contour

Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Switching contour size 1. Select >Technology >Contour parameters >Switch contour size.... 2. Click on the first point on the contour from which the contour size is to be switched (in direction of machining). The mask "Switch contour" is displayed. 3. Select new contour size. 4. Select OK. 5. Click on the second point on the contour from which the contour size is to be switched (in direction of machining). The contour between these two points is set to the desired size. The contours keep their original contour size before and afterwards. The switching is represented by cyan arrows. The direction of the arrows shows the switching direction. The size of the arrows symbolizes the contour size before and after the switching. 6. To finish, click on End. 7. Select >Technology >Contour parameters >Delete contour size switching. 8. Select the area of application. 9. Click on the contour whose contour switching(s) should be deleted. 10. To finish, click on End.

Deleting switching

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-41

6.2

Cutting exact circles

The machining of circles can be optimized in the following ways: Cut circles with path correction. Cut circles with diameter correction. Cut circles with the help of "Approach start point" without lug. Cutting circles with path correction A circle must be cut with path correction for high accuracy. If circles are cut with path correction, TruTops does not output an equidistant in the NC text, but rather the contour itself. The operator enters the value for the path correction at the machine. The path correction corresponds to the kerf. The operator measures the kerf on a cut circle. In case of laser cutting machines, the path correction can be switched on or off. If a small circle is cut at high speed on a machine, it can occur that the control system no longer corrects the drag of the axes. The circle is then cut with a diameter smaller than the programmed diameter. TruTops gives you the option to correct this effect by programming a larger diameter. The diameter correction affects the NC output, but not the geometry (drawing) of the part. The corrective value for the diameter can be calculated by TruTops with the help of the machine and cutting parameters (automatic diameter correction) or can be entered manually (manual diameter correction). When cutting a circular contour, a so-called lug often remains which juts out into the circle. If, for instance, a tube is to be put through such a circle, the lug must be removed manually.

Cutting circles with diameter correction

Cutting circles through "approach start point" without lug

Circle with lug

Fig. 18346

To cut a circular contour without a lug, it is possible to cut beyond the programmed contour at the approach position. We call the notch which results in the contour the "approach start point".

4-42

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

1 2

Transition radius Depth of the approach start point

Radius Fig. 29875

Approach start point

Combining different circle corrections

Path correction, diameter correction and approach start points can be combined.

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-43

Cutting circles with diameter correction, path correction or approach start point
Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Cutting with diameter correction 1. Select >Technology >Tool path >Create circle correction... . The "Circle correction" mask is displayed. Note Ensure that the contour at the machine is machined with the speed and the acceleration that have been programmed in TruTops. (Have the values in the technology table at the machine been modified?) Ensure that the kerf at the machine corresponds to the kerf that has been programmed. 2. Either Select "Correction of diameter", "automatic". TruTops calculates a corrective value for the diameter with the help of the machine and cutting parameters. or Select "Diameter correction", "Manual". Enter the corrective value. TruTops increases the circle diameter by the corrective value entered. 3. Check "With cutter path compensation". The machine operator can now correct the diameter of the circle cut by entering a different kerf. 4. Check "Approach start point". Note If an approach start point has been created, the machining (especially the approach and withdrawal flags) may no longer be modified one after the other. 5. Enter radius (3), depth (2) and transition radius (1) (see "Fig. 29875", pg. 4-43). 6. For machines with Bosch or TASC control systems, a withdrawal flag must be programmed in order to dismantle the path correction which the machine has constructed when approaching the contour: select "Withdrawal". 7. Enter radius, length and angle of the withdrawal flag.

Cutting with path correction

Generating approach start point

Creating a withdrawal flag for machines with Bosch or TASC control systems

4-44

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

Selecting the area of application

For Contour or Part + Copy areas of application

8. Select the area of application: "Contour": cutting a circle of a single contour in all identical parts using circle correction. "Part + Copy": cutting circles in one part and all its copies with circle correction. "Sheet": cutting all the circles on a sheet with circle correction. 9. Select OK. 10. One after the other, click on circles which are to be cut with diameter correction, path correction or approach start point. 11. To finish, click on End.

6.3

Cutting contours with high precision (path correction)

Cutting contours with high precision (path correction)

Not only circles (see "Cutting exact circles", pg. 4-42), but all other contour can also be cut with path correction. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Tool path >Set path correction. 2. Select the area of application: To cut one single contour with path correction: select Contour. To cut all identical contours with path correction: select All identical contours in the part. To cut all contours with identical contour size with path correction: select All contours with identical contour size in the part. To cut all contours in the part with path correction: select All contours in the part. To cut all identical contours on the sheet with path correction: select All identical contours on the sheet. To cut all contours with the identical contour size on the sheet with path correction: select All contours with identical contour size on the sheet. To cut all contours on the sheet with path correction: select All contours on the sheet.

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-45

3. Depending on the area of application, click on or, for single parts, box in the contours using the mouse, which are to be cut with path correction. The relevant contours are displayed in yellow for a short period. 4. To finish, click on End.

Cutting tool path without correction

If, for example, very narrow slottings that are smaller than the laser beam diameter are to be cut in a contour, TruTops could not machine these slottings. The machining can be forced with the "Tool path not corrected" selection. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded.

Corrected tool path

Not corrected tool path Fig. 51008

Example: narrow slotting

1. To calculate the tool path (equidistant) without the correction of overcuttings: select >Technology >Tool path >Do not correct tool path. 2. Click one after the other on the contour to be cut without correction. 3. To finish, click on End.

4-46

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

6.4

Modifying piercing

Modifying piercing
Depending on the size of the contour, the manner of piercing is decided: soft with reduced power or normal with full power. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Note If the piercing type is modified for a contour, it has the same effect on all identical parts on the sheet if no part groups have been formed (see "Part groups", pg. 4-116). If machinings are modified manually, then the machinings may not be recreated subsequently. Otherwise the manual modifications are lost. 1. Select >Technology >Modify >Modify piercing. The "Piercing" mask is displayed. 2. Select "Piercing type". 3. Open "Use for" with . 4. Select the area of application: To modify the approach parameters of a single contour: select Contour. To modify the approach parameters of all identical contours: select All identical contours in the part. To modify the approach parameters of all contours with identical contour size: select All contours with identical contour size in the part. To modify the approach parameters of all contours: select All contours in the part. To modify the approach parameters of all identical contours on the sheet: select All identical contours on the sheet. To modify the approach parameters of all contours with identical contour size on the sheet: select All contours with identical contour size on the sheet. To modify the approach parameters of all contours on the sheet: select All contours on the sheet. 5. Select OK. 6. One after the other, click on all contours on which the laser beam should pierce in the desired way. 7. To finish, click on End. The other piercing type is presented with a change in color: Normal piercing: star, red. Reduced piercing: star, magenta.

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-47

Deleting piercing
Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Modify >Delete piercing. 2. One after the other, click on all contours on which the modified piercing type is to be deleted. 3. To finish, click on End.

4-48

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

6.5

Approaching

Approach flags consist of the following elements: Piercing point. Approach path (for laser cutting machines possibly partially "reduced"), with or without approach radius. Approach radius 0 mm = linear approach. Angle 0 on approaching a corner = tangential approach. Angle 0 on approaching a line = vertical approach.

A B c d 1

Piercing point Straight part of approach path Approach radius Contour Starting point of the approach path

2 3 + -

Transition of the approach flag End point of the approach flag Appr. angle approximately 10 Appr. angle approximately -10

Approach flag with and without approach radius

Fig. 42509

Note Collisions can occur with machinings that have already been defined if approach flags are modified: carry out a collision check after the modification(see "Collision test", pg. 4-35). Modifications in the approach flags always have an effect on all identical parts of a sheet if no part groups have been formed (see "Part groups", pg. 4-116).

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-49

Modifying parameters of the approach flags

The following parameters of the approach flags can be modified: Length, radius, angle. Approach mode (normal or reduced; for machines with Bosch control systems, Reduced II). If these approach parameters are modified, TruTops automatically calculates the position of the piercing points and approach flags. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Modify >Modify approaching.... 2. Select >Values last used. or Select >Values from contour. Click on the contour whose approach parameters are to be modified. The "Approach parameters" mask is displayed. The mask preallocated with either the last entered values or with the values of the selected contour from the current rules. 3. In order to read in the approach parameters of a contour where necessary: select Read. 4. Click on the contour whose approach parameters are to be read in. Note The parameters can be permanently modified only in the rules (See chapter "Setting basic data"). 5. 6. 7. 8. Enter or modify length, radius and angle. Select the approach mode "normal" or "reduced". Open "Use for" with . Select the area of application: To modify the approach parameters of a single contour: select Contour. To modify the approach parameters of all identical contours: select All identical contours in the part. To modify the approach parameters of all contours with identical contour size: select All contours with identical contour size in the part.

4-50

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

To modify the approach parameters of all contours: select All contours in the part. To modify the approach parameters of all identical contours on the sheet: select All identical contours on the sheet. To modify the approach parameters of all contours with identical contour size on the sheet: select All contours with identical contour size on the sheet. To modify the approach parameters of all contours on the sheet: select All contours on the sheet. 9. Select OK. 10. Depending on the area of application, click on the contours whose approach flags should obtain the selected parameters. 11. To finish, click on End. All modified contours are displayed in yellow.

Displacing the piercing points manually, modifying the form of the approach flags manually
The following modifications can be made here: Displacing the piercing points by clicking using the mouse. Modifying the length and the angle of the approach flags by clicking using the mouse. Modifying the approach radii by clicking using the mouse. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded.

Fig. 4769

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-51

a b c d

Piercing point Straight part of approach path Approach radius Contour

1 2 3

Starting point of the approach path Transition from straight line to banana End point of approach flag Fig. 27688

Approach flag with and without approach radius

Displacing piercing point

1. 2. 3.

Modify approach radius

4. 5. 6. 7.

Note If the angle of an approach flag is modified, the approach radius is retained. The transition from the approach radius to the straight part of the approach flag will no longer be tangential. Select >Technology >Modify >Modify approach form. Click on the piercing point (a) or the straight part of the approach path (b) (see "Fig. 27688", pg. 4-52). Click on the new end point (3). or Enter the coordinates of the new end point (3). To finish, click on End. Click on the approach radius (c)(see "Fig. 27688", pg. 4-52). Click on the new end point (3). To finish, click on End.

4-52

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

Displacing approach flags manually

If the approach flags are displaced manually, the contour is started at a different point when the workpiece is machined. Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The contour whose approach flag is to be displaced must be closed. Note If the type the piercing has been modified previously (e.g. from normal to reduced): TruTops automatically resets the piercing back to the specifications from the rules. Modifications in the approach flags always have an effect on all identical parts of a sheet if no part groups have been formed (see "Part groups", pg. 4-116). If contours have several program or machine microjoints, approach flags can no longer be displaced (see "Microjoints", pg. 4-64). 1. Select >Technology >Modify >Displace approaching. 2. Click on the new P1 point on the contour to which the approach flag should be attached:

Fig. 4770

3. To finish, click on End.

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-53

Inverting approach flags

When inverting the approach flag, the contour is cut in the reverse direction. Note If the type of piercing has been modified previously (.g. from normal to reduced): TruTops automatically resets the piercing back to the specifications from the rules. Modifications in the approach flags always have an effect on all identical parts of a sheet if no part groups have been formed (see "Part groups", pg. 4-116). 1. Select >Technology >Modify >Invert approaching. 2. One after the other, click on all contours whose approach flags are to be inverted. 3. To finish, click on End. The approach flag is inverted. The contour is cut in the reverse direction.

Fig. 38456

4-54

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

6.6

Withdrawal

Withdrawal flags consist of the following parts: Withdraw path with or without withdrawal radius.

Creating withdrawal flags

Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Note New machining may not be created when creating withdrawal flags. Otherwise the withdrawal flags will be lost. 1. Select >Technology >Modify >Modify withdrawal.... Note The parameters can be permanently modified only in the rules (See chapter "Setting basic data"). 2. Select >Values last used. or Select >Values from contour. Click on the contour whose withdrawal flags are to be modified. The "Withdrawal parameters" mask is displayed. The mask is preallocated with either the values of the clicked contour or (when opening for the first time) with the values of a small contour from the current rules. 3. To read in the withdrawal parameters of a contour if necessary, select Read. 4. Click on the contour. 5. Select "Withdrawal activated". 6. Enter or modify length, radius and angle. "Length" 0 mm: do not generate a withdrawal flag. "Radius" 0 mm: linear withdrawal. "Angle" 0 when withdrawing from a corner: tangential withdrawal. "Angle" 0 when withdrawing from a line: vertical withdrawal. 7. Open "Use for" with .

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-55

8. Select the area of application: To modify the withdrawal parameters of a single contour, select Contour. To modify the withdrawal parameters of all identical contours, select All identical contours in the part. To modify the withdrawal parameters of all contours with identical contour size, select All contours with identical contour size in the part. To modify the withdrawal parameters of all contours, select All contours in the part. To modify the withdrawal parameters of all identical contours on the sheet, select All identical contours on the sheet. To modify the withdrawal parameters of all contours with identical contour size on the sheet, select All contours with identical contour size on the sheet. To modify the withdrawal parameters of all contours on the sheet, select All contours on the sheet. 9. Select OK. 10. Depending on the area of application, click on the equidistances of the contours at which a withdrawal flag is to be created with the desired parameters. 11. To finish, click on End.

Modifying the form of the withdrawal flag

Overview of the section Modify the length and the angle of the withdrawal flags. Modify the withdrawal radii. Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The sheet or the single part contains withdrawal flags. Note If the angle of a withdrawal flag is modified, the withdrawal radius is retained. The transition from the withdrawal radius to the straight part of the withdrawal flag will no longer be tangential. Collisions can occur with machinings that have already been defined if you modify withdrawal flags later: carry out a collision check after the modification(see "Collision test", pg. 4-35). 1. Select >Technology >Modify >Modify withdrawal form. 2. Continue as described under "Manually displacing piercing points, manually modifying the approach flag form"(see "Approaching", pg. 4-49).

4-56

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

6.7

Optimizing end of cut

At the end of the cut of arbitrary contours, e.g. for nitrogen cutting of stainless steel, there are fusing and color changes if the contours tilt in the laser beam that is still active for a brief period after the free cutting. The "End of cut optimization with flying switch-off" function is used to execute a tangential withdrawal motion at the end of cut. The laser beam is thus switched off in a flying manner at the end of contour, i.e. there is no axis stop directly at the end of the contour. In combination with the setting "Beam end before contour end", the part quality can be improved (for rules for laser cutting in details, See chapter "Setting basic data"). The following machines are equipped with end of cut optimization by default from this version of TruTops laser onwards: TC L 3050: From control version 4.70 onwards. TC L 4050: From control version 4.70 onwards. TC L 6050: From control version 4.70 onwards. TruLaser series 5000.

Optimizing the end of cut of contour

Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Modify >Optimize cutting end.... The "Optimize cutting end" mask is displayed. 2. Check "Flying cutting end". 3. Check "Beam end before contour end". 4. Select the area of application. 5. Select OK. 6. Click on the contours on which the cutting end is to be optimized. The withdrawal motion is displayed in blue. 7. To modify length and radius for the flying switch-off: modify the value of the variables in the public machine rules FlyCuttingEndLength and FlyCuttingEndRadius under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >Machine.

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-57

6.8

Corner treatment

Rounding corners
Rounded corners are not sharp-edged and have a rounding radius.

1 2 3

Maximum rounding radius Minimum rounding radius Minimum tolerance

4 5

Maximum tolerance Tolerance range within which the rounding can lie

Runden

Fig. 4750

Cooling corners
Corner cooling the procedure The laser cut is interrupted in the corner, and the corner is cooled using cutting gas. After the programmed corner cooling time is over, the laser continues cutting. When programming corner treatment, "Rounding corners" or "Looping" is standard. Both strategies are selected directly by means of the rule. "Cooling corners" is not included in any rule, but must instead be programmed "manually". The "Corner cooling" strategy is used exclusively in thick sheet areas.

4-58

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

Moving loopings
Looping "Round" The cutting head moves in a straight line away from a corner, makes a loop, and moves into the second half of the corner in a straight line.

Looping, circular

Fig. 21864

Looping "Bisecting line angle"

The cutting head moves out of the first half of the corner with the head tilted up, turns around, and moves into the second half of the corner.

Looping, bisecting line angle

Fig. 22250

Looping, Parameters

Circular Length = distance of the corner from the outermost point of the looping. Bisecting line angle Length = path which the cutting head moves out of the corner.

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-59

6.9

Corner treatment in application

Recreating corner treatment

TruTops obtains the information concerning how corners are generally to be machined on a sheet from the rules (see >Tools >Modify data >Rules). In the rules, either "Rounding corners" or "Moving loopings" has priority. The corner treatment (even on open contours) can be modified, deleted or (if one is not present) created interactively. Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The sheet or single part contains corners without corner treatment. Note A new corner treatment can be created only at corners without any already present. An existing corner treatment must be deleted before a new one is created. 1. Select "Technology""Process optimization""Create corner treatment". The "Corner treatment" mask is opened. 2. To create corners with roundings: select "Rounding" and enter "Radius". 3. To create corners with loopings: select "Looping", "Round" or "Bisecting line angle" and enter the following parameters. For "Round": length = distance of the corner from the outermost point of the looping. For "Bisecting line angle": length = path which the cutting head moves out of the corner. Note If a sheet is to be generally cooled with "Cooling corners": create a separate rule (See chapter "Setting basic data"). For machines with Siemens control systems: create self-defined technology table in addition and enter in "General cutting" the corner cooling time. 4. To cool corners: select "Cooling". 5. Select "Create new corner treatment".

Setting the selection filter

4-60

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

Limiting the angle range of the corners

Defining permissible paths before the corner

Defining permissible paths after the corner

Treating only internal or external corners

6. Select the area of application: To limit the corner treatment to a single corner: select "Object". To limit the corner treatment to all corners of one contour, select "Contour". To limit the corner treatment to all corners of all identical parts: select Part+Copies. To apply the corner treatment to all corners, select "All". Note If "Object" has been selected as the area of application: first click on the first element of the equidistant, then the second element of the equidistant. It is not sufficient to click on the contour on which the object is located. 7. For the area of application "Object" or "Contour": one after the other, click on the objects or contours whose corner treatment is to be created. 8. To finish, click on End. 9. To filter the corner treatment: select Enlarged.... 10. Select "Corner angle". 11. Enter corner angle. TruTops uses the corner treatment only on those corners which lie between the entered angles. 12. Select "Length of element before corner". Note The minimum path prevents the corner treatment from damaging elements of the contour which are too close. 13. Enter the minimum and maximum treatable paths before the corner. If the free path before the corner is too short or too long, the corner will not be treated. 14. Select "Length of element after corner". 15. Enter the minimum and maximum treatable paths after the corner. If the free path after the corner is too short or too long, the corner will not be treated. 16. Select "Selection of corner". 17. Next to "Selection of corner", open the selection field. 18. To limit the corner treatment to inside corners: select Intern. corners only. Note Only external corners are treated with loopings. 19. To limit the corner treatment to outside external corners: select External corners only. 20. Select OK. 21. Follow the instructions in the command line.

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-61

Modifying corner treatment

The parameters of a type of corner (rounding, looping) or the type of corner itself can be modified. Setting the selection filter 1. Select >Technology >Process optimization >Create corner treatment. The "Corner treatment" mask is opened. 2. To create corners with roundings: select "Rounding" and enter "Radius". 3. To create corners with loopings: select "Looping", "Round" or "Bisecting line angle" and enter the following parameters. For "Round": length = distance of the corner from the outermost point of the looping. For "Bisecting line angle": length = path which the cutting head moves out of the corner. 4. Select "Modify existing corner treatment". 5. Select the area of application: To limit the corner treatment to a single corner: select Object. To limit the corner treatment to all corners of one contour, select Contour. To limit the corner treatment to all corners of all identical parts: select Part+Copies. To apply the corner treatment to all corners, select All. Note If Object has been selected as area of application: first click on the first element of the equidistant, then the second element of the equidistant. It is not sufficient to click on the contour on which the object is located. 6. For the area of application Object or Contour: one after the other, click on the objects or contours whose corner treatment is to be created. 7. Select OK. 8. Follow the instructions in the command line. 9. To finish, click on End.

4-62

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

Deleting corner treatment

Setting the selection filter 1. Select >Technology >Process optimization >Delete corner treatment. The "Delete corner treatment" mask is opened. Select the type of corner to be deleted. Select the area of application: To limit the corner treatment to a single corner: select Object. To limit the corner treatment to all corners of one contour, select Contour. To limit the corner treatment to all corners of all identical parts: select Part+Copies. To apply the corner treatment to all corners, select All. Select OK. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Deleting corner treatment

2. 3.

4. 5.

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-63

6.10 Microjoints
With microjoints, the contour is not completely cut off. Instead, it stays connected with the sheet through one or more webs. After sheet machining has been completed, the contour is manually broken out. Microjoints avoid collisions between the cutting head and the cut contour. (Collisions could occur, for example, if the cut contour tilts and does not fall out.) Program microjoints and/or machine microjoints A distinction is made between program microjoints and machine microjoints: The position and the length of the microjoints are determined in TruTops in case of program microjoints . Program microjoints are hard programmed, i.e. the machine operator can neither modify nor deactivate them (unlike machine microjoints). Only the position of the microjoints is defined and not their length in case of machine microjoints. The machine reads out the length of the machine microjoints from a table stored in the control system. The machine operator can machine and activate or deactivate the programmed machine microjoints in the table.

Setting program microjoints

Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Note In cases where there are several program microjoints at one contour, the approach flags automatically obtain the values of the approach flag that is present. 1. Select >Technology >Process optimization >Set microjoint.... The "Set microjoint" mask is displayed. 2. To set program microjoints, select "Program". Note The modifications are retained as long as a new process rule is not selected or the contour size of the clicked contour is not modified. If the contour size of the selected contour is modified, TruTops reads in the values of the new contour size from the rule and overwrites the modifications. The parameters can be permanently modified only in the rule (See chapter "Setting basic data"). 3. Enter the length of the program microjoint. The program microjoint length entered in the mask is the default value recommended by TRUMPF from the current rule. It can be temporarily modified here.

4-64

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

4. To set one program microjoint at the end of the contour, select "At contour end". If there are microjoints at the contour end, the beam is switched off before it reaches the end of the contour. 5. Open "Use for" with . 6. Select the area of application: To create one program microjoint in a single contour, select Contour. To create one program microjoint in all identical contours, select All identical contours in the part. To create one program microjoint in all contours with identical contour size, select All contours with identical contour size in the part. To create one program microjoint in all contours, select All contours in the part. To create one program microjoint in all identical contours on the sheet, select All identical contours on the sheet. To create one program microjoint in all contours with identical contour size on the sheet, select All contours with identical contour size on the sheet. To create one program microjoint in all contours on the sheet, select All contours on the sheet. 7. To set several program microjoints at arbitrary points, select, "Arbitrary". 8. Select OK. 9. For program microjoints at the end of the contour: depending of the area of application, click on all contours that are to contain one program microjoint, one after the other. The contours at which a program microjoint was set are displayed in yellow. or For several program microjoints at arbitrary points: one after the other, click on the positions of the program microjoints. 10. To finish, click on End.

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-65

Setting machine microjoints

Only the position of the microjoints is defined and not their length in case of machine microjoints. The machine reads out the length of the machine microjoints from a table stored in the control system. The machine operator can machine and activate or deactivate the programmed machine microjoints in the table. The programmed machine microjoints are outputted in the setup plan. Machine microjoints are currently possible on the following machines: TC L 3030, TC L 4030, TC L 6030 from software update 5.00 onwards. TC L 2530 from software update 7.00 onwards. HSL 2502C from software update 2.01 onwards. TC L X050. TruLaser series 2000. TruLaser series 3000. TruLaser series 5000. TruLaser 7025. Conditions The programming of the machine microjoints is enabled (set the value of the Machine microjoint variable in the public machine rules to 1 (See chapter "Setting basic data")). A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Note TruTops always creates machine microjoints within one contour in all identical parts. Open contours are automatically disabled against machine microjoints by TruTops. 1. Select >Technology >Process optimization >Set microjoint.... The "Set microjoint" mask is displayed. 2. To set machine microjoints, select "Machine". 3. Select OK. 4. One after the other, click on the desired positions of the machine microjoints on the contours. TruTops displays the machine microjoints using green diamonds. 5. To finish, click on End.

4-66

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

Disabling contours against machine microjoints

If contours are cut without automatic "Machine microjoints" (e.g. because the contour is a waste part and is intended to fall away), these contours can be disabled against automatic machine microjoints. The machine operator can no longer activate machine microjoints there. Contours that are disabled against machine microjoints are marked as disabled. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Disabling contours Note Open contours are automatically disabled against machine microjoints by TruTops. 1. Select >Technology >Process optimization >Disable microjoint. 2. Click on contours to be disabled against automatic machine microjoints. The disabling is displayed using a red diamond. 3. To enable the contours disabled against automatic machine microjoints again, select >Technology >Process optimization >Enable microjoint. 4. Click on the disabled contours one after the other. 5. To finish, click on End.

Canceling disabling

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-67

Deleting microjoints
Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part containing microjoints has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Process optimization >Delete microjoint. 2. Select the area of application: To delete one single microjoint in one contour, select >Object. To delete all microjoints in all identical contours, select >Contour. To delete all microjoints in all identical contours in the part, select >Identical contours in the part. To delete all microjoints in all contours with identical contour size, select >Contours with identical contour size in the part. To delete all microjoints in all contours in the part: select >All contours in the part. To delete all microjoints in all identical contours on the sheet, select >Identical contours on the sheet. To delete all microjoints in all contours with identical contour size on the sheet, select >Contours with identical contour size on the sheet. To delete all microjoints in all identical contours on the sheet, select >All contours on the sheet. 3. Select OK. 4. Depending on the area of application, click on what is to be deleted. or Box in the part or the group of parts using the mouse. 5. To finish, click on End.

4-68

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

6.11 Microwelds
MicroWelds are weld points. They keep parts which have been cut free in the sheet skeleton, and are particularly suitable for thick materials where no further microjoints can be used. Microwelds are an option for laser cutting machines. Application Fastening small machined parts in the sheet, to enable automatic unloading of the complete sheet (e.g. with the LiftMaster). Preventing contours cut free from tipping (depending on the size and form of the parts). Fastening long and narrow parts in the sheet which can arch upwards from heat and could lead to collisions. The machining of the contour is halted just after it has passed the position programmed for the weld point (1.). The cutting head moves back along the path just machined and places the weld point at the programmed position (2.). The cutting head moves forward along the path just machined (3.) and resumes the machining of the contour.

Operating principle

Note The cutting head cannot move back to a contour which it has already left. For this reason, weld points cannot not be placed at the end of a contour. At the end of a contour, it is possible instead to work with microjoints(see "Microjoints", pg. 4-64).

1 2

Preparatory cut Setting the weld point

Overlapping cut Fig. 29874

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-69

Setting microwelds
Conditions The microweld function is activated for your machine (See chapter "Setting basic data"). A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. For the application of microwelds, the contour should contain no program or machine microjoints. Setting microweld 1. Select >Technology >Process optimization >Set microweld... The "Microweld" mask is displayed. The mask contains the machining rules for microwelds. They are taken from the rules and can be temporarily modified here. The modifications are lost as soon as a new rule is selected. 2. To bind the part only slightly to the sheet skeleton: select "Soft". 3. To bind the part firmly to the sheet skeleton: select "Hard". 4. Enter the "length of the preparatory cut". Preparatory cut = path between the position at which machining is stopped and the position at which the weld point is placed (see "Fig. 29874", pg. 4-69). 5. Enter "length of the overlap cut". Length of overlap cut = 0: machining is resumed at the point at which it was stopped. Length of overlap cut > 0: machining is resumed prior to the point at which it was stopped. 6. Enter "Offset to contour" (5)(see "Fig. 18401", pg. 4-70).

Selecting the "type" of microwelds

Entering dimensions

1 2 3

Weld point Sheet skeleton Kerf center

4 5

Part Offset Fig. 18401

4-70

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

7.

8.

9.

10.

Offset = distance between the center of the kerf (3) and the center of the weld point. Advantage of offset: The weld point damages the part as little as possible. An offset increases the weld joint's stability, especially when machining stainless steel. For reduced approach after welding: select "Reduced approaching". Note The "reduced approach path" begins from the point at which machining was stopped. (For an overview of piercing and approaching for various materials, refer to the current data collection for your machine.) If "Length of the reduced approach path" = 0: enter length. TruTops reads out the length of the reduced approach path from the rules. If the rule does not contain a value, TruTops enters the length 0.00 mm. Select OK. Note MicroWelds can be placed at the beginning and between the beginning and end of a contour. Microwelds cannot be placed at the end since the cutting head cannot travel back into a contour which it has previously left. Click on the position(s) of the microwelds on the contour. The weld points are marked with a green or a red circle (soft or hard weld point); the "preparatory cuts" are marked with a blue line and the "overlapping cuts" with a yellow line. Tip Work with microjoints at the end of the contour (see "Microjoints", pg. 4-64).

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-71

Deleting microwelds
Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part containing microjoints has been loaded. 1. Technology >Process optimization >Delete microweld... 2. Select the area of application: To delete a single MicroWeld: select >Object. To delete the microwelds at a single contour in all identical parts: select >Contour. To delete all the microwelds in all identical parts of a sheet: select >Part and Copy. To delete all microwelds on the sheet: select >Sheet. 3. For >Sheet area of application: confirm the displayed query. 4. For >Object and >Contour areas of application: one after the other, click on all microwelds that are to be deleted. 5. To finish, click on End.

4-72

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

6.12 Cutting up scrap

The internal contours are cut up in TruTops as scrap. This way, possible collisions in TruTops caused by self-installing parts can be avoided. Note The approach flag of the cut up contour is not displaced during automatic and manual waste cutting. The approach flags of the cut up contours must be checked and displaced if required.

Defining parameters for cutting scraps

Opening file 1. Open machined sheet or non machined sheet. 2. Select >Technology >Process optimization >Cut scrap Parameters.... The "Parameters for scrap cutting" mask is displayed. The parameters entered in the mask are the values recommended by TRUMPF from the current rule. They can be modified temporarily here. The modifications are lost as soon as a new rule is selected. (For modifying parameters permanently See chapter "Setting basic data".) 3. Select "Open". TruTops reads out the contour type from the active rule. Depending on the process rule, "open contour" means small, medium or large contours. or Check contour type "Small", "Medium" or "Large". The contour type is allocated, independent of the specification in the process rule. 4. Check "Round angles as indicated in the process rule". The specifications are adopted from the current rule . 5. Enter "Remaining web". This value gives the width of the remaining web.

Selecting contour type

Corner rounding

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-73

Creating grid automatically

Creating approach automatically

6. Check "After support web occupancy" and enter the "Correction factor". The diagonal of the automatically created scrap squares is less than the minimum support web distance and support point distance (correction factor). The scraps must drop through the slats with this procedure. Note The waste squares could tip over after cutting and thus lead to collisions. 7. Check "Grid raster" and enter "Maximum length": the diagonal of the automatically created waste squares is less than this maximum length. 8. Enter the "length" (length of the first contour to be cut) and the "angle" (angle between the first and the second element of the cut up contour) for the approach when cutting scrap. 9. Select OK. TruTops applies the set parameters to future cut scrap.

Cutting scrap automatically

1. Open machined or non machined sheet. 2. Select >Technology >Process optimization automatically. 3. Pick the contour to be cut up. The contour is cut up automatically. >Cut scrap

4-74

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

Cutting scrap manually

1. Open machined or non machined sheet. 2. Select >Technology >Process optimization >Cut scrap manually. 3. Select "Straight line". Pick the contour to be cut up. Using the wheel mouse, rotate the straight line in an arbitrary cutting position. Follow the instructions in the command line. or Select "Polygon". Follow the instructions in the command line. Polygonal cuts are composed of several contiguous cuts, each of which can take any course. 4. To finish, click on End.

Deleting cut scrap

Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part containing cut scrap has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >Process optimization >Cut scrap - delete. 2. Select the area of application: To delete a single cut scrap: select >Object. To delete the cut scraps at a single contour in all identical parts: select >Contour. To delete all cut scraps in all identical parts of a sheet: select >Part and Copy. To delete all cut scraps on a sheet: select >Sheet. 3. For Sheet area of application: confirm the displayed query.

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-75

6.13 Optimizing the machining time Positioning to cutting distance with path finder
The following machines are equipped with path finder by default from this version of TruTops onwards: TC L 3050: From control version 4.70 onwards. TC L 4050: From control version 4.70 onwards. TC L 6050: From control version 4.70 onwards. TruLaser series 5000. Condition The "Position to cutting distance" function in the public machine rules is active. (Set the value of the FunktionPosiAufSchneidabstandEnable variable under >Tools >Modify data >Process rule >Machine to 1.) The Path finder checks whether the positioning paths run over already cut contours and tries to go around them if possible. If the positioning does not run over already cut contours, the cutting head remains at cutting distance. This saves substantial time, since the cutting head does not need to be raised and lowered between machining and positioning.

Cutting dist.

Positioning height Fig. 46433

Position of the cutting head

1. Select >Tools >Parameters. or Select >Technology >Machining >Generate >Parameters... . The "Machine parameters" mask is displayed. 2. Select the "Path finder" tab.

4-76

6BModifying machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

3. Either Select "Path finder with positioning on cutting distance". Contours are bypassed and the cutting head remains at cutting distance. Enter "Maximum positioning length". The maximum positioning length indicates the permitted distance that the cutting head may travel on the cutting height. This length depends on the evenness and stability of the sheet and on the evenness of the slats. or Select "Path finder without positioning on cutting distance". Contours are bypassed but the cutting head remains at positioning height. 4. Select OK. 5. Select >Technology >Machining >Generate >Start. The positioning paths that are driven with cutting distance are displayed in magenta. All other positioning paths are displayed in white.

S98EN

2007-04-20

6BModifying machinings

4-77

7.

Preparing machinings

The machinings can be prepared on a sheet in the following manner: Prepare common cuts (TwinLine) on a sheet.

7.1

Sheet parting cuts

With sheet parting cuts, non machined remainder of a sheet can be separated or the sheet skeleton can be cut up. The sheet parting cuts can be created automatically or manually.

Setting sheet parting cut parameters

The parameters for sheet parting cuts (e.g. approach path to the sheet) can be set here. TruTops then uses these until another rule is selected. The piercing type for sheet parting cuts can be set under >Tools >Modify data... (rules for laser cutting machines in details, See chapter "Setting basic data"). Opening sheet 1. Open sheet. 2. Select >Technology >Sheet cut >Create >Parameters. The "Parameters for Cut on Sheet" mask is displayed. 3. Select "Contour type""Open". The contour type is read out from the rule present. Depending on the process rule, "open contour" means small, medium or large contours. or Select contour type "Small", "Medium" or "Large". The contour type is allocated, independent of the specification in the process rule. 4. Select "Approach mode", "Normal" or "Reduced". (For an overview of piercing and approaching for various materials, refer to the current data collection for your machine).

Selecting contour type

Selecting approach mode

4-78

7BPreparing machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

Selecting settings for approach and withdrawal

5. Enter the "measuring distance" (1). At this distance (starting from the sheet edge), the height regulation system measures the position of the sheet surface.

1 2

Measuring distance Approach path to the sheet

Reduced approach path in the sheet

4+5 Travel without height regulation 5 Withdrawal path from the sheet Fig. 29678

2+4 Travel without height regulation Settings for approach and withdrawal

Resetting parameters to values from the process rule

6. Enter "Travel without height regulation" (2+4 or 4+5): the height regulation system is not to be switched on when the beam moves into the sheet from outside. (Risk of collision: the cutting head would move down to its lowest point and hit the sheet when moving in.) The machine switches the height regulation system on only when the laser has covered the "Travel without height regulation". 7. To approach with laser beam cutting machines with reduced laser power ("Approach mode", "Reduced" are in effect): enter "Reduced approach path in the sheet" (3). 8. Enter "Approach path to the sheet" (2). (= Distance between the switch-on position of the beam (outside the sheet) and the sheet edge. The height regulation system is switched off.) 9. Enter "Withdrawal path from the sheet" (5). (Distance between the sheet edge and the switch-off position of the beam. The height regulation system is switched off.) 10. Select Set. 11. Select OK.

S98EN

2007-04-20

7BPreparing machinings

4-79

Creating sheet parting cuts automatically

1. Select >Technology >Sheet cut >Create >Start.... The "Create Cut on Sheet" mask is displayed. 2. Select "Automatic". 3. Select cutting types: To create horizontal cuts: select "Horizontal". To create vertical cuts: select "Vertical". To create horizontal and vertical cuts simultaneously: select "Grid" and enter grid clearances. 4. Enter the remaining web to the part and to the sheet margin. 5. Select OK. 6. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Creating sheet parting cuts manually

Sheet parting cuts created manually can be of any length. The start and end points can be set freely. Manual sheet parting cuts can be created before or after the sheet machining. If the sheet has already been machined, TruTops machines the cuts automatically. Integrating manually created sheet parting cuts into the TwinLine preparation Note With sheet parting cuts on machined sheets, the machinings are deleted before the TwinLine preparation. 1. Open non machined sheet without TwinLine preparation. 2. Select >Technology >Sheet cut >Create >Start.... The "Create Cut on Sheet" mask is displayed. 3. Select "Manual". Note Horizontal and vertical cuts can be created one after the other on a sheet. Polygonal cuts are composed of several contiguous cuts, each of which can take any course. 4. Select the type of intersection. 5. Select OK. 6. Follow the instructions in the command line. 7. To finish, click on End.

4-80

7BPreparing machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

Deleting polygonal sheet parting cuts step-by-step during creation

Polygonal cuts can be deleted step-by-step when creating them. This is not possible with horizontal or vertical cuts. Condition The polygonal cuts are not yet confirmed with OK. 1. Select >Technology >Sheet cut >Undo. The last created cut is deleted. 2. Repeat until the desired cuts have been deleted.

Deleting sheet parting cuts

Note Deleted cuts cannot be restored. 1. Select >Technology >Sheet cut >Delete. 2. One after the other, click on all sheet parting cuts that are to be deleted.

S98EN

2007-04-20

7BPreparing machinings

4-81

7.2

Rearranging the sheet parting cuts

In TruTops, each sheet parting cut (exception: cuts with subsequent TwinLine preparation) is created as one part by default. TruTops defines sheet parting cuts that are created before a TwinLine preparation as one part. (They cannot then be rearranged at will.) TruTops defines sheet parting cuts that are created after the TwinLine preparation as a separate part. They can be rearranged in any way.

Rearranging sheet parting cuts

Set the value of the pa_flag_multipleSheetCutParts variable in the public system rules to 0 (for System rules (public), See chapter "Setting basic data"). TruTops creates all sheet parting cuts as one part and machines them one after the other.

4-82

7BPreparing machinings

2007-04-20

S98EN

8. 8.1

NC cycles Inserting and deleting NC cycles

Inserting "Text"
The NC function "Text" can be inserted into the machining of a sheet or a single part. As a rule, the text consists of a machine command. TruTops inserts this into the NC program as a line during the generation of an NC program. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >NC cycles >Enter text. The "Switching function: Free text" mask is opened. 2. Enter the text. 3. To insert the NC cycle before or after machining: select "Before" or "After". 4. Select OK. 5. Click on the contour. The entered text is displayed . The entered text is inserted by TruTops at the corresponding position during generation of the NC program. For that reason, only permissible NC blocks may be entered. Tip An NC text that is used often can be created under >Tools >Modify data, NC output, Customer cycles and inserted as an NC cycle again.

S98EN

2007-04-20

8BNC cycles

4-83

Inserting "Cycle"
The NC function "Cycle" can be inserted into the machining of a sheet or a single part. As a rule, a cycle (customer cycle) consists of a machine command. TruTops inserts this into the NC program as a line during the generation of an NC program. The programming manual of the machine gives an overview of all NC functions. Example for "Cycle" Reducing the machining speed. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >NC cycles >Insert cycle. The "Switching function: Free cycle" mask is opened. 2. Select a cycle name in the selection field. The cycle text is displayed. 3. To insert the NC cycle before or after machining: select "Before" or "After". 4. Select OK. 5. Click on the contour. The cycle name is displayed. The selected NC cycle is inserted by TruTops at the corresponding position during generation of the NC program.

4-84

8BNC cycles

2007-04-20

S98EN

Deleting NC cycles
Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part containing NC cycles has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >NC cycles >Delete. 2. Select the area of application: To delete a single cycle: select >Object. To delete the cycles at a single contour in all identical parts: select >Contour. To delete all the cycles in all identical parts of a sheet: select >Part and Copy. To delete all cycles on the sheet: select >Sheet. 3. For Object and Contour areas of application: click on all NC cycles one after the other that are to be deleted. 4. To finish, click on End.

S98EN

2007-04-20

8BNC cycles

4-85

9. 9.1
Difference between sequence and positioning path

Modifying machining sequence and positioning paths Modifying machining sequence manually

With Sequence, single parts can be rearranged and positions for insertions can be preset. With Sequence, TruTops leaves the current, possibly optimized machining sequence and sets only the picked part/contour at a different point in the machining. With Traversing path, single parts can also be rearranged. In both cases, TruTops creates linear positioning paths.

Setting a particular part/contour at the beginning of the machining

Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Note If the machining sequence is modified, a new machining should not be created. Otherwise the modifications are lost. Always machine the outer contours last. 1. Select >Optimize >Sequence >Rearrange - Beginning. 2. Selecting an area of application: To set a particular part in the sheet at the beginning of the machining: select Part. or To place a particular contour in all identical parts at the beginning of the machining: select Contour. 3. Click on the part/contour. The clicked object is set at the beginning of the machining. The remaining (optimized if necessary) machining sequence remains unchanged.

4-86

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

2007-04-20

S98EN

Setting a particular part/contour at the end of the machining

Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Note If the machining sequence is modified, a new machining should not be created. Otherwise the modifications are lost. Always machine the outer contours last. 1. Select >Optimize >Sequence >Rearrange - End. 2. Selecting an area of application: To set a particular part in the sheet at the end of the machining: select Part. or To place a particular contour in all identical parts at the end of the machining: select Contour. 3. Click on the part/contour. The clicked object is set at the end of the machining. The remaining (optimized if necessary) machining sequence remains unchanged.

Modifying machining sequence in any way

The sequence can be modified as follows: Modify the sequence of machining in any way manually. Specifically machine one part prior to another. Do not recalculate the remaining machining. Specifically machine one part after another, Similarly do not recalculate the remaining machining. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Modifying the sequence Note If the machining sequence is modified, a new machining should not be created. Otherwise the modifications are lost. Always machine the outer contours last. 1. Select >Optimize >Sequence >Set from.

S98EN

2007-04-20

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

4-87

Specifically process one part prior to another

Specifically machining one part after another

2. Selecting an area of application: To modify the machining sequence of the parts on the sheet: select Part. or To modify the machining sequence of the contours in all identical parts: select Contour. 3. Click on the part/contour, starting from which TruTops should modify the machining sequence. 4. Click on further parts/contours in the sequence in which they should be machined. or Box in the parts/contours using the mouse. 5. Select >Optimize >Sequence >Set until end. 6. Select >Optimize >Sequence >Rearrange-Before. 7. Click on the part/contour before which the other part/contour is to be machined. 8. Click on the part which is to be machined before it. TruTops leaves the current, possibly optimized machining sequence and sets only the picked part/contour at the desired position in the machining sequence. 9. Select >Optimize >Sequence >Rearrange-After. 10. Click on the part/contour after which the other part/contour is to be machined. 11. Click on the part which is to be machined after it. TruTops leaves the current, possibly optimized machining sequence and sets only the picked part/contour at the desired position in the machining sequence.

4-88

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

2007-04-20

S98EN

9.2

Optimizing the machining sequence

When optimizing the sheet machining, TruTops calculates the best possible machining sequence of the parts on a sheet. The goal is to combine process reliability and minimal machining time. Path optimization TruTops incorporates the following specifications and general conditions into path optimization: The preset starting corner and executing direction (e.g. horizontal, vertical, distributed over single sectors ...). The technical data of the machine for which you are programming. The technological aspects of a machining sequence (e.g. heat buildup). TruTops makes a distinction between the optimization of parts and the optimization of contours. Tipping optimization TruTops determines, on request, parts and contours that tip during machining and could lead to collisions. TruTops takes the following factors into account here: Geometry of the parts or contours Distance between support points on the slats. Distance between the slats. Material thickness. If TruTops discovers parts or contours that are in the danger of tilting, it automatically modifies the machining sequence to avoid collisions. TruTops machines all parts or contours that do not tilt and do not have the minimum distance to a tilting part/contour before the tilting part/contour. Programming path and tipping optimization The path and tipping optimization can be programmed as follows: Automatic path and tipping optimization by TruTops: Set the path and tipping optimization before the machining in a machine-dependent manner. TruTops uses the settings as soon as a sheet or a nesting job has been loaded and machined. Calculate the path and tipping optimization after the machining of a sheet or a nesting job in a machine-independent manner. Restrict the machining strategy to the selected areas of a sheet. Optimize the automatically calculated machining sequence manually after machining a sheet or a nesting job.

S98EN

2007-04-20

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

4-89

Setting automatic, machine-dependent process options

In TruTops, the process options (APS, microjoints) for parts and contours before machining are set in a machine-dependent manner. TruTops uses the settings as soon as a sheet or a nesting job has been loaded and machined. What does the APS do: The new process optimization with APS (Advanced Processing System) generates approach flags on all elements and corners, evaluates them, and selects the suitable ones. For open contours, approach flags are generated on both ends, and the optimum approach flag is selected. For circle approaches, approach flags are generated in eight possible locations, and the optimum approach flag is selected. Conditions Technology table and rules are active. "Consider tilting" is active (for tipping optimization, TruTops uses the collision range of the cutting head; See chapter "Setting basic data".) The available parts are not permitted to have any preparation in the "CAD" application for the application of APS. Selecting machine 1. Select >Tools >Change machine and open the desired machine. 2. Select >Technology >Machining >Generate >Parameters... . The "Parameters ..." mask is displayed. 3. Under "Approach with APS", check "On". TruTops determines suitable approach points so that, as far as possible, collisions do not occur during automatic machining suggestion. A suitable approach point for path optimization is selected so that the positioning paths are better aligned. The currently cut contour is not traveled over as far as possible when positioning for the next contour.

Optimizing with APS

4-90

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

2007-04-20

S98EN

Approach without APS

Fig. 38439

Approach with APS

Fig. 38703

Setting machine microjoints

4. Selecting further parameters: "Consider minimum element length": APS observes the minimum element length that is prescribed in the rules. "Outer contour: 90 corner preferred": APS selects the approach flag on the outer contour at a 90 corner. 5. To set machine microjoints automatically, select "Machine microjoint". TruTops automatically sets machine microjoints at parts/contours in danger of tipping. 6. To fasten all parts in danger of tipping with machine microjoints, check "Parts". 7. To fasten contours in danger of tipping with machine microjoints, check "Contours". Note To enable the machine microjoints in TruTops, set the value of the MaschineMicrojoint variable in the public machine rules to 1(See chapter "Setting basic data").

S98EN

2007-04-20

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

4-91

Defining parameters for program microjoints

No data in the rules

8. Check the area of application for contours. Select "All": TruTops sets machine microjoints at all contours in danger of tilting. Select "All collisions": TruTops sets machine microjoints at all contours in danger of tilting that have neighboring contours in danger of tipping. Select "Dissolve collisions": TruTops sets only as many machine microjoints as necessary in order to prevent possible collisions while cutting the internal and external contours. 9. Only with program microjoints: select Parameters. Note If a new rule is loaded, the manual modifications in the microjoint lengths are lost. 10. Enter microjoint length for small, medium and large contours (microjoint length needs to be >0 ) and Select OK. 11. Select OK. 12. If the values for the Microjoint lengths are not available in the current rules, TruTops will issue a message. 13. Either Do not check "Process security". Enter the microjoint length directly into the rules (See chapter "Setting basic data"). The modifications are adopted and are retained from one session to the next. or Modify microjoint length in Parameters. The modifications remain in force until the rule is changed.

4-92

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

2007-04-20

S98EN

Presetting automatic path and tipping optimization in a machine-dependent manner

The path and tipping optimization can be set before the machining in a machine-dependent manner. TruTops uses the settings as soon as a sheet or a nesting job has been loaded and machined. Condition Technology table and rules are active. Selecting machine 1. Select >Tools >Change machine and open the desired machine. 2. Select >Technology >Machining >Generate >Parameters... . The "Parameters ..." mask is displayed. 3. Select the "Optimization" tab. The machining sequence between the parts can be optimized on the left side of the mask ("Part optimization"). The machining sequence within the parts can be optimized on the right side of the mask ("Contour optimization"). The optimization strategies within and between the parts can be set independently of each other. 4. To determine the parts in danger of tilting: check "Consider tilting" on the left side. (During tipping optimization, TruTops uses the collision range of the cutting head; See chapter "Setting basic data") 5. Select machining strategy: "Standard": known strategy of earlier TruTops versions. Executes areas in meandering manner, one after the other. Well suited to sheets with irregular arrangements. "Grid": calculation of a meandering (linewise or columnwise) machining sequence of a sheet with strict observance of the machining direction. The grid strategy is ideal for regular or grid-formation arrangements. Positioning path mode: different grids are calculated and the one with the shortest positioning path is used. Screening mode: each grid is calculated and used as a result. "Distributed": heat-optimized distribution of machining through "Sector selection". (Example: 4 x 3 areas = 4 columns, 3 lines.) The smaller the "Distribution", the less TruTops will switch between the sectors, and will execute them in one go instead. The greater the "Distribution", the more TruTops will switch between the individual sectors until they have been executed completely.

Presetting optimization between parts

S98EN

2007-04-20

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

4-93

Presetting optimization within parts

6. With "Standard" or "Grid" machining strategy: select machining direction and starting corner. (Starting corner = sheet corner where TruTops will commence machining of the sheet.) 7. Set "Optimization requirement". (+ = best result, shortest positioning path; - = worst result, longest positioning path.) 8. Make remaining settings (same as steps 3 to 6). 9. When all settings are made: Select OK. The data is saved for the duration of the session.

Automatic, machine-independent optimization

TruTops carries out automatic, machine-independent path and tipping optimization after machining. Creating optimization 1. Load and machine sheet or nesting job. 2. Select >Optimize >Sequence >Start. The "Automatic optimization" mask is displayed. The machining sequence between the parts is optimized on the left side of the mask ("Part optimization"). The machining sequence within the parts is optimized on the right side of the mask ("Contour optimization"). The optimization strategies within and between the parts can be set independently of each other. 3. Check "Part optimization". 4. To load the machine-dependent presettings (where necessary): select Load presettings. 5. To detect parts in danger of tilting: check "Consider tilting". (During tipping optimization, TruTops uses the collision range of the cutting head; See chapter "Setting basic data".) 6. Select machining strategy. 7. With "Standard" or "Grid" machining strategy: select machining direction and starting corner. (Starting corner = sheet corner where TruTops will commence machining of the sheet.) 8. Set optimization cost. (+ = best result, shortest positioning path; - = worst result, longest positioning path.)

Optimizing machining between the parts

4-94

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

2007-04-20

S98EN

Optimizing machining within the parts

9. Check "Contour optimization". 10. To machine the contours within a part that fall through first, check "Cut falling first". 11. To modify the approach flags, select "Modify approaching". 12. To force the optimization of prepared single parts during automatic optimization: check "Reject drawing preparation" (see "TruTops CAD software manual"). 13. Make remaining settings (same as steps 6 to 10). 14. When all settings are madeSelect OK. The parts and contours are optimized.

S98EN

2007-04-20

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

4-95

9.3

Modifying positioning paths between single parts

Modifying the positioning paths manually changes the form and the direction of the positioning paths, but not the sequence of machining. The position of the piercing point on the contour is not changed. Polygonal (i.e. non-linear) positioning paths can be generated when positioning paths are modified manually. (The positioning paths which TruTops generates automatically are always linear.) Application examples Slightly tilting parts should be moved around on the sheet. Already cut contours must be moved around in case SprintLine is used.

During the automatic definition of the machining, TruTops generates linear positioning paths. If a positioning path is modified manually, the linear positioning path becomes a polygonal positioning path that can be designed as desired:

Automatically created positioning path

Manually created positioning path Fig. 4785

All modifications apply to the positioning paths between the parts of the sheet or the positioning paths within a part.

4-96

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

2007-04-20

S98EN

Modifying positioning paths manually

Polygonal positioning paths must be generated when positioning paths are modified manually. Reason: the position of the piercing point on the contours does not change with a different positioning path. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Modifying positioning paths Note Modifying the positioning paths manually changes the form and the direction of the positioning paths, but not, however, the sequence of machining. Select >Optimize >Positioning path >Modify manually. Click on the positioning path to be modified. Click on the calibration points for the new positioning path one after the other. Note The last generated line of the positioning path can be modified only as long as the target contour is not reached. Select >Optimize >Positioning path >Manual undo until the desired elements of the positioning path are deleted. Click on the target contour.

1. 2. 3. Deleting modified positioning path step-by-step 4. Closing the positioning path 5.

Resetting the modified positioning paths

Using this function, manual modifications to the positioning paths can be rejected quickly, as TruTops regenerates all the positioning paths. The machining sequence remains unchanged. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Select >Optimize >Positioning path >Create automatically. All positioning paths are regenerated.

S98EN

2007-04-20

9BModifying machining sequence and positioning paths

4-97

10.

Slats

Overview of the section Assembling slats individually and saving them as selection. Calling up a saved selection and allocating it to a sheet. Advantage The slats can be particularly removed (depending on the sheet layout) in order to allow waste parts to fall out cleanly. A list of slats is outputted in the setup plan, which the machine operator must remove from the pallet.

10.1 Assembling slats individually and saving them as selection

Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Optimize >Slats >Set. All slats that are present when the machine is active are displayed. Set rails are displayed in red and removed rails are displayed in blue. 2. One after the other, click on all slats that the machine operator must remove. The color of the removed slats changes from red to blue. Note TRUMPF slats may not be overwritten. 3. When all the desired slats are marked, select >Optimize >Slats >Save assignment.... The "Save support web assignment" mask is displayed. 4. Enter the assignment name. 5. Select OK.

4-98

10BSlats

2007-04-20

S98EN

10.2 Calling up a saved selection and allocating it to a sheet

Condition A sheet to which a saved selection is to be allocated has been loaded. 1. Select >Optimize >Slats >Load allocation.... The "Support web occupation selection" mask is displayed. It has the All set , Every second set selections and the newly assembled and saved combinations of slats by default. 2. Mark the desired selection. 3. Select OK. The desired selection is allocated to the loaded sheet. Slats that are set are displayed in red and slats that are to be removed are displayed in blue.

S98EN

2007-04-20

10BSlats

4-99

11.

Machinings with FlyLine (optional)

FlyLine is a machining strategy which will help you save significant amounts of time on certain sheets and parts. FlyLine is particularly effective for hole grids. The most important machining features of FlyLine are: Floating and position-accurate switch-on and switch-off of laser beam. Axes are not stopped when laser is switched on and off. Splitting of single contours located on a single line. Corner treatment is thus avoided. The speed is reduced only in the few instances where the direction is changed. FlyLine can be used for sheet thicknesses up to s = 1.5 mm. The following machines are equipped with FlyLine by default from this version of TruTops laser onwards: TC L 3050: From control version 4.70 onwards. TC L 4050: From control version 4.70 onwards. TC L 6050: From control version 4.70 onwards. TC HSL 2502C: From control version 3.00 onwards. TC HSL 4002C: From control version 3.00 onwards. TruLaser series 5000. TruLaser 7025. TruLaser 7040. The following two drawings show the function of FlyLine with the help of an example with several 45 degree single contours. The first drawing shows the conventional machining strategy, and the second drawing shows machining using FlyLine.

4-100

11BMachinings with FlyLine (optional)

2007-04-20

S98EN

Conventional machining strategy

Each contour is machined at the piece. The speed is reduced at the corners.

S v t

Starting point Feedrate Time

P1 Positioning path 1 P2 Positioning path 2 1-4 Processing line Fig. 38804

Conventional machining strategy

S98EN

2007-04-20

11BMachinings with FlyLine (optional)

4-101

Machining with FlyLine

Individual contours are split into four lines. Corner treatment is avoided there is only a minimum number of direction changes. Floating switch-on and switch-off of the laser beam.

S V t

Starting point Feedrate Time

P1 Positioning path 1-6 Processing lines Fig. 38805

Machining with FlyLine

Advantages of machining using FlyLine

When machining with FlyLine, TruTops makes sure that no contour which has already been cut is crossed over. In case of risk of collision, TruTops gives a message. FlyLine areas are always cut first. If several FlyLine areas are present in a part, they are machined in the sequence in which they were created. The sequence cannot be changed later. Normal traverse paths lie between the single FlyLine areas.

4-102

11BMachinings with FlyLine (optional)

2007-04-20

S98EN

11.1 Machining parts with FlyLine

Using FlyLine, selected contours are machined without approaching and without piercing. TC_LASER_ON and TC_LASER_OFF are no longer present between the single contours. FlyLine areas can be created for the following contours: For all single contours located on a single line, these contours must be without roundings. For all round holes (circles), but not for ovals or ellipses. Conditions The machine is equipped with FlyLine. A machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Optimize >FlyLine >Set.... The "Create FlyLine area" mask is displayed. 2. Select "Lines" or "Circles". 3. If "Circles" have been selected: select "Parameters of FlyLine circles". "Sequence": keep the same sequence for cutting (select "Use current") or define the sequence of FlyLine freely (select "others permitted"). Select the "revolving direction" of the circles in the FlyLine area: define the revolving direction as in the system rules (select "Use current") or determine any arbitrary revolving direction (select "arbitrary"). (If "Use current" has been selected, TruTops adopts the defined values from the "pa_def_umlaufsinn_in/out" system variable. For Description of the system variables, See chapter "Setting basic data".) Tip In case of irregularly distributed circles, select the "others permitted" sequence and the "arbitrary" revolving direction. 4. Select OK. 5. Click on circles/lines using the mouse. or Box in several circles/lines using the mouse. 6. Select OK.

S98EN

2007-04-20

11BMachinings with FlyLine (optional)

4-103

Left: geometry with lines and right: geometry with circles

Fig. 51004

The first contour/circle in the FlyLine area is displayed in red and the the revolving direction for each contour/circle is marked using a green arrow.

11.2 Showing or deleting FlyLine area

Condition A single part with defined FlyLine areas has been loaded. 1. Select >Optimize >FlyLine >Show FlyLine. 2. Click on a FlyLine area using the mouse. All contours belonging to one FlyLine area are displayed in magenta. Note After deleting the FlyLine area, all manual modifications to the machining are lost, because the machining is recalculated. 3. To delete a FlyLine area: select >Optimize >FlyLine >Delete. 4. Using the mouse, click on the FlyLine area to be deleted. 5. Select OK. All contours belonging to one FlyLine area are deleted and then recalculated.

4-104

11BMachinings with FlyLine (optional)

2007-04-20

S98EN

12.

Increased acceleration

Laser cutting of contours with high acceleration reduces the machining time. However, an acceleration value higher than the acceleration specified by TRUMPF could result in a reduced quality of cut.

12.1 For machines with an open control system Setting increased acceleration
For machines with an "open control system" (SINUMERIK 840D), you can individually define the contours to be cut with high acceleration. The machine control system reads out the value for "High acceleration" from the technology table. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. Note The value for increased acceleration can be modified only in the technology table. (to copy technology tables and create new ones See chapter "Setting basic data"). 1. Select >Optimize >Dynamics >Set increased acceleration. 2. Select the area of application: Contour: accelerating the machining of a single contour in all identical parts. Part and copy: accelerating the machining of a part and all its copies. Sheet: accelerating the machining of the entire sheet. 3. For Contour and Part and copy area of application: one after the other, click on contours or parts whose machining is to be accelerated. The clicked parts and contours are displayed in yellow till the next screen appears.

S98EN

2007-04-20

12BIncreased acceleration

4-105

Showing increased acceleration

For purposes of clarity, TruTops shows contours which are cut with high acceleration in yellow only directly after this machining type is defined. At a later point in time, you can display whether a contour is cut with high acceleration or not. Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The sheet or single part contains parts or contours with increased acceleration. 1. Select >Optimize >Dynamics >Show increased acceleration. 2. Click on the contour. TruTops reports whether the contour is cut with increased acceleration or not.

Deleting increased acceleration

Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The sheet or the single part contains parts or contours with increased acceleration. 1. Select >Optimize >Dynamics >Delete increased acceleration . 2. Select the area of application: Contour: deleting increased acceleration of a single contour in all identical parts. Part and copy: deleting increased acceleration of a part and all its copies. Sheet: deleting increased acceleration of the entire sheet. 3. For Contour and Part and copy areas of application: one after the other, click on contours or parts whose increased acceleration is to be deleted.

4-106

12BIncreased acceleration

2007-04-20

S98EN

Setting the dynamic level for single parts

The dynamics of the NC axes can be adapted to the currently required manufacturing quality of the workpiece. If the requirements for the manufacturing quality are low, the parts time can be reduced by increasing the dynamics. In case of high-quality cutting edges, the dynamics can be reduced accordingly. The TC_DYNAMIC_LEVEL cycle sets one dynamic level for all NC axes of the machine and thus defines the acceleration of the axes during contour machining. The dynamic level can be switched within a contour. Parameters for the axis dynamics are stored in the machine data for every dynamic level. The selection of the dynamic level has an effect on the manufacturing speed and thus the quality of the cutting edges. The following machines are equipped with the "Set dynamic level" option from this version of TruTops onwards: TruLaser series 5000. TruLaser 7025. TruLaser 7040. 1. Select >Optimize >Dynamics >Set dynamic level. 2. Select dynamic level: +1 Fast: increased dynamics and low quality. 0 Standard. -1 Precise: reduced dynamics and better quality. 3. Click on contours or parts. The clicked parts and contours are displayed in yellow till the next screen appears.

Showing dynamic level

Select >Optimize >Dynamics >Show dynamic level. Contours/parts with dynamic level +1 are displayed in red. Contours/parts with dynamic level -1 are displayed in blue.

S98EN

2007-04-20

12BIncreased acceleration

4-107

12.2 For machines with other control systems Setting increased acceleration
For machines with other control systems (e.g. BOSCH CC 220S), the machining of a sheet, a single part or a single contour can be created with high acceleration. Creating a technology table 1. Create your own technology table with a higher acceleration value (for "Copying technology tables and creating new ones", See chapter "Setting basic data"). 2. Load sheet/part that is to be machined with increased acceleration. 3. Select previously created technology table and rules. 4. Select >Technology >Machining >Generate >Start. The entire sheet/the entire part is processed with the new technology table. 5. Machine sheet/part with the "normal" technology table. 6. Select technology table with increased acceleration that you have created. 7. Machine single parts/contours selectively.

Entire sheet/part with increased acceleration

Only individual parts/contours with increased acceleration

13.

Simulation

13.1 Simulating sheet machining

The sheet machining can be simulated with a different speed. Other functions such as One step forward, Next, Stop or Pause also enable a precise machining check. Select >Optimize >Simulation >Start. or Select >NC program >Simulation >Start.

4-108

13BSimulation

2007-04-20

S98EN

14.

Machinings with two head machines

Both cutting heads can machine a sheet either in sequence or simultaneously. They are offset to each other in the X direction in such a way that one cutting head alone cannot cover the entire working area. Two-head mode TruTops first defines only the machining for the first cutting head. Then you specify the parts to be machined with the second cutting head. All two head machines can operate with the first cutting head in the single-head mode. The TC HSL 2502, TruLaser 7025 / TC HSL 2502 C and TruLaser 7040 / TC HSL 4002 C can also operate with the second cutting head in the single-head mode.

Single-head mode with two head machines

14.1 Defining machining with two cutting heads

Conditions In the nesting application, a sheet was "Half" occupied. The parts have been nested such that they are located in the working area of the first cutting head (which will machine the parts later). The same parts are to be cut from the second half of the sheet as from the first half. The second half of the sheet is not occupied. Note During nesting, TruTops does not "know" which parts are to be machined with which cutting head. In the "Nesting" application, one cannot check whether the parts are located inside or outside the working area of the relevant cutting head. 1. Load a non machined sheet occupied with parts that are to be cut with the first cutting head. 2. Select technology table and rules. 3. Select >Technology >Machining >Generate >Start. TruTops machines the half occupied sheet similar as in case of machines with one cutting head. 4. Select >Technology >Two head machining >Set. The "Set Cutting Head Data" mask is displayed.

S98EN

2007-04-20

14BMachinings with two head machines

4-109

5. Select "Both cutting heads". Note The "Distance between cutting heads" entered in the mask is the minimum distance between the cutting heads (section "Machine data", See chapter "Setting basic data"). It must be set to the actual distance between both cutting heads (usually half the sheet size). 6. Enter the "distance between cutting heads". 7. Select OK. The working area of the first cutting head is displayed using a red dash. 8. Using the mouse, click on or box in parts that are to be machined with the first cutting head. (To assign different "Distances between cutting heads" to the various originals and their copies, repeat steps 4 to 8.) or To select all parts, enter all in the command line and press or select the All button. The copies of parts (including their machining) are placed on the sheet in such a manner that the original and the copy can be machined simultaneously. The original is always machined using the first cutting head, and the copy is machined using the second cutting head. The parts that are machined using the second cutting head are displayed in blue.

14.2 Defining machining with one of the two cutting heads

Note Only the TC HSL 2502, TruLaser 7025 / TC HSL 2502 C and TruLaser 7040 / TC HSL 4002 C can operate with the second cutting head as well in the single-head mode. 1. Load a non machined sheet whose parts are to be cut with only one cutting head. 2. Select technology table and rules. 3. Select >Technology >Machining >Generate >Start. TruTops machines the half occupied sheet similar as in case of machines with one cutting head. 4. Select >Technology >Two head machining >Set. The "Set Cutting Head Data" mask is displayed.

4-110

14BMachinings with two head machines

2007-04-20

S98EN

5. Select the desired cutting head and Select OK. The working area of one cutting head is displayed with a red dash. 6. Using the mouse, click on or box in parts that are to be machined with the selected cutting head. 7. If all the parts have been identified: To finish, click on End.

14.3 Deleting machining with two cutting heads

Even if the machining using two cutting heads is completely deleted, the machine continues to operate with only one cutting head. It then processes only the half occupied sheet. 1. Load sheet with two head machining. 2. Select >Technology >Two head machining >Delete. 3. To delete only one part of the two head machining, using the mouse, click on or box in parts that are to be machined using the first cutting head. The copies of the parts which are to be machined using the second cutting head are deleted. or To delete the entire machining with two cutting heads, enter all in the command line and press or select the All button.

14.4 Showing machining with two cutting heads

1. Load sheet with two head machining. 2. Select >Technology >Two head machining >Show cutting heads. The "Display Cutting Head Data" mask is displayed. 3. Select "Options for display": "All cutting heads for one part" = original which is cut using the first cutting head and all the relevant machinings which are cut using the second cutting head. 4. Click on the desired original part. The relevant parts are displayed in yellow.

S98EN

2007-04-20

14BMachinings with two head machines

4-111

15.

Creating and modifying simple sheet layout

In the "Laser" application, a sheet can be laid out with machined or non machined single parts, without using the "Nest" application. The mechanism corresponds to that from ToPs 100 lite: The whole sheet is filled with a single part. For the layout of the sheet, TruTops uses the circumscribing rectangle of the single part.

15.1 Creating simple sheet layout

Opening a file Note Rotating single parts, allocating mini nests with sheets and optimizing sheet layout is not possible here. 1. Select >File >Sheet layout and processing.... The TruTops file browser is displayed. 2. Select desired file type (non machined single part: '*.GEO', machined single part: '*.GMT' ). 3. Mark the searched file. or Enter the name of the searched file under "File name". 4. Select OK. In case of non machined single parts, the "Selection of Technology Table" mask is displayed. 5. Select technology table and rule. The "Sheet layout" mask is displayed. TruTops shows how many parts fit onto the sheet under "Number of parts". (When the mask is displayed for the first time, TruTops does not take into account here the margins of the sheet or the web widths, since at this point these are still zero.) 6. Enter "X" and "Y" dimensions, sheet margins and distance of the parts. 7. Select the start corner for the layout. Start corner = sheet corner at which TruTops starts the sheet layout. Note With Fill sheet, TruTops automatically takes into account the margins of the sheet and the web widths that have been entered.

For non machined single parts

Creating sheet layout

4-112

15BCreating and modifying simple sheet layout

2007-04-20

S98EN

8. Enter the number of the single parts in the X and in Y directions. or Select Fill sheet. 9. Select OK. The "Sheet Layout Check" mask is displayed. 10. To modify the sheet layout: select Cancel. 11. Repeat steps 6 to 9. 12. If the sheet layout is OK: Select OK.

15.2 Moving, rotating parts...

The following can be done on machined or non machined sheets: Move parts through 2 points horizontally or vertically. Rotate parts through 2 points or through the center. Create part groups. If the sheet layout of machined sheets is modified, TruTops "takes along" the existing machining. The existing machining must not be recreated. Manual modifications and optimizations are retained.

Moving parts horizontally or vertically

Fig. 27704

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Select >Layout >Move part. To move the original : select >Horizontal or >Vertical. Click on the reference point (P1). Click on the target position (P2). Click on the element in the original. or Box in the entire original using the mouse (P3, P4).

S98EN

2007-04-20

15BCreating and modifying simple sheet layout

4-113

Moving parts through 2 points

Fig. 27703

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Select >Layout >Move part. To move the original: select >2 points. Click on the reference point (P1). Click on the target position (P2). Click on the element in the original. or Box in the entire original using the mouse (P3, P4). 6. To undo the last movement: select >Layout >Move part >Undo movement.

Moving parts through 2 points

Rotating through two points corresponds to rotating and moving simultaneously.

Fig. 28060

1. 2. 3. 4.

Select >Layout >Move part. To move the original: select >Rotate 2 points. Click on the reference point (P1). Click on the target position (P2).

4-114

15BCreating and modifying simple sheet layout

2007-04-20

S98EN

5. Enter angle of rotation . Example: 90. 6. Click on the element in the original. or Box in the entire original using the mouse (P3, P4).

Moving parts through the center

Fig. 28062

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Select >Layout >Move part. To rotate the original: select >Rotate center. Click on the center of rotation (P1). Enter angle of rotation . Example: 90. Click on the element in the original. or Box in the entire original using the mouse (P2, P3).

S98EN

2007-04-20

15BCreating and modifying simple sheet layout

4-115

16.

Part groups

Identical parts on a sheet can be merged into one or more part groups. Advantage: Identical parts can be machined in various ways. Example: displace approach flags only at some identical parts. If no part groups are formed, TruTops displaces the approach flags in all identical parts by default.

16.1 Creating part groups

Conditions Technology data is present. The sheet contains at least two identical parts. Opening sheet 1. Open a non machined or machined sheet. 2. Select >Sheet layout >Part groups >Create. Note The parts do not need to have an identical angular position. To selectively merge two or more identical parts into a group, click on the master part (= new original part). One after the other, click on the copies belonging to the part group. The master part of the part group is displayed in cyan and the associated copies are displayed in magenta. Select OK. The part group is presented in yellow. Select >Sheet layout >Part groups >Create identical angular position. Click on the master part (= new original part). TruTops forms a part group from the parts and displays the master part of the part group and all identical parts with identical angular position in yellow.

Merging only selected parts into a group

3. 4.

5. Merging parts with identical angular position into part group 6. 7.

4-116

16BPart groups

2007-04-20

S98EN

16.2 Showing part groups

Conditions Technology data is present. The sheet contains part groups. 1. Load the sheet. 2. Select >Sheet layout >Part groups >Show part groups. 3. Click on any part from a part group. All parts belonging to the same part group are displayed in yellow.

S98EN

2007-04-20

16BPart groups

4-117

17.

Screen display

In TruTops Laser, the following "View options" on the screen can be activated and deactivated. They can be displayed in any combination: Geometry and technology points. Part geometries on the sheet. Positioning lines of the cutting head. Machined single parts ('*.GMT'). Collisions in the machining. Missing roundings. NC cycles that have been set. Dynamic level. Contours of the machine in the top view. Slats on the pallet (workpiece support).

17.1 Activating view options

Select >View and the desired options.

17.2 Highlighting machining

Conditions When optimizing the machining sequence, parts or contours in danger of tilting are determined. The sheet or the nesting job has been loaded. 1. For machined parts and sheets: select >View >Highlight. or Select >Technology >Process optimization"Highlight". Note The Collision removal or Tilting contours selection can be set only if the Consider tilting option is activated.

4-118

17BScreen display

2007-04-20

S98EN

2. Activate the desired selection: Select Tilting contours collision or Tilting parts collision: TruTops displays the internal contours or parts in danger of tilting, which fall short of the collision range of the cutting head with the neighboring internal contours or parts (See chapter "Setting basic data"). Select Fixed contours or Fixed parts: TruTops displays all fixed internal contours or parts in brown. Select Cut up scrap: TruTops displays all cut-up internal contours. Collision removal: TruTops displays all contours in danger of tilting, which have to be technologically supported for collision removal (e.g. fixing, cutting up). Tilting contours: TruTops displays all internal contours in danger of tilting in brown. Tilting parts: TruTops displays all parts in danger of tilting in brown. Deactivate: No highlights. 3. To remove possible collisions (see "Cutting up scrap", pg. 4-73) or (see "Modifying machining sequence and positioning paths", pg. 4-86).

S98EN

2007-04-20

17BScreen display

4-119

18.

Automation components supported by TruTops

Depending on the configuration of the machine, TruTops Laser supports the following automation components: Automatic loading of the machine with raw sheets (LiftMaster or LiftMaster Sort) Unloading of the entire machined sheets - without single part sorting (LiftMaster) Removal and sorting of cut parts into small and medium sizes. Separate removal of large cut parts and of the sheet skeleton (LiftMaster Sort with SortMaster).

1 2 3

Laser cutting machine Pallet changer LiftMaster Sort

4 5

Double cart (optional) Seven depositing containers for small parts

6 7

Stacking pallets for small parts SortMaster

Automation with LiftMaster sort and SortMaster

Fig. 47935

LiftMaster

The LiftMaster is used for automatic loading of the machine with raw sheets and for unloading the machined sheet. The loading and unloading procedures take place fully automatically and in a program-controlled manner without the intervention of the operator. The lifting suction cups selected using TruTops ensure safe and reliable loading of the raw sheets onto the machine pallet changer.

4-120

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

2007-04-20

S98EN

LiftMaster Sort

The LiftMaster Sort was developed on the basis of the LiftMaster. It is a central handling facility for automatic loading of the machine with raw sheets and removal of large parts and the sheet skeleton after the machining of a sheet. The suction cup surfaces and positions for separating the large parts from the sheet skeleton and storing them are saved in TruTops. The SortMaster removes small and medium-sized single parts of 30 x 80 mm to 600 x 600 mm from cut sheets. The SortMaster sorts small parts up to 200 x 200 mm in size into up to seven removable depositing containers located on one side of the pallet changer. It places larger parts on a frame or on Europallets. With the optional C axis for rotating the suction plate by 180, it can also deposit cut single parts from free nesting the right way round on stacks. Two extendable suction cup strips with six suction cups each (optional) make it possible to remove single parts up to 600 x 100 mm in size and up to 20 kg in weight. The suction cup activation for the removal of the cut single parts is calculated automatically by TruTops during programming. The pallet with the machined workpieces is automatically replaced by a pallet with non machined workpieces. The pallets act as both work table and workpiece support at the same time during machining. Slats inserted in the pallet frame can be changed by the customer if required. The double cart comprises two carts for unloading of finished parts. The parts are removed from the pallet changer using SortMaster.

SortMaster

Pallet changer

Double cart (optional)

S98EN

2007-04-20

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

4-121

18.1 Removing parts automatically: setting LiftMaster Sort and SortMaster

Depending on the size of the parts that your automation components can unload (for "Allocating automation components to the machines and configuring", See chapter "Setting basic data"), TruTops can calculate an automatic unloading suggestion for most of the parts on a sheet or in a nesting job (see the following section). Of course, the unloading of the parts can be set manually as well.

Calculating the unloading of parts automatically

Condition Automation components are allocated to the machine and configured (for "Allocating automation components to the machines and configuring", See chapter "Setting basic data"). Note When the unloading of parts is calculated automatically, the SortMaster will not extend its suction cup strips (optional). 1. Either Open and machine the sheet. or Select >Job >Open job.... Select nesting job. In the "Preselections for machining the nesting job" mask, check "Create machining" and do not check "Generate NC program". 2. Select >Technology >Lift >Automatic loading/unloading. TruTops first determines all the parts that can be unloaded using the LiftMaster Sort and marks them with LM. Then TruTops calculates all the parts that can be unloaded using the SortMaster and marks them with SM. TruTops displays parts that cannot be removed (incorrect part size, connected to the sheet through microjoints ...) in yellow for a short period. 3. For parts for which TruTops could not calculate an automatic suggestion, set manual unloading or rework. 4. For nesting jobs: Palletize the sheet. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for every sheet in the job.

4-122

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

2007-04-20

S98EN

Setting SortMaster manually

The SortMaster removes small and medium-sized single parts from the cut sheet . It makes any number of clearing runs desired, in succession. TruTops places the center of gravity for lifting on the center of gravity of the part. Conditions SortMaster is allocated to the machine and configured (for "Allocating automation components to the machines and configuring", See chapter "Setting basic data"). Existing '*.GMT' files are smashed. Opening a file 1. Open and machine a sheet or a nesting job. 2. Select >Technology >SortMaster. 3. Select the type of unloading material: Set finished part removal. Set multiple part removal: to remove two or more parts simultaneously which are next to one another (they need not be identical parts). Set sectional removal: to program the simultaneous removal of all parts within an area (the parts hang at the sheet by means of microjoints or microwelds; the area is cut free by means of sheet parting cuts). Area can only be used with the Single part area of application. Set scrap removal. 4. Select the area of application: Single part: to program the removal of a single part. Part and copy: to program the removal of a single part and all its copies. Identical angular position: to program the removal of a part and all its copies with identical angular position. 5. Depending on the area of application: click on the part(s) for which the removal is to be programmed or box in the desired area using the mouse. 6. For multiple part removal: Select OK. TruTops sets the SortMaster. For the Sectional removal area of application: all suction cups are inactive and are displayed in yellow. For all other areas of application: as many suction cups as required/possible are active (depending on the setting under >Tools >Modify data...; See chapter "Setting basic data"). Active suction cups are displayed in red.

Selecting unloading material

Selecting the area of application

S98EN

2007-04-20

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

4-123

Manually set SortMaster

Fig. 41122

Modifying the position of the set SortMaster

7. Select >Technology >SortMaster Unloading material >... Modify. 8. Depending on the area of application: click on the part(s) for which the removal is to be modified or box in the desired area using the mouse. 9. Select >Technology >SortMaster >Adapt >Position. The SortMaster is attached to the mouse. Note For the Sectional removal area of application, all the suction cups that have already been activated manually remain active. For all other areas of application, TruTops calculates the suction cups for the new position. 10. To rotate the set SortMaster: rotate the SortMaster stepwise using the wheel mouse (set to 5 by default) and click on the new position of the SortMaster. TruTops calculates the suction cups for the new position.

4-124

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

2007-04-20

S98EN

Extending or retracting the rails of the SortMaster (optional)

Adopting the set suction cups or setting manually

11. Select >Technology >SortMaster >Adapt >Rails. The SortMaster is displayed. 12. To hang the SortMaster rails on the mouse and extend them: click on the strip. The selected rail is attached to the mouse. 13. To extend or retract the rails steplessly, modify the traversability of SortMaster under >Tools >Modify data... >Machines >Data >Automation (for "Allocating the automation components to the machines and configuring", See chapter "Setting basic data"). 14. To modify the suction cups manually: select >Technology >SortMaster >Adapt >Suction cups. 15. Click on all suction cups one after the other. Suction cups which are outside the part cannot be activated. 16. To adopt the suction cups set by TruTops (not if the area of application is Sectional removal): Select OK. TruTops checks whether the part's center of gravity is within the convex shell of the active suction cup. Depending on the area of application, TruTops marks with SM all parts that can be removed with SortMaster. TruTops displays parts that cannot be removed in yellow for a short period. 17. Repeat sequence from step 3 until an unloading is allocated to all parts that can be unloaded with the SortMaster. 18. For nesting jobs: Palletize the sheet. Repeat steps for every sheet in the job.

Modifying unloading with the SortMaster

Conditions A machined sheet or a machined nesting job has been loaded by unloading parts with SortMaster. If unloading from '*.GMT' files is to be modified, then these files must be smashed. Copying unloading 1. Select >Technology >SortMaster. 2. Select the type of unloading material (e.g. single removal, multiple part removal or sectional removal) that is to be copied.

S98EN

2007-04-20

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

4-125

Deleting unloading

3. Depending on the area of application, select: Single part: to copy the removal of a single part. Part and copy: to copy the removal of a single part and all its copies. Identical angular position: to copy the removal of a part and all its copies with identical angular position. 4. Click on the part or area whose unloading is to be copied. The SortMaster is attached to the mouse. 5. Click on the new position of the SortMasters. TruTops copies the unloading to the marked parts. 6. Select >Technology >SortMaster. 7. Select the type of unloading material (e.g. single removal, multiple part removal or sectional removal) that is to be deleted. 8. Depending on the area of application, select: Single part: to delete the removal of a single part. Part and copy: to delete the removal of a single part and all its copies. Identical angular position: to delete the removal of a part and all its copies with identical angular position. 9. Click on the part or area whose unloading is to be deleted.

4-126

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

2007-04-20

S98EN

Setting LiftMaster Sort manually

The LiftMaster Sort activates its suction once, removing large parts and the sheet skeleton. Condition LiftMaster Sort is allocated to the machine and configured (for "Allocating automation components to the machines and configuring", See chapter "Setting basic data"). Unloading with the LiftMaster Sort 1. Open and machine a sheet or a nesting job. Note Only multiple part removal is possible with the LiftMaster Sort (one large part, one large part + sheet skeleton, several large parts + sheet skeletons). 2. Select >Technology >LiftMaster >Set multiple part removal. 3. Click all parts one after the other that are to be unloaded with the LiftMaster Sort. TruTops displays the parts in magenta. 4. Select OK. TruTops displays the suction cups of the LiftMaster Sort. Display: Active suction cups: red. Non-active suction cups: yellow, dashed. 5. To activate/deactivate suction cups: click with the mouse. 6. Select OK. TruTops displays a symbol (LM) for the unloading with the LiftMaster Sort in the lower left corner. 7. Select >Technology >LiftMaster >Modify multiple part removal. 8. To activate/deactivate suction cups, click with the mouse. or Box in several suction cups with the mouse. 9. Select OK. 10. Select >Technology >LiftMaster >Delete multiple part removal. TruTops deletes the unloading with the LiftMaster Sort.

Modifying loading with the LiftMaster Sort (activating/deactivating suction cup) Deleting unloading with LiftMaster Sort

S98EN

2007-04-20

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

4-127

Showing parts without unloading

Condition A machined sheet or a machined nesting job has been loaded. Select >Technology >Lift >Show parts without unloading. or Select >View >Information >Show parts without unloading. TruTops displays all parts that are not unloaded in yellow.

Loading with LiftMaster Sort

The LiftMaster Sort suctions up sheets and places them on the slats for machining. Condition LiftMaster Sort is allocated to the machine and configured (for "Allocating automation components to the machines and configuring", See chapter "Setting basic data"). Loading with LiftMaster Sort 1. Open and machine a sheet or a nesting job. 2. Select >Technology >LiftMaster >Set loading. TruTops displays the loading area of LiftMaster Sort in yellow; the geometries are hidden. The suction cups are: Active: red, dashed. Not active: yellow, dashed. 3. To activate/deactivate suction cups: click with the mouse. 4. Select OK. TruTops displays a symbol (LM) for the loading with the LiftMaster Sort in the lower left corner. 5. Select >Technology >LiftMaster >Modify loading. 6. To activate/deactivate suction cups: click with the mouse. or Box in several suction cups with the mouse. 7. Select OK. 8. Select >Technology >LiftMaster >Delete loading. TruTops deletes the loading with the LiftMaster Sort.

Modifying loading with the LiftMaster Sort (activating/deactivating suction cup)

Deleting loading with LiftMaster Sort

4-128

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

2007-04-20

S98EN

18.2 Palletizing cut parts (SortMaster)

When palletizing, finished parts that are removed with the SortMaster are deposited at a defined position. The SortMaster sorts small parts into depositing containers; larger ones are deposited on frames or Europallets. Palletizing - run Positions (unloading areas) have been defined under >Tools >Modify data >Machines >Automation (for "Defining and configuring unloading areas for palletizing", See chapter "Setting basic data"). Automatically palletize nesting job or single sheet. Single sheets can also be palletized several times in different ways and/or in any order. Modify stack item data. Modify palletizing manually (move stack, rotate stack, merge stacks, modify stacking mode, eliminate collisions). Display stacks information. Adopt total palletizing. Display palletizing graphic in the setup plan.

Palletizing for multiple sheets

Palletizing for multiple sheets means that several sheets can be palletized in succession. Both nesting jobs and sheets can be palletized in any order. What is important is that the order in which the sheets were palletized is strictly adhered to during execution on the machine. (A different order can cause collisions of the lift with previous stacks.) A production package can be generated after generating the last NC program so that the sequence of the NC programs is adhered to on the machine. Note For machines with SortMaster, a log containing information about the program sequence can be created and printed in the production package menu. Single NC programs within multiple sheet palletizing may not be subsequently modified.

Palletizing types

Create stacks for the loaded sheet on empty pallets only. Delete stacks of previous sheets here (new palletizing). Palletize the stacks for the loaded sheet by adding them to the stacks of previously palletized sheets (Add by palletizing). The unloading area configuration cannot be modified when using this type of palletizing. Restore the original stacks of the loaded sheet , if e.g. the stacks have been manually displaced or merged after the palletizing and you want to undo this (Discard current sheet).

Note The unloading area configuration cannot be modified here.

S98EN

2007-04-20

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

4-129

Palletizing nesting job or single sheet

Conditions Automation components are allocated to the machine and configured (for "Allocating automation components to the machines and configuring", See chapter "Setting basic data"). Unloading areas for the palletizing have been defined and configured under >Tools >Modify data, (for Defining and configuring unloading areas for the palletizing , See chapter "Setting basic data"). Loading sheets Setting LiftMaster Sort and SortMaster Palletizing 1. Load and machine a sheet or nesting job. 2. Set the unloading of parts of the single sheets (see "Automation components supported by TruTops", pg. 4-120). For nesting jobs: set unloading of the parts of the first sheet. 3. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Start. 4. Select New palletizing or Add by palletizing. New palletizing: The stacks for the loaded sheet are created on empty pallets only. Stacks for previous sheets are deleted. Add by palletizing: The stacks of loaded sheet are added to the stacks of previously palletized sheets. The unloading area configuration can therefore not be modified when using this type of palletizing. The "Stack item data" mask is displayed. Note When marking a stack item, the geometry of the part is displayed in the preview window and the "offset" and the "size" are displayed. "Offset" = The offset values in the X direction and Y direction, from the reference point of the stack item (lower left-hand corner of the circumscribing rectangle) to the zero point of the lift. "Size" = circumscribing rectangle of the part geometry.

Entering stack item data

4-130

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

2007-04-20

S98EN

Enabling parts view for all angular positions

Modifying all stack item data

Configuring strategy for stack formation

5. Mark stack items one after the other and enter or select desired data. Open selection fields with "": Maximum number of parts in the stack: the maximum number of one part in one stack may not be less than the number of sheets. If the maximum number of a part in the stack is smaller, TruTops automatically increases the maximum number. Sheet thickness in the stack: maximum number of parts in the stack x material thickness in the stack yields the maximum stack height. Stacking mode Depositing mandatory: the lift must deposit the parts on the stack. Discarding or "dropping" is not possible. Stacking mode Depositing optional: if possible, the lift deposits the parts on the stack. To avoid collisions, single parts can also be discarded softly (see following bullets). Stacking mode Drop dynamically: The lift throws the part from a height above the stack that is specified at the machine (e.g. 10 mm). Stacking mode Soft dropping: the lift throws the part down from reduced height. The height is defined in the machine data (on the machine). Stacking mode Dropping: the lift throws the part down from maximum height. Admitting or prohibiting container: admit or prohibit dropping parts into the bucket. 6. If the stack items in all angular positions are to be displayed in the "Stack item data" mask: under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >System set the value of the PalletizingShowAllStackItems variables in the public system rules to 1 (" System rules (public)", See chapter "Setting basic data"). 7. Check " Mark all stack goods" if the data of all stack items is to be modified. 8. Select Continue. Select the "Automatic configuration" mask. 9. For nesting jobs: enter number of identical sheets. TruTops calculates one palletizing layout for several identical sheets of a nesting job that leads to a uniform NC program for all sheets. 10. Select "Arrangement of stack items". "Finished part and scrap mixed": Finished parts and scrap are both placed on one pallet. "Finished part and scrap separately": Finished parts and scrap are both placed on separate pallets.

S98EN

2007-04-20

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

4-131

Defining parameters

Allocating unloading area configuration

11. "Select Dealing with collisions during stacking": "Change stacking mode": TruTops switches from stacking mode Depositing optional to Soft dropping. A new stack is created with stacking mode Depositing mandatory. "New stack": If there is risk of collision with an existing stack, TruTops begins with a new stack. 12. Switch to the "Stack items" tab. 13. Select "Mixed" or "Sorted": "Mixed": Different parts may be stacked on one pallet (in different stacks). "Sorted": Only one type of part may be stacked on any one pallet. 14. Switch to the "Parameters" tab. 15. Select the desired box: "Pallet sequence""X before Y": the pallets are filled first in X direction, then in Y direction. "Pallet sequence""Y before X": the pallets are filled first in Y direction, then in X direction. "Pallet sequence""As in data base:" The pallets are filled in accordance with the sequence of their ID (for Defining the ID of the pallets, see Defining and configuring unloading areas for palletizing, See chapter "Setting basic data"). "Adopt as default": Defines a default pallet sequence. "Stack growth within the pallet""X before Y": the stacks are placed first in X direction, then in Y direction. "Stack growth within the pallet""Y before X": the stacks are placed first in Y direction, then in X direction. Selecting stack corner: a starting corner can be defined on a pallet, in which TruTops should begin with palletizing. "Min. stack clearance X, Y": Enter the minimum stack clearance in X and Y direction. "Do not rotate parts": The parts are not rotated on the stacks when palletizing. Note Only with self-defined unloading area configuration; not relevant for standard TRUMPF configuration. 16. Switch to "Unloading area" tab. 17. Open selection field with . Note The unloading area configuration can be changed only in the palletizing type New palletizing. 18. Mark the desired configuration.

4-132

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

2007-04-20

S98EN

19. When all settings are made: Select OK. The palletizing graphics is displayed (see "Graphical display of the created stack", pg. 4-140). The single sheet or the first sheet of the nesting job is palletized.

Palletizing graphics

Fig. 51005en

Generating an NC program

For nesting jobs only

20. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. 21. If the NC program is to be included in the program list of the production package: select "Settings" and check "Production package". 22. Make the rest of the settings in this and the other tabs and then Select OK. The NC program is generated for the single sheet or for the first sheet or identical sheets of the nesting job. 23. Select >Job >Next sheet. The next sheet of the nesting job is machined. 24. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Start. 25. Repeat steps 3 to 24 until all sheets of the nesting job are palletized.

S98EN

2007-04-20

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

4-133

Creating production package

Note If the palletizing is to be continued on empty pallets while palletizing several sheets, because e.g. the pallets have become full when palletizing previous pallets, then, as a next step, continue to palletize using the New palletizing mode. If the production package is created after the last sheet , and is subsequently executed on the machine, the unloading pallets must be emptied if the active single NC program was palletized in the New palletizing mode. The machine operator can find this information in the NC program's setup plan. 26. If the last sheet has been palletized: create production package. Select >NC program >Production package >Start automatically. All NC programs of the nesting job are interlinked into one program.

Palletizing single sheets several times in various ways

A sheet is to be machined many times one after the other and each sheet is to be palletized differently. Conditions Automation components are allocated to the machine and configured ("for Allocating automation components to the machines and configuring", See chapter "Setting basic data"). Unloading areas for the palletizing have been defined and configured under >Tools >Modify data (for "Defining and configuring unloading areas for the palletizing", See chapter "Setting basic data"). Opening sheet Setting LiftMaster Sort and SortMaster Selecting the palletizing type Entering stack item data 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Open and machine the sheet. Define unloading of the parts. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Start. Select the palletizing type. Enter "Stack item data" and select Continue. In the "Automatic configuration" mask, select"Strategy". Enter number of identical sheets. Make the rest of the settings in this and the other tabs. Select OK. The palletizing graphics is displayed.

4-134

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

2007-04-20

S98EN

Generating an NC program

10. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. 11. If the NC program is to be included in the program list of the production package: select "Settings" and check "Production package". 12. Make the rest of the settings in this and the other tabs and then Select OK. 13. Save TMT file (if desired) through >File >Save. 14. To add the identical sheet to palletizing again: repeat steps 4 to 13. Different palletizings and NC programs are created for single sheets.

Palletizing any sheet ordering sequences

Sheets can be palletized in any sequence. So that the sequence of the NC programs is adhered to, a production plan can be generated after the last NC program has been generated. Conditions Automation components are allocated to the machine and configured ("Allocating automation components to the machines" and configuring, See chapter "Setting basic data"). Unloading areas for the palletizing have been defined and configured under >Tools >Modify data ("defining and configuring unloading areas for the palletizing", See chapter "Setting basic data"). Opening sheet Setting LiftMaster Sort and SortMaster Selecting the palletizing type 1. Open and machine the first sheet. 2. Set unloading of the parts. 3. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Start. 4. Select the palletizing type Add by palletizing or New palletizing. Enter "Stack item data" and select Continue. In the "Automatic configuration" mask, select"Strategy". Enter the number of identical sheets. Make the rest of the settings in this and the other tabs. Select OK. The palletizing graphics is displayed(see "Fig. 51005en", pg. 4-133).

Entering stack item data

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

S98EN

2007-04-20

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

4-135

Generating an NC program

Creating production package

10. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. 11. If the NC program is to be included in the program list of the production package: select "Settings" and check "Production package". 12. Make the rest of the settings in this and the other tabs and then Select OK. 13. Save TMT file through >File >Save. 14. Open next sheet and repeat steps 2 to 8. Note If the palletizing is to be continued on empty pallets while palletizing several sheets, because e.g. the pallets have become full when palletizing previous pallets, then, as a next step, continue to palletize using the New palletizing mode. If the production package is created after the last sheet, and is subsequently executed on the machine, the unloading pallets must be emptied if the active single NC program was palletized in the New palletizing mode. The machine operator can find this information in the NC program's setup plan. 15. If the last sheet has been palletized: create production package. Select >NC program >Production package >Start automatically. All NC programs of the nesting job are interlinked into one program.

4-136

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

2007-04-20

S98EN

Modifying palletizing: moving, merging, rotating stack ...

The following actions can be performed with stacks: Moving the stack in the X and Y directions. Merging stacks with one another. Changing stacking mode. Dividing stack. Clearing stacks with collision. Rotating the stack around the zero position of the lift. Condition The palletizing graphics is displayed(see "Fig. 51005en", pg. 4-133). Moving stack Note Only the stacks of the currently loaded sheet can be moved and merged. Stacks of previous sheets (displayed in blue) cannot be moved. With mixed stacks (= stacks of previous sheets and the current sheet), only the parts of the currently loaded sheet can be moved or merged. Moving a mixed stack therefore leads to the separation of the stack: The parts of the stack from the previous sheet stay in the original position. The parts of the stack from the currently loaded sheet can be repositioned with a mouse click. The same results occur when merging mixed stacks. 1. Select >NC program >Machining >Move stack freely. Note The stack to be deposited must touch the pallet. The stack is allocated to this pallet, even the largest part of the stack surface is lying on another pallet (See chapter "Setting basic data"). The stacks can only be moved in the applicable lift travel range. Stacks may overlap the edge of the pallet. The maximum stack height of the pallet upon which the stack is deposited, needs to be greater than the current height of the stack which is to be displaced ("Allocating automation components and configuring" See chapter "Setting basic data"). If one of these conditions is not met, then the stack cannot be deposited.

S98EN

2007-04-20

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

4-137

Moving stack to offset

Rotating stack

Merging stacks

Dividing stack

2. Using the mouse, click on box in the stack or enter the ID. The stack is attached to the mouse and can be moved to the desired position on the sheet. 3. Reposition the stack. 4. If collisions arise from the displacement of the stack (TruTops message): define new position. 5. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Move stack to offset. 6. Click the stack or enter ID. The "Stack data" mask is displayed. 7. Enter the offset values in X and Y direction and Select OK. 8. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Rotate stack. 9. Click the stack or enter ID. The stack is attached to the mouse and can be rotated by the specified angle. 10. Rotate the stack with the wheel mouse step by step (set to 5 by default). Note The stacks that are to be merged contain the same parts. The maximum stack height of the target stack may not be exceeded. (The maximum stack height is the product of the maximum number of parts in the stack x material thickness.) 11. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Merge stacks. 12. Click source stack (= stack containing the parts to be transferred) or enter ID. 13. Click target stack (= stack that is to adopt the parts) or enter ID. TruTops transfers as many parts as possible onto the target stack. If all parts can be transferred, TruTops deletes the source stack. If all parts cannot be transferred, TruTops outputs a list with the number of transferred parts . 14. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Divide stack. 15. Click the stack or enter ID. The "Stack data" mask is displayed. 16. Under "Divide number of parts", enter the desired number of parts and Select OK. The stack with the selected number of parts is attached to the mouse and can be rotated. 17. Select new position for the stack on the pallet.

4-138

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

2007-04-20

S98EN

Modifying the stacking mode

Clearing stack with collision

18. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Modify stacking mode . 19. Using the mouse, click on or box in the stack or enter ID. The "Stack data" mask is displayed. 20. Open selection field "Stacking mode " with . 21. Mark new stacking mode and Select OK. Note TruTops eliminates collisions by modifying the stacking mode of single parts. TruTops does not shift any stacks. "Lift against stack" collisions can be automatically cleared by TruTops. "Stack against stack" collisions, on the other hand, cannot be. 22. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Clear stack. 23. If the stacking mode Depositing mandatory has been selected for the stack (is displayed), TruTops cannot correct the collision: place the stack at a new position through Move stack freely.

Showing information for stacks or stack item

Condition The palletizing graphics is displayed(see "Fig. 51005en", pg. 4-133). 1. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Stack information or >Stack item information. 2. Click the desired stack or enter the ID and Select OK. The "Stack data" mask is displayed. (Display only. Nothing can be modified in this mask.)

S98EN

2007-04-20

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

4-139

Graphical display of the created stack

Color Contour yellow green blue Stack text yellow green blue Stack of loaded sheets. Status: fillable. Stack of loaded sheets. Status: full. Stack of previous sheets. Status: full or fillable. Mixed stack of parts of previous sheets and parts of loaded sheets to be added by palletizing. Status: fillable. Mixed stack of parts from previous sheets and parts of loaded sheets to be added by palletizing. Status: full. Stack indicating an error (e.g. collision, stack lies outside the pallet. Tab. 4-3 Cur. number: 20\10 means: Number of parts in the stack: 20. Of which parts of the previous sheets: 10. Stack properties Example: Specifications for previous sheets -

blue

yellow

blue

green

red

red

Graphics display of the created stacks

Activate >NC program >Palletizing >View.

4-140

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

2007-04-20

S98EN

Adopting total palletizing

When a palletized sheet is saved: The stacks of the currently loaded sheet and the stacks of the previous sheets (blue stacks) are saved in the TMT file. The list of NC programs of the previous sheets is saved from the NC generation mask. If, for example, five sheets are palletized one after the other, the TMT file of the fifth sheet contains information about the palletizing of the sheets 1 to 5. Opening file 1. Open the TMT file of the sheet with which the palletizing is to be continued. The displayed palletizing graphic contains all stacks (total palletizing). 2. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Adopt completely. All previously existing stacks of previous sheets are deleted. Instead, all stacks of the currently loaded sheet are adopted. The list of NC programs for the previous sheets is adopted into the NC generation mask from the tmt file. In this way, earlier palletizing arrangements can be restored. 3. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Start Palletizing mode New palletizing. The parts of the currently loaded sheet are newly palletized. All existing previous stacks (blue) are deleted. The list of the NC programs is not modified. 4. Select >NC program >Palletizing >Start Palletizing type Add by palletizing. Parts of the currently loaded sheet are added to previously existing stacks. Previous stacks from the TMT file are deleted. The list of the NC programs is not modified.

Adopting total palletizing

Selecting the New palletizing palletizing type

Selecting Add by palletizing palletizing type

Displaying palletizing graphic in the setup plan

(see "Setup plan", pg. 4-142)

S98EN

2007-04-20

18BAutomation components supported by TruTops

4-141

19.
Default templates

Setup plan

Depending on the machine, TruTops uses a default template for the html setup plan. 'ReportToPs100V6.html'.

19.1 Selecting a setup plan template individually when generating the NC program
1. Select the desired machine. 2. Select >Tools >Modify data. Note The value corresponds to the file name of the default template for the setup plan. 3. Under >Rules >Machine, delete the value of the EinrichteplanFormular variables. 4. Select Modify and then Exit. "Modify data" is closed. 5. Generate an NC program. 6. Close the "Generate NC program mask" with OK. The list of all templates is displayed each time an NC program is generated. 7. Select a template and confirm with OK. 8. To reuse the default template, reset the value of the EinrichteplanFormular variables in the "Machine" rule to the original entry (see above). TruTops reuses the default template for the html setup plan.

4-142

19BSetup plan

2007-04-20

S98EN

19.2 Defining another template as the default template

Condition The TruTops file browser is opened. 1. Switch to the '...\TRUMPF.NET\Templates\HTML' directory. The template files are displayed. 2. Rename a default template (e.g. 'ReportTops100V6.html') (e.g. as 'ReportTops100V6.html_alt.html'). 3. Give the new template the original file name of the default template. TruTops uses the new template as the default template for the setup plan.

19.3 Integrating your own company logo in the setup plans

Conditions The size of the company logo should be 50x50 pixels (ideal size). Recommended file formats: '.gif', '.bmp', '.png', '.jpg'. 1. Place the company logo in an arbitrary directory on the computer or import it in PDM. 2. Under >Tools >Modify data, Rules, System, modify the value $(ToPs_HTML_TEMPLATE_PATH)/SYSTEM_Logo.gif) of the "CompanyLogo" variable as per the following example: File name: 'SYSTEM_Firmenlogo.bmp'. The file name for the company logo must always begin with 'SYSTEM'. Directory: '\Mein_Logo\Aktuell'.
File system PDM ...:\ Mein_Logo\Aktuell\SYSTEM_Firmenlogo.bmp /Mein_Logo/Aktuell/SYSTEM_Firmenlogo.bmp Tab. 4-4

New value of the system variables

S98EN

2007-04-20

19BSetup plan

4-143

19.4 Outputting setup plan, defining options

The path, file format and contents with which the setup plan is to be outputted can be defined individually. Setting the path for the output of the setup plan 1. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. The "Generate NC program" mask is opened. 2. Select "Settings", "Path for setup plan". A fixed path can be preset for all setup plans here. If this option is not selected, then the setup plan is saved in the same directory as the NC program. 3. Select the "Setup plan" tab. 4. Check the file format(s) in which the setup plan is to be outputted. Note Not all options are available in the text-based setup plan (file format: '*.ein'). 5. Check the desired options under "Output of setup plan by means of".

Setting format and options

19.5 Showing and printing setup plan

Condition An NC program has been generated. 1. Select >NC program >NC program >Show setup plan or >Print setup plan. 2. Show/print current/any setup plan.

4-144

19BSetup plan

2007-04-20

S98EN

19.6 Using Microsoft Word as html editor

The setup plan in the '*.html' format can be edited with Microsoft Word (for "Entering NC post-processing programs/external programs", See chapter "Setting basic data"). Notes Exit Word after editing the html setup plans. It is only then that TruTops can be operated once again. Microsoft Word 97 does not support the current html standard completely. This can lead to a situation whereby individual formatting (e.g. line breaks) is not correctly displayed. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select an arbitrary machine and then >Tools >Modify data. Select >User >Programs. In the selection list under "Designation", mark HTML_EDITOR. Rename HTML_EDITOR in the input field "Designation" (e.g. as HTML_EDITOR_IE). 5. Select Modify. 6. Mark HTML_WORD in the selection list. 7. Rename HTML_WORD in the input field "Designation" as HTML_EDITOR. 8. Select Modify. The modification is saved. Microsoft Word is available as the html editor.

S98EN

2007-04-20

19BSetup plan

4-145

19.7 Compressing html files

The 'comprhtm.bat' program is used to reduce the required memory on the hard drive. Files in 'html' format are converted and compressed into pdf files with all associated graphics. After that, the larger original files are deleted. Compressing directory or files 1. Mark a directory in Explorer which contains 'html' files. or Mark one or more 'html' files in a directory. 2. Right click. The context-sensitive menu is opened. 3. Select >Send to >HTM-PDF. 'comprhtm.bat' is executed. All 'html' files are compressed.

4-146

19BSetup plan

2007-04-20

S98EN

20.

Production package

Several NC programs that have been generated one after the other can be combined in the sequence of their generation or in the frame of a job to make up a production package. The production package also offers the opportunity of making information (e.g. customer or job data) available for TruTops Fab or a control system (e.g. TC-CELL). If NC programs are to be linked together in arbitrary sequence independent of TruTops to make up a production package, then the auxiliary program NcLink (see software manual for "NcLink, TubeLink") is available for use on the TruTops CD. Working with production packages is supported only by machines with: Open control systems. Cell-Server connection. TruTops Fab connection. Note Machines without an open control system with Cell-Server or TruTops Fab connection must be configured under >Tools >Modify data. Other requirements The production package type has been determined (see the software manual "NcLink, TubeLink") and selected under >Tools >Modify data"Production package output". NC programs that are to be interlinked to a production package must have different file names and main program names.

20.1 Generating production packages from several NC programs

Condition The NC programs were generated with the "Production package" setting. 1. Select >NC program >Production package automatically.... The "Create production package" mask is opened. 2. Select "From program list". The NC programs are displayed. >Start

S98EN

2007-04-20

20BProduction package

4-147

3. Enter the "Production package file name" and "Production package path". 4. Select "Overview path". Note The production package overview shows the NC programs and single parts that have been used in the production package. If the "Overview path" is missing, the "Production package path" is used to save the production package overview. 5. Enter the path for storing the production package overview. 6. Select Preview. The production package can be checked in the preview. 7. Select OK. The production package is created.

20.2 Creating production package from every NC program

A production package can be created from each NC program with the NC post-processing program "NCLINK_LST". This is practical, e.g. if the number of program runs or the Stock ID is to be used for each NC program. 1. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. The "Generate NC program" mask is opened. 2. Under "Parameters", "NC post-processing program", select NCLINK_LST.

4-148

20BProduction package

2007-04-20

S98EN

20.3 Creating production package from job

Conditions The job has been completely machined. NC programs have been generated for all sheets. Different parts are not permitted to have the same parts ID. Note The parts entered in the job are distributed among the "Customers" when the production package is created from a job. The option "Job information output" must already have been selected in the production package settings for this purpose. If no Part ID has been allocated, TruTops automatically creates an unequivocal Part ID in the job. 1. Select >NC program >Production package >Start automatically. The "Create production package" mask is opened. 2. Select "From nesting job". The TruTops file browser is opened. 3. Select the desired job . The NC programs of the selected job are displayed. 4. Enter the "Production package file name" and "Production package path". 5. Select Preview. The production package can be checked in the preview. 6. Select OK. The production package is created.

20.4 Starting NcLink from TruTops

The production package parameters (stock IDs, end of block, etc.) can be adapted through the user interface of NcLink (see the software manual "NcLink, TubeLink") and saved in the production package. Select >NC program >Production package >Start interactively. The NcLink program is started with the production package from the current job or the current program list.

S98EN

2007-04-20

20BProduction package

4-149

21.

Generating an NC program

21.1 Making program settings

Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The machining of the sheet or the single part, including all manual modifications, has been completed. Modifying settings Note When generating an NC program, various functions can be activated or deactivated (e.g. "Anticipate operations", "Use subroutine technique", "Measure sheet position" ...) and saved as desired. When generating an NC program, TruTops checks whether the technology table contains all the data required. If any data is missing, TruTops outputs it in the technology log (see "Showing the technology log", pg. 4-36). Select >NC program >NC program >Start. The "Generate NC program" mask is displayed. Select "Settings". Note The name of the NC file should not have more than eight characters for machines with the operating system Windows 3.11. If the file name is longer, only the first six characters and the three-letter file extension ('*.LST') are displayed. The missing characters from the file name are replaced by a tilde ("~") and forfile names which occur frequently, by a digit. TruTops always suggests the name of the machined sheet as the name of the NC file. Example: "Zahnra~1.LST" "Zahnra~2.LST" Delete the suggested name under "NC file". Enter a new name. To set the path of the storage of the NC program ('*.LST') permanently, enter the desired path as the value of the ST_LstPath variable in the public system rules (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >System, See chapter "Setting basic data"). Set the value of the ST_LstPathModal variable to 1. or Open "NC program path" with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. Select the desired directory. Select OK.

1. 2. Modifying the suggested name for the NC file

3.

Modifying NC program path

4. 5. 6.

4-150

21BGenerating an NC program

2007-04-20

S98EN

Defining the path for storage of the setup plan

Reduce maximum length of the program names Modifying the program name

NC title, customer/job number, programmer, remark ...

Making additional settings

7. Check "Path for setup plan" . 8. Open Path for set-up plan with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. 9. Select the directory. 10. Select OK. 11. Select >Tools >Modify data. 12. Select >Machines >Data >Basic data >Limit values. 13. Modify "Max. number of digits for program number". Note For machines with Bosch control system, TruTops offers the last used program name as the default program name. For machines with Siemens control system and alphanumeric program names, TruTops offers the name of the NC file as the default program name. In case of alphanumeric program names, no distinction is made between lower case and upper case letters. (For Converting alphanumeric program names into numeric See chapter "Setting basic data"). 14. If the alphanumeric "Program name" is to be different from the name of the NC file in the default settings, set the value of the ST_LAS_NcProgNrLikeFileName variable in the public system rules to c_no (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >System, See chapter "Setting basic data"). 15. Delete the old program name. 16. Enter the new program name. Note TruTops writes this information in the setup plan and (in case of machines with Siemens control system) the NC file. The remarks for the setup plan are self-holding . Then they are overwritten by new text. 17. Enter the desired information. 18. Change to the "Parameters", "Sequence", "Sheet position" or "Setup plan" tab (see the following description). 19. When all settings have been made: Select OK. The NC program is generated.

S98EN

2007-04-20

21BGenerating an NC program

4-151

21.2 Defining parameters

Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The machining of the sheet or single part, including all manual modifications, has been completed. 1. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. The "Generate NC program" mask is opened. 2. Select "Parameters".
Parameters Number of program runs Effect Indicates how often the NC program is to be executed at the machine. The information is outputted in the setup plan. If a production package has been created with TruTops or NcLink, then the NC program will be executed accordingly often, one after another, as specified in the production package. The length or the machine microjoints can be modified in TruTops. "Machining": Only the geometries of the parts are displayed, and not the machining. "Numbering": The parts are displayed with their part numbers (corresponds to the part number in the setup plan and in the NC text). "Sheet info": The sheet name and the date of creation of the sheet are displayed. After the NC programming, TruTops automatically saves the sheets in the '*.TMT' format. TRUMPF technology tables are already stored in the database of the machine control system. It is not necessary to output these with the NC program. Your technology tables that are not yet present at the machine control system must be sent to the machine with the NC program. (Alternative: create technology table at the machine as well. This is the more complicated way to do it.) The numbering of the subroutines then always begins with "1". The "Subroutine no." input field is disabled. Entries for post-processing programs or complete post-processing programs are supplied with TruTops. Post-processing programs are started directly after the NC program is generated. The message "Do you wish to overwrite" is not displayed. The post-processing program is started immediately after the generation of the NC program (see section below). The mask for data transfer is automatically opened after the generation of the NC program. The NC program can be copied or moved to the transfer directory. All parts on the sheet are machined with the selected dynamic level. Tab. 4-5

Length of the machine microjoint Graphic display

Save TMT Output technology tables with program

Link main program and subroutine numbers Use NC post-processing programs

Overwrite the NC file without warning NC post-processing program Start transfer right away

Dynamic level

4-152

21BGenerating an NC program

2007-04-20

S98EN

21.3 Using NC post-processing programs

Entries for post-processing programs or complete post-processing programs are supplied with TruTops. Post-processing programs are started directly after the NC program is generated. TruTops Laser contains the following NC post-processing programs as default settings: LST_EDITOR Opening NC program using an editor. STD_PRINTER Printing the NC program with the default printer. STD_PRINTER_MO (MO = Modal, i.e. TruTops waits when the NC program is being printed) Printing the NC program with the default printer. FlyCut FlyLine (without piercing) the floating and position-accurate switch-on and switch-off of the laser, whereby the height regulation between the contours is not switched off. FLYCUT_BSS The NC post-processing program FlyCut_BSS can be applied to arbitrary contours. NCLINK_LST Starting NcLink when generating an NC program (NcLink creates the production package). SPRINTLAS_PLUS SprintLine (with piercing) is similar to FlyLine, but is used in machines whose software does not support the TC_POS_MODE command. PREPARE_LABEL Collecting data for printing labels.

Example given below: After generating the NC program, the NC text should be opened using the "Notepad" editor and printed. 1. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. The "Generate NC program" mask is opened. 2. Select "Parameters". 3. Select "NC post-processing program". 4. Open input field with . The "Program Selection" mask is opened. Note You can create your own NC post-processing programs and incorporate them into the selection (See chapter "Setting basic data"). TruTops then offers these post-processing programs here.

S98EN

2007-04-20

21BGenerating an NC program

4-153

5. Mark an NC post-processing program (for STD_PRINTER). TruTops imports the STD_PRINTER into the input field.

example:

21.4 Defining the sequence of the machinings

Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The machining of the sheet or the single part, including all manual modifications, has been completed. 1. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. The "Generate NC program" mask is opened. 2. Select "Sequence". 3. Select options for vaporizing. "Vaporize all": selecting vaporizing type (possible only if the vaporizing type is present in the technology table). "No vaporizing": Nothing is vaporized. "Vaporize according to process rule": TruTops reads out the values from the selected process rule. 4. Under "Anticipate machining", select "sheetwise" or "partwise". 5. Mark the preferred operation under "Selectable operation". 6. Select the right arrow. The operation is transferred to the "Selected operation and order" input field. 7. To change the internal sequence of the preferred operations, mark the operation and set it at the desired place using Up arrow or Down arrow. 8. To delete the preferred operations again from "Selected operation and order", mark the operation to be deleted and click on the Down arrow. The operation will be taken back into the "Selectable operation" selection field. 9. To save the preferred operations for future NC programs, check "Save data for future NC generation". 10. Check "Subroutine technique". 11. Check "Enter remainder sheet in remainder sheet management". 12. Change to the "Settings", "Parameters", ""Sheet position" or "Setup plan" tab. 13. When all settings are madeSelect OK. The NC program is generated.

4-154

21BGenerating an NC program

2007-04-20

S98EN

21.5 Measuring sheet position, defining machine loading

Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The machining of the sheet or the single part, including all manual modifications, has been completed. Generating an NC program 1. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. The "Generate NC program" mask is opened. Note The contents of the "Sheet position" tab depend on the machine control system and the enabled options. 2. Select "Sheet position". Note When machining a sheet, its length must be known with sufficient accuracy. To guarantee this, the sheet must be loaded or measured precisely. Sheet alignment with height regulation can be deactivated permanently (for Basic data of the machine, See chapter "Setting basic data"). Cateye (optional) is a photoelectrical sensor which measures the part position precisely. Cateye must be individually activated for every machine (for Basic data of the machine, See chapter "Setting basic data"). 3. Activate the desired box: " Do not measure": The sheet position is not measured. "With height regulation": The machine measures the position of the sheet edge with height regulation. (The "Values for sheet alignment" for machines with Bosch control systems are appropriately preallocated.) "With CatEye (sheet edge)": Cateye measures the exact position of the sheet edge of a rectangular blank or a sheet. "With CatEye (two holes)": Cateye measures the exact position of the centers of two round holes. Note Zero offset is possible only on machines with Bosch control systems. 4. Check "Correction of zero point active" and enter the NC command. The "zero offset" corresponds to the zero offset on the machine. In case of "Correction of zero point active", the machine operator can enter the value of the zero offset at the control system. The NC command is appropriately preallocated. (For NC commands, see the current programming manual for the machine.)

Measuring sheet position

Activating the zero offset (Bosch)

S98EN

2007-04-20

21BGenerating an NC program

4-155

Defining the machine loading

Defining machine unloading

5. Select the desired box for loading. For manual loading, check "Manual". To automatic loading, check "automated". Loading with individual suction cups or suction cup groups is possible. Check the pallet changer before the start of the main program or after the end of the main program. To load with the LiftMaster, check "Loading with LiftMaster". To load with the drawing device, check "Loading with drawing device". 6. Check "Unload skeleton with LiftMaster Sort". 7. Change to the "Settings", "Parameters", ""Sheet position" or "Setup plan" tab. 8. When all settings are madeSelect OK. The NC program is generated.

21.6 Defining options for output of the setup plan

Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The machining of the sheet or the single part, including all manual modifications, has been completed. 1. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. The "Generate NC program" mask is opened. 2. Select "Setup plan"(see "Setup plan", pg. 4-142). 3. Select the desired parameters.

4-156

21BGenerating an NC program

2007-04-20

S98EN

21.7 Editing and printing currently generated NC program

Editing means: modifying the file contents and saving the modified file. The software using which a file is edited is called editor. Conditions An NC program has been generated now. The machined sheet or the machined single part is still loaded. 1. Select >NC program >NC program >Show >Show current. TruTops opens the currently generated NC program using an editor (e.g. Notepad). Note An overview of all NC functions is given in the current programming manual for the machine. 2. Edit NC program 3. To save modifications, select >File >Save (in the editor; here, Notepad). 4. To print the file, select >File >Print (in the editor; here, Notepad). 5. To close the file: >File >Close (in the editor; here, Notepad).

21.8 Editing and printing any NC program

Editing means: modifying the file contents and saving the modified file. The software using which a file is edited is called editor. Conditions An NC program has been generated. A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >NC program >NC program >Show >Show any. The TruTops file browser is displayed. It usually shows all NC programs ('*.LST') in the current directory.

S98EN

2007-04-20

21BGenerating an NC program

4-157

2. Mark the NC desired program. 3. Select OK. TruTops opens the desired NC program with an Editor (e.g. Notepad). Note An overview of all NC functions is given in the current programming manual for the machine. 4. Edit NC program 5. To save modifications, select >File >Save (in the editor; here, Notepad). 6. To print the file, select >File >Print (in the editor; here, Notepad). 7. To close the file: >File >Close (in the editor; here, Notepad).

21.9 Sending NC program to the machine

When generating an NC program 1. Either If the "Generate NC program" mask is still open, select the "Parameters" tab. Select "Start transfer right away". Select OK. or Select the desired machine. Select >NC program >NC program >Start transfer. The "NC file transfer" mask is opened. 2. Open "Source file name" with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. 3. Mark the desired NC program ('*.LST'). 4. Select OK. The "NC file transfer" mask is reopened. The file name and the path of the NC program are entered under "Source file". Note During transfer, TruTops always offers the directory that is entered for the machine in the Data Management. 5. To define the target directory permanently, select >Tools >Modify data, >Machines >Data, Basic data, Limit values, "Name of transfer path".

Selecting an NC program

Modifying the target directory at the machine

4-158

21BGenerating an NC program

2007-04-20

S98EN

Starting transfer

6. To modify the target directory temporarily (until the next time the machine is changed), open "Target directory" with . The "Select directory" mask is opened. 7. Select a directory. 8. Select OK. The "NC file transfer" mask is reopened. The new target directory is entered. It remains in effect until the next time the machine is changed. 9. To send a copy of the NC program to the machine, select "Copy". or To send the original of the NC program to the machine, select "Move". 10. To transfer additional NC programs after the first NC program has been transferred, deactivate "Close dialog after transfer". 11. Select Transfer. The data transfer to the machine is started.

21.10 Switching time output on and off after each NC block

The time output can be switched on and off with the ST_LAS_NcZeitausgabe system variables. Set the value of the ST_LAS_NcZeitausgabe variable to 1 (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >SystemSee chapter "Setting basic data").

S98EN

2007-04-20

21BGenerating an NC program

4-159

22.

Table alignment

22.1 Transferring data to the machine

Technology tables can be transferred to the machine control system without generating an NC program. This compact data transfer ensures that the machine operator has at his disposal the same data as the TruTops programmer does. Condition The control system of the machine must support the table format (e.g. SINUMERIK 840D, Bosch type 3) Note Technology tables are not overwritten at the control system. Example: a table "1234" already exists at the control system. If a technology table with the same name is transferred with the '*.tab' file, then the transferred table is ignored during the data alignment process. The table at the control system remains unchanged. 1. Select >Tools >Export tables. The "Export tables" mask is opened. 2. Select the desired data. Note The file extension '*.tab' must remain unchanged when the file name is allocated. 3. Either accept the file name suggested or enter your own file name. 4. Select OK. The files are saved in the "Target directory". The files must be subsequently transferred from the target directory to the respective machine.

4-160

22BTable alignment

2007-04-20

S98EN

Chapter 5

Information on machines
1. Machines supported by TruTops laser........................ 5-2

S98EN05.DOC

Machines supported by TruTops laser

5-1

1.
Machine TC L2503 TC L2503 E TruLaser 2025 / TC L 2510 TC L 2520 TC L 2530 TruLaser 2525 / TC L 2530 plus TC L3003 TC L3003 E TruLaser 3030 classic / TC L 3020 TruLaser 3030 / TC L 3030 TruLaser 3030 / TC L 3030 TruLaser 5030 / TC L 3050 TC L4003 TC L4003 E TruLaser 3040 / TC L 4030 TruLaser 3040 / TC L 4030 TruLaser 5040 / TC L 4050 TC L 5005 TruLaser 3060 / TC L 6030 TruLaser 3060 / TC L 6030 TruLaser 5060 / TC L 6050 TC LY 2500 TLC 105 TLC 105 (Height regulation DIAS) TLC 1005 TLC 6005 TLC CUT5 TC HSL 2502 (two cutting heads) TruLaser 7025 (two cutting heads) TC HSL 2502 C TruLaser 7040 (two cutting heads) TC HSL 4002 C

Machines supported by TruTops laser

Components Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer (optional) Pallet changer (optional) Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer, LiftMaster Pallet changer, LiftMaster, LiftMaster sort, SortMaster (optional) Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer, LiftMaster Pallet changer, LiftMaster, LiftMaster sort, SortMaster (optional) Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer, LiftMaster sort, SortMaster (optional) Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer

Control system (machine software) Bosch Bosch SINUMERIK 840D SINUMERIK 840D SINUMERIK 840D SINUMERIK 840D Bosch Bosch SINUMERIK 840D Bosch SINUMERIK 840D SINUMERIK 840D Bosch Bosch Bosch SINUMERIK 840D SINUMERIK 840D TASC 500 Bosch SINUMERIK 840D SINUMERIK 840D Bosch TASC 500 TASC 500 SINUMERIK 840D SINUMERIK 840D SINUMERIK 840D SINUMERIK 840D SINUMERIK 840D SINUMERIK 840D

5-2

1BMachines supported by TruTops laser

S98EN05.DOC

Machine TC WS 2500 TC WS 2502 (two cutting heads) TC WS 4000 TC WS 4020 (two cutting heads)

Control system (machine software) Bosch Bosch Bosch Bosch

Components Table 1

S98EN05.DOC

Machines supported by TruTops laser

5-3

5-4

1BMachines supported by TruTops laser

S98EN05.DOC

Chapter 6

Order interface (Option)

1. 2. 2.1 2.2 Order interface ............................................................... 6-3 User interfaces............................................................... 6-3 Production orders mask................................................... 6-3 Order interface mask ....................................................... 6-4 Toolbars...................................................................... 6-4 Symbols ...................................................................... 6-5 Operating the order interface ....................................... 6-6 Importing an order in the order interface ......................... 6-6 Using an existing production order .................................. 6-6 Using new production order............................................. 6-7 Confirming the completion of a production order ............ 6-8 Settings ............................................................................ 6-8 Modify basic settings .................................................. 6-8 Changing the language .............................................. 6-9 Changing the measuring system ................................ 6-9 Resetting view to standard size.................................. 6-9 Dialog boxes .................................................................. 6-10 Input fields ................................................................ 6-10 Buttons...................................................................... 6-10

3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

3.6

S98EN06.DOC

1B Order interface

6-1

3.7

3.8

3.9

Overviews in the order interface.................................... 6-11 Sorting overviews ..................................................... 6-11 Outputting overviews ................................................ 6-11 Number of data records............................................ 6-13 Filter functions ............................................................... 6-14 Filter for production orders ....................................... 6-14 Filter for PPC orders................................................. 6-15 Initial filter for PPC orders......................................... 6-15 Help in the order interface ............................................. 6-16 Documentation.......................................................... 6-16 Tool tips .................................................................... 6-16 PPC orders ................................................................... 6-17 Overview ........................................................................ 6-17 Working with PPC orders............................................... 6-17 Show PPC orders ..................................................... 6-17 Creating a PPC order ............................................... 6-18 Processing PPC orders ............................................ 6-18 Entering and outputting PPC orders......................... 6-19 Order data................................................................. 6-20 Importing PPC orders manually..................................... 6-21 Creating an import scheme ...................................... 6-21 Importing data........................................................... 6-23 Job management ........................................................... 6-24 Displaying respective jobs ........................................ 6-24 Deleting a job............................................................ 6-24

4. 4.1 4.2

4.3

4.4

6-2

1B Order interface

S98EN06.DOC

1.

Order interface

Production orders can be imported either through an Excel import or from external PPC systems through an XML interface in the order interface. These production orders can then directly be installed in the corresponding nesting jobs using Nest. If the nesting jobs have been completely programmed, the completion of the production orders is sent back to the order interface via TruTops Punch or TruTops Laser.

2. 2.1

User interfaces Production orders mask

The production orders mask shows all active order parts, for which NC programs are to be generated.

1 2

Filter settings Display area

Detailed information Fig. 58013

Filter settings Display area

The number of visible production orders can be adjusted via the filter settings (see section Filter for production orders, p. 6-14). All active production orders are listed in the display area and can be selected in Nest for further processing.

S98EN06.DOC

1B Order interface

6-3

Detailed information

The detailed information also clearly shows all information of the chosen production order in list form next to a graphic component.

2.2

Order interface mask

All orders are shown here, which were imported through the XML interface or through the Excel import. For detailed information see PPC orders, p. 6-17.

Toolbars

1 2

Menu bar Quick function bar

3 4

Softkey bar Status bar Fig. 58014

Toolbars in the order interface

Menu bar Quick function bar Softkey bar

General functions and settings of the order interface can be activated using the menu bar. The functions of the quick function bar also depend on the selected function area. They are displayed as symbols (see p. 6-5). The softkey bar includes buttons that are activated or deactivated depending on the selected object. The functions of the buttons are different for every function area. In some function areas, additional functions can be called up using the symbol on the right-side of the softkey bar.

6-4

2BUser interfaces

S98EN06.DOC

Status bar

Current messages, date and time are displayed on the status bar.

Symbols
In the order interface, symbols are either used to display information (e.g. status) or symbolize certain functions in dialog boxes or on toolbars.
Symbol Description Create new data record. Edit marked data record. You can alternatively double-click on the data record. Delete marked data record. You can alternatively select <DEL>. Actualize view. You can alternatively select <F5>. Output display. The output mode can be determined in a dialog box (see section 3.7, p. 6-11). Filter active (green)/not active. The filter functions are displayed/hidden by pressing this symbol. An initial filter is saved for the displayed list (see section 3.7, p. 611). Select from available data records. The value in the input field is automatically set as the filter. If the input field is empty, then all data records will be displayed. A message appears if the number of data records to be displayed exceeds a defined maximum number (this can be modified in the settings). You can alternatively press <F3>. Select from available data records. All available data records are always displayed. This symbol is also used for selecting files in the file system. General symbols in the order interface Table 6-1

S98EN06.DOC

2BUser interfaces

6-5

3. 3.1

Operating the order interface Importing an order in the order interface

A new order can be imported in the order interface via 4 different methods. Importing an order automatically via the XML interface from a PPC system (see document "Interface description of the order interface"). or Importing an order automatically via the XML interface from a PPC system and subsequently adjusting it manually (see Processing PPC orders, p.6-18). or Importing an order via the Excel import function (see Importing PPC orders manually, p. 6-21). or Creating an order manually (see Creating a PPC order, p. 618). Tip The "PPC orders" mask of the order interface can be opened directly from the "Nest" application via>Extras >Show order entry.

3.2

Using an existing production order

Prerequisite Order is entered in the order interface (see Entering and outputting PPC orders, p. 6-19). 1. Switch to the "Nest" application. 2. Select>File >New >Order . 3. Press Import in the selection of parts mask. The "Production orders" mask is opened. 4. Select desired production order. 5. Press OK. 6. Select job name and storage location. 7. Create nesting job in "Nest" application.

6-6

3BOperating the order interface

S98EN06.DOC

The selected production orders are applied in the "Nest" application. The used number can be subsequently adjusted in the nesting job. The actual used parts and partial quantities are reported back to the order interface and shown under "Target quantity job" in the "Job management" mask.

3.3

Using new production order

Prerequisite Order is imported in the order interface (see Importing an order in the order interface, p. 6-6). 1. Switch to the "Nest" application. 2. Select >File >New Order.... 3. Press Import in the selection of parts mask. The production orders mask is opened. 4. Show order entry . The "PPC orders" mask of the order interface is opened. 5. Select an order. 6. Input order (see Entering and outputting PPC orders, p. 6-19). 7. Close order interface. 8. In the "Production orders"mask, press Update. 9. Select desired production order. 10. Press OK. 11. Select job name and storage location. 12. Creating nesting job in "Nest" application. The selected production orders are applied in the "Nest" application. The used number can be subsequently adjusted in the nesting job. The actual used parts and partial quantities are reported back to the order interface and shown under "Target quantity job" in the "Job management" mask.

S98EN06.DOC

3BOperating the order interface

6-7

3.4

Confirming the completion of a production order

If a production order is a component of a nesting job, the used quantity in the nesting job is automatically reported back to the PPC order. The completion of the production order after the creation of the NC program must be reported manually from the TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch. Prerequisite Production order is a component of a nesting job with nesting result. NC program of the nesting job is created in TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch. 1. Switch to the "Nest" application. 2. Select>NC program >NC program >Complete processing. The completion of the used production orders is reported back to the relevant PPC orders and shown under "Quantity in job" in the "Job management" mask.

3.5

Settings

Modify basic settings

1. Select >Administration >settings. 2. Modify the desired settings and then select OK. or Select Cancel (Modifications will not be saved). Tip Detailed descriptions of the settings are available as a tool tip (see Tool tips, p. 6-16).

6-8

3BOperating the order interface

S98EN06.DOC

Changing the language

1. Select View >Language change. The following mask appears:

Language change

Fig. 41072en

2. Select a language and select Apply. The language is changed. The computer does not have to be restarted.

Changing the measuring system

1. SelectView >Units of measurement. 2. Select unit of measurement and then press OK. The measuring system is changed. The computer does not have to be restarted.

Resetting view to standard size

The interface is optimized to a resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels. If the window has been zoomed in and out, the optimal size can be reset. Resetting view to standard size. The application window is reset to the optimal size.

Resetting to standard size

S98EN06.DOC

3BOperating the order interface

6-9

3.6

Dialog boxes

In the following, you will find general basic notes for the operation of dialog boxes within the "PPC orders" and "Job management" mask.

Input fields
There are three types of input fields: Mandatory fields Mandatory fields are displayed on a yellow background. These fields must be filled out in order to save a data record. An error message appears if a mandatory field has not been filled when a dialog box is being closed. Can fields Can fields are displayed on a white background. These fields can be filled out or left empty. Disabled fields Disabled fields are displayed on a gray background. These fields cannot be edited.

Buttons
OK

All entries in the dialog box are saved and the dialog box is closed. The current data record is saved. The dialog box remains open. An empty data record is generated. The field for the name of the data record is reset. All other entries are retained. In the case of data records with similar features, you can use this function to avoid re-entering of the entire data. The dialog box is closed. If the data record has been modified, a prompt to save or discard the changes appears.

Apply

New...

Copy

Close

6-10

3BOperating the order interface

S98EN06.DOC

3.7

Overviews in the order interface

Overviews are displayed in tabular form as lists (e.g. PPC orders, relevant jobs, etc.). Different auxiliary tools are available so that you can find the desired information quickly in these lists. For filter functions, see Filter for PPC orders, p. 6-15.

Sorting overviews
The overviews can be sorted in ascending or descending order according to each column displayed. Activating sorting 1. Click on the heading of the column according to which the list is to be sorted. Tip You can sort according to multiple columns by keeping the <SHIFT> key pressed. The list is sorted. An arrow next to the heading of the column shows the sorting direction. 2. Click on the heading of the column again to change the sorting order.

Outputting overviews
The printing functions allow a manifold output of all overviews and tables. The overviews can, for instance, be directly exported as PDF or XLS files or can also be sent directly via e-mail as PDF files. Outputting overviews 1. Select the print symbol .

S98EN06.DOC

3BOperating the order interface

6-11

The following dialog box will appear:

Print dialog box

Fig. 53419en

2. Select the desired output mode from "Output on..." . Various export formats are available (e.g. printing, XLS, XML, HTML, PDF, etc.). Tip The output can be generated directly as a preview, Excel or . PDF file using the symbols 3. Make further settings as needed. 4. Select Start. The current list is output in the desired output mode.

Sending a print-out as an email

The print-out can also be sent directly via e-mail using the printing selection dialog box. 1. Print the desired document from TruTops. The printing selection dialog box appears. 2. In the "Output on..." field, select the "Preview" output mode and select Start. The preview is displayed. 3. Select the letter symbol in the menu bar. The following dialog box will appear:

Mail dispatch

Fig. 43933en

6-12

3BOperating the order interface

S98EN06.DOC

4. Select "PDF document" (or another format) from the list and select OK. The print-out is converted into the specified format and is automatically inserted into a new e-mail of your default mail program.

Number of data records

The number of displayed data records can be displayed or hidden in the quick function bar. 1. Right-click the list. The context menu opens. 2. Select Number of records. The number of data records is displayed in the quick function bar.

Number of data records (here: 29)

Fig. 44241

S98EN06.DOC

3BOperating the order interface

6-13

3.8

Filter functions

Filter for production orders

The filter functions can be used to filter the displayed production orders with different criteria. Here, the filter functions are displayed in a line above the data. Activating filter criteria Note The filtering can be both positive ("all orders which contain the following value") and negative ("all orders which do not contain the following value"). The filter criteria are preceded by a "-" in case of a negative search. 1. Either Select filter criterion from the list of filter criteria and enter the corresponding filter value. Enter filter criterion directly in the filter line, end with ":" and enter the corresponding filter value. or Right-click the desired filter value (e. g. Customer "XYZ") and select filter according to the value. 2. Select the next filter criterion, if needed. The list is updated with the filters.

Deactivating filter criterion

Delete filter line. The entire list is displayed.

Standard filter

1. Select the desired filter under >Filter criteria >Standard filter. Tip Using >Save filter, the current filter settings are saved as Userdefined. 2. Select Reset to activate the selected standard filter.

Sort columns

1. Click on the heading of the column according to which the list is to be sorted. The list is sorted. An arrow next to the heading of the column shows the sorting direction. 2. Click on the heading of the column again to change the sorting order.

6-14

3BOperating the order interface

S98EN06.DOC

Displaying and hiding columns

1. Right-click on any column. 2. Activate or deactivate the desired columns in the contextsensitive menu.

Filter for PPC orders

The filter functions can be used to filter the displayed data with different criteria. Here, the filter functions are displayed above the data. Displaying and hiding filter functions Select the filter symbol .

The filter function bar is displayed or hidden.

Applying filters

1. Enter filters in the respective fields. Use "%" as dummy. 2. Select the symbol (or press <F5> ). The list is updated with the filters.

Deactivating filters

Enter "%" in all fields. The entire list is displayed and the filter symbol changes to "No filter active" .

Initial filter for PPC orders

For every list displayed, the currently set filter can be saved as the so-called "Initial filter". The list is then automatically filtered with the initial filter each time it is opened. Note The initial filter is saved with reference to terminals; i.e. it is applicable for all users of the terminal. Setting initial filters 1. Enter filter criteria in filter functions. 2. Right-click the list field. The context menu opens. 3. Select Save initial filter. The initial filter is set and the filter symbol changes to "Initial filter" .

S98EN06.DOC

3BOperating the order interface

6-15

Deleting initial filters

1. Right-click the list field. The context menu opens. 2. Select Delete initial filter. The initial filter is deleted.

3.9

Help in the order interface

Documentation
The documentation of the order interface is part of the TruTops software manual and is available as PDF file directly in TruTops. Opening the manual Select Help >Help in TruTops. The manual is opened.

Tool tips
The so-called "tool tips" provide additional information, descriptions or help on individual elements of the user interface (e.g. symbols, list elements). Displaying a tool tip Point to the desired element with the mouse. The tool tip appears in a yellow box next to the mouse pointer after a short time.

Fig. 41080en

6-16

3BOperating the order interface

S98EN06.DOC

4. 4.1

PPC orders Overview

Orders are automatically transferred through the PPC interface and are displayed in the "PPC orders" function area (see document "Interface description of the order interface"). Orders that were imported through the Excel import interface are also displayed. The 2 possible statuses of individual orders are displayed in the status column: Released ( ): Order is completely imported and relevant production orders are listed in the production orders mask. Incomplete ( ): Order is not complete. The order must be manually completed and entered (see Working with PPC orders, p. 6-17). Note Only those orders which have been successfully imported are displayed. If errors occur during the import, the files in the import directory are provided with the ".error" ending, a log file with all errors is written and it is also stored in the import directory.

4.2

Working with PPC orders

Show PPC orders

1. Switch to the "Nest" application. 2. Select>Extras >Show order entry. or Select>File >New >Order. Press Import in the selection of parts mask. The production orders mask is opened. PressShow order entry . The "PPC orders" mask of the order interface is opened.

S98EN06.DOC

4BPPC orders

6-17

Creating a PPC order

Creating a PPC order 1. Select the symbol for new PPC order in the quick function bar. The input dialog box appears. 2. Enter the order number. 3. Enter the "part no.": Select an existing part: Enter the filter value in the "Part no." field and select . the "Select part" symbol Select a part from the list and select OK. If the unprocessed raw material is already available for this part, you will be asked, if you want to adopt new raw material.

or Create a new part: Enter part no. manually. The part data is adopted in the mask.

4. Enter "Raw material ext. 5. Enter the "Target quantity". 6. Enter additional specifications as needed. Tip As long as the order is not entered, the status of the order remains "Incomplete". The order can still be saved and you can complete it at a later time. 7. Select OK or Apply.

Processing PPC orders

Editing a PPC order 1. Select the order. 2. Select the symbol for Edit order. The input dialog box is displayed. 3. Modify data. 4. Select OK.

Canceling a PPC order

When canceling, the PPC order is deleted from the order interface and a cancellation message is sent to the PPC system.

6-18

4BPPC orders

S98EN06.DOC

Prerequisite The order is not contained in any nesting job and is not being processed. 1. Select the order. 2. Select Cancel order. or Select the delete symbol in the softkey bar. 3. Confirm the cancellation message. If the PPC order has been directly transferred from the PPC system, a dialog box appears in which you can enter a deletion note.

Entering and outputting PPC orders

If the PPS orders are not automatically entered by the PPC system (setting in the XML file, see document "Interface description of the order interface"), they must be manually entered in the order interface, in order to be able to generate a production order from them. Entering a PPC order 1. Select the order. 2. Select Enter order. The status of the PPC orders changes to "Released". The relevant production order can now be added to a nesting job in the nest application.

Outputting a PPC order

Prerequisite The production order is not included in any nesting job. 1. Select the order. 2. Select Output order. The status of the PPC order changes to "Incomplete", the production order can no longer be used in the "Nest" application.

S98EN06.DOC

4BPPC orders

6-19

Order data
Following fields are included: Order no. The unique name of the order. Part no. The unique name of the part to be produced. Part no. ext An extended name of the part to be produced. Filler part order Indicates that the production order is only used for filling sheets. Even when the number of units for the order is not achieved, no new sheet will be assigned with the parts that are still not accounted for. Order status The current status of the order. Assembly This can be used as a filter/grouping option. Customer order: If the production order was generated from a customer order, the customer order is displayed. Customer: Customer for whom the production order is produced. Customer order no.: If available, a customer order no. can be specified. Identification This can be used as a filter/grouping option. Target finish date: The date for completion of the order. Priority: 1 = lowest priority, 10 = highest priority. Target quantity: Quantity of parts to be produced. Comment Any text or active contents can be entered here. Target processing time Here, you can enter the maximum time for the machining of the part in minutes. Monitoring Identification whether it is a critical operation which should better be monitored by an employee. The identification can be used as a filter criterion when creating a job. As soon as an operation with monitoring is included in the job, the entire job receives the "Monitored" identification. Part rotatable If this function is active, parts can be rotated for this operation during nesting. Only for programming with TruTops. Rolling direction Information about the rolling direction of the sheet.

6-20

4BPPC orders

S98EN06.DOC

4.3

Importing PPC orders manually

The "Excel import" function can be used to import orders as PPC orders in Microsoft Excel format. The assignment of the columns from the Excel file to the corresponding columns in the order interface is done using an import scheme which must be defined earlier.

Creating an import scheme

Selecting the Excel file 1. Select Excel import. The "Import orders" mask is opened. 2. Use the file selection symbol to open the Excel file in the file system. Because no import scheme has yet been created, a corresponding message will appear. Configuring a scheme 3. Select Configure. The following mask appears:

Creating a configuration

Fig. 43937en

All table sheets of the selected Excel file are displayed in the "Excel table" field as selection list. 4. Select the table sheet from which the data is to be taken. 5. Activate "Read out area". The fields used to enter the table area are activated. 6. Enter the table area from which the data is to be read out in the "Table area" fields (e.g. "A1:F10"). 7. Enter further options: Header exists Indicates whether a line should be used as column headings.

S98EN06.DOC

4BPPC orders

6-21

Header position Indicates which line is to be recognized as header. Remove blank lines The empty lines in the table are not imported.

8. Select Test to test the current configuration. The current configuration is displayed in a window. 9. Select Close to close the window and change the configuration as needed. Assigning columns 10. Select the "Mapping" tab.

Mapping

Fig. 43938en

In mapping, each column from the Excel table is assigned with the corresponding field name in the order interface. 11. Select the column name from the Excel table in the right list field. 12. Select the field name in which the values from the selected table column should appear from the left list field. 13. Select the transfer symbol . The column name is transferred from the right list field into the left list field. To correct, select the opposite transfer symbol (). 14. In this way, assign all columns of the table to the fields in the order interface. 15. Further entries: Decimal separator Specifies whether the decimal values from the Excel table are separated by a comma or a dot. Generating order no. An order number is automatically generated for each data record from the Excel table if this option is activated. Deactivate this option if a field with the order number is already defined in the table.

6-22

4BPPC orders

S98EN06.DOC

16. To save the configuration, select Save as. A dialog box for entry of the name for the configuration appears. 17. Enter a name for the configuration and select OK. The configuration is saved. 18. Adapt further tables from the Excel file as needed. 19. Close the configuration dialog box. 20. The data from the Excel file is now displayed in the import dialog box.

Finished configuration

Fig. 43942en

The saved configuration can be selected under "Import scheme".

Importing data
Prerequisite At least one import scheme has been created.

1. Select Excel import. The import dialog box appears (see Fig. 43942en, p. 6-23) . 2. Select the import scheme from the list. 3. Use the file selection symbol to open the Excel file. 4. Click Import. All of the data from the selected Excel file will be imported into the order interface with the selected import scheme.

S98EN06.DOC

4BPPC orders

6-23

4.4
Definition "Job"

Job management

A job consists of one or several PPC order parts for which a nesting job has already been created. Normally all part orders have similar unprocessed material.

Displaying respective jobs

If the PPC order is already included in nesting jobs, these jobs can be displayed. 1. Mark the PPC order. 2. Select Respective jobs. The order interface changes to job management and applies the display filter to all jobs with the order number of the selected PPC order. 3. Select Back to return to the PPC overview.

Deleting a job
If a nesting job is manually deleted via the file browser, no feedback is sent to the order interface. The order interface checks the completed jobs automatically after three days and deletes them. The relevant job can also be manually deleted in the Job management. 1. Select the job that is to be deleted. 2. Select delete symbol in the softkey bar. The job is deleted.

6-24

4BPPC orders

S98EN06.DOC

Index
A
Acceleration programming (Bosch) ........... 2-68 Alphanumeric program names Numeric, converting to (Siemens control systems)................................................ 2-7 Applications in TruTops ............................... 1-7 Closing individually and reopening ....... 1-7 Closing, permanently ............................ 1-8 Language, switching ............................. 1-9 Opening, several times ......................... 1-8 Renaming.............................................. 1-8 Approach Modify approach radius....................... 4-52 Approach (Bosch) Cutting speed ...................................... 2-44 Gas pressure....................................... 2-44 Gating frequency................................. 2-44 Laser power ........................................ 2-44 Approach angles, inside and outside ........ 2-75 Approach path ........................................... 2-76 Approach radius ........................................ 2-76 Approach strategy (rule) ............................ 2-76 Approaching Approach flags .................................... 4-49 Approach flags, displacing .................. 4-53 Approach flags, form, modifying manually ............................................................ 4-51 Approach flags, inverting .................... 4-54 Approach flags, parameters, modifying............................................. 4-50 Piercing points, displacing .................. 4-51 Automation components ...allocating to the machines and configuring........................................... 2-17 ...supported by TruTops.................... 4-120

C
Calculator................................................... 1-57 Coordinates of points, entering ........... 1-58 Deactivating, permanently................... 1-57 Numerical values, entering in input fields ........................................... 1-58 Catching, activating...................................... 3-6 Cateye...................................................... 4-155 Characteristics ........................................... 1-46 Characteristic fixed, switching on or off .................................................... 1-46 Characteristics, highlighting ................ 1-47 Characteristics, removing.................... 1-47 Notches - advanced options................ 1-48 TruTops behavior ................................ 1-46 Circles Cutting exactly..................................... 4-42 Cutting with diameter correction, path correction or approach start point ....... 4-44 Collection call up for several NC postprocessing programs, creating ........... 2-123 Collision check Log file, showing.................................. 4-36 Safety range ........................................ 2-79 Color scheme, modifying ........................... 1-49 Colors and symbols Meaning................................................. 4-8 Command line and input line ..................... 1-14 Command prompt PDM functions, executing.................... 1-21 Configuring laser data................................ 2-16 Contour parameters Adopting .............................................. 4-39 Showing............................................... 4-38 Contour size Modifying ............................................. 4-40 Switching within a contour................... 4-41 Contour size, definition Open contours:.................................... 2-67 Small, medium, large........................... 2-67 Contour, cutting Gas pressure ....................................... 2-41 Power pause (YAG laser).................... 2-42 Power pulse (YAG laser)..................... 2-42 Time pause (YAG laser)...................... 2-42 Time pulse (YAG laser) ....................... 2-42 Contours, marking Contour size of marked texts............... 2-70 Contours, not machinable Marking or dot marking........................ 2-70

B
Beam end before contour end ................... 4-57 Beam end before contour end?................. 2-78 Blank Defining a new one ............................. 2-28 Button texts in the function browser, displaying and hiding ............................................. 1-15

S98EN06.DOC

Index

6-1

Coordinates of points, entering.................. 1-58 Copy Paste, using .................................. 1-56 Corner cooling time ................................... 2-46 Corner treatment ....................................... 4-58 Corners, cooling .................................. 4-58 Deleting ............................................... 4-63 Loopings, moving ................................ 4-59 Modifying............................................. 4-62 Recreating........................................... 4-60 Crossing height of cutting head when positioning ............................................ 2-81 Customized rules Machine-dependent ............................ 2-87 Cutting With SprintLine.................................... 2-68 Cutting distance, positioning to ................. 4-76 Cutting head Collision area ...................................... 2-24 Cutting head collision area ........................ 2-24 Cutting head No. (Bosch) .......................... 2-56 Cutting head, cross. height when positioning ............................................ 2-68 Cutting scrap Determining parameters ..................... 4-73 Cutting speed Approach (Bosch) ............................... 2-44 Cutting the contour.............................. 2-41 General cutting.................................... 2-46 Cutting the contour Cutting speed ...................................... 2-41 Gating frequency................................. 2-41 Kerf width ............................................ 2-41 Laser power ........................................ 2-41 Nozzle standoff ................................... 2-41 Setting value ....................................... 2-41

Drawing display Detail view, displaying ......................... 1-50 Drawing, displaying completely ........... 1-50 Drawing, restructuring ......................... 1-50 Drawing, zooming................................ 1-51 Outline points, displaying and hiding... 1-52 Screen section, moving ....................... 1-51 View, get last ....................................... 1-52 View, memorizing and recalling........... 1-52 Drawing, displaying completely ................. 1-50 Drawing, zooming ...................................... 1-51 Drawings Opening and editing (laser) ................. 4-11 Drawings, display Detail view, displaying ......................... 1-50 Drawing, displaying completely ........... 1-50 Drawing, restructuring ......................... 1-50 Drawing, zooming................................ 1-51 Outline points, displaying and hiding... 1-52 Screen section, moving ....................... 1-51 View, get last ....................................... 1-52 View, memorizing and recalling........... 1-52 Drawings, mini nests, sheets, opening and mirroring simultaneously....................... 4-12 Dynamic level Setting ............................................... 4-107 Showing............................................. 4-107 Dynamics Defining ............................................... 2-15 Modifying ............................................. 2-15

E
Entries in the command line, repeating ..... 1-56 Exporting (PDM) Using prompt/script ............................. 1-41 Using the TruTops file browser ........... 1-40 External programs.................................... 2-123 Self-defined, entering ........................ 2-120

D
Data Management, opening ........................ 2-5 Defining setting dimension offset .............. 2-75 Dependencies between files (PDM) Dependent files, deleting, exporting, properties, displaying .......................... 1-44 Dependencies between files(PDM) Dependencies, checking..................... 1-42 Detail view, displaying ............................... 1-50 Determining sheet thickness by means of measuring cycle.................................... 2-73 Directories Renaming............................................ 1-29 Display of drawings, restructuring ............. 1-50 Dot mark points Contour size ........................................ 2-70 Double cart .............................................. 4-121

F
Feed forward When approaching .............................. 2-75 When cutting ....................................... 2-78 While withdrawing ............................... 2-80 File dependencies, checking (PDM) .......... 1-42 File or directories, renaming ...................... 1-29 File properties Viewing ................................................ 1-36

6-2

S98EN06.DOC

Files (PDM), importing Using file browser................................ 1-38 Using Windows Explorer..................... 1-37 Files and folders (PDM), importing/exporting............................... 1-37 Files, adding other details to list field ........ 1-33 Files, automatically checking updated status when loading and saving in TruTops (PDM) ................................. 1-45 Files, deleting and restoring ...................... 1-30 Files, importing/exporting using Windows Explorer (PDM)..................................... 1-37 Files, loading Check whether there are non machined RED that are already machined (affecting selection) ........................... 2-108 Files, opening with the Geo Viewer........... 1-34 Files, searching for .................................... 1-32 Files, sending from PDM to My Documents in the file system.................................. 1-35 Files, sending via email ............................. 1-34 Files, zipping.............................................. 1-35 Flying cutting end ...................................... 4-57 FlyLine ..................................................... 4-100 Advantages ....................................... 4-102 Machining, deleting ........................... 4-104 Machining, showing........................... 4-104 Parts, machining ............................... 4-103 Form of the approach at corners (rule)...... 2-77 Free cycles Copying ............................................. 2-117 Creating............................................. 2-115 Deleting ............................................. 2-119 Modifying........................................... 2-117 Printing .............................................. 2-117 Selection, removing from .................. 2-119 Function browser ....................................... 1-13 Button texts in the function browser, displaying and hiding .......................... 1-15 Displaying and hiding.......................... 1-15 Quick navigation bar, displaying and hiding................................................... 1-15 Symbols, modifying the size ............... 1-18

Gas type General cutting .................................... 2-46 Gating frequency Approach (Bosch)................................ 2-44 Cutting the contour .............................. 2-41 Geo Viewer Files, opening with it............................ 1-34

H
Height regulation active When approaching .............................. 2-75 When cutting ....................................... 2-77 Height regulation system active While withdrawing ............................... 2-80 html editor Mircrosoft Word, using ...................... 4-145

I
Importing, files(PDM) Using the prompt/script ....................... 1-41 Importing, several folders (PDM) ............... 1-39 Increased acceleration Deleting (for machines with an open control system) .................................. 4-106 Setting (for machines with an open control system) .................................. 4-105 Setting (for machines with other control systems) ................................ 4-108 Showing (for machines with an open control system) .................................. 4-106 Information Single part information ........................ 4-37 Information, displaying Job, total sheet waste of...................... 3-70 Result log, displaying .......................... 3-71 Sheet, waste of.................................... 3-70 Single parts, geometries, showing and hiding ................................................... 3-69 Internet TruTops, obtaining tips and tricks ......... 1-6

G
Gas flushing (Bosch) Switch on when changing from cutting to piercing............................................ 2-56 Switch on when changing from piercing to cutting.............................................. 2-56 Gas pressure Approach (Bosch) ............................... 2-44 Contour, cutting................................... 2-41

K
Kerf width Cutting the contour .............................. 2-41 Key functions of TruTops, using ................ 1-55

S98EN06.DOC

Index

6-3

Keyboard buffer of command line, using (entries, repeating) ............................... 1-56 Keyboard operation ................................... 1-54 Copy Paste, using ............................ 1-56 Key functions of TruTops, using ......... 1-55 Keyboard buffer Command line, using (entries, repeating) .............................. 1-56 Numerical values and coordinates, entering ............................................... 1-54 Texts, entering in input fields .............. 1-54 Windows keyboard commands and shortcuts, using ................................... 1-54

L
Labels, printing Generate label per part and/or per NC program............................................. 2-109 Language, switching.................................... 1-9 Laser power Approach (Bosch) ............................... 2-44 Cutting the contour.............................. 2-41 Lens (Bosch) ID No. .................................................. 2-56 LiftMaster ................................................. 4-120 Displaying in Nest ............................... 3-68 LiftMaster Sort ......................................... 4-121 LiftMaster sort suction cup selection strategy Modifying............................................. 2-18 Limited period license, applying for ........... 1-60 Loop corners.............................................. 2-84 Angle range......................................... 2-85 Length of bisecting line angle ............. 2-85 Length of element before/ after a looping ..................................... 2-85 Radius ................................................. 2-85 Select shape ....................................... 2-84 Looping, ..................................................... 4-59 Looping, Parameters ................................. 4-59

M
Machine Configure (basic data)........................... 2-6 Copying ............................................... 2-27 Machine data ............................................... 2-6 Machine microjoints................................... 4-64 Contours, disabling against automatic 4-67 Setting ................................................. 4-66 Machine time in the set-up plan Configuring.......................................... 2-94

Machine-dependent customized rules ....... 2-87 Adapting .............................................. 2-87 Modifying public variables ................... 2-87 Machines Changing ............................................. 4-10 Data, transferring to the machine (table alignment)................................ 4-160 NC program, sending to the machine 4-158 Machining sequence Automatic optimization, setting in a machine-dependent manner ............... 4-93 Automatic, machine-independent optimization,setting.............................. 4-94 Modifying manually.............................. 4-86 Optimizing............................................ 4-89 Path optimization................................. 4-89 Process options, Automatic, machinedependent, setting............................... 4-90 Setting at the beginning of the machining .................................. 4-86 Setting at the end of the machining..... 4-87 Tipping optimization ............................ 4-89 Machining sequence Modifying in any way ........................... 4-87 Machining, highlighting ............................ 4-118 Machinings Collision test ........................................ 4-35 Contour parameters ............................ 4-38 Copying ............................................... 4-31 Deleting ............................................... 4-32 Disabling.............................................. 4-33 Enabling............................................... 4-34 End of cut, optimizing .......................... 4-57 FlyLine, with....................................... 4-100 Generating........................................... 4-29 Simulating.......................................... 4-108 Main menus and submenus....................... 1-12 Marking Data ..................................................... 2-49 With SprintLine .................................... 2-68 Masks and messages, moving .................. 1-49 Material Defining a new one.............................. 2-28 Material data Modifying ............................................. 2-29 Microjoints Definition.............................................. 4-64 Deleting ............................................... 4-68 Microwelds Application ........................................... 4-69 Data (Bosch)........................................ 2-54 Definition.............................................. 4-69 Deleting ............................................... 4-72 Setting ................................................. 4-70 MicroWelds Data ..................................................... 2-52

6-4

S98EN06.DOC

Mini nests Creating............................................... 3-58 Discarding changes............................. 3-64 Modifying............................................. 3-60 Moving................................................. 3-60 Opening and editing (laser)................. 4-11 Rotating............................................... 3-63 Single parts of mini nests, distancing for common separating cuts (TwinLine) ... 3-65 Mouse operation Mouse pointer in masks, placing automatically at OK ............................. 1-53 Multi-function buttons ................................ 1-14

N
Name of transfer path Modifying permanently.......................... 2-7 NC block, time output, switching on and off after each....................................... 4-159 NC cycles Deleting ............................................... 4-85 NC cycles:......................................... 4-83, 4-84 NC output................................................. 2-115 NC output, configuring................................. 2-6 Alphanumeric program names? (Siemens control systems).................... 2-7 Laser table format ................................. 2-7 Name of transfer path ........................... 2-7 NC text, number of digits for row numbering ............................................. 2-7 Number of digits for the program names.......................... 2-7 Number of digits in the main program name, subroutine number ..................... 2-6 Program names with leading zeros....... 2-7 X, Y, I, J coordinates, maximum values 2-7 NC post-processing programs...... 4-153, 2-120 Collection call up for several NC postprocessing programs, creating.......... 2-123 Deleting ............................................. 2-125 Modifying........................................... 2-125 Self-defined, entering........................ 2-120 NC program ............................................. 4-150 Machine loading, defining ................. 4-155 Machinings, defining sequence......... 4-154 NC post-processing programs, using 4-153 NC program, editing any ................... 4-157 NC program, editing currently generated .......................................... 4-157 NC program, printing any.................. 4-157 NC program, printing currently generated .......................................... 4-157 Output, configuring................................ 2-6

Parameters, defining ......................... 4-152 Program settings, making.................. 4-150 Sending to the machine..................... 4-158 Setup plan, defining output................ 4-156 Sheet position, measuring................. 4-155 NC program, configuring output................... 2-6 NC program, sending the to the machine Name of the transfer path, permanently modifying ............................................... 2-7 NC program, sending to the machine Target directory, permanently modifying2-7 NcLink, starting ........................................ 4-149 Nesting job Opening (laser).................................... 4-19 Parts, deleting ..................................... 3-14 Nesting jobs Common cuts (TwinLine), activating ... 3-23 Copy of a sheet, adding or removing .. 3-29 Creating ................................................. 3-8 Exporting ............................................. 3-31 External surfaces, occupying .............. 3-19 Importing.............................................. 3-32 Internal surfaces, occupying................ 3-18 Job file ('*.DAT'), structuring................ 3-33 Last sheet, filling.................................. 3-18 Mini nests, nesting............................... 3-13 Modifying manually.............................. 3-28 Nesting accuracy, defining .................. 3-22 Nesting job, creating from a single sheet ...................................... 3-41 Nesting mode ...................................... 3-15 Nesting process, starting..................... 3-26 Nesting processors................................ 3-6 Nesting, machine-oriented .................. 3-24 Netsing profile, selecting ..................... 3-22 New parts, renesting manually ............ 3-28 Number of parts, modifying ................. 3-28 Opening, editing, NC program and production package, generating .......... 4-18 Optimization, creating.......................... 3-23 Options, defining ................................. 3-17 Parameters, defining ........................... 3-15 Part, allocating to a customer.............. 3-13 Part, nesting in grid ............................... 3-9 Parts or sheet, re-nesting automatically........................................ 3-27 Parts, entering ..................................... 3-11 Parts, modifying................................... 3-14 Positioning direction, defining.............. 3-21 Remainder sheet, allocating................ 3-16 Result log, displaying .......................... 3-71 Sample parts, creating .......................... 3-7 Sheet data, defining ............................ 3-15 Sheet name, modifying........................ 3-25 Sheet view, showing............................ 3-27 Sheets (empty), adding new to nesting job ....................................... 3-30

S98EN06.DOC

Index

6-5

Single sheet, showing ......................... 3-27 Single sheets, browsing ...................... 3-27 Start corners, defining......................... 3-21 Start part, determining ........................ 3-20 Waste grid separation (laser), parameters .......................................... 4-21 Nesting mode, selecting ............................ 3-15 Nesting processor Tile nesting processor......................... 3-72 Nesting processors...................................... 3-6 Notches Advanced options through the ............ 1-48 Nozzle (Bosch) Diameter.............................................. 2-56 ID No. .................................................. 2-56 Nozzle standoff Cutting the contour.............................. 2-41 Numerical values and coordinates, entering................................................. 1-54 Numerical values, entering in input fields.. 1-58

O
Online help, calling up ................................. 1-6 Optimization Path optimization................................. 4-89 Tipping optimization ............................ 4-89 With APS (Advanced Processing System) ............................................... 4-90 Outline points, displaying and hiding......... 1-52

P
Pallet changer.......................................... 4-121 Palletizing Configuration for double cart............... 2-19 Palletizing (SortMaster) Cut parts, palletizing ......................... 4-129 Multiple sheets, palletizing for........... 4-129 Nesting job or single sheet, palletizing .......................................... 4-130 Palletizing - run ................................. 4-129 Palletizing types ................................ 4-129 Parameters, defining......................... 4-132 Production package, creating ........... 4-134 Sheet ordering sequences, palletizing any ................................... 4-135 Single sheets, palletizing several times in various ways........................ 4-134 Stack created, graphical display ....... 4-140

Stacks or stack item, showing information......................................... 4-139 Total palletizing, adopting.................. 4-141 Unloading area configuration, allocating ........................................... 4-132 Unloading areas, defining and configuring ........................................... 2-18 Palletizing graphics .................................. 4-133 Palletizing, modifying Stack with collision, clearing.............. 4-139 Stack, dividing ................................... 4-138 Stack, moving .................................... 4-137 Stack, moving to offset ...................... 4-138 Stack, rotating ................................... 4-138 Stacking mode, modifying ................. 4-139 Stacks, merging................................. 4-138 Paramaters Multi-copy machining identification, automatic ............................................. 3-46 Parameters Defining for automatic sheet layout..... 3-42 Manual sheet layout, defining for ........ 3-46 Nesting job, options, defining .............. 3-17 Nesting jobs......................................... 3-15 Tile nesting processor ......................... 3-72 Part groups Angular position, creating identical ... 4-116 Creating ............................................. 4-116 Showing............................................. 4-117 Part layout Parts, moving horizontally or vertically............................................. 4-113 Parts, moving through 2 points.......... 4-114 Parts, moving through the center ...... 4-115 Part number, allocating automatically........ 4-12 Parts Copying ............................................... 3-50 Copying or cutting from one sheet to another ............................................ 3-50 Cutting ................................................. 3-51 Deleting (single sheet)......................... 3-53 Distance for common cuts, placing at exact distance (TwinLine)................ 3-52 Distance, modifying ............................. 3-50 Laying out automatically...................... 3-42 Machining, automatically ..................... 4-29 Moving ................................................. 3-46 Parts quantity, modifying ..................... 3-49 Reference point, modifying.................. 3-48 Renesting ............................................ 3-40 Roatating ............................................. 3-46 Section, laying out automatically......... 3-42 Sheet, laying out automatically............ 3-43 Parts monitoring Consider parts, activating...................... 3-5 Consider sheet edge, activating ............ 3-5

6-6

S98EN06.DOC

Path correction .......................................... 2-78 Contours, cutting with high precision .. 4-45 Path finder Machining time, optimizing.................. 4-76 Path slope When approaching .............................. 2-75 When cutting ....................................... 2-78 While withdrawing ............................... 2-80 PDM (Product Data Management) ............ 1-19 Advantages ......................................... 1-19 Dependencies between files, checking1-42 Dependent files, deleting, exporting, properties, displaying .......................... 1-44 Files and folders, importing/exporting . 1-37 Files, automatically checking updated status when loading and saving in TruTops ........................................... 1-45 TruTops file browser ........................... 1-26 TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM, in comparison............................ 1-20 PDM functions, calling up via command prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe) ................ 1-21 pdmCLI.exe PDM functions, executing ................... 1-21 Piercing Deleting ............................................... 4-48 Modifying............................................. 4-47 Piercing time ....................................... 2-37 Setting value ....................................... 2-37 Piercing (laser) Data..................................................... 2-37 Piercing time Piercing ............................................... 2-37 Place holders (for search) ......................... 1-59 Place holders (wildcards), searching with the help of............................................. 1-59 Plasma sensor system (Bosch) Switching on........................................ 2-56 Threshold values................................. 2-56 Plasma sensor system (Siemens) Switching on........................................ 2-46 Threshold values................................. 2-46 Positioning Cross. height ....................................... 2-81 Positioning paths Modified, resetting............................... 4-97 Modifying manually ............................. 4-97 Single parts, modifying between ......... 4-96 Power pause Contour, cutting (YAG laser)............... 2-42 Power pulse Contour, cutting (YAG laser)............... 2-42 Precision stop When approaching .............................. 2-75 When cutting ....................................... 2-77 While withdrawing ............................... 2-80 Precut for approaching thick sheet?.......... 2-75

Printing....................................................... 1-61 Files, textual content ........................... 1-61 Geos as HPGL .................................... 1-62 Screen content .................................... 1-61 Priority corner treatment Looping?.............................................. 2-68 Rounding ............................................. 2-68 Process rule Laser technology table, allocating....... 2-62 Process rules ............................................. 2-58 Allocating to a technology table (laser, Bosch) ................................................. 2-56 Code numbers..................................... 2-58 Copying, creating new ones ................ 2-61 Customer process rules ...................... 2-38 Deleting ............................................... 2-64 Designation.......................................... 2-58 Displaying ............................................ 2-64 Names ................................................. 2-58 Printing ................................................ 2-64 Searching ............................................ 2-59 TRUMPF process rules ....................... 2-38 Production package Creating from job............................... 4-149 Generating from every NC program.. 4-148 Generating from several NC programs ..................................... 4-147 Production package output ........................ 2-26 Program microjoints ................................... 4-64 Setting ................................................. 4-64 Programs, external................................... 2-123 Self-defined, entering ........................ 2-120 Punch marking (laser) Data ..................................................... 2-50

Q
Quick navigation bar, displaying and hiding .................................................... 1-15

R
Radius of spatter circle .............................. 2-73 Readme, displaying ..................................... 1-6 Recycle bin (PDM) ..................................... 1-30 Emptying.............................................. 1-30 Renaming ............................................ 1-31 Reduced approach II (Bosch) .................... 2-75 Reference point, modifying ........................ 3-48 Remainder sheets Defining ............................................... 3-55

S98EN06.DOC

Index

6-7

Managing ............................................ 3-56 Nesting job, allocating to..................... 3-16 Taking off ............................................ 3-57 Round corners ........................................... 2-82 Angle range......................................... 2-83 Length of element before/ after a corner....................................... 2-83 Rounding radius .................................. 2-83 Rounding corners Corners, rounding ............................... 4-58 Rule Changing............................................. 4-26 Displaying............................................ 4-28 Rules PierceLine required?........................... 2-68 Rules for laser cutting machines Approach............................................. 2-74 Cutting................................................. 2-77 General 1 ............................................ 2-67 General 2 ............................................ 2-69 General 3 ............................................ 2-71 Looping ............................................... 2-84 Piercing ............................................... 2-73 Positioning........................................... 2-81 Rounding............................................. 2-82 Technology data in detail .................... 2-66 Vaporizing ........................................... 2-86 Withdrawal .......................................... 2-79 Rules for laser cutting machines: .............. 2-72

S
Safety range during collision check........... 2-79 Scrap, cutting Cutting automatically........................... 4-74 Cutting manually ................................. 4-75 Deleting ............................................... 4-75 Scrap, cutting up........................................ 4-73 Screen display Color scheme, modifying .................... 1-49 Masks and messages, moving............ 1-49 Window size, adapting ........................ 1-49 Screen section, moving ............................. 1-51 Scripts, executing (pdmCLI.exe) ............... 1-21 Setting value Cutting the contour.............................. 2-41 General cutting.................................... 2-46 Piercing ............................................... 2-37 Setup plan................................................ 4-142 Company logo, integrating ................ 4-143 html files, compressing ..................... 4-146 Mircrosoft Word, using as html editor 4-145 Outputting.......................................... 4-144 Printing .............................................. 4-144

Setup plan template .......................... 4-142 Showing............................................. 4-144 Template, another ............................. 4-143 Sheet data.................................................. 3-15 Sheet format, modifying ............................. 3-54 Sheet layout Creating ............................................. 4-112 Sheet layout, modifying.............................. 3-46 Sheet parting cuts Creating automatically......................... 4-80 Deleting ............................................... 4-81 Polygonal sheet parting cuts, deleting step-by-step when creating them ........ 4-81 Rearranging......................................... 4-82 Setting parameters .............................. 4-78 Sheet parting cuts Creating manually ............................... 4-80 Sheet position, measuring ....................... 4-155 Sheet view, showing .................................. 3-27 Sheets Automation components, displaying with ..................................... 3-67 Creating ............................................... 3-37 Deleting ............................................... 3-54 Displaying ............................................ 3-67 Laying out automatically...................... 3-42 Laying out sectionally (multi-copy machining) ........................................... 3-43 Laying out with the number of parts (multi-copy machining) ........................ 3-44 Machine environment, displaying with 3-67 Machining, automatically ..................... 4-29 Nesting job, creating from a single sheet ...................................... 3-41 Opening and editing (laser) ................. 4-11 Parameters, defining for automatic sheet layout ......................................... 3-42 Part, positioning with number of pieces .............................................. 3-39 Saving.................................................. 3-39 Siemens control systems Convert alphanumeric program names into numeric? ......................................... 2-7 Simulation ................................................ 4-108 Single folders (PDM), importing Using file browser................................ 1-38 Single part Blank opening as and machining immediately ......................................... 4-16 Single part information, showing................ 4-37 Single sheet, showing ................................ 3-27 Slat layouts Assembling .......................................... 2-11 Configuring .......................................... 2-11 Creating ............................................... 2-13 Deleting ............................................... 2-12 Standard layout ................................... 2-12

6-8

S98EN06.DOC

Slats Assembling, individually...................... 4-98 Creating................................................. 2-9 Data, modifying ................................... 2-10 Deleting ............................................... 2-10 Saved selection, calling up and allocating to a sheet ............................ 4-99 Saving, as selection ............................ 4-98 Software manual, displaying........................ 1-6 Software version, displaying........................ 1-6 SortMaster ............................................... 4-121 Displaying in Nest ............................... 3-68 Modifying traversability ....................... 2-18 SortMaster suction cup selection strategy Modifying............................................. 2-18 SprintLine Marking with SprintLine....................... 2-68 SprintLine, cutting ............................... 2-68 Status bar and message line ..................... 1-14 Stock item Defining a new one ............................. 2-28 Support functions......................................... 2-4 System rules (public) Description of variables..................... 2-103 Variables, modifying.......................... 2-101

T
Table alignment ....................................... 4-160 Target directory Modifying permanently.......................... 2-7 Technology data Last used, selecting ............................ 4-23 Technology data: ....................................... 4-24 Technology log Showing .............................................. 4-36 Technology tables ..................................... 2-30 Approach (laser, Bosch) ..................... 2-44 Contour cutting (laser, Siemens) ........ 2-40 Copying and creating new ones.......... 2-35 Customer process rules ...................... 2-56 Cutting (laser, Bosch) ......................... 2-45 Date of creation (Bosch) ..................... 2-56 Deleting ............................................... 2-36 Displaying and printing........................ 2-36 Header data, modifying....................... 2-34 Marking ............................................... 2-49 Names................................................. 2-31 Others ................................................. 2-52 Permissible names.............................. 2-31 Piercing (laser) .................................... 2-37 Punch marking .................................... 2-50 Searching ............................................ 2-32

Technology data concerning laser cutting machines in detail................................ 2-37 Technology table, allocating process rules ....................................... 2-57 Technology table, allocating process rules (Bosch).......................... 2-55 TRUMPF process rules ....................... 2-56 Vaporizing (laser) ................................ 2-47 Technology tables:..................................... 2-54 Tests, marking Contour size of marked texts............... 2-70 Texts, cutting Contour size of cut texts...................... 2-70 Texts, entering in input fields ..................... 1-54 Time pause Contour, cutting (YAG laser) ............... 2-42 Time pulse Contour, cutting (YAG laser) ............... 2-42 Tool path, cutting without correction .......... 4-46 Toolbars ..................................................... 1-14 Deleting ............................................... 1-18 Displaying and hiding .......................... 1-16 Modifying existing, creating own ......... 1-17 Moving or downsizing.......................... 1-16 Renaming ............................................ 1-17 Resetting to the original status ............ 1-18 Symbols, modifying the size................ 1-18 TruTops database........................................ 2-4 TruTops file browser .................................. 1-26 File or folders, renaming...................... 1-29 Files, adding other details to list field .. 1-33 Files, deleting and restoring ................ 1-30 Files, opening with the Geo Viewer..... 1-34 Files, searching for .............................. 1-32 Files, sending from PDM to My Documents in the file system ........ 1-35 Files, sending via email ....................... 1-34 Files, zipping........................................ 1-35 Folders, creating new .......................... 1-28 Folders, deleting.................................. 1-28 Opening ............................................... 1-27 Recylce bin (PDM) .............................. 1-30 TruTops license ......................................... 1-60 TruTops, exiting ........................................... 1-5 TruTops, operating using keyboard ........... 1-54 TruTops, operating with the mouse Mouse pointer in masks, placing automatically at OK ............................. 1-53 TruTops, starting.......................................... 1-5 TruTops, tips and tricks from the Internet .... 1-6 TwinLine TwinLine-capable sheet, opening and preparing ............................................. 4-13 Two head machines................................. 4-109 Machining with one of the two cutting heads, defining .................................. 4-110

S98EN06.DOC

Index

6-9

Machining with two cutting heads, deleting.............................................. 4-111 Machining with two cutting heads, showing ............................................. 4-111 Machining, defining ........................... 4-109 Two-head machines Configuring.......................................... 2-25

User-defined settings Copying and transferring ..................... 1-10

V
Vaporizing (laser) Data ..................................................... 2-47 Variables for public system rules Description:........................................ 2-103 Version, displaying....................................... 1-6 View options, activating ........................... 4-118 View, get last.............................................. 1-52 View, memorizing and recalling ................. 1-52

U
Unloading areas for palletizing Defining and configuring ..................... 2-18 User interface Button texts in the function browser, displaying and hiding .......................... 1-15 Command line and input line .............. 1-14 Function browser................................. 1-13 Function browser, displaying and hiding................................................... 1-15 Main menus and submenus................ 1-12 Menus function browser and toolbars . 1-12 Multi-function buttons.......................... 1-14 Quick navigation bar, displaying and hiding................................................... 1-15 Status bar and message line .............. 1-14 Symbols (toolbars, function browsers), modifying the size ............................... 1-18 Toolbar, renaming ............................... 1-17 Toolbars .............................................. 1-14 Toolbars, deleting................................ 1-18 Toolbars, displaying and hiding .......... 1-16 Toolbars, modifying existing, creating own........................................ 1-17 Toolbars, moving or downsizing ......... 1-16 Toolbars, resetting to original status ... 1-18

W
Wildcards (for search)................................ 1-59 Window size, adapting ............................... 1-49 Windows keyboard commands and shortcuts, using..................................... 1-54 Withdrawal To outer and inner contours? .............. 2-79 Withdrawal flag, modifying form .......... 4-56 Withdrawal flags, creating ................... 4-55 Withdrawal angles Outside, inside..................................... 2-80 Withdrawal flags Form .................................................... 2-80 Withdrawal path ......................................... 2-80 Withdrawal radius ...................................... 2-80 Withdrawal to outer and inner contours ..... 2-79

6-10

S98EN06.DOC

Update information

TruTops Laser
Version 7.1

Update information

TruTops Laser
Version 7.1

Edition 2008-03-20

Order Information

Please specify when ordering this document: Update information TruTops Laser Edition 2008-03-20 Document number U98

Address for orders

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Technische Dokumentation Johann-Maus-Strae 2 D-71254 Ditzingen Fon: +49 (0) 71 56 /3 03-0 Fax: +49 (0) 71 56 /3 03-5 40 Internet: http://www.trumpf.com E-Mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf.com

This document was compiled by the Technical Documentation Dept. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG.

of

All rights, in particular the right to reproduce, distribute or translate this documentation, are reserved to TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG, even in case of patent and industrial rights applications. No part of this documentation may be reproduced, processed, duplicated or distributed by means of electronic systems in any form whatsoever without the prior written consent of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Subject to errors and technical changes. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG cannot be held responsible for possible mistakes in this documentation. Any warranty for direct and indirect damages, arising in connection with the delivery or the use of this documentation, is excluded, as far as this is in conformity with the law.

Table of contents
1. 2. 2.1 User-defined settings ........................................................7 PDM (product data management) ....................................7 Creating and restoring file versions (PDM)..........................8 Displaying and hiding the version window......................8 Creating a file version.....................................................9 Restoring a file version ...................................................9 Deleting a file version .................................................. 10 Tips & Tricks ..................................................................... 11 Archiving the copies of a file........................................ 11 The calculator ................................................................. 12 Setting the angle increment........................................... 12 Setting the angle increment of the wheel mouse.............. 12 Display of drawings........................................................ 13 Displaying sheet completely ............................................. 13 Configuring automation components .......................... 14 Configuring Lifts................................................................ 15 Modifying material data for magnetic materials ................ 17 NC post-processing programs ...................................... 18 Creating a collection call up for several NC post-processing programs ................................................ 18 Entering a collection call up for several NC post-processing programs ................................................ 20 NC output......................................................................... 21 Managing customer cycles ............................................... 21 NC cycles......................................................................... 22 Inserting a "Cycle" ............................................................ 22 Description of variables in public machine rules........ 23 Description of variables in public system rules .......... 24 Creating sheets............................................................... 26 Displaying identical parts in colors ................................... 26 Showing single part information........................................ 26 Renesting parts................................................................. 27

2.2

3. 4. 4.1 5. 5.1 6. 6.1 6.2 7. 7.1 7.2

8. 8.1 9. 9.1 10. 11. 12. 12.1 12.2 12.3

U98EN

2008-03-20

Table of contents

13. 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 14. 14.1 15. 16. 16.1 17. 17.1 18. 19. 20. 21. 21.1

Nesting jobs .................................................................... 28 Creating nesting job.......................................................... 28 Entering parts in a nesting job .......................................... 29 Sorting sheets................................................................... 31 Renesting new parts manually.......................................... 32 Modifying the sheet layout ............................................ 33 Separating sheets............................................................. 33 File format for nesting jobs ........................................... 34 Adapting parameters for "View" ................................... 34 Adjusting the view............................................................. 34 Machining single parts or sheets.................................. 35 Saving processed single parts.......................................... 35 Displaying the contour size ........................................... 35 Corner treatment............................................................. 35 Simulating sheet machining .......................................... 36 Generating NC programs ............................................... 36 Measuring sheet position, defining machine loading........ 36

2008-03-20

U98EN

1.
NEW

User-defined settings

Every application is opened once after the initial installation of TruTops version 1.2. After an update or a reinstallation, all applications open in the same status that they were in before the update/reinstallation (type, quantity and names of applications).

2.
NEW

PDM (product data management)

File versions can be created, archived and restored in TruTops with PDM.

U98EN

2008-03-20

User-defined settings

2.1

Creating and restoring file versions (PDM)

Displaying and hiding the version window

1 2 3

Displaying and hiding the version window Button to create a file version Directory contents (file list)

4 5

Select the file whose version is to be created and archived Version window (archive) Fig. 50219en

File versions in version window

File versions are displayed in a separate version window. The version window is displayed in the TruTops file browser (with PDM) by default. To hide and then display the version window: select (Version window).

PDM (product data management)

2008-03-20

U98EN

Creating a file version

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Select the file whose version is to be created. 3. Either Select (Create version). or Open the context menu with the right mouse button. Select >Create version. The "Properties... - Version x" mask, "Version info" tab is displayed. 4. If required, enter (the required) information about the new version. 5. Select OK. (Cancel aborts the input of the information but not the creation of the file version.) The file version is displayed in a separate version window (see "Fig. 50219en", pg. 8).

Restoring a file version

Note If a file version is to be changed (e.g. contours are to be deleted or added), the file version must be copied from the version window into the normal directory. File versions cannot be directly opened from the version window. 1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Select the file whose versions have been created. All file versions of the selected file are displayed in the version window (see "Fig. 50219en", pg. 8). 3. Select the file version to be restored. 4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.

U98EN

2008-03-20

PDM (product data management)

5. Either In order to copy the file version from the version window into the normal directory under its original file name (so that the file version can be opened with the appropriate application): select >Restore. Replying to an inquiry: Yes: A version is created from the file from the normal directory and it is stored in the version window. No: The file in the normal directory is overwritten with the file version. or In order to copy the file version into the normal directory under another file name (so that the file version can be opened with the appropriate application): select >Restore under.... The "New file name" mask is displayed. Change the suggested file name if required. 6. Select OK. The restored file is displayed in the normal directory and can be opened with the appropriate application (e.g. TruTops CAD).

Deleting a file version

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Select the file whose versions have been created. All file versions that have been created by the selected file are displayed in the version window (see "Fig. 50219en", pg. 8). 3. Select the file version to be deleted. 4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. 5. Select >Delete.

10

PDM (product data management)

2008-03-20

U98EN

2.2

Tips & Tricks

Archiving the copies of a file

Earlier, variants of a file had to be saved as copies under different names (see "Fig. 53348", pg. 11). But now, variants of a file can be archived together as file versions under one name. Only the current status of a file is displayed in the file list of the TruTops file browser and the file versions are in the version window (see "Fig. 50219en", pg. 8). The following gives an example of how an (old) copy of a file ('egon1.geo') can be created as a file version of the current status ('egon.geo').

Latest status of the file

Copy of a file (old status) Fig. 53348

Variants of a file in the file list

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File browser). 2. Create a file version of 'egon1.geo' (right click to open the context menu, select >Create version). A file version is stored in the version window of 'egon1.geo' which is identical to 'egon1.geo'. 3. Open 'egon.geo' and save it as 'egon1.geo'. When overwriting, 'egon1.geo' in the file list is overwritten. The file version of 'egon1.geo' in the version window is retained. 'Egon1.geo' has the current status. The old status of the file version is located in the version window. 4. Delete 'egon.geo'. 5. Rename 'egon1.geo' as 'egon.geo.' 6. If several files are to be archived together: Create a version of the oldest file and overwrite it with the second oldest file. (This ensures that the file versions in the version window are stored in the right sequence). Repeat the process till all file versions in the version window have been archived together. Then rename the file in the file list whose versions are currently present.

U98EN

2008-03-20

PDM (product data management)

11

3.
NEW

The calculator
adopting the input: press

Keyboard added for operation: Closing the calculator, <Ctrl>+<Enter> ( ).

4.
NEW

Setting the angle increment

The angle increment of the wheel mouse is not set individually for every function; it is set globally for all TruTops functions.

4.1

Setting the angle increment of the wheel mouse

1. Select >Tools >Presettings >Wheel mouse angle increment (only in the Punch application). or Select >Tools >Wheel mouse angle increment (only in the CAD, Laser, Nest applications). or Select >Tools >Parameters >Wheel mouse angle increment (only in the Tube application). 2. Either Select the desired value. or Select >more.... Enter the desired angle and confirm with OK. The angle increment is changed for all TruTops functions.

12

The calculator

2008-03-20

U98EN

5.
NEW

Display of drawings

The sheet can now be displayed in the total view.

5.1

Displaying sheet completely

This view can be displayed only in Laser and Punch applications. Either Select >View >Zoom >Sheet. or Select Total sheet view .

U98EN

2008-03-20

Display of drawings

13

6.
NEW

Configuring automation components

Suction cups now have three retaining elements: Suction cup gripper (pure vacuum energy). Magnet gripper (pure magnetic energy): suitable for use in case of magnetic material. Magnetic suction gripper (magnet + vacuum energy): suitable for use in case of pierced (e.g. perforated sheet) and non-magnetic material. The procedure is changed during the arrangement of automation components (see "Configuring Lifts", pg. 15). The relative magnet gripper must be adjusted in the material data for unloading the magnet grippers and the magnetic suction cups (see "Modifying material data for magnetic materials", pg. 17) .

Retaining elements

Suction cup gripper with Magnetic gripper. check radius 1 Suction cup display
1

Magnetic suction cup with check radius 1 Tab. 1

Check radius: An area around the suction cup that must be kept clean and grease-free for safe suctioning. Color Yellow Yellow Red Yellow Red Symbol Lift drawing Circle, dashed Circle, dashed Circle, solid Circle, solid Description SortMaster/LiftMaster has been set. Suction cup not active. Suction cup active. Magnet gripper not active. Magnet gripper active. Tab. 2

14

Configuring automation components

2008-03-20

U98EN

Suction cup activation for magnetic suction grippers

TruTops places the center of gravity for lifting on the center of gravity of the part. A check is done here to see if the part's center of gravity is within the convex shell of the active suction cup. Suctions cups that are outside the part or at the cut contours cannot be activated. When unloading magnetic suction grippers, magnetic energy or vacuum energy or both are used depending on the carrying capacity. The display of the active magnetic suction grippers on the sheet is displayed in red wither partially or completely depending on the type of energy used: With vacuum energy: only the dashed circle is red. With magnetic energy: only the solid circle is red. With vacuum and magnetic energy: both the circles are red.

6.1

Configuring Lifts

The allocation of the automation components or the data of the allocated automation components (configuration) can be modified as follows: Opening Data Management 1. Open the Data Management for the desired machine. 2. Select >Machines >Data >Automation >Lifts. The "Lift configuration" mask is displayed. It contains the automation components allocated to the active machine. 3. To delete the allocation of an automation component: mark component. 4. Select Delete. 5. Select Allocate. The "Lift selection" mask is displayed. 6. Select LiftMaster. The "Lift selection" mask is displayed. It contains all the LiftMaster automation components that can be allocated to the active machine. 7. Mark the desired component and select OK. The "Lift configuration" mask is displayed again.

Deleting allocation

Allocating LiftMaster

U98EN

2008-03-20

Configuring automation components

15

Allocating SortMaster

8. Select Allocate. The "Lift selection" mask is displayed. 9. Select SortMaster. The "SortMaster options" mask is displayed. It contains all the SortMaster options that can be allocated to the active machine. 10. Mark the desired options and select OK. The "Lift configuration" mask is displayed again. 11. Mark the automation component that is to be configured and select Modify. The "Lift configuration" mask is displayed. The data contained in the mask corresponds to the standard configuration of the allocated components. If required, modify the data (select the desired checkbox; adhere to the safety factor during the automatic selection of the suction cup). Under "Suction cup", select "Suction cup types", Change. The "List of suction cup types" mask is displayed. Select the desired suction cup type. Carrier: corresponds to type 1 carrier cup. Carrier cups are for loading and unloading. Swivel: corresponds to type 2 swivel cup. Swivel cups enable an accurate transfer of the sheet when loading. Stripper: corresponds to type 3 peeler cup. Within the area of the peeler cup, the topmost sheet is overbent when raising. This causes the sheets to be separated. In order to display an image of a suction cup: right click on the suction cup type. Select "Traversability", Modify. The "Modify traversability" mask is displayed.

Configuring the allocated components

12.

Changing the suction cup type

13. 14.

15. Modifying the SortMaster traversability 16.

The data contained in the mask corresponds to the standard traversability of the SortMaster. 17. To set the lift bars to any position, checkmark "Rails continuously traversible". 18. If necessary, modify data and select OK.

16

Configuring automation components

2008-03-20

U98EN

6.2

Modifying material data for magnetic materials

The SortMaster can unload parts with vacuum and magnetic energy. The magnet grippers can be used only for magnetic materials. 1. to select Material. The "Material Management" mask is displayed. It contains all the materials and blanks which are already contained in the database. 2. To add a material (e.g. St37-20; 1.4301-10;...): select "Material". 3. Select one of the materials from the selection field. The data is entered in the mask head. Tip Select a material that is similar to the new one. Note The following characters are not permitted when modifying the material ID: " \ and $. 4. Enter or modify data. 5. Under "Rel. magnetic retaining energy", enter the relative magnetic retaining energy in %. 6. Select Create. The material is added in the selection field.

U98EN

2008-03-20

Configuring automation components

17

7.
NEW

NC post-processing programs

In the new TruTops version, the Perl software is no longer a part of the standard scope of delivery. The following sequence has been modified.

7.1

Creating a collection call up for several NC post-processing programs

Several single NC post-processing programs can be consecutively called up in a defined sequence via the 'PostprocessorCollection.bat' NC post-processing program. Unlimited 'PostprocessorCollection.bat' can be created, depending on how many different collection call ups are required. Start Windows Explorer 1. Start Windows Explorer. 2. Go to the '\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\Macros' directory. Note The copies must also be in the '\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\Macros' directory. 3. Copy and rename 'PostprocessorCollectionTemplate.bat' in the required quantity (e.g. 'PostprocessorCollection1.bat', 'PostprocessorCollection2.bat' ). 4. Open copy (e.g. PostprocessorCollection1.bat) with an editor. 5. Enter the NC post-processing programs to be called up in the desired sequence (see the highlighted sections in the following example). The entered NC post-processing programs can be deactivated as needed per comment (i.e. ; at the beginning of the rows). Example for NC post-processing programs that are to be called up consecutively: First execute the NC post-processing program: customer.bat, Then open NC program using an editor (LST_Editor) Finally, print NC program using the default printer (STD_PRINTER).

Copying template

Modifying template

18

NC post-processing programs

2008-03-20

U98EN

rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem

---------------------------------------------------Here comes the list of postprocessors ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------customer.bat ------------------------------------------------------------LST_EDITOR ----------------------------------STD_PRINTER -----------------Tab. 3

\bin\%A_TC_TOOL_PATH%\customer.bat%A_LST_FILENAME_STRING%

notepad %A_LST_FILENAME%

notepad/p %A_LST_FILENAME%

6. Save changes.

U98EN

2008-03-20

NC post-processing programs

19

7.2
1. 2. 3. 4.

Entering a collection call up for several NC post-processing programs

Open the Data Management for the machine. Select >User >Programs. Enter "User"trumpf. Enter "Description"PostprocessorCollection1 (example!). 5. Select "Modal"YES. 6. Select "Window"YES. 7. Select "Show log"NO.

Note The list must, be extended or shortened where necessary according to the entered post-processing program. 8. Under "Parameters", enter "$(P)" $(P) $(TOPS_APP_UTILS_PATH). These transfer parameters are adapted to the 'PostprocessorCollectionTemplate.bat' template and mean the following in the above-mentioned example: "$(P)": Name of the generated NC program in the string format. $(P): Name of the generated NC program. $(TOPS_APP_UTILS_PATH): Path to the product-specific tools. 9. Under "Program": enter $(TOPS_MACROS_PATH)\PostprocessorCollection1.b at. 10. Select Create. The NC post-processing program is added in the selection list.

20

NC post-processing programs

2008-03-20

U98EN

8.
NEW

NC output

"Customer cycles" are "Random cycles".

8.1

Managing customer cycles

1. Select >Tools >Modify data >NC output >Random cycles. 2. Refer to the TruTops Laser software manual, version 7.0, S. 2-115 ff.

U98EN

2008-03-20

NC output

21

9.
NEW

NC cycles

The desired free cycles can be selected directly via the menu.

9.1

Inserting a "Cycle"

The NC function "Cycle" can be inserted into the machining of a sheet or a single part. As a rule, a cycle (customer cycle) consists of a machine command. TruTops inserts this into the NC program as a line during the generation of the NC program. The programming manual of the machine gives an overview of all NC functions. Example for "Cycle" Reduce the processing speed. Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >Technology >NC cycles >Insert cycle >[Free cycle]. The "Switching function: Free cycle" mask is displayed. The cycle text is displayed. 2. In order to insert an NC cycle before or after processing or on a contour: select "Before contour" or "After contour" or "Pick point (on contour)". 3. Select OK. 4. Click the contour. The cycle name is displayed. TruTops inserts the selected NC cycle at the corresponding position when generating the NC program.

22

NC cycles

2008-03-20

U98EN

10.

Description of variables in public machine rules

The following table contains a list of new or modified machine variables.

No. Machine variables FunktionCutScrapEnabled FunktionCutScrapEnabled LaserXControl PosLevelMarkingHigh PosLevelMarkingLow PosLevelSheetThickness SicherheitMagnetanwahl T3MrGuiC_NCNachbearbeitungPrg Note text Machine can FlyCut (0=no, 1=yes) Machine can perform TC_POS_MODE (flying switch-off) (0=no, 1=yes) Machine has X laser control system (0=no, 1=yes). Positioning height for large sheet thickness range during marking. Positioning height for small sheet thickness range during marking. Limit value for sheet thickness range for PosLevel during marking ( > limit value: large sheet thickness range). Safety factor during automatic selection of magnetic suction grippers/magnet grippers. Name of NC post-processing program (in >Data >User >Programs) Tab. 4

U98EN

2008-03-20

Description of variables in public machine rules

23

11.

Description of variables in public system rules

The following table contains a list of new or modified system variables.

No. System variable GMTLoadIgnoreControl GMTLoadIgnoreMachine GMTLoadIgnoreProperty Note text Ignore control system name (value includes 1), control system type (value includes 2) when loading GMT. Ignore machine name (value includes 1), machine type (value includes 2) when loading GMT. Ignore sheet thicknesses (value includes 1), tensile strength and specific weight (includes 2), magnetism (includes 4) when loading GMT? Display structure for the laser. Flag whether "Mirror half" should be allowed. Should the mask with the nesting parameters be displayed when creating a nesting job? (0 = no; 1 = for free geometry nesting processor; 2 = for square nesting processor ) 1= Every single sheet is saved in a TAF file, 0 = Copies of sheets are not saved. 5 pa_flag_deleteSheetCutParts PathfinderTimeOut PDMWarningMode SetupPlanBlankThicknessFromLTT TestCollisionPierceAndSupportWebPoint TolForCollisionPierceSupportWebPoint UseAdvancedCalculator Flag whether all sheet cuts should be deleted during reprocessing (0=no, 1=yes). Maximum time for pathfinder calculation within a part in seconds. 0= No warnings; 1=Load; 2= Save (3=Both); (new) 4=Dissolve recursive warnings in individual warnings. In the setup plan, the thickness for a blank is determined from the LTT material (=1) or the sheet material (=0). View and check piercing points via support points as collisions (1= Check, 0= Do not check). Tolerance for collision check of slats/piercing point. Should the advanced calculator be used? (0=no, 1=yes) Tab. 5

1 2 3

LaserFormatString NestEnableMirrorHalf NestShowParametersBeforeCreatingJob

NestWriteTafFileCopies

No. 1

LaserFormatString The LaserFormatString variable can be used to set the information that to be displayed in the active laser display. $N = "Laser". $L = LTT. $G = Gas type. $R = Rules. $I = Comment for the rules.

Example: The "$N $L $R ($I)" value corresponds to the "Laser T2D-5532 T2D-5532-1 (rounding) display.

24

Description of variables in public system rules

2008-03-20

U98EN

No. 2

NestEnableMirrorHalf The NestEnableMirrorHalf variable is used by the nest to place parts on the sheet such that they are half in the original alignment and half as a mirror image depending on the number of parts. Value = 0: Parts are not mirrored (default setting). Value = 1: Parts are half mirrored.

No. 3

NestShowParametersBeforeCreatingJob The NestShowParametersBeforeCreatingJob variable can be used to configure a setting whether the mask with the nesting parameters and then the parts selection should be processed when creating a nesting job. Value = 0: The mask with nesting parameters is not displayed first. Value = 1: The mask with nesting parameters for free geometry nesting processor is displayed. Value = 2: The mask with nesting parameters for square nesting processor is displayed.

No. 4

NestWriteTafFileCopies The NestWriteTafFileCopies variable can be used to define whether all sheets should be saved with copies or without copies. If the sheets are saved without copied, there are gaps (e.g. Test_1.taf, Test_3.taf, Test_5.taf) when numbering files. Value = 0: Copies of sheets are not saved in separate *.TAF files (recommended). Value = 1: Every sheet is saved as a *.TAF file (including all copies).

No. 5

pa_flag_deleteSheetCutParts The pa_flag_deleteSheetCutParts variable can be used to define whether the sheet cuts are retained during the reprocessing of a sheet.

U98EN

2008-03-20

Description of variables in public system rules

25

12.
NEW

Creating sheets

Displaying identical parts on a sheet in various colors (see "Displaying identical parts in colors", pg. 26). Displaying single part information about part (see "Showing single part information", pg. 26). When renesting, the parts can be manually placed till the current number of pieces has been reached(see "Renesting parts", pg. 27). More parts can also be placed later via the minimum and maximum number of pieces.

12.1 Displaying identical parts in colors

Condition In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed . 1. Select >Parts >Highlight. 2. Click the part or the sheet. All identical parts on the sheet are displayed in colors.

12.2 Showing single part information

The single part information contains the following details: Geo file name. Geo file path. Parts ID. Remark on the drawing. Customer name from the drawing. Dimensions of the part. Area of the part. Condition A sheet has been loaded. 1. Select >View >Information >Parts information. 2. Click the contour. The "Part info" mask is displayed. 3. Select OK.

26

Creating sheets

2008-03-20

U98EN

12.3 Renesting parts

Opening sheet 1. Select >File >Open... or <Ctrl> + <O>. The TruTops file browser is displayed. 2. Load the laid out sheet. 3. To load a new part: select >Parts >New.... or Click on the empty field in the parts preview. The TruTops file browser is displayed. 4. Mark the desired part and Select OK. The mask with the part parameters is displayed. 5. Enter the desired number of pieces under "Min". or Checkmark "Max". Enter the minimum and maximum number of parts. 6. Open Any rotation possible with . If the part has to be rotated in any way: select Any rotation possible and enter the desired angle of rotation. If the part is not to be rotated: select Not rotatable. 7. Modify desired part properties. 8. Either Select Automatic. The first part with the desired number of pieces is placed on the sheet and also hangs on the mouse. or Select OK. The part hangs on the mouse. Rotate part with the wheel mouse and place it at the desired position (click; repeat if required till the current number of pieces is reached). 9. Click on the part in the parts preview, which is to be renested. The selected part hangs on the mouse. 10. Rotate the part with the wheel mouse and deposit on the sheet as many times as desired. 11. Select End or <Esc>.

Renesting a new part

Defining number of pieces

Defining information about the part

Renesting an existing part

U98EN

2008-03-20

Creating sheets

27

13.
NEW

Nesting jobs

The "Create subdirectory for order " option has been added to the "Job file names" mask(see "Creating nesting job", pg. 28). The parts can now be mirrored when nesting as well (see "Entering parts in a nesting job", pg. 29). The sheets within a nesting job can now be sorted as per the sheet surface (see "Sorting sheets", pg. 31). When renesting, the parts can be manually placed till the current number of pieces has been reached(see "Renesting new parts manually", pg. 32). More parts can also be placed later via the minimum and maximum number of pieces.

13.1 Creating nesting job

1. Select >File >New >Job.... The "Job - File names" mask is displayed. The last saved nesting job is displayed. Note The file name can contain up to 35 characters. Digits, letters or a combination of the two are permitted. Enter the name of the new nesting job under "Job". Open the "storage location" with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. Select the directory. In order to create a subdirectory with the same job name: checkmark "Create subdirectory for order". If the individual sheet should have a name different from that of the job or if the job path is not the same as the sheet path: checkmark "Sheet name" and enter the name of the new sheet. Open "Sheet path" with . The TruTops file browser is displayed. Select the directory. Select OK. The "(Job name) - Parts" mask is displayed.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9.

28

Nesting jobs

2008-03-20

U98EN

13.2 Entering parts in a nesting job

Condition The "(Job name) - Parts" mask is displayed (see section "Creating nesting job"). Note A sheet that is laid out only contains references to the single parts which are nested on it. When a single part is modified after a sheet has been laid out with it, the single part is modified automatically on the sheet. Mini nests cannot be entered directly into a nesting job. The relevant part can be entered and "Mini nest" can be checked in the part properties for this. Selecting a part 1. To enter a new part in the nesting job: select Add. or Right click in the selection field. Select Add. The TruTops file browser is displayed. 2. Mark the part that should be adopted in the nesting job. or To adopt several parts in the job: press <Ctrl> or <Shift> and left click. 3. Select OK. The mask with the part parameters is displayed.

Fig. 53386en

U98EN

2008-03-20

Nesting jobs

29

Defining the number of parts

Reading in information from 'File'

Defining the angle for rotation Nesting mini nests

4. Enter the desired number of parts under "Min". or Checkmark "Max". Enter the minimum and maximum number of parts. 5. To read in information from the 'File': checkmark "Entries from file". Nest reads in the following drawing data of the '*.GEO' or. '*.GMT' file into the nesting job: "Mini nest": If there is a mini nest for the part, Nest nests the mini nest. If there is no mini nest, Nest forms a mini nest internally. In case of '*.GMT' files, no mini nests can be entered in the job. Any rotation possible: If this is active, Nest rotates the single part when nesting with the free geometry nesting processing by the angle increment selected under "Angle". In the rectangle nesting processor, Nest rotates the part by 90. The direction of rolling of the sheet remains unconsidered. Direction of rolling: Nest places the part on the sheet according to the selected direction of rolling. The part is placed on a remainder sheet only when it has the same direction of rolling. If only the standard sheets have been defined with a direction of rolling, Nest places this part on standard sheets. 6. If Any rotation possible is selected: enter the angle. Note In case of '*.GMT' files, no mini nests can be entered in the job. Checkmark "Mini nest": If there is a mini nest for the part, Nest nests the mini nest. If there is no mini nest, Nest forms a mini nest internally. To place the part for using common cuts on the sheet: checkmark "Suitable for TwinLine". Enter the number of parts of a group in X and Y direction under "Block X, Y". If a part is to be nested in a grid-shaped arrangement, checkmark "Lay in grid".

7.

Common cuts

8. 9.

Nesting part in grid

10.

Mirroring a part

Note If the part contains text for marking in the '*.FNT' format, the text is not mirrored. 11. If a part is to be mirrored when nesting: checkmark "Mirror". Select Mirroring allowed: If active, the next mirrors the part when nesting. Select Mirror always: If active, the nest always mirrors the part in order to prevent burr formation on the go end.

30

Nesting jobs

2008-03-20

U98EN

Allocating priority Creating sample part

Allocating to a customer

Allocating number of machining cycle

12. Enter priority. 13. If one or more sample parts are to be created, enter the desired number of sample parts under "Number of sample parts". 14. A part can be allocated to one or more customers: right click in the "Customer" selection field. 15. Select "Add". The "Customer" mask is displayed. 16. To enter a customer: open "Customer/order no." with and select customer. 17. Enter number of parts for the customer. 18. In case of several customers for the same part, repeat steps 13 to 16. 19. If required, enter number of the machining cycle. 20. When several parts are marked and the same settings are valid for all parts: checkmark "Transfer to all parts". 21. Select OK. The mask with the part properties of the next part is displayed until the properties have been defined for all the selected parts.

13.3 Sorting sheets

Nesting jobs containing several sheet formats can be sorted as per the sheet surface (X multiplied by Y) of the sheets. Condition A nesting job with several sheet formats is present. Select >Sheet >Sort >In the ascending order of the size or >In the descending order of the size.

U98EN

2008-03-20

Nesting jobs

31

13.4 Renesting new parts manually

The following parts can be manually added to a job: Unprocessed single parts ('*.GEO'). Processed single parts ('*.GMT'). Mini nests ('*.MTL').

Conditions A nesting job has been loaded. The single sheet view of the sheet is displayed. 1. Select >Parts >New.... or Click on the empty field in the parts preview. The TruTops file browser is displayed. 2. Change the file format if required ('*.MTL' or '*.GMT'). 3. If required, change the directory. 4. Mark the searched file. 5. Select OK. The mask with the part parameters is displayed. 6. Enter the desired number of pieces and if required the name of the customer and the number of the machining cycle. 7. Either Select OK. The part hangs on the mouse. To rotate the part before depositing: rotate part with the wheel mouse. Place the parts at the desired position (click; if required, repeat till the current number of pieces is reached). or Select Automatic. The desired parts are added to the nesting job.

32

Nesting jobs

2008-03-20

U98EN

14.
NEW

Modifying the sheet layout

If a nesting job has several similar sheets, these can be separated and processed individually.

14.1 Separating sheets

If a nesting job includes a sheet with quantity N, it is then possible to separate a sheet in order to make changes on this one sheet only. The number of nested parts does not change. Conditions A nesting job has been loaded. Single Sheet View of the sheet is displayed. The nesting job includes a sheet with quantity N. 1. Select >Sheet >Separate single sheet. The separated sheet is displayed as a single sheet. 2. Make the required changes (e.g. change the number of parts or their positions). 3. To view all sheets of the nesting job: Select >Job >All sheets. The sheet overview is displayed. The separated sheet has the quantity 1.

U98EN

2008-03-20

Modifying the sheet layout

33

15.
NEW

File format for nesting jobs

The '*.XNJOB' format replaces the previous '*.DAT' format of the job file. The '*.XNJOB' file can be converted into a '*.Job' file with the help of the "convertXNJOB2JOB.exe" program. Note ('*.DAT') job files that have been created with previous TruTops versions can also be read in. More information can be found under TRUMPF.NET\Applications \ToPsNest\utils\convert_NXJOB_to_JOB.

16.
NEW

Adapting parameters for "View"

The view of the sheet and the set-up plan can now be defined in the "Information" mask.

16.1 Adjusting the view

1. Select >View >Presettings >Modify.... The "Information" mask is displayed. 2. Select the desired view and checkmark the display options. Layout. Technology. Optimization. NC: Display options for set-up plan. 3. Select OK. 4. Select the desired view via >View >Presettings.

34

File format for nesting jobs

2008-03-20

U98EN

17.
NEW

Machining single parts or sheets

The procedure for saving *.GMT files has been changed.

17.1 Saving processed single parts

Condition A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. 1. Select >File >Save part.... 2. Click one or more parts on the sheet and Select OK. The TruTops file browser is displayed. The name of the last selected single part is entered under "File name". 3. Modify the file name if required and Select OK. The single part is saved in the *.GMT format.

18.
NEW

Displaying the contour size

Contour size of contours can be displayed in various colors via >View >Save contour size: Contours with a large contour: green. Contours with a medium contour: red. Contours with a small contour: blue. Marked/dot marked: magenta.

19.
New

Corner treatment

The tolerance range for the rounding radius can now be specified via >Technology >Process optimization >Create corner treatment.

U98EN

2008-03-20

Machining single parts or sheets

35

20.
NEW

Simulating sheet machining

The "Simulation step by step (Ctrl+Left)" is added for the simulation operation.

21.
NEW

Generating NC programs

The "With LiftMaster in single pallet mode" parameter has been added to machine loading.

21.1 Measuring sheet position, defining machine loading

Conditions A machined sheet or a machined single part has been loaded. The machining of the sheet or the single part, including all manual modifications, has been completed. Generating NC programs 1. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. The "Generate NC program" mask is opened. Note The contents of the "Sheet position" tab depend on the machine control system and the enabled options. 2. Select "Sheet position". Measuring sheet position Note When machining a sheet, its position must be known with sufficient accuracy. To guarantee this, the sheet must be loaded or measured precisely. Sheet alignment with height regulation can be deactivated permanently (for Basic data of the machine, See chapter "Setting basic data"). Cateye (optional) is a photoelectrical sensor which measures the part position precisely. Cateye must be individually activated for every machine (for Basic data of the machine, See chapter "Setting basic data").

36

Simulating sheet machining

2008-03-20

U98EN

3. Activate the desired box: " Do not measure": The sheet position is not measured. "With height regulation": The machine measures the position of the sheet edge with height regulation. (The "Values for sheet alignment" for machines with Bosch control systems are appropriately preallocated.) "With CatEye (sheet edge)": Cateye measures the exact position of the sheet edge of a rectangular blank or a sheet. "With CatEye (two holes)": Cateye measures the exact position of the centers of two round holes. Activating the zero offset (Bosch) Note Zero offset is possible only on machines with Bosch control systems. 4. Checkmark "Correction of zero point active" and enter the NC command. The "zero offset" corresponds to the zero offset on the machine. In case of "Correction of zero point active", the machine operator can enter the value of the zero offset at the control system. The NC command is appropriately preallocated. (For NC commands, see the current programming manual for the machine.) 5. Select the desired box for loading. For manual loading, checkmark "Manual". To automatic loading, checkmark "automated". Loading with individual suction cups or suction cup groups is possible. In order to always load from a machine pallet only: checkmark "With LiftMaster in single pallet mode". Checkmark the pallet changer before the start of the main program or after the end of the main program. To load with the LiftMaster, checkmark "Loading with LiftMaster". To load with the drawing device, checkmark "Loading with drawing device". 6. Checkmark "Unload skeleton with LiftMaster Sort". 7. Change to the "Settings", "Parameters", ""Sheet position" or "Setup plan" tab. 8. When all settings have been defined: Select OK. The NC program is generated.

Defining the machine loading

Defining machine unloading

U98EN

2008-03-20

Generating NC programs

37

38

Generating NC programs

2008-03-20

U98EN

Update information

TruTops Laser
Version 8.0

Update information

TruTops Laser
Version 8.0

Edition 2009-02-27

Order Information

Please specify when ordering this document: Update information TruTops Laser Edition 2009-02-27 Document number U98EN

Address for orders

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Technische Dokumentation Johann-Maus-Strae 2 D-71254 Ditzingen Fon: +49 7156 303 - 0 Fax: +49 7156 303 - 30540 Internet: http://www.trumpf.com E-Mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf.com

This document was compiled by the Technical Documentation Dept. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG.

of

All rights, in particular the right to reproduce, distribute or translate this documentation, are reserved to TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG, even in case of patent and industrial rights applications. No part of this documentation may be reproduced, processed, duplicated or distributed by means of electronic systems in any form whatsoever without the prior written consent of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Subject to errors and technical changes. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG cannot be held responsible for possible mistakes in this documentation. Any warranty for direct and indirect damages, arising in connection with the delivery or the use of this documentation, is excluded, as far as this is in conformity with the law.

Table of contents
1. 1.1 2. 2.1 3. 4. 5. 5.1 Help in the case of problems............................................7 Diagnostics for program crash.............................................7 Variables in machine rules ...............................................8 Description of variables in public machine rules..................8 Description of variables in public system rules .............9 New for the automation components ..............................9 Palletizing the cut parts ................................................. 10 Palletizing with SortMaster ............................................... 10 Palletizing parts together/one after the other, defining the strategy for the stack increase................. 10 Monitoring the pallet weight .............................................. 11 Defining nesting parameters ......................................... 12 Machine-oriented nesting (free geometry nesting processor) ......................................................................... 12 Defining options for a nesting job ................................ 13 Nesting with several nesting profiles ........................... 13 Saving sheets in the DXF format .................................. 14 Creating sheets............................................................... 14 Creating a nesting job from a single sheet ....................... 14 Deleting remaining sheets ............................................. 15 Deleting remaining sheets from the remaining sheet management ........................................................... 15 Moving or rotating parts ................................................ 16 Working with nesting jobs ............................................. 17 Opening and editing nesting job, generating NC program and production package..................................... 17 Opening a nesting order .............................................. 18 Parameters for waste grid separation.......................... 19 Creating NC program for nesting job........................... 21 Saving the nesting job ................................................. 23 Processing the remaining parts ........................................ 23

5.2 6. 6.1

7. 8. 9. 10. 10.1 11. 11.1

12. 13. 13.1

13.2

U98EN

2009-02-27

Table of contents

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 19.1 20. 21. 22. 23. 23.1

TwinLine in the thick sheet (mild steel)........................ 24 Other areas of application during processing............. 24 Contour parameters for radii ......................................... 25 Changing the parameters of the approach flag........... 25 Setting Microjoints ......................................................... 25 Observing sample parts................................................. 26 Observing the sample parts.............................................. 26 Creating sheet-separating cuts automatically............. 27 Saving the scrap skeleton as remaining sheets ......... 27 Saving the settings for future NC programs................ 28 Generate NC program. ................................................... 28 Processed sheet Save when generating the NC program............................................................................. 28 NC post-processing programs ...................................... 29 Creating a collection call up for several NC post-processing programs ................................................ 29

24. 24.1

2009-02-27

U98EN

1. 1.1

Help in the case of problems Diagnostics for program crash

A so-called "Crash-Dump" of the process is written in a file every time TruTops crashes. This helps the TruTops development analyze the cause of the crash. 1. Following a crash, change to the following directory:e.g. in TruTops Laser '...:\TRUMPF.NET\Applications\ToPs100\bin'. In this directory you will find files with the following names: 'CRASH_20YYMMDD_hhmmss.DMP'. 'ERRORLOG_20YYMMDD_hhmmss.TXT'. The time stamp of both files is the time of the crash: 20YYMMDD = year, month, day and hhmmss = hour, minute, second. 2. Send both files and a description of what action cause the crash to TRUMPF's CAD/CAM service.

U98EN

2009-02-27

Help in the case of problems

2.
NEW

Variables in machine rules

The variable in the machine rules "T2MSrNcL_DoOutputTc PartEnd" is automatically set to 1 if a Lift with single suction cup selection has been assigned to the machine. These variables control whether TC_PART_END, PARTS_IN_PROGRAM and PARTS_IN_PROGRAM_POS should be outout in the NM program after every part. In case of lifts with single suction cup selection, this variable must always be set.

2.1

Description of variables in public machine rules

The following table contains a list of new or modified machine variables.

Machine variables MinRoundingRadius NcNameActNumber NcNameActNumberFormat NcNameRemember NcParaFromPPS Note text Minimal radius for roundings. Last serial number during automatic formation of the Nc program name as per the control string for this machine. Control string for forming the Nc program name specially for this machine. The last used Nc program name is suggested in case of a restart (machine-specific). Nc program name specially for this machine pre-assigned with a value from the PPS? (1=yes, 0=no). Tab. 1

Variables in machine rules

2009-02-27

U98EN

3.

Description of variables in public system rules

The following table contains a list of new or modified system variables.

System variable FactorElectircPowerPiercin g NcNameActNumber NcNameActNumberFormat NcNameInitMode NcNameRemember NcNameUseFileContent NcParaFromPPS NcSetupPlanOptionsFromT MT Note text Part of cutting power for outputting piercing power (negative: standard). Last serial number during automatic formation of the Nc program name as per the control string. Control string for forming the Nc program name. Nc program name as per the sheet file name (1), control (2) or self-holding (3)? The last used Nc program name is suggested in case of a restart. Use Nc program name from TMT? Nc program name pre-assigned with a value from the PPS? (1 = yes, 0 = no) Use setup plan output type from TMT? Tab. 2

4.
LifMaster Sort with additional suction cup frames

New for the automation components

The name of the LiftMaster types (LiftMaster name + format + number of suction cups) was improved. In case of LiftMaster 1530 with 24 and with 36 suction cups, the additional suction cups can now be activated. The number of suction cups is increased with the additional suction cup frame. Under >Technology >LiftMaster >Adjust, there is a new function "Displace suction cup frame". The configuration table for SortMaster options has been supplemented with "Construction dimension" and "Installation version" of the SortMaster.
Construction dimension Sheet format Arrangement for pallet changer

LiftMaster Sort: Displacing the suction cup frame SortMaster options

SortMaster1530 1500x3000 Left Near Special From a distance Right Near From a distance

SortMaster2040 2000x4000 Left Right

Constructional dimensions and installation versions

Tab. 3

U98EN

2009-02-27

Description of variables in public system rules

5. 5.1
NEW

Palletizing the cut parts Palletizing with SortMaster

You can define whether several parts should be removed and palletized individually or together. The new function can be selected for the following actions: Palletize single sheets. Palletize nesting jobs. Palletize several identical parts. Palletize any parts sequence. Remove the overfilling of the unloading area. You can define whether several stacks should be filled with parts one after the other or uniformly.

Palletizing parts together/one after the other, defining the strategy for the stack increase
Conditions Starting palletizing Automation components are allocated to the machine. The automation components are configured. The unloading areas for palletizing are defined and configured under >Tools >Modify data, >Machines >Data. An individual sheet or a nesting job has been loaded. The parts are processed. The removal of the parts with SortMaster is set. Optimization of the sheet has been completed. The sheet view is open.

Defining stack item data

1. Select >NC program >Palletization >Start >Add pallets. or Select >NC program >Palletization >Start >New palletization. or Select >NC program >Palletization >Start >Reject current sheets. The "Stack item data" mask is displayed. 2. In the selection field, select a stack item and define the desired data. 3. Select Continue. The "Automatic configuration" mask is displayed.

10

Palletizing the cut parts

2009-02-27

U98EN

Defining strategy for stack formation

4. Select "Strategy". 5. Activate the desired options. 6. To fill the stacks one after the other: select "Stack increase", "Fill one after the other". If 40 parts are to be palletized in 4 stacks, first 10 parts are first placed in stack 1, then the next 10 parts on stack 2, etc. or To fill the stacks uniformly: select "Stack increase", "Fill uniformly". If 40 parts are to be palletized in 4 stacks, first 10 parts are first placed in stack 1, then the next 10 parts on stack 2, etc. till every stack has one layer of parts. The second, third, etc. layers of parts are then stored on every stack. The first layer is first placed on every stack and then the second, third, etc. layers. 7. Selecting the other options of the mask.

5.2
NEW

Monitoring the pallet weight

During the configuration of the unloading area in the "Unit" mask and the "Pallet" mask, the weight monitoring can now be activated. During automatic palletization, parts are placed on the pallets till either the max. permissible part weight of the unit or the pallet is reached. Even during the interactive movement, the stacks can be moved to a pallet if the max. permissible part weight of the pallet is not exceeded.

U98EN

2009-02-27

Palletizing the cut parts

11

6.
NEW

Defining nesting parameters

In case of punch machines, you can now decide in the nesting parameters in the "Technology" tab whether the clamp dead areas, the clamping dead strips or no clamps should be taken into account for the selected machine.

6.1

Machine-oriented nesting (free geometry nesting processor)

1. Select >Job >Parameters >Free geometry.... The "Nesting parameters" mask is displayed. 2. Select the "Technology" tab. 3. Under "Machine selection", select Selection and select the desired machine. 4. Select OK. Nest adopts the data for the machine and the control system. 5. If a laser cutting machine has been selected: under "Technological settings", select "Prevent tilting of parts". Nest nests the parts in such a manner that they do not fall through the slats or tip over. 6. In case of punching or multi-purpose machines, the selection "Taking into account clamps" is selected. Under "Technological settings", "Take into account clamp", select "Do not take into account". Select "Clamp dead areas" and select the loading position. During sheet assignment, the machine-specific clamp dead areas are taken into account. or Select "Clamp dead strips" and select the loading position. During sheet assignment, the machine-specific clamp dead strip is taken into account.

12

Defining nesting parameters

2009-02-27

U98EN

7.
NEW

Defining options for a nesting job

In case of the nesting options, the positioning direction of the parts can once again be defined for all sheets including the last one. If the positioning direction X or Y is selected, then all sheets are assigned in the appropriate direction. If the positioning direction Automatic is selected, then depending on the selected nesting profile (e.g. optimizer= current option "Optimizer"): the second last sheets are assigned in the direction that attains the best sheet cut and the last sheet are assigned deviating from this in the direction of the narrower sheet edge such that square remaining sheets are generated.

8.
NEW

Nesting with several nesting profiles

Several nesting profiles can now be simultaneously selected under >Job >Parameters >Free geometry... >Options >Nesting profiles. These profiles are processed in a prescribed sequence. The best result of the individual profiles is adopted as the final nesting result. The nesting process can be aborted at any time with the <Esc> key. Here, the currently calculated profiles are aborted without contributing to the final result. The results of the completely calculated profiles are however internally compared and the best one is returned as the result. The selected nesting profile is then entered in the result log. In case of several active nesting profiles, the profile is constantly displayed in the message bar which has the best intermediate result.

U98EN

2009-02-27

Defining options for a nesting job

13

9.
NEW

Saving sheets in the DXF format

Sheets in the nest can also be saved in the 'DXF' format. Under >File, select >Save sheet(s) as DXF. The sheets are saved in the same directory and under the same name as the sheet data. In case of a nesting job, all the selected sheets in the 'DXF' format can be saved in the sheet overview.

10.
NEW

Creating sheets

The sequence is ended when creating a nesting job from a sheet. (see "Creating a nesting job from a single sheet", pg. 14) When creating a nesting job, the "Nesting parameters" mask is displayed (under >File >New >Job...). If the mask is not open here, then set the value of the variable NestShowParametersBeforeCreatingJob in the public system rules to 0 (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >System).

10.1 Creating a nesting job from a single sheet

If a single sheet has been created and laid out with parts, a nesting job can be created from this. 1. Regenerate or reload sheet. 2. Select >Sheet >Generate job.... 3. Select the desired nesting parameters and start the nesting process. 4. Select >File >Save or <Ctrl> + <S>. or Select >File >Save as. The "Job - File names" mask is displayed. The sheet name is displayed. Note The file name can contain up to 35 characters. Digits, letters or a combination of the two are permitted. 5. Enter the name of the new nesting job under "Job". 6. Open "Storage location" with . The file browser opens. 7. Select the directory.

14

Saving sheets in the DXF format

2009-02-27

U98EN

8. In order to create a subdirectory with the same job name: checkmark "Create subdirectory for order". 9. If the individual sheet should have a name different from that of the job or if the job path is not the same as the sheet path: checkmark "Sheet name" and enter the name of the new sheet. 10. Select OK. The sheet is saved in the 'JOB' format.

11.
NEW

Deleting remaining sheets

Existing remaining sheets can now be deleted only in the remaining sheet management.

11.1 Deleting remaining sheets from the remaining sheet management

Condition There is at least one remaining sheet in the remaining sheet management.

1. Select >Tools >Manage remaining sheets.... The "Remainder sheet management" mask is displayed. 2. To delete an existing remainder sheet: mark the remainder sheet in the selection field. 3. Select Delete. 4. Select Exit.

U98EN

2009-02-27

Deleting remaining sheets

15

12.
NEW

Moving or rotating parts

If several parts that are assigned in one pitch are to be moved, then this is identified during the selection and visualized with a blue cross. Even a pitch on the sheet with several parts per pitch cell is identified such that the pitch can be re-identified from MTLs. Distance test is deactivated for non-interactive copying of parts The non-interactive displace functions (e.g. >Parts >Displace >Horizontal/Vertical/2 Points) take into account since TruTops 2.0 the settings for the distance test so that parts on other parts or at the sheet edge can be stopped. If parts are already selected, then this selection is displaced. Else, the parts to be displaced must be selected at the end of the interaction.

16

Moving or rotating parts

2009-02-27

U98EN

13.
NEW

Working with nesting jobs

The procedure for processing a nesting job has been changed (see "Opening and editing nesting job, generating NC program and production package", pg. 17). New procedure for saving the nesting job (see "Saving the nesting job", pg. 23). Unprocessed parts can now be processed with a "jump"(see "Processing the remaining parts", pg. 23). The processing of a part can be adopted to similar parts on other sheets. For example, part A is on sheet 2 and 3. Now processing of part A is changed at sheet 2. This change is automatically adopted to sheet 3. The changed part A is highlighted in orange on sheet 3. If this is not desired, a part group must be formed.

13.1 Opening and editing nesting job, generating NC program and production package
Overview of the section: Nesting job TwinLine-preparing. Automatically creating sheet parting cuts to separate the sheet skeleton. Loading machined sheets as '*.TMT'. Creating machinings. Generating an NC program. Printing out the setup plan automatically. Saving processed sheets as '*.TMT'.

U98EN

2009-02-27

Working with nesting jobs

17

Opening a nesting order

Condition Opening a nesting job Nesting job was created in nest.

1. Select >Job >Open.... 2. Mark the desired nesting order and Select OK. The "Sheet job processing defaults " mask is displayed. Note The actions are applicable for every sheet of the nesting job. Mark the desired actions. If "Create machining" and "Generate NC program" are deselected, the nesting job can be machined only sheet by sheet and no production package is generated. If "Save Tmts TMT" is selected, *.TMT is displayed when loading a sheet provided it is present in the file browser. If no *.TMT is found for the selected sheet, a *.TAF is displayed. If a production package is to be created and the machine is connected to CELL-SERVER or TC-CELL: set the value of variable NcLinkLiteModus in the public system rules to 1 (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >Machine, (see chapter "Setting basic data"), Machine dependent rule). If data is missing in the production package: change the value of variable NcLinkProduktionsPlanTyp in the public system rules (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >Machine, (see chapter "Setting basic data")). Select OK. If technology data is not present: select the technology table and the rule. If "TwinLine preparation" has been selected, the "TwinLine parameters" mask is displayed. Modify parameters for common cuts if required and Select OK. If "Separate waste grid" has been selected, the "Parameters for waste grid separation" mask is displayed.

3.

4. 5. TwinLine-preparing nesting job Separating waste grid 6. 7. 8.

Note If the sheet parting cuts for separating the waste grid are executed before the machining of the sheet, these cannot be combined with the common cuts (TwinLine). 9. Modify parameters if necessary and Select OK.

18

Working with nesting jobs

2009-02-27

U98EN

Parameters for waste grid separation

The parameters entered in the "Parameters for waste grid separation" mask are the default values recommended by TRUMPF from the active rules. They can be modified temporarily here. The modifications are lost as soon as a new rule is selected. (Changing parameters permanently, (see chapter "Setting basic data").) Selecting contour type 1. Select "Contour type", "Open". The contour type is read out from the rule present. Depending on the process rule, "open contour" means small, medium or large contours. or Select contour type "Small", "Medium" or "Large". The contour type is allocated, independent of the specification in the rule. 2. Select "Approach mode", "Normal" or "Reduced". (For an overview of piercing and approaching for various materials, refer to the current data collection for your machine). 3. Enter the "measuring distance" (1). At this distance (starting from the sheet edge), the height regulation system measures the position of the sheet surface.

Selecting approach mode

Selecting settings for approach and withdrawal

1 2

Measuring distance Approach path to the sheet

Reduced approach path in the sheet

4+5 Travel without height regulation 5 Withdrawal path from the sheet Fig. 29678

2+4 Travel without height regulation Settings for approach and withdrawal

U98EN

2009-02-27

Working with nesting jobs

19

4. Enter "Travel without height regulation" (2+4 or 4+5): the height regulation system is not to be switched on when the beam moves into the sheet from outside. (Risk of collision: the cutting head would move down to its lowest point and hit the sheet when it moves to cut into it.) The machine switches the height regulation system on only when the laser has covered the "Travel without height regulation". 5. To approach with laser beam cutting machines with reduced laser power ("Approach mode", "Reduced" are in effect): enter "Reduced approach path in the sheet" (3). 6. Enter "Approach path to the sheet" (2). (= Distance between the switch-on position of the beam (outside the sheet) and the sheet edge. The height regulation system is switched off.) 7. Enter "Withdrawal path from the sheet" (5). (Distance between the sheet edge and the switch-off position of the beam. The height regulation system is switched off.) 8. Enter the "minimum element length of the cut" so that the sheet-separating cuts at the webs (distance between two parts) can be set to the desired width. Note If the sheet parting cuts for separating the waste grid are executed before the machining of the sheet, these cannot be combined with the common cuts (TwinLine). Select desired "Settings for sheet separating cuts" (before or after machining the sheet?). Enter the web widths in X and Y. Enter "Remaining web to part" and "Remaining web to sheet margin". Select Set. Select OK.

9. 10. 11. Resetting parameters to values from the process rule 12. 13.

20

Working with nesting jobs

2009-02-27

U98EN

Creating NC program for nesting job

Conditions A nesting job has been loaded. The processing of the nesting job including all manual changes is complete.

Changing the program settings

Note When generating an NC program, various functions can be activated or deactivated (e.g. "Anticipate operations", "Use subroutine technique", "Measure sheet position" ...) and saved as desired. When generating an NC program, it is checked whether the technology table contains all the required data. If data is missing, it is output in the technology log. 1. In order to create the NC program only for the current sheet of the nesting job: select >NC program >NC program >Create NC program >Sheet NC.... or In order to create the NC program only for the entire nesting job: select >NC program >NC program >Create NC program >Job NC.... The "Generate NC program" mask is displayed. 2. Select "Settings". Note The name of the NC file should not have more than eight characters for machines with the operating system Windows 3.11. If the file name is longer, only the first six characters and the three-letter file extension ('*.LST') are displayed. The missing characters from the file name are replaced by a tilde ("~") and for file names which occur frequently, by a digit. 3. TruTops always suggests the name of the machined sheet as the name of the NC file. Example: "Zahnra~1.LST" "Zahnra~2.LST" 4. Delete the suggested name and enter a new name under "NC file". 5. To set the path for the storage of the NC program ('*.LST') fixed: enter the desired path in the public system rules as the value of variable ST_LstPath (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >System, (see chapter "Setting basic data")). Set the value of the ST_LstPathModal variable to 1. or "NC program path" with. The file browser opens. Select the desired directory. Select OK. 6. Check "Path for setup plan" . 7. Path for setup plan with . The file browser opens.

Modifying the suggested name for the NC file

Modifying NC program path

Defining the path for storage of the setup plan

U98EN

2009-02-27

Working with nesting jobs

21

Reduce maximum length of the program names

8. 9. 10. 11.

Select the directory and Select OK.. Select >Tools >Modify data. Select >Machines >Data >Basic data >Limit values. Modify "Max. number of digits for program number".

Modifying program name

Note In machines with Bosch control system, the last used program name is the default program name suggested. In machines with Siemens control system and alphanumeric program names, the name of the NC file is the suggested program name. With alphanumeric program names, no distinction is made between lower case and upper case letters. (Change Alphanumeric program names to numeric(see chapter "Setting basic data")). 12. If the alphanumeric "Program name" is different than the name of the NC file by default: set the value of variable ST_LAS_NcProgNrLikeFileName in the public system rules to c_no (under >Tools >Modify data >Rules >System, (see chapter "Setting basic data")). 13. Delete the old program name and enter a new one. Note TruTops writes this information in the setup plan and (in case of machines with Siemens control system) the NC file. The remarks for the setup plan are self-holding. They are overwritten only by new text. 14. Enter the desired information. 15. In order to generate a production package directly from the job (possible only on machines with Siemens control system), select "Production package". 16. Switch "Parameters", "Sequence", "Sheet position" or "Setup plan" in the tab. 17. When all settings have been defined: Select OK. The NC program is generated.

NC title, customer/job number, programmer, remark ...

production package

Defining additional settings

22

Working with nesting jobs

2009-02-27

U98EN

Saving the nesting job

Condition The processed nesting job is loaded.

1. Select >Job >Save .... or Select >File >Save all. All sheets of the job are saved as TMT. 2. Select >File >Save TMT. The "Save file" mask is displayed. 3. Enter the desired file name. The currently displayed sheet is saved as TMT. 4. Select >File >Save GMT. 5. Select the desired part/parts on the sheet and Select OK. The "Save file" mask is displayed. 6. Enter the desired file name. The part/parts is(are) saved as GMT.

13.2 Processing the remaining parts

If there are unprocessed parts on a sheet/ in a job, they can be processed quickly. Select >Technology >Processing >Remaining parts >Sheet or >Job. The unprocessed parts on the sheet / in the job are displayed.

U98EN

2009-02-27

Working with nesting jobs

23

14.
NEW

TwinLine in the thick sheet (mild steel)

Corners can be unrounded and cut in mild steel with the help of new corner treatment. This leads to the TwinLine preparation even in case of thick mild steel (> 6 mm). This corner treatment is now created automatically for TwinLine. The speed is thus reduced before the corners and the corners are cooled. The reduced paths and cooling points are presented in yellow. The "Corner cooling" strategy is used exclusively in thick sheet areas. If the corners are to be processed, it is defined in the rules (see >Tools >Modify data >Rules Tab "General 3" TwinLine with cooling).

15.
NEW

Other areas of application during processing

There are new areas of application "All inner contours in the part", "All inner contours on the sheet", "All outer contours on the sheet" that are valid for the following interactions: Change processing type. Change piercing. Change approaching. Modify withdrawal. Set / delete microjoint. Adopt contour parameters. Set contour size. Delete contour switching. Set / delete path correction.

24

TwinLine in the thick sheet (mild steel)

2009-02-27

U98EN

16.
NEW

Contour parameters for radii

If roundings based on radii are not possible from the rules, the rounding is generated with a smaller radius. The smallest radius can be defined in the machine rules: set the value of variable "MinRoundingRadius" to the desired value (under >Tools >Modify data... >Rules >Machine). The contours at which the rounding radius is less than that from the rules are presented with a yellow circle.

17.
NEW

Changing the parameters of the approach flag

In the "Approach parameters" mask (via >Technology >Modify >Change approach...), the current rule values are now displayed. The "Left arrow" can be used to adopt the displayed values in the input fields. The contour size can be changed via the selection field. The contour size of the subsequently selected contour is not changed, only the approach values are.

18.
NEW

Setting Microjoints

The name of microjoints has been changed: "Machine microjoints" are now called "Microjoints that can be modified at the machine". In case of microjoints that can be modified at the machine, only the position of the microjoints is defined and not their length. The machine reads out the length of the microjoints from a table stored in the control system. The operator can process and activate or deactivate the microjoints in the table. "Program microjoints" are nor called "Fixed programmed microjoints". In case of fixed programmed microjoints, the position and the length of the microjoints is defined in TruTops. The operator of the machine can neither modify nor deactivate the fixed programmed microjoints.

U98EN

2009-02-27

Contour parameters for radii

25

19.
NEW

Observing sample parts

If sample parts are available, then these are taken into account during optimization and cut before all other parts. Existing sample parts can be highlighted in colors.

19.1 Observing the sample parts

The quality of the cut parts can be checked with the sample part at the beginning of the production. The "Observe sample" function is used to cut sample parts on the sheet before all other parts. For better sheet usage, parts that are not sample parts are nested within sample parts. During processing, parts in the inner surfaces are usually cut before the surrounding parts. Thus, parts that are not sample parts may be cut together with the sample parts. Conditions Sample parts have been nested in the nest. The sheet or the nesting job is loaded.

1. Select >Technology >Processing >Create >Parameters.... The "Machine parameters" mask is displayed. 2. Select the "Optimization" tab. 3. Select "Observe sample parts" on the left side of the tab. The existing sample parts are taken into consideration during the optimization and cut before all other parts. 4. In order to highlight the sample parts on the sheet: select >View >Show sample parts. The sample parts are highlighted in orange.

26

Observing sample parts

2009-02-27

U98EN

20.
NEW

Creating sheet-separating cuts automatically

When creating sheet-separating cuts, a new parameter was added for the minimum element length of the cut. Thus, sheet-separating cuts can be set to the desired length at the webs (distance between two parts). So far, 10 mm was defined as the minimum web width.

21.
NEW

Saving the scrap skeleton as remaining sheets

In case of "Generate NC program", you can now select depending on the cut of the sheet as to whether the scrap skeleton should be saved as '*.TRG' (remaining sheet) and entered into the remaining sheet management. In the "Generate NC program" mask, checkmark the "Use scrap skeleton as remaining sheet, if the cut is larger than" and enter the permissible cut in percent.

Example for a remaining sheet

Fig. 55550

U98EN

2009-02-27

Creating sheet-separating cuts automatically

27

22.
NEW

Saving the settings for future NC programs

When generating an NC program, settings that have been selected once for "Measure sheet position" can be adopted for future NC programs as well. In the "Generate NC program" mask in the "Sheet position" tab, activate the "Save data for future NC generation" box. The selected settings are thus reused for the next NC program.

23.
NEW

Generate NC program.

In the table header of the NC program (CONSUMPTION_TIMES table), values are now output with which calculation programs such as TruTops Calculate can determine the gas and power consumption per part. If a processed sheet is to be saved when generating the NC program, it can be selected under the following name: Name of the TMT. Name of the NC file. Any other name.

23.1 Processed sheet Save when generating the NC program

Condition The "Generate NC program" mask is displayed (via >NC program >NC program >Start).

1. Select "Save TMT". 2. Open a list field with . 3. Select a name under which the processed tube should be saved. Name of the TMT. Name of the NC file. Any other name.

28

Saving the settings for future NC programs

2009-02-27

U98EN

24.
NEW

NC post-processing programs

The description of the sequence has been improved.

24.1 Creating a collection call up for several NC post-processing programs

Several single NC post-processing programs can be consecutively called up in a defined sequence via the 'Postprocessor Collection.bat' NC post-processing program. Any number of 'PostprocessorCollection.bat' files can be created. However, only one per machine can be activated as a standard. Copying template 1. Start Windows Explorer. 2. Go to the '\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\Macros' directory. Notes The copies must also be '\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\Macros' directory. in the

Modifying template

The name of the file must not contain more than 14 characters. 3. Copy and rename 'PostprocessorCollectionTemplate.bat' in the required quantity (e.g. 'PostprocessorCollection_1.bat', 'PostprocessorCollection_2.bat'). 4. Open the copy (e.g. 'PostprocessorCollection_1.bat') with an editor (e.g. Notepad). Note The line notepad %A_LST_FILENAME_STRING% in the following example of a *.bat file must be in one line. 5. Enter the NC post-processing programs to be activated in the desired order (see highlighting). Example: Execute the NC post-processing program 'customer.pl'. Open NC program using an editor. Print the NC program using the default printer. Corresponding entries in the *.bat file (e.g. 'PostprocessorCollection_1.bat'): rem ----------------------------------------set A_LST_FILENAME_STRING=%1 set A_TC_PERL_PATH=%2 set A_TC_TOOL_PATH=%3 rem ----------------------------------------rem ----------------------------------------rem Here comes the list of postprocessors rem -----------------------------------------

U98EN

2009-02-27

NC post-processing programs

29

%A_TC_PERL_PATH%\bin\perl %A_TC_TOOL_PATH%\customer.pl %A_LST_FILENAME_STRING% notepad %A_LST_FILENAME_STRING% notepad /p %A_LST_FILENAME_STRING% rem set set set rem ----------------------------------------A_LST_FILENAME_STRING= A_TC_PERL_PATH= A_TC_TOOL_PATH= -----------------------------------------

Tip The NC post-processing programs entered can be deactivate by commenting them out with "rem" at the beginning of the line. 6. Save changes. 7. Open the Data Management of the machine for which the NC post-processing program is to be used. 8. Select >User >Programs. 9. Enter "User", trumpf. 10. Enter "Designation", PostprocessorCollection_1 (example!). 11. Select "NC converter", YES. 12. Select "Modal", YES. 13. Select "Window", YES. 14. Select "Show log", NO. 15. Select "export", "re-import" and "export help files", NO. Note The following list must be extended or shortened according to the entered post-processing program. 16. Under "Parameters", enter $(P) $(TOPS_PERL_PATH)$(TOPS_APP_UTILS_PATH) These transfer parameters are adapted to the 'PostprocessorCollectionTemplate.bat' template and mean the following in the above-mentioned example: $(P): Name of the generated NC program.

Entering a collection call up as NC post-processing program

$(TOPS_PERL_PATH): Path to PERL.

$(TOPS_APP_UTILS_PATH): Path to the product-specific tools. 17. Under "Program": enter $(TOPS_MACROS_PATH)\PostprocessorCollection_1. bat.

30

NC post-processing programs

2009-02-27

U98EN

Note The NC post-processing program selected last is set as the standard for the active machine. The standard holds for all TruTops users. 18. Select Create. TruTops adds the NC post-processing program in the selection field. Tip Activate the NC post-processing program: see chapter "Machining parts, generating an NC program".

U98EN

2009-02-27

NC post-processing programs

31

32

NC post-processing programs

2009-02-27

U98EN

Update information

TruTops Laser
Version 8.1

Update information

TruTops Laser
Version 8.1

Edition 2010-03-19

Order Information

Please specify when ordering this document: Update information TruTops Laser Edition 2010-03-19 Document number U98DE

Address for orders

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Technische Redaktion Johann-Maus-Strae 2 D-71254 Ditzingen Fon: +49 7156 303 - 0 Fax: +49 7156 303 - 30540 Internet: http://www.trumpf.com E-Mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf.com

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG

Table of contents
1. 1.1 2. 2.1 Applications .......................................................................7 Closing open files ................................................................7 Message and confirmation masks ...................................7 Reactivating hidden message and confirmation masks...................................................................................7 Automatically switching views over ................................8 Configuring and activating viewing options .........................8 Defining nesting parameters ............................................8 Modifying the sheet layout ...............................................9 Mirroring a part or part group on a vertical axis...................9 Editing part grids..................................................................9 Modifying nesting jobs manually.................................. 10 Renesting new parts manually.......................................... 11 Rules ................................................................................ 12 Description of variables in public machine rules............... 12 Description of variables in public system rules................. 12 Reassigning your own technology tables.................... 12 Direct sheet change........................................................ 13 Display ............................................................................. 13 Plane representation of parts and processings ................ 14 Processing single parts, sheets, nesting jobs ............ 14 Switching over contour size within a contour ............. 15 Switching contour size within a contour............................ 15 Modify appro. form ......................................................... 16 FlyLine working range.................................................... 16 DetectLine replaces Cateye ........................................... 16 Measuring sheet position, defining machine loading........ 16 TwinLine strategies ........................................................ 19

3. 3.1 4. 5. 5.1 5.2 6. 6.1 7. 7.1 7.2 8. 9. 10. 10.1 11. 12. 12.1 13. 14. 15. 15.1 16.

U98DE

2010-03-19

Table of contents

16.1

Opening TwinLine-capable sheet (common cut) and preparing TwinLine .................................................... 20 Opening TwinLine-capable sheets (common cut) and preparing TwinLine ........................................ 23 Simulation........................................................................ 24 Simulation ......................................................................... 24 Simulating sheet machining......................................... 24 Table alignment .............................................................. 24 Machine information....................................................... 25 Machines supported by TruTops laser ............................. 25

17. 17.1

18. 19. 19.1

2010-03-19

U98DE

1.
NEW

Applications

In the applications CAD, Nest, Laser, Punch, Tube CAD and Tube, it is now possible to close files which are currently open (e.g. drawings, nesting jobs, processed tubes) without having to shut down and reopen the application.

1.1

Closing open files

In the applications CAD, Nest, Laser, Punch, Tube CAD and Tube, it is now possible to close files which are currently open (e.g. drawings, nesting jobs, processed tubes) without having to shut down and reopen the application. Select >File >Close. The working range of the application is empty. The application status is the same as directly after starting it up.

2.
NEW

Message and confirmation masks

Message and confirmation masks which are permanently hidden can be reactivated.

2.1

Reactivating hidden message and confirmation masks

1. Select >Extras >Modify data.... 2. Select >User >Configuration. The "Configuration" mask is displayed. 3. Select "Show optional message boxes again". 4. Select Modify.

U98DE

2010-03-19

Applications

3.
NEW

Automatically switching views over

From Version 2.0 of TruTops onwards, it is possible to configure viewing options for the functions "Sheet layout", "Technology", "Optimization" and "NC/Setup plan". From Version 2.1 of TruTops onwards, the configured viewing options can be activated if required by selecting one of these functions in the function browser.

3.1

Configuring and activating viewing options

Viewing options can be configured for the functions "Sheet layout", "Technology", "Optimization" and "NC/Setup plan". If required the configured viewing options can be activated by selecting one of these functions in the function browser. Configuring viewing options 1. Select >View >Presettings >Adapt.... 2. Select function (e.g. "Technology"). 3. Activate desired display options (e.g. "Positioning lines"). Automatically activate viewing options in the function browser? 4. To activate the corresponding viewing options when the function is selected in the function browser: select "Activate in the function browser". 5. Select other functions and other display options if required. 6. Select OK. Manually activate viewing options? 7. Select >View >Presettings. 8. To manually activate the configured viewing options: select function (>Sheet layout, >Technology, >Optimization or >NC/Setup plan).

4.
NEW

Defining nesting parameters

Up to 9999 sheets of a format can be added when adding new sheet formats.

Automatically switching views over

2010-03-19

U98DE

5.
NEW

Modifying the sheet layout

Manually nested parts or part groups can now be mirrored. Uniform part grids can now be edited easily using the mouse.

5.1

Mirroring a part or part group on a vertical axis

1. Double-click a part or a part group to mark it 2. Select >Parts >Multi-copy machining >Mirror. or Press <Strg> or <Ctrl> + <M>.

5.2

Editing part grids

When the same parts in a block comprising of several rows and columns are hanging on the mouse, Nest recognizes them as a parts grid. Different toolbars are arranged around the grid area in order to be able to edit it. Conditions The sheet or the nesting job is loaded. In case of nesting jobs: the single sheet view is displayed.

Different values are displayed in the message bar during editing.

Distance between the respective part rows or columns. Size of a cell (part width or height plus distance). Total width or height of the part grid. Distance to the respective sheet margin. Number of parts in the current grid (number of columns x number of rows) total number of parts on the sheet/minimum number according to job Tab. 1

Distance Cell size Grid dimension Edge distance Number of parts Example: 8(4x2) 15/10

U98DE

2010-03-19

Modifying the sheet layout

Modifying the number of parts in the grid

1. Draw a frame around all parts belonging the grid with the mouse. 2. To increase the number of parts by row or column: Click on and enlarge the grid frames outwards. 3. Press the left hand mouse button when the desired number of parts has been achieved. The frame around the grid disappears. 4. To reduce the number of parts by row or column: Click on and reduce the grid frames inwards. 5. Press the left hand mouse button when the desired number of parts has been achieved. The frame around the grid disappears.

Modifying the part distance in the grid

6. Draw a frame around all parts belonging the grid with the mouse. 7. To enlarge the part distance horizontally: Click on and enlarge the grid frames outwards. 8. Press the left hand mouse button when the desired part distance has been achieved. The frame around the grid disappears. 9. To reduce the part distance horizontally: Click on and reduce the grid frames inwards. Note A query is issued if the set part distance is smaller than the minimum distance. 10. Press the left hand mouse button when the desired part distance has been achieved. The frame around the grid disappears.

6.
NEW

Modifying nesting jobs manually

If a part is added to the existing job, a check is performed to determine if a material ID has been saved for the new part which differs from the existing job. If this is the case, a query is issued asking whether the material of the new part should be adopted and whether the standard values of the new part saved in the database (web width, sheet margins, etc.) should be adopted.

10

Modifying nesting jobs manually

2010-03-19

U98DE

6.1

Renesting new parts manually

The following parts can be manually added to a job: Non machined single parts ('*.GEO'). Processed single parts ('*.GMT'). Mini nests ('*.MTL').

Conditions A nesting job has been loaded. The single sheet view of the sheet is displayed.

1. Select >Parts >New.... or Click on the empty field in the parts preview. The file browser opens. 2. Change the file format if required ('*.MTL' or '*.GMT'). 3. If required, change the directory. 4. Mark the desired file. 5. Select OK. The mask with the part parameters is displayed. 6. Enter the desired number of pieces and if required the name of the customer and the number of the machining cycle. 7. If the material ID of the new part does not match the material ID in the table, respond to the queries asking if the material ID or if the standard values should be transferred. 8. Either Select OK. The part hangs on the mouse. To rotate the part before depositing: rotate part with the wheel mouse. Place the parts at the desired position (click; if required, repeat until the current number of pieces is reached). or Select Automatic. The desired parts are added to the nesting job.

U98DE

2010-03-19

Modifying nesting jobs manually

11

7. 7.1

Rules Description of variables in public machine rules

The following table contains a list of new machine variables.

Machine variables FlyLineMaxSize Note text Maximum size of the FlyLine range. Tab. 2

7.2

Description of variables in public system rules

The following table contains a list of new system variables.

System variable PRP_UseMachTransPath Note text Selection of the storage location of the production plan package.

0: Path of the master file (machine-independent). 1: Last used path (machine-dependent). Tab. 3

8.
NEW

Reassigning your own technology tables

If you select one of your own laser technology tables which is not assigned to a TRUMPF laser technology table you have to reassign the table. The laser technology table can be reassigned via the entry "Basic LTT" under >Extras >Modify data... >Laser >General >Info.

12

Rules

2010-03-19

U98DE

9.
NEW

Direct sheet change

If a job consists of several sheets, it is now possible to directly show individual sheets without having to go through all the sheets in a job one after the other. Direct access to sheets is available via >Job >Active sheet. A list of all sheets from the active job is displayed via the selection field between Previous sheet and Next sheet. A specific sheet can be displayed by clicking on it.

10.
NEW

Display

Sheet information and part numbering can be displayed and hidden directly via >View (previously this was only possible via >View >Presettings >Adapt...). In addition to "'Missing roundings", "Roundings too small" can now be displayed and hidden via >View >Missing roundings. Roundings that are too small are marked in the display with a yellow circle. Additionally a realistic plane representation of parts and processings can be selected under >View. This option is also available in single part mode.

U98DE

2010-03-19

Direct sheet change

13

10.1 Plane representation of parts and processings

Example

Fig. 54774

11.
NEW

Processing single parts, sheets, nesting jobs

When automatically processing a part or a sheet, contours which are smaller than the minimum value of the small contour are only point marked and are not cut. A message is issued in the technology log, indicating that one or several contours have, due to their size, only been pointed marked. The technology log can be displayed via >Technology >Processing >Technology log.

14

Processing single parts, sheets, nesting jobs

2010-03-19

U98DE

12.
NEW

Switching over contour size within a contour

The contour size within a contour can now be modified directly by making a multiple selection.

12.1 Switching contour size within a contour

Condition Switching contour size A processed sheet or a processed single part is loaded.

1. Select >Technology >Contour parameters >Switch contour size. 2. Select >S, >M or >L to switch over directly to a small, medium or large contour. or Select >Selection.... Note For direct switch over, the 2nd point on the contour can be clicked immediately after the 1st point. 3. Click on the first point on the contour from which the contour size is to be switched (in direction of machining). The "Contour change-over" mask is displayed. 4. Select a new contour size. 5. Select OK. 6. Click on the second point on the contour from which the contour size is to be switched (in direction of machining). The contour between these two points is set to the desired size. The contours retain their original contour size before and afterwards. The switching is represented by cyan arrows. The direction of the arrows shows the switching direction. The size of the arrows symbolizes the contour size before and after the switching. 7. To finish, click on End.

Deleting switching

8. Select >Technology >Contour parameters >Delete contour size switching. 9. Select the area of application. 10. Click on the contour whose contour switching(s) are to be deleted. 11. To finish, click on End.

U98DE

2010-03-19

Switching over contour size within a contour

15

13.
NEW

Modify appro. form

In order to modify an approach form, it is now possible to click on the spray circle around the piercing spot in addition to the piercing spot and the straight part of the approach path.

14.
NEW

FlyLine working range

A message indicating possible cutting problems is displayed if a FlyLine range larger than the recommended maximum size of 150 x 150 mm is created. The size of the maximum FlyLine range can be modified via the machine rules variable "FlyLineMaxSize". To do this, select "FlyLineMaxSize" under >Extras >Modify data... >Rules >Machine and enter a new value.

15.
NEW

DetectLine replaces Cateye

The DetectLine function replaces the previous Cateye function.

15.1 Measuring sheet position, defining machine loading

Conditions A processed sheet or a processed single part is loaded. The machining of the sheet or the single part, including all manual modifications, has been completed.

Generating NC programs.

1. Select >NC program >NC program >Start. The "Generate NC program" mask is opened. Note The contents of the "Sheet position" tab depend on the machine control system and the enabled options. 2. Select "Sheet position".

16

Modify appro. form

2010-03-19

U98DE

Measuring sheet position

Note When machining a sheet, its position must be known with sufficient accuracy. To guarantee this, the sheet must be loaded or measured precisely. Sheet alignment with height regulation can be deactivated permanently (Basic data of the machine, (see chapter "Setting basic data")). DetectLine (optional) is a photoelectrical sensor for precisely measuring the part position. DetectLine must be individually activated for every machine (Basic data of the machine, (see chapter "Setting basic data")). 3. Activate the desired box: "Do not measure": The sheet position is not measured. "With height regulation": The machine measures the position of the sheet edge with height regulation. (The "Values for sheet alignment" for machines with Bosch control systems are appropriately preallocated.) "With DetectLine (an outside corner)": DetectLine measures the exact position of an outside corner of a rectangular pre-cut part or sheet. "With DetectLine (two round holes)": DetectLine measures the exact position of the centers of two round holes. 4. To adopt settings for future NC programs: checkmark "Save data for future NC generation". The data is saved for future sessions.

Saving the settings for future programs

Activating the zero offset (Bosch)

Note Zero offset is possible only on machines with Bosch control systems. 5. Checkmark "Correction of zero point active" and enter the NC command. The "zero offset" corresponds to the zero offset on the machine. In the case of "Correction of zero point active", the machine operator can enter the value of the zero offset at the control system. The NC command is appropriately preallocated. (For NC commands, see the current programming manual for the machine.)

Defining the machine loading

6. Select the desired box for loading.

For manual loading, checkmark "Manual". To automatic loading, checkmark "automated". Loading with individual suction cups or suction cup groups is possible. In order to always load from a machine pallet only: checkmark "With LiftMaster in single pallet mode". Checkmark the pallet changer before the start of the main program or after the end of the main program. To load with the LiftMaster, checkmark "Loading with LiftMaster". To load with the drawing device, checkmark "Loading with drawing device".

U98DE

2010-03-19

DetectLine replaces Cateye

17

Defining machine unloading

7. Checkmark "Unload skeleton with LiftMaster Sort". 8. Change to the "Settings", "Parameters", ""Sheet position" or "Setup plan" tab. 9. When all settings have been defined: Select OK. The NC program is generated.

18

DetectLine replaces Cateye

2010-03-19

U98DE

16.
NEW

TwinLine strategies

The TwinLine function now offers 2 different strategies for the preparation of parts/sheets suitable for TwinLine: Safety strategy. Easy strategy Both strategies can be used when opening a sheet and on a sheet which is already open.
Easy strategy All materials All sheet thicknesses

Function Materials Sheet thickness

Safety strategy All materials

Mild steel: maximum 6 mm Stainless steel/aluminum: maximum 3 mm

Contour

No restrictions

Separation cut must be straight and go all the way through. No notches allowed in the area where the separation cut is to be performed.

Simulation Cutting sequence Optimize

Own simulation of TwinLine processing. Short precuts necessary. No manual intervention possible.

Standard simulation following processing of the entire sheet No precuts necessary.

Invert approaching possible. Modification of the processing sequence of part groups and separation cuts possible.

Processing sequence

1. Inner contours 2. TwinLine cuts

1. Inner contours 2. Separation cuts 3. Trimming cuts

Preparation Sheet strategy Corner treatment Kerf width

It is possible to manually change between processing strategies whenever and as often as you want. This undoes the previous preparation.

Only one strategy is possible on a sheet. Different strategies are possible for several sheets.

The corner cooling function is possible when using oxygen as the gas type. The kerf width for preparation can be changed from the value specified in the laser technology table. Tab. 4

U98DE

2010-03-19

TwinLine strategies

19

16.1 Opening TwinLine-capable sheet (common cut) and preparing TwinLine

With common cuts, the contours of parts lying next to each other are cut at the same time. The parts are laid out in such a way that the distance between them corresponds to the kerf width. A sheet skeleton is not formed.

Single part

Sheet Fig. 17142

What is TwinLine preparation: TruTops creates a common cut for all contours which are separated from each other by a distance corresponding to the kerf width in the active technology table. With TwinLine preparation, the sequence of cuts is defined depending on the strategy used. Safety strategy: separation cut, preparatory cut in the neighboring contour, overlapping cut, withdrawal ... Easy strategy: Inner contours, separation cut, trimming cut.

20

TwinLine strategies

2010-03-19

U98DE

Length of preparatory cut (Safety strategy)

The preparatory cut goes over and beyond the parting cut to the neighboring contour:

Preparatory cut Fig. 29043

Length for overlapping (Safety strategy)

The length for overlapping extends the preparatory cut. It prevents the formation of slats when the preparatory cut and the actual cutting of the contour later "come together". The length for overlapping is thus cut "twice". The length for overlapping is dependent on the material.

Preparatory cut

Length for overlapping Fig. 29044

Length of preparatory cut: Length for overlapping: Total length of the cut into the neighboring contour: Example

15 mm 1 mm 16 mm Tab. 5

Min. length of element for preparation (Safety strategy)

This value ensures that a workpiece will not be already cut out by two preparatory cuts.

U98DE

2010-03-19

TwinLine strategies

21

Length of the reduced approach path (Safety strategy) Approach length on the outer contour (Easy strategy)

Reduced approaching is mainly used for stainless steel and aluminum. TruTops reads out the value from the rules. The approach length is the length of the preparatory cut up to the outer contour (trimming contour). The default value is the length of the approach flag:

Approach length

Overshoot length Fig. 57574

Overshoot length on the outer contour (Easy strategy) Corner cooling on the outer contour Currently set kerf width from the laser technology table Kerf width for next preparation

The overshoot length is the additional length of the separation cut after the outer contour (trimming contour). Default value is 1 mm. If oxygen is used as the gas type during processing, this function can be activated for corner treatment for TwinLine processing. TruTops only displays the kerf width in this mask. It cannot be modified here. ("Modify kerf width", (see chapter "Setting basic data")). This value matches the kerf width for the next preparation, it deviates from the currently set kerf width.

22

TwinLine strategies

2010-03-19

U98DE

Opening TwinLine-capable sheets (common cut) and preparing TwinLine

Conditions TwinLine-capable sheets or TwinLine-capable mini nests were created during nesting. The web widths in the X and Y directions match the kerf width from the active technology table. Ideally, the technology table that was selected in the nest for the TwinLine preparation is active. If necessary modify the kerf width in the technology table (see chapter "Setting basic data")), or enter the new value in "Kerf width for next preparation". Note The distance between the parts must correspond to the distance entered in "Kerf width for next preparation". 1. Open >File > and select >Prepare TwinLine >Safety strategy or >Easy strategy. The file browser opens. 2. Select desired file type. 3. Mark the desired file. 4. Select OK. 5. If a technology table is not active: select the technology table and the rule . The "Parameters for Common Slitting Cuts" mask is displayed. The parameters entered are the default values recommended by TRUMPF from the active rules. They can be modified temporarily here. Note The modifications are lost as soon as a new rule is selected. The parameters can only be permanently modified in the rules (see chapter "Setting basic data"). 6. Modify parameters if necessary. 7. Start TwinLine preparation: Select OK. The sheet is prepared for common cuts. 8. Select >Technology >Processing >Generate >Start.

U98DE

2010-03-19

TwinLine strategies

23

17.
NEW

Simulation

Now during simulation the functions Continue and Pause are, depending on the situation, on the same button.

17.1 Simulation Simulating sheet machining

The sheet machining can be simulated with a different speed. Other functions such as One step forward, One step back, Continue/Pause or Stop also enable exact processing monitoring. Select >Optimize >Simulation >Start. or Select >NC program >Simulation >Start.

18.
NEW

Table alignment

Tables cannot be exported if a machine with a BOSCH control system has been selected.

24

Simulation

2010-03-19

U98DE

19.
NEW

Machine information

The following machines have been incorporated in the list of machined supported by TruTops Laser: TruLaser 1030. TruLaser 3530. TruLaser Cell 7020 TruLaser Cell 7040

19.1 Machines supported by TruTops laser

Machines TruLaser 1030 TruLaser 2025 / 2030 TC L 2510 TruLaser 2525 TC L 2530 plus TruLaser 3030 classic TC L 3020 TruLaser 3030 TC L 3030 TruLaser 3530 TC L 3040 TruLaser 5030 TC L 3050 TruLaser 3040 TC L 4030 TruLaser 5040 TC L 4050 TruLaser 3060 TC L 6030 TruLaser 5060 TC L 6050 TruLaser 7025 (two cutting heads) TC HSL 2502 C TruLaser 7040 (two cutting heads) TC HSL 4002 C TruLaser Cell 7020 TruLaser Cell 7040 TC L2503 TC L2503 E TC L 2520 TC L 2530 TC L3003 / TC L3003 E TC L3030 Control system (machine software) B&R SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D Bosch Bosch SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D Bosch Bosch Components Pallet changer (optional) Pallet changer, LiftMaster Pallet changer, LiftMaster Pallet changer, LiftMaster, LiftMaster sort, SortMaster (optional) Pallet changer, LiftMaster Pallet changer, LiftMaster, LiftMaster sort, SortMaster (optional) Pallet changer Pallet changer, LiftMaster sort, SortMaster (optional) Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer (optional) Pallet changer Pallet changer

U98DE

2010-03-19

Machine information

25

Machines TC L4003 / TC L4003 E TC L 4030 TC L 5005 TC L 6030 TC LY 2500 TLC 105 TLC 1005 TLC 6005 TLC CUT5 TC HSL 2502 (two cutting heads) TC WS 2500 TC WS 2502 (two cutting heads) TC WS 4000 TC WS 4020 (two cutting heads)

Control system (machine software) Bosch Bosch TASC 500 Bosch Bosch TASC 500 SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D SINUMERIK 840 D Bosch Bosch Bosch Bosch

Components Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Pallet changer Tab. 6

26

Machine information

2010-03-19

U98DE

Software Manual

NcLink, TubeLink
Version 4.0

Software Manual

NcLink, TubeLink
Version 4.0

Edition: 02/2009

Ordering information

Please specify the title of the document, the language desired, and the date of the edition. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Technische Dokumentation JohannMausStrae 2 D71254 Ditzingen Phone: +49 (0) 71 56/3 030 Fax: +49 (0) 71 56/3 033 05 40 Internet: http://www.trumpf.com E-mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf.com

This document was compiled by the Technical Documentation department of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG. All rights, especially the right to reproduce, distribute or translate this documentation, are reserved to TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG, even in case of notifications of protected privileges. No part of this documentation may be reproduced or processed, duplicated or distributed by means of electronic systems in any form whatsoever without the prior written consent of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG. Subject to technical alterations. Errors excepted. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG assumes no liability for any errors in this documentation. No liability is accepted for direct or indirect damage or injury resulting from the delivery or use of this documentation to the extent permitted by law.

Table of Contents
1. 1.1 1.2 Creating production package with NcLink......................7 Machines that support production packages from NcLink ..................................................................................7 Opening and closing NcLink ................................................8 Opening NcLink independently of TruTops ....................8 Opening NcLink from TruTops .......................................9 Closing NcLink................................................................9 Production plan type ..........................................................10 Determining production plan type for machines with open control ..........................................................10 Determining production plan type for machines without open control .....................................................11 Entering production plan type in TruTops ....................11 Selecting production plan type in NcLink .....................12 Parameters to be output in the production package..........13 Extending or deleting production package parameters....................................................................13 Changing the values of the production package parameters permanently...............................................15 Description of production package parameters............16 Production package overview............................................19 Configuring the production package overview .............19 Show production package overview .............................21 Adding the company logo to the production package overview .........................................................22 Production package ...........................................................23 Open existing production package ...............................23 Changing a production package or creating a new one with NcLink.....................................................23 Nesting tubes with TubeLink..........................................26 Machines that support production packages from TubeLink ............................................................................26 Opening and closing TubeLink ..........................................26 Opening TubeLink ........................................................26 Closing TubeLink..........................................................26 Defining nesting options ....................................................27 Nesting tubes (creating a production package) .................27 Show production package overview ..................................29

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

2. 2.1 2.2

2.3 2.4 2.5

S558EN.DOC

3.

Sending the production package to the machine .................................................................30

4.

Opening the TruTops file-browser.................................30

S558EN.DOC

1.

Creating production package with NcLink

With NcLink, several NC programs can be combined in any order and any number of repetitions to a production package and sent to the machine's transfer directory. Machines with automation Data that are important for automation (e.g. storage item designation) are added to the production package. The production package also makes it possible to make information (e.g. customer or job data) available to a control system. Production package and control system parameters (stock ID number, end of block, etc.) can be adjusted and the production package saved via the NcLink user interface.

1.1

Machines that support production packages from NcLink

The production package from NcLink is supported by the following machines with either open control, TruTops Fab/cell controller connection: TruPunch 2020 (2500)/TC 2020 R. TC 500 with cell controller V5.2. TC 600 L software version V6.20 or higher, or (for connection to storage) V6.51 or higher. TruPunch 1000/TC 1000 R. TruPunch 3000/TC 3000 R. TruPunch 5000/TC 5000 R. TruMatic 3000/TC 3000 L. TruMatic 6000/TC 6000 L. TruMatic 7000. TruLaser Series 2000. TruLaser 5030/TC L 3050, TruLaser 5040/TC L 4050, TruLaser 5060/TC L 6050. TruLaser 3530/TC L 3040. TruLaser 3030/TC L 3030, TruLaser 3040/TC L 4030 and TruLaser 3060/TC L 6030 with SINUMERIK 840D, from Software update V4.75. TruLaser Tube 5000/TUBEMATIC with part removal station PRS 2000/3000. TruLaser Tube 5000/TUBEMATIC with part removal station PRS 3001/6001. Other machines with connection to TruTops Fab/ToPs 1000

S558EN.DOC

0BCreating production package with NcLink

1.2

Opening and closing NcLink

Opening NcLink independently of TruTops

1. Select Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >NcLink. NcLink opens a new (still empty) production package:

New (still empty) production package

Fig. 42003EN

0BCreating production package with NcLink

S558EN.DOC

Opening NcLink from TruTops

Select NC program >Production package >Start interactively. NcLink is started with the production package from the current nesting job or the current program list.

New production package with three NC programs New (still empty) production package

Fig. 42473EN

Closing NcLink
Select File >Exit.

S558EN.DOC

0BCreating production package with NcLink

1.3

Production plan type

Determining production plan type for machines with open control

There are different types of production plan pre-configured in NcLink depending on the machine and automation. For NcLink, TruTops Laser and TruTops Punch, you must determine the production plan type at the machine and enter it in Data Management. Notes No production plan type needs to be determined on the TruPunch 1000, since it generally uses the production plan type 1. In TruTops Tube, the production plan type is automatically controlled by the "NcLinkProduktionsPlanTyp" variable in the public machine rules (see TruTops Tube software manual, "Data module" or "Setting basic data" chapter). After TruTops Laser and TruTops Punch have been installed, there is a program with which the correct production plan type can be easily determined at the machine. Prerequisite TruTops has been installed successfully. The installation DVD is in the DVD drive. A formatted floppy disk (without write protection!) is in the floppy-disk drive.

Creating a floppy-disk

1. Either Open the folder 'LW:\Support_Tools\production_plan_type\ Win16Bit'. (LW = Letter of the DVD drive.) 2. Press <CTRL> + <A>. All files in this folder are selected. 3. Press <CTRL> + <C>. All the files in this folder are copied. 4. Go to the floppy-disk directory. 5. Press <CTRL> + <V>. The copied files are pasted into the floppy-disk directory.

10

0BCreating production package with NcLink

S558EN.DOC

Determining type of production plan at the machine

1. Insert the floppy disk with the inserted files into the drive on the machine's control panel. 2. On the user interface (machines without touchscreen): Select Activity >Maintenance/Initial startup >Load software >Software Update TruTops (1, 5, 3, F8, F2). 3. The production plan type will be displayed. 4. Note the production plan type. 5. Remove the floppy disk.

Determining production plan type for machines without open control

Machines with cell-controller connection without open control: Without pallet output: production plan type 17. With pallet output: production plan type 1. With end of block: production plan type 2. With end of block without automated supply: production plan type 18. Machines with TruTops Fab connection, without open control: No modification necessary.

Entering production plan type in TruTops

Selecting production plan type in TruTops Punch 1. Open Data Management (select Tools >Modify data ...). 2. Under "What do you want to adjust?" Select "Production package output". 3. Select Continue. 4. Under "Production plan type", select the determined type (For a TruPunch 1000, generally select production plan type 1.). 5. To book the single parts of a production package generated by means of a nesting job in TC-CELL with order number, select "Job information output". 6. Select Exit.

S558EN.DOC

0BCreating production package with NcLink

11

Setting production plan type in TruTops Laser

1. Open Data Management (select Tools > Modify data ...). 2. Set production plan type in the machine rule variable "NcLinkProduktionsPlanTyp" (For public machine rules, see TruTops Laser software manual, chapter "Setting basic data".). 3. To book the single parts of a production package generated by means of a nesting job in TC-CELL with job number, change the value of the NcLinkLiteModus variable in the public machine rules from 1 to 0.

Selecting production plan type in NcLink

(See Section 1.4, p. 13 ff.)

12

0BCreating production package with NcLink

S558EN.DOC

1.4

Parameters to be output in the production package

NcLink's production package must contain certain parameters depending on the production plan type, the machine and its configuration (for a description of the parameters see Table 1, p. 16 f.). Default parameters such as storage item designation, stock group types and possibly end of block are pre-defined in NcLink (depending on production plan type) and are automatically output. Optional parameters can be extended or deleted.

Extending or deleting production package parameters

1. Open NcLink. 2. Select Presettings >Attributes. The "Attributes" mask is displayed.

"Attributes" in production plan type 17

Fig. 51810EN

S558EN.DOC

0BCreating production package with NcLink

13

Selecting production plan type

If NcLink has been opened from TruTops, it reads the production plan type from the Data Management of TruTops. (For more on determining and entering production plan type see section 1.3, p. 10 f.) If NcLink was opened independently of TruTops, the production type last used is displayed. 17 is displayed as the default value. 3. Open "Production plan type" with >. 4. Select the number of the production plan type used on the control system. Note On the TruPunch 1000, generally select production plan type 1.

Selecting optional parameters

5. Select additional parameters that are to be output in the production package (for a description of parameters see Table 1, p. 16 f.). The entered parameters contain preset values from the appropriate standard machine configurations for the present production plan type. They can be changed here manually. 6. In order to generate the production job designation from the program name: Select "Prod.job des. automatic" (For single part booking, "Prod.job des. automatic" must be selected. This will ensure a unique designation for the production jobs.). or In order to specify in the layout file how a production job should be designated: Select "Prod.job des. arbitrary" (For the layout file, see the following section.). 7. Select Apply.

Specify production job designation?

14

0BCreating production package with NcLink

S558EN.DOC

Changing the values of the production package parameters permanently

The values of a set parameter can differ from the machine's configuration in individual cases. They can be changed as follows: Note This section is not required when working with TruTops FMC/FMC controller. Incorrect changes to NcLink files could interfere with the execution of NcLink! Check the entries and modifications. Caution Consult TRUMPF Software Support if in doubt. 1. Open NcLink. 2. Select Presettings >Attributes. 3. Select desired production plan type. 4. Select Apply. A Layout[production plan type].lay file (e.g., 'Layout17.lay') is created. 5. Quit NcLink. 6. Open Windows Explorer. 7. Go to the directory '\TRUMPF.NET\Applications\NcLink\Layout'. 8. Open Layout[production plan type].lay (e.g., 'Layout17.lay') with an editor. 9. Change the values of the parameters in question (default value = 2; for parameter numbers see Table 1, p. 18). 10. Save the file. When changing the file, did you make errors that you can no longer understand or correct? Delete the Layout[production plan type].lay file. Repeat steps 1 to 4.

S558EN.DOC

0BCreating production package with NcLink

15

Description of production package parameters

Note This section is not required when working with TruTops FMC/FMC controller.
Short description Actual number Storage item des. No. 60 80 Parameter ISTANZAHL LAGERGUT_ID Description Default is 0 Specification of the unprocessed sheet with which the production job is to be produced (LagergutID from storage inventory management). Only with storage coupling via TRUMPF production control technology software. Stock group type which is to be prepared for the disposal side of the machine for this production job, e.g. Spol, SPml, ... only with storage coupling via TRUMPF production control technology software. Production plan type Pallet Nos.: specification of the supply pallet. Production plan type End of block: Valid for all machine types! 0 = no signal after production job. 1 = digital signal after production job. SupplyPall2 120 VERSORGE_PALLETE2 Production plan type End of block: Production package with autom. material supply and autom. stock group type disposal within a nesting (job name). 0 = disposal unit will not be replaced after execution of the production job. The partially filled unit remains at the machine. It will only be replaced if it is full or if a new job is started. 1 = disposal unit will be replaced after execution of the production job with a new one of the same Lift stock group type. RemovalPall1 RemovalPall2 130 140 ENTSORGE_PALETTE1 ENTSORGE_PALETTE2 Specification of the unloading pallet Exchange pallet for TC 500 with cell controller.

InventoryLift

90

BESTAND_GR_TYP_LIFT

SupplyPall1

110

VERSORGE_PALETTE1

16

0BCreating production package with NcLink

S558EN.DOC

Short description (Depends on production plan type) Endofblock or startofblock

No. 150

Parameter BLOCKENDE, BLOCKSTART

Description End of block: 0 = After the production job has been processed, the disposal unit is only replaced if it is full or a new production package is starting. 1 = After the production job has been processed, the disposal unit is always replaced.

Start of block: 0 = Before the production job has been processed, the disposal unit is only replaced if it is full or a new production package is starting. 1 = Before the production job is processed, the disposal unit is always replaced. SuppLAM 170 LAMGRUPPE_VERSORGUNG Valid only for LiftMaster installations. This parameter indicates whether loading is to be done from the supply position station (Value = 1) or from a loading platform (Value = 3). Valid only for LiftMaster installations. This parameter indicates whether unloading is to be done from the disposal position station (Value = 1) or on a disposal platform (Value = 2). Valid only for LiftMaster installations with hook operation and connection to storage. The number indicates to where the first rake machine pallet is to be unloaded when there is a changeover to hook operation (Default = 1; storage). Valid only for LiftMaster installations with hook operation and connection to storage. The figure is the number of the first system pallet for rake operation (SPr) upon which the machine pallet (MPR) is placed. Valid only for LiftMaster installations with hook operation and connection to storage. The number indicates to where the second rake machine pallet is to be unloaded when there is a changeover to hook operation (Default = 1; storage). Valid only for LiftMaster installations with hook operation and connection to storage. The figure is the number of the second system pallet for rake operation (SPr) upon which the machine pallet (MPR) is placed. Valid only for LiftMaster installations: 1 = Suction cup/rake operation. 2 = Rake operation without separation 5 = Rake operation with separation RemLAM Maxi 300 LAMGRUPPENTMAXI For unloading maxi-parts with the LiftMaster sort use from either the storage station or removal platform 1/2: 1 = Unload to storage station. (In this case production package parameters "EntsorgePal1" or "BestandLift" must also be activated.) 2 = Removal platform 1. 7 = Removal platform 2.

RemLAM

180

LAMGRUPPE_ENTSORGUNG

LAMMPR1

190

LAMGRUPPE_MPR1

MPR1

200

MPR1

LAMMPR2

210

LAMGRUPPE_MPR2

MPR2

220

MPR2

Loadtype

230

BELADEART

S558EN.DOC

0BCreating production package with NcLink

17

Short description Clean pal.

No. 310

Parameter PALETTE_PUTZEN

Description After the sheet skeleton has been removed with the rake, clean pallet after each sheet of this production job: 1 = Activate 0 = Deactivate

Clean suction cup

320

SAUGER_PUTZEN (optional)

Clean suction cup before each sorting process within one production job: 1 = Activate 0 = Deactivate

Sort small parts

330

KLEINTEILE SORTIEREN

Activate sort master: 0 = No sorting. 1 = Sorting.

Description of the parameters that can be output in the production package

Table 1

18

0BCreating production package with NcLink

S558EN.DOC

1.5

Production package overview

The production package overview shows the NC programs and single parts that have been used in the production package.

Configuring the production package overview

By default NcLink uses the layout template 'ReportNcLinkV9.xsl' for the layout of the production package overview. If you want to use your own layout template (stylesheet), it can be programmed at TRUMPF. Opening the configuration mask Want to use your own layout template? Select Presettings >Production project overview. 1. If you want to use your own layout template (stylesheet), select "Template", "User-defined". Note User-defined stylesheets are not adapted during a NcLink update. 2. Select . 3. Select the stylesheet you want. 4. Select Open. Suppress error messages? If a part has not been assigned a part ID, or if a part ID is repeated, NcLink outputs error messages 1. If neither TC-CELL nor TruTops Fab are available, and the sheet graphic is taken from the setup plan, select "Suppress errors 7412 and 7413". Output job data? In order to display the job data assigned in the TruTops nesting job or in NcLink in the production package overview: select "Customer/order information output". Notes TruTops Laser: The value of the "NcLinkLiteModus" variable in the public machine rules must be 0 (see TruTops Laser software manual, chapter "Setting basic data"). TruTops Punch: When entering the production plan type, you must select "Order information output" (see section 1.3, p. 10 f.).

Only TruTops Laser and TruTops Punch. Not relevant to TruTops Tube.

S558EN.DOC

0BCreating production package with NcLink

19

Configuring overview header

In the case of TruTops Laser programs, the default overview header in NcLink indicates whether the SortMaster is being used for sorting or whether the sheet position is being measured with Cateye. 1. In "Overview header", deactivate "Sorting" and/or "Cateye" as appropriate. 2. If you want to use your own layout template (stylesheet) in the overhead header: Select "Overview header", "User-defined" Select . Select the stylesheet you want. Select Open. The layout of the rest of the production package overview remains the same and will be updated during an update (if "Standard" is set). If a user-defined stylesheet is being used for the overview header, it will not be adapted if NcLink is updated.

Configuring single part information

1. If you want to show the section "Single part information", select "Single part information", "Activate". 2. Depending on the result you want (see table below), select "Adopt graphics setup plan" and/or "Generate graphics":
"Adopt graphics setup plan" X "Generate graphics" X Result

No graphics are output in the production package overview. The graphics from the setup plan are adopted, if they exist ('*.BMP' format). NcLink generates graphics in '*.SVG' format and outputs them in the production package overview. The graphics from the setup plan are adopted, if they exist ('*.BMP' format). If there are no graphics, NcLink generates them from the Geo file ('*.SVG format'). Table 2

Configuring graphics output

Configuring production jobs

1. If you want to display the "Production jobs" section, select "Production jobs", "Activate". 2. Depending on the result you want, select "Adopt graphics setup plan" and/or "Generate graphics".

20

0BCreating production package with NcLink

S558EN.DOC

Want to output parts, NC programs, technology?

1. To output a list of the parts in the section "Production jobs", select "Parts" "Activate". 2. If you want to output the minimum and maximum quantities from the nested order in addition to the actual quantities, select "Number from nesting". 3. To output the sections "NC programs", "Technology tables" and/or "Tools", select the corresponding checkbox.

Show production package overview

Select File >Overview. NcLink creates the production package overview. (TruTops Punch) Is the maximum number of tools for the machine output incorrectly in the production package overview? Change the number of maximum tools in the TruTops Punch Data Management (via Tools >Modify data ... >Machines >Data, Tooling system data, Data 1). (TruTops Punch) Is the maximum number of tools for the machine not output at all in the production package overview? Check that there is a connection to the TruTops database. Start Windows Explorer. Open the directory 'TRUMPF.NET\Applications\NcLink'. Open 'NcLink.ini' with an editor. Change the connection to the TruTops database in NcLink.ini' as follows: Incorrect changes to NcLink files could interfere with the execution of NC-Link! Check the entries and modifications. Caution Consult TRUMPF Software Support if in doubt.

WERKZEUG_DSN = T300_V45_V500

S558EN.DOC

0BCreating production package with NcLink

21

Adding the company logo to the production package overview

Prerequisites The size of the company logo should be 50x50 pixels (ideal size). Recommended file formats: '.gif', '.bmp', '.png', '.jpg'. 1. Place company logo in an arbitrary folder on the computer or import it in PDM. 2. Open Explorer. 3. Switch to the folder '...\TRUMPF.NET\Applications\NcLink'. 4. Open 'NcLink.ini' (e.g. by double-clicking on it). If necessary, select the program (editor) with which the file should be opened (e.g. Notepad). 5. In the following line, enter the path and filename of your own logo (replace highlighted places): XML LOGO = $(TOPSLW)\Trumpf.NET\Templates\HTML \System logo ncLink.gif 6. Save changes.

22

0BCreating production package with NcLink

S558EN.DOC

1.6

Production package

Open existing production package

1. Open NcLink. 2. Select File >Open or . The "Open production package" mask is displayed. 3. Mark desired production package ('*.LST' or '*.TPP'). 4. Select Open.

Changing a production package or creating a new one with NcLink

Prerequisites All required NC programs are generated. TruTops Laser and TruTops Punch: The production plan type was determined and entered in Data Management. The machine has a tabular display. Opening a production package or creating a new one 1. Open NcLink. 2. To create a new production package, select: File >New production package. or Open existing production package. Importing nesting jobs from TruTops Laser/ TruTops Punch? 1. If you want to group several nesting jobs from TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch into one production package: select Import >Order from Depending on the TruTops version that the nesting job is to be imported from, either the file browser from TruTops or the "Nesting jobs: TruToPs..." mask is displayed. Are the specified products from which nesting orders can be imported not up-to-date? Re-install NcLink. The settings are then automatically reset.

S558EN.DOC

0BCreating production package with NcLink

23

Are the specified products from which nesting orders can be imported still not up-to-date after reinstalling NcLink? Start Windows Explorer. Open the directory 'TRUMPF.NET\Applications\NcLink'. Open 'NcLink.ini' with an editor. Every entry in the [DATENBANK] block of the 'NcLink.ini' corresponds to an entry in the >Import menu of NcLink. Delete or re-insert the following line pairs: Incorrect changes to NcLink files could interfere with the execution of NcLink! Check the entries and modifications. Caution Consult TRUMPF Software Support if in doubt.

AUFTRAG_APPX= (insert name of the TruTops product). AUFTRAG_DSN1= (insert name of the associated database). AUFTRAG_APP1=ToPs300 AUFTRAG_DSN1=T300_V4.00

Example

2. If necessary, change directory in the file browser of TruTops. 3. Select the desired nesting order. 4. Select OK. The production package contains the selected nesting order. Loading NC programs into production package 1. Select Edit >Add or click . The "Open NC program" mask will be displayed. 2. Select one or more NC programs (*.LST) to be loaded into the production plan (for several NC programs hold down <CTRL> or <Shift>). 3. Select Open. The production package contains the selected NC programs. Want to delete an NC program from the production package? Want to change the sequence of NC programs? 1. Select the NC program that you want to delete. 2. Select Edit >Delete or click .

The machine executes the NC programs in the sequence in which they are entered in the production package. 1. To change the sequence, select the NC program that you want to resort. 2. Then move it to the desired position by selecting Edit >Move / . up/Edit >Move down or by clicking

24

0BCreating production package with NcLink

S558EN.DOC

Changing the production package parameters

To change the production status, the desired number or other production package parameters, double-click in the relevant input field and enter the desired value. Production status 0 = free; the production job will be run immediately at the machine. Production status 9 = blocked; the production job must first be released at the machine. If you want to save the production package either for the first time or under a new file name, select File >Save as or click (Create production package). Enter file name and select OK. or If the production package has already been saved and you want to save it under the same name, select File >Save.

Saving the production package

Displaying single part information

Select Edit >Single part info or click

The single parts of the selected production job are shown and possibly their link to the job. The job data (Order assignment/Customer) must be activated so that you can make changes here: TruTops Laser: The value of the "NcLinkLiteModus" variable in the public machine rules must be 0 (see TruTops Laser software manual, chapter "Setting basic data"). TruTops Punch: When the production plan type is entered, "Job information output" must be selected. 1. Select File >Order assignment. The "Order assignment" mask is displayed. It shows all the parts of the production package and the associated job data. 2. Select Modify>>. 3. In the left list field, select the part whose order assignment you want to change. All of the part's serial numbers are highlighted in the right list field. 4. You may only have to select individual serial numbers ("SerNo") (to select several numbers hold down <CTRL> or <Shift>). 5. Change "Job/Customer" and/or "Operation" (= work cycle number). The modified order assignment is immediately displayed at the top. 6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 until you have made all the changes you want. 7. Select OK.

Order assignment of parts from TruTops Laser/ Modifying TruTops Punch

S558EN.DOC

0BCreating production package with NcLink

25

2.

Nesting tubes with TubeLink

"TubeLink" makes it possible for a complete nested tube development for a TruLaser Tube 5000 to be produced from one or more NC programs and started in the production package on the TruLaser Tube 5000.

2.1

Machines that support production packages from TubeLink

The production package from TubeLink is supported by the following machines: TruLaser Tube 5000 with part removal station PRS 2000/3000. TruLaser Tube 5000 with part removal station PRS 3001/6001.

2.2

Opening and closing TubeLink

Opening TubeLink
Select Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >TubeLink. A new (still empty) production package is opened.

Closing TubeLink
Select File >Exit.

26

1BNesting tubes with TubeLink

S558EN.DOC

2.3

Defining nesting options

1. Select Options >Nesting options. 2. Enter data: "Raw material length": Length of the rods to be processed. "Minimum residual length": Length of the tube piece in the chuck of the machine that cannot be processed. "Offset surcharge": The larger the "offset", the more the tubes interpenetrate each other. The slider for the "offset" is for example at 122 (for slider see Fig. 41305, p. 28). An "offset surcharge" of 5 for example sets the "offset" to 127 and thus reduces the safety distance between the tubes. 3. Choose OK.

2.4

Nesting tubes (creating a production package)

Prerequisite All required NC programs are generated. Tubes that are to be nested must have the same cross-section. Opening a production package or creating a new one 1. Open TubeLink. 2. To create a new production package, select : File >New production package. or To open an existing production package, select File >Open or click . Loading NC programs into the production package 1. Select Edit >Add or . The "Open NC program" mask will be displayed. 2. Select one or more NC programs (*.LST) to be loaded into the production plan (for several NC programs hold down <CTRL> or <Shift>). 3. Choose OK. The production package contains the selected NC programs.

S558EN.DOC

1BNesting tubes with TubeLink

27

1 2

1 2

Number of rods that are allocated First and second tube nested in each other.

First tube nested in itself (if quantity >1).

Example of nested rectangular tubes

Fig. 41305EN

The top graphic (2) shows the nesting between the selected part and the part that was processed previously. The bottom graphic (3) shows the nesting between identical individual parts of the selected part. Want to delete an NC program from the production package? Want to change the sequence of NC programs? 1. Select the NC program that you want to delete. 2. Select Edit >Delete or click .

The machine executes the NC programs in the sequence in which they are entered in the production package. 1. To change the sequence, select the NC program that you want to re-sort. 2. Then move it to the desired position by selecting Edit >Move / . up/Edit >Move down or by clicking

Optimizing nesting result

Values are suggested that produce a nesting result with minimum waste. Change "Angle" and "Offset" if necessary (enter value or use slider): "Angle": the angle of rotation by which the two tubes are rotated relative to each other for nesting. "Offset": The larger the offset, the more the tubes interpenetrate each other. At an "offset" of 0 the tubes are not interpenetrated.

28

1BNesting tubes with TubeLink

S558EN.DOC

Entering the desired number

Note TubeLink does not evaluate the production status. 1. Double-click in the "Desired number" input field. 2. Enter the desired quantity.

Saving the production package

If you want to save the production package either for the first time or under a new file name, select File >Save as or click (Create production package). Enter file name and select OK. or If the production package has already been saved and you want to save it under the same name, select File >Save.

2.5

Show production package overview

Select File >Overview. The production package overview is created.

S558EN.DOC

1BNesting tubes with TubeLink

29

3.

Sending the production package to the machine

Production packages can be sent directly from NcLink to the transfer directory of the machine (regardless of whether TruTops was installed in the file system or the PDM operation). Prerequisite The production package that you want to send to the machine is open (for more on opening a production package see p. 23, for more on opening a nesting see section 2.4, p. 27). 1. Select File >Transfer. The "Select transfer path" mask is opened. 2. Select the transfer path. The directory remains valid for future sessions. 3. Choose OK.

4.

Opening the TruTops file-browser

For a description of TruTops's file browser see the TruTops Laser, TruTops Punch, TruTops Tube, or TruTops Bend software manual, "Basics" chapter or "TruTops CAD software manual". 1. Open NcLink or TubeLink. 2. Select File >File browser.

30

2BSending the production package to the machine

S558EN.DOC

Software manual

TruTops Convert
Version 6.2

Software manual

TruTops Convert
Version 6.2

Edition: 03/2008

Ordering information

Please specify the title of the document, the desired language required and the date of issue. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Technische Dokumentation Johann-Maus-Strae 2 D-71254 Ditzingen Phone: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-0 Fax: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-30 54 0 Internet: http//www.trumpf.com E-Mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf.com

This document was compiled by the Technische Dokumentation of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co KG. All rights of this documentation, especially the right of reproduction and distribution as well as that of translation, are reserved by TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG, even in the case of notifications of protected privilege. No part of this documentation may be reproduced, processed, duplicated or distributed by means of electronic systems in any form without the prior written permission of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG. Subject to technical alterations. Errors expected. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG assumes no liability for any errors in this documentation. No liability is accepted for direct or indirect damage or injury resulting from the delivery or use of this documentation in so far as this is legally permissible.

Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 5. 5.1 5.2 6. TruTops Convert................................................................6 Showing the software version..........................................6 Showing TruTops Convert on-line help ..........................6 Converting manually ............................................................7 Defining the conversion settings in the Ini file .....................7 Defining the conversion settings in TruTops Convert................................................................10 Starting conversion ............................................................15 Time-controlled conversion ...........................................16 Preparing conversion.........................................................16 Starting automatic conversion ...........................................18 Overview of the function and format of the options ..............................................................................20

S392EN.DOC

1.

TruTops Convert

With the TruToPs Convert program, you can convert CAD files directly. CAD drawings do not need to be individually loaded and saved in the desired format. Application Advantage Principle Automatic data conversion (e.g. overnight). This saves time, especially if several files have to be converted. It provides a perfect link to CAD systems.

tc_conv.exe

Fig. 53332

2.

Showing the software version

Start >Programs

1. Start TruToPs Convert (select >TRUMPF.NET >TruToPs Convert).

2. With the left mouse button, click on the TRUMPF logo, top left in the title bar. 3. Select >Show versions.... 4. Close the display of the software version with OK.

3.

Showing TruTops Convert on-line help

Start >Programs

1. Start TruToPs Convert (select >TRUMPF.NET >TruToPs Convert).

2. Select Help. Acrobat Reader will start. The on-line help for TruToPs Convert will be displayed.

0BTruTops Convert

S392EN.DOC

4. 4.1

Converting manually Defining the conversion settings in the Ini file

For manual conversions, you have to make the following settings in the Ini file for TruToPs Convert. This concerns conversion settings which are rarely or never changed: Enable/disable contour preparation. (As standard: Contour preparation is enabled.) Activate/deactivate the conversion of narrow contours into lines. When enabled, the geometry of the contours and the width have to be defined. (The standard setting is that rectangular and narrow oblong contours with a width of 0.35 mm are converted into lines.) Specify part of the file name which is to be used as Part ID. (The complete file names without file extension are used as standard.)

All of the conversion settings in the Ini file apply to all of the files in each conversion batch. If different settings are needed for different files, then the files must be converted separately from one another. Opening the Ini file 1. Start TruToPs Convert (select >TRUMPF.NET >TruToPs Convert). Start >Programs

2. With the left mouse button, click on the TRUMPF logo, top left in the title bar. 3. Select >Show versions.... 4. Click on the TRUMPF logo in the mask which opens. The Ini file will be opened. Deactivate contour preparation? When the file is saved, the contours are automatically prepared to avoid inaccuracies. For example, any open contours are closed and the zero point of the drawing is shifted to the left lower corner of the rectangle encompassing the drawing. Contour preparation is enabled as standard and should remain enabled. 5. To disable contour preparation (as an exception e.g. to retain the zero points of the drawings), the value of the ContourPreparationOnOff Ini entry should be set to 0. Modify the preselections for narrow contours? Rectangles or oblong holes that are narrower than the laser kerf can lead to problems with the laser machining. One way around this is to replace the closed contours with individual lines which are then cut as open contours.

S392EN.DOC

3BConverting manually

6. To be able to modify the preselections for narrow contours, if necessary, the value of the ContourPreperationThin StdContoursMode Ini value must be modified: 0= 1= 2= 3= Do not convert narrow contours into lines. Only convert narrow, rectangular contours into lines. Only convert narrow, oblong contours into lines. Convert all rectangular and narrow, oblong contours into lines.

7. After ContourPreparationThinStdContoursWidth= enter the width of the contours which should be replaced by single lines (see Fig. 46138, p. 8). Note Enter in [mm] regardless of the measuring system being used.

1
1 Width of the contours to be converted into lines Converting narrow contours into lines Right: Converted contour new width: Kerf width Fig. 46138

Defining Part ID

8. To define which part of a file name (without file extension) should be used as the Part ID: Modify the regular expression in the Ini entry SetDrawingIDToFileNameRegExpr (Standard entry: .*, i.e. the entire file name without file extension is used as the Part ID). Regular expressions form a type of character filter. Standard syntax descriptions for regular expressions are listed in the following table. The table is followed by an example.

3BConverting manually

S392EN.DOC

RE . * + ? [ ]

Explanation Accepts any character Accepts preceding character 0 to n times. Accepts preceding character 1 to n times. Accepts preceding character 0 to 1 times. Accepts precisely one character of the characters in brackets. "-" defines ranges ("from" "to").

Example .*

Result Accepts the complete file name (without file extension; default setting).

[0-9] [a-z] [ABC] [0-9a-z_-]

Accepts all digits from 0 to 9. Accepts all lower case letters from a to z. Accepts an A, B or C. Accepts all digits, lower case letters, underscores and hyphens. Accepts everything except A, B and C.

[^]

Accepts all characters, except those in brackets. "-" defines ranges ("from" "to"). Accepts the exact characters in brackets (in the sequence specified). Derestricts the special meaning of the next character.

[^ABC]

() \ i ^ $

(=>) (=>)+ \?

Accepts => Accepts any number =>,e.g. =>=>=> Accepts an ? Accepts KFZ or PKW Accepts lines beginning with Anna. Accepts lines ending with Peter. Tab. 1

Accepts either the character string to the left of (KFZ|PKW) the symbol or the character string to the right Accepts characters at the beginning of a line. Accepts characters at the end of a line. ^Anna Peter$

Standard syntax descriptions regular expressions

Example

The file names of DXF files comprise of a customer name, followed by a 4 digit digit sequence and the file version (e.g. Anna_4711_V1.DXF). A number of DXF files will automatically be converted and a defined part of the file name will be set as the Part ID of the respective '.GEO'.

Part of the file name which is to be used as Part ID. Customer name (At the beginning of the file name) 4 digit digit sequence Number of the file version (end of the file name - without file extension)

In the example Anna_4711_V1.DXF Anna_4711_V1.DXF Anna_4711_V1.DXF

Regular expression required ^[a-zA-Z]+ [0-9][0-9][0-9][0-9] [0-9]+$

Result (Part ID) Anna 4711 1 Tab. 2

Closing the Ini file

9. Save changes. 10. Close the small "TruTops Convert" mask with OK.

Regular expression. Regular expressions find defined character strings. They form a type of character filter.

S392EN.DOC

3BConverting manually

4.2

Defining the conversion settings in TruTops Convert

All of the conversion settings in TruToPs Convert apply to all files in each batch of conversions. If different settings are needed for different files, then the files must be converted separately from one another. Starting TruTops Convert 1. Select Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >TruTops Convert. The "TruTops Convert" mask is displayed. In this mask, you can choose the conversion settings. The selected conversion setting will be shown as switches with values in the command line (pos 1, Fig. 53331, p. 10). You can copy the switches and values and use them for automatic conversion (see section 5, p. 16 ff.).

1
1 Command line Fig. 53331en

"TruTops Convert"

Selecting the input and output formats

2. If the names of the files to be converted do not have any extensions: Under "Input format" select the format of the files to be converted. Note Only one input format may be selected each time the conversion program runs. Files in the wrong format will not be converted.

10

3BConverting manually

S392EN.DOC

3. Under "Output format" select the format to be converted into. Selecting the files for conversion Note All of the files to be converted together, running the program once, must have the same input format. If the files in the "Selected Files" field have different formats, then the TruToPs Convert takes the format of the top file as the input format. Files in the wrong format will not be converted. 4. Either Use Window Explorer drag and drop function to copy an unlimited number of files directly into the "Selected files" field. Tip Windows Explorer can search for files in several directories or on complete drives. The files found can then be marked and dragged and dropped directly into the "Selected files" field. or Select Open. In the "Open" mask, use <CTRL> + left mouse button or <SHIFT> + left mouse button to select several files or use the combination <CTRL>+<A> to select all of the files. Select Open. The files selected will be shown in the "Selected files" field. Deleting the list of files to be converted It is not possible to pick files to be deleted in the "Selected files" field. The files in the "Selected files" field will be automatically deleted as soon as other files are dragged into or entered in the field. Set directory for converted files? If no other directory has been defined, then TruToPs Convert will put the converted files into the same directory as the files to be converted. 5. To set a permanent directory for the converted files: Select "Common dest. Directory". Set the destination directory. Mark any file in the target folder. Select Open. Assign Part ID? 6. To assign a Part ID to the files: Select "Set drawingID". Depending on the entry in the Ini file (see section 4.1, p. 7 ff.) the entire file name (default setting) or a part thereof is adopted as Part ID.

S392EN.DOC

3BConverting manually

11

Displaying the log file

7. Select "Show logfile". The log file (*.LOG) contains information about the status of the conversion (example: "Files are being converted"). The file will be displayed when the conversion process is completed. Note You can change the language that the information should be displayed in, in the 'CAD_CONV.ini' file: Open Windows Explorer. Switch to the directory '...:\TRUMPF.NET\Applications\ ToPsCadConverter\bin'. Open 'CAD_CONV.ini'. Change the entry TC_LANGUAGE=DEU (DEU for German, ENG for English, FRZ for French). Save changes. 8. To display a preview of the files, select "Show marked file". Note For drawings with text, special characters e.g. umlauts are not shown in the preview. The umlauts will however be correctly converted. 9. If converted files already exist and should be overwritten, select "Overwrite".

Setting the file options

Set all colors to black/white?

10. Select "Colors Monochrome". Depending on the color scheme set in TruTops, all colors are set to black or white. During smoothing, an existing contour (or contour section) is replaced by a new contour (or contour section). The aim is to reduce the number of (often unnecessary) individual elements of a contour as far as possible, without deviating too far from the original contour. 11. Open the list field with >. 12. Choose your settings: No smoothing: Don't smooth the drawing. Coarse smoothing: Smooth with coarse resolution. Medium smoothing: Smooth with medium resolution. Fine smoothing: Smooth with fine resolution. The coarser the resolution, the fewer elements are required. The new contour section deviates further away from the original contour. The higher the resolution, the more elements are required. The new contour section is the closest to the original contour.

Smooth drawings?

12

3BConverting manually

S392EN.DOC

Transfer texts?

13. Open the list field with >. 14. Select the text font to be used. (No text = Ignore text.)

Interpolate B-splines?

15. To convert B-splines into a contour during the interpolation: Open the list field using >. Mark Interpolate B-Splines. 16. Enter "Distance" (= distance, pos. 1, Fig. 25996, p. 13). The "Distance" corresponds to the increment along the curve. The smaller this value is, the more precisely the interpolation matches the curve. A disadvantage is that the number of lines generated is increased. 17. Enter "Min. length" (= minimum length, pos. 2, Fig. 25996, p. 13). Each line must be longer than the specified value. If the total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value given, the Bspline will not be converted.
1

2
1 Distance 2 Min. Length Fig. 25996

Interpolation of B-splines

Approximate B-Splines?

18. To convert B-Splines into a contour consisting of lines and arcs: Open the list field using >. Mark Approximate B-Splines. 19. Enter "Distance" (= distance, pos. 1, Fig. 25997). This parameter defines the maximum distance from the lines and arcs to the curve. The curve is divided until the distance between the approximated contour and the curve is smaller than the entered value. 20. Enter "Min. length" (= minimum length, pos. 2, Fig. 25997). Each line must be longer than the specified value. If the total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value given, the Bspline will not be converted.

S392EN.DOC

3BConverting manually

13

2
1 Distance 2 Minimum length Fig. 25997

Approximating B-Splines

Setting the measuring system

21. Open the list field using >. 22. Select the desired measuring system: Automatic: The measuring system used in the files to be converted will be used. Note Dimensions in *.dxf have no units. If Automatic is set, the metric measuring system will be used.

Metric: Set to metric measuring system. Inch: Set to imperial measuring system (inches). Metric Inch: Convert metric to imperial (inches). Inch Metric: Convert imperial (inches) to metric. Scale metric with factor: Scale metric measuring system with a factor (important for parts drawn to scale). Scale inch with factor: Scale inches with a factor (important for parts drawn to scale).

23. If the measuring system has to be scaled: Enter a scale factor under "Scale factor". Carrying out the contour preparation 24. Enter the "Tolerance" with which the contour preparation is to be carried out. Note Note the measuring system used in the drawings. The tolerance specifies how far apart the start and endpoints of two elements may lie, so that they are still merged together.

14

3BConverting manually

S392EN.DOC

Display a frozenlayer ('.DXF')?

Individual layers can be "frozen" in AutoCad with the effect that they are no longer displayed. 25. To display frozen layers from '.DXF': Select "Frozen layer". 26. To adopt all geometric elements which were defined as blocks whilst producing a drawing in '.DXF' format: Select "Blocksection". By reading in particular layers it is possible to read in geometries of a layer specifically or leave them out specifically. As a result timeconsuming post-machining procedures (e.g. delete dimensioning) are no longer required: 27. In "Selected files" select the file whose layers should be read in (the top file in the list is always automatically selected). The name of the file is shown under "Source for layers". Note Layers can only be selected from one file. The selected layers are valid for all files which are converted in the same run. 28. Select "Select layer". 29. Select one or more layers (to select several: hold <CTRL> or <Strg> down).

Adopt blocksections ('.DXF')?

Only read in selected layers ('.DXF', '*.MI')?

4.3

Starting conversion

1. Once all of the conversion settings have been made: Select Convert. The conversion will begin. 2. To leave TruTops Convert: Select Exit.

S392EN.DOC

3BConverting manually

15

5.

Time-controlled conversion

Automatic conversion of files can be prepared and automatically be started (e.g. overnight).

5.1

Preparing conversion

1. Start the Windows command prompt. 2. In the "TruTops Convert" mask, select files to be converted and make the desired settings (see section 4.2, p. 10 ff.). 3. Copy the contents of the TruTops CAD Converter command line (for the command line see Fig. 53331, p. 10): Mark the contents. Open the context menu with the right mouse button. Select Copy. Example: 4. Insert the contents into the Windows command line. C:\trumpf.net\applications\topscadconverter\bin \tc_conv.exe -idxf -force -t 0.0005 -s DEU -p C:\TRUMPF.NET\Licences -q 1 -j c_yes -U auto n isoprop.fnt -a 2 -g 0.5 -h 0.1 -T 1 -M 3 -W 0.35 -ogeo -mon 5. To convert one file: Enter space. Enter the path of the file to be converted 1. Press <RETURN>. 6. To convert all files in a directory: Add the following commands to the beginning of the line. Write everything in one line. Pay attention to the capitalization and spaces. Replace highlighted positions with actual names or leave out: C:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\Macros\chg_file -D -R I R -Yf C:\TRUMPF.NET\Workfiles .*\.dxf$ -E " -R C:\TRUMPF.NET\ Workfiles .dxf
Variable commands Only enter if the files in the subdirectories are to be converted too. Directory where the files are to be found which are to be converted. Input format. Tab. 3

(Overview of the function and format of the options see section 6, p. 20 f.)

Paths may not contain any spaces.

16

4BTime-controlled conversion

S392EN.DOC

7. If necessary, after -mon, insert a space and then the commands described below for "Disable contour preparation", "Modify preselections for narrow contours" and "Set directory for converted files". Separate the various commands from one another using a space. (The order of the commands is of no significance.) Disable the contour preparation? When the file is saved, the contours are automatically prepared to avoid inaccuracies. For example, any open contours are closed and the zero point of the drawing is shifted to the left lower corner of the rectangle encompassing the drawing. Contour preparation is enabled as standard and should remain enabled. 8. To disable the contour preparation (as an exception e.g. to retain the zero points of the drawings): after -mon insert a space, then insert the -I command (i.e. -L, in lower case). Modify the preselections for narrow contours? Rectangles or oblong holes that are narrower than the laser kerf can lead to problems with the laser machining. One way around this is to replace the closed contours with individual lines which are then cut as open contours. 9. If you want to modify the preselections for narrow contours: Insert a space after -mon. 10. Enter one of the following commands immediately afterward: -M 0 = -M 1 = -M 2 = -M 3 = 11. Enter space. 12. Immediately afterward, enter the width of the contours that are to be replaced by individual lines using the command W Width (pos. 1, Fig. 46138). Use point as a decimal marker. Example: -W 0.35. Note Note the measuring system used by the drawings. Enter the width in [mm] or [inches]. Do not convert narrow contours into lines. Only convert narrow, rectangular contours into lines. Only convert narrow, oblong contours into lines. Convert all rectangular and narrow, oblong contours into lines.

S392EN.DOC

4BTime-controlled conversion

17

1
1 Width of the contours to be converted into lines Converting narrow contours into lines Right: Converted contour new width: Kerf width Fig. 46138

Set directory for converted files?

If no other directory has been set, then TruToPs Convert will put the converted files into the same directory as the files to be converted. 13. To set a permanent directory for the converted files: Enter a space after -mon. 14. Immediately following, insert the command -x path. (Replace path with the actual name. Enter the path without spaces.) 15. End the command line with a space followed by $1".

5.2
Start automatic conversion immediately?

Starting automatic conversion

When all commands have been entered, press <RETURN> (). Automatic conversion will start.

Start automatic conversion with a delay?

Use the at command of the operating system. Example: All DXF files in the directory 'C:\TRUMPF.NET\Workfiles' should be converted daily at 6:00 am and 12:30 pm to the '.GEO' format. 1. Create a new batch file. 2. Save the batch file under 'C:\autoconvert.bat'. 3. Enter the following commands into the batch file. Pay attention to the capitalization and spaces. Replace the highlighted positions with actual names:

18

4BTime-controlled conversion

S392EN.DOC

start /min /low C:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\Macros\ chg_file.exe -D -I R -Yf C:\TRUMPF.NET\Workfi les .*\.dxf$ -E "C:\trumpf.net\applications\ topscadconverter\bin\tc_conv.exe -idxf for ce -t 0.0005 s DEU p C:\TRUMPF.NET\Licenc es q 1 j c_yes U auto n isoprop.fnt a 2 g 0.5 h 0.1 T 1 M 3 W 0.35 ogeo mon Z \0d036(DATA_LIST,S_Name,DATA_LIST_END) $1" 4. Start the Windows command prompt. 5. Enter the following command: at 06:00 /interactive /every:m,t,w,th,f,s \autoconvert.bat" at 12:30 /interactive /every:m,t,w,th,f,s \autoconvert.bat" Note Network drives are not connected in this mode. "c: "c:

S392EN.DOC

4BTime-controlled conversion

19

6.

Overview of the function and format of the options

Display overview of the function and format of the options

1. Either Open Windows Explorer. Switch to the directory '...:\TRUMPF.NET\Applications\ ToPsCadConverter\bin'. Open 'tc_conv.exe' (e.g. via double-click). or Start the Windows command prompt via >Start >Programs >Accessories >Command prompt. Switch to the directory '...:\TRUMPF.NET\Applications\ ToPsCadConverter\bin'. Enter tc_conv.exe. Press <RETURN> (). The function and format of all options is displayed (the highlighted points are place holders for actual names/numerical values):

Option -a

Function Conversion mode for B-splines.

Format -a 0 -a 1 -a 2 -a 3

Remarks -a 0 = Ignore B-splines. -a 1 = Interpolate B-splines. -a 2 = Approximate B-splines. -a 3 = Output control polygon for B-splines. Standard: -a 2 Example: -c(BLACK RED YELLOW) -

-b -c -d -e

DXF: read in block section. DXF/MI: Convert layers entered. Suppress loading and display of texts. Output error messages in a log file (*.LOG).

-b -c (Layername1 Layername2) -d

-e path and file name of the log The file name must observe all conventions applicable for the file 1 operating system. The program is canceled if the log file cannot be created. The log file is stored in the same directory as the 'tc_conv.exe' program.

-f

Switch overwrite mode on and off.

-f

Before creating the output file, the system checks whether a file of the same name already exists. If that is the case, it will not be overwritten. Use f to switch off the check.

Paths may not contain any spaces.

20

5BOverview of the function and format of the options

S392EN.DOC

Option -g -h -i

Function Distance for interpolation/approximation. Minimum length of the B-splines Input format

Format -g distance -h length -igeo 1 -iiges 2 -idxf 2 -imi 2 -imi_capt 2 -idstv 2 -j c_yes -j c_no -l

Remarks Standard: -g 0.05 Use point as a decimal marker. Standard: -h 0.1 Use point as a decimal marker. An input format must be specified. Only one input format may be selected for each program run.

-j -l

Preserve color settings of the source file. Disable the contour preparation.

Standard: -j c_yes; i.e. preserve color settings. Only disable contour preparation in exceptional cases (e.g. to retain the zero points of the drawings). Standard: -moff, i.e. switched off. -M 0 = No preparation. -M 1 = Only prepare rectangular contours. -M 2 = Only prepare oblong contours. -M 3 = Prepare all contours. Only for DXF-, IGES- and MIformats. Standard: Text font 'iso.fnt' is offered as default. At least one target format must be specified. You may also select more than one target format. The input file is then converted to each of the specified file formats. E.g.: -p c:\trumpf.net\licences E.g.: -P tops_pwd -q 1 = Check for local dongle. -q 2 = Check for network dongle. -q 3 = Check for both. Use point as a decimal marker.

-m -M

Output messages about the status of the conversion.

-mon -moff

Mode with which narrow contours -M 0 are converted into lines. -M 1 -M 2 -M 3

-n

Text font to be used.

-n ISO.FNT -n ISOPROP.FNT -n BOLD.FNT -ogeo 1 -ogeo_102 -odxf 2 -ome10

4

-o

Output format of the converted files.

-p -P -q

Path for password file File name of the password file Control dongle access.

-p path

-P file name -q 1 -q 2 -q 3 -r scale factor

-r

Scale factor for drawings.

1 2 3 4

File format created by TruTops. Extension: .geo. Standard interface for CAD systems. Old TruTops file format for drawings of version 1.02. Paths may not contain any spaces.

S392EN.DOC

5BOverview of the function and format of the options

21

Option -s

Function Set the language of the log file ('*.log'). (Standard: English)

Format -s deu -s eng -s frz -s spa -s ita -t tolerance

Remarks -

-t

Tolerance for open contour closure

The tolerance specifies how far apart the start and endpoints of two elements may lie, so that they are still merged together. Use point as a decimal marker. -T 0 = No smoothing -T 1 = Coarse -T 2 = Medium -T 3 = Fine-pitch -U auto = Adopt the measuring system of the files to be converted. -U metric = Set the measuring system to metric. -U inch = Set the measuring system to inches. When active, error messages are output in '.html' (more detailed). When not active, error messages are output in '.txt' (less detailed). Note the measuring system ([mm] or [inch]). Use point as a decimal marker. If the entire file name is not to be used: Instead of .* use an adapted character string ("Regular expression") in the ini file (see section 4.1, p. 7 ff.). Tab. 4

-T

Set resolution for smoothing.

-T 0 -T 1 -T 2 -T 3 -u DongleId -U auto -U metric -U inch

-u -U

ID number of the dongle. Set measuring system of the target file.

-v

Print detailed error descriptions.

-v

-W

Width of the contours that will be replaced by individual lines. DXF: Ignore frozen layer. Write free text as Part ID in the drawing (e.g. for NcLink) Write file names as Part ID in the drawing (e.g. for NcLink)

-W width

-z -Z -F

-z -Z "Free text" -F ".*"

Options for conversion

22

5BOverview of the function and format of the options

S392EN.DOC

Software manual

TruTops
Simple drawing and programming

Software manual

TruTops
Simple drawing and programming

Edition: 10/2006

Ordering information

Please state title of document, desired language and date of edition. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Technische Dokumentation Johann-Maus-Strae 2 D-71254 Ditzingen, Germany Phone: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-0 Fax: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-540 Internet: http://www.trumpf.com E-mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf.com

This document was compiled by the Technical documentation department of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG. All rights, especially the right to reproduce, distribute or translate this documentation, are reserved to TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG, even in the case of patent and industrial rights applications. No part of this documentation may be reproduced, processed, duplicated or distributed by means of electronic systems in any form whatsoever without the prior written consent of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG. Subject to technical alterations. Errors excepted. TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG assumes no liability for any mistakes in this documentation. No liability is accepted for direct or indirect damage or injury resulting from the delivery or use of this documentation to the extent permitted by law.

Before you continue reading...

The aim of this software manual is to introduce, after a short overview, the scope of functions of the "Simple drawing" and "Simple programming" modules using two examples. This software manual complements the software manuals in the TruTops product family.

S580EN.DOC

Before you continue reading...

Table of contents
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 Basics .................................................................................9 Opening simple modules ...................................................10 Subdivision of the user interface .......................................11 Zooming in the graphics window ..................................12 Operating simple modules using the keyboard .................12 Configuration .....................................................................13 Optimizing keyboard operation.....................................13 Entering values using the formula calculator.....................13 Setting and operating the 3D-Viewer.................................14 Meaning of colors and symbols .........................................15 What is important for bending parts...................................17 Base plus flanges .........................................................17 Bend factors and relief grooves....................................18 Data for bending ...........................................................19 Creating individual bend factors and relief grooves .........................................................................19 Simple drawing ................................................................20 Example: drawing a flat workpiece ....................................20 Creating new drawing...................................................20 Drawing rectangular notch............................................21 Drawing square bevels .................................................22 Drawing roundings........................................................23 Drawing a circle ............................................................24 Drawing oblong hole.....................................................25 Drawing rectangular bevels ..........................................26 Closing and saving drawings........................................27 Example: drawing a bending part ......................................28 Creating new drawing...................................................28 Drawing flanges ............................................................29 Drawing notches at elements .......................................35 Drawing rectangular bevels ..........................................37 Displacing coordinates system .....................................39 Drawing a circle of holes ..............................................40 Managing bend factors and relief grooves ...................41 Drawing relief grooves - saving bending part ...............42 Simple programming.......................................................44 Example: programming L plate..........................................44 Creating new sheet.......................................................44 Load part.......................................................................44 Laying out the sheet .....................................................45 Defining slitting strategy ...............................................46 Processing parts automatically.....................................47

2. 2.1

2.2

3. 3.1

Table of contents

S580EN.DOC

3.2

Optimizing the processing sequence ...........................49 Simulating processing ..................................................50 Example: programming bending part ................................51 Creating new sheet.......................................................51 Loading part..................................................................51 Laying out the sheet .....................................................52 Defining slitting strategy ...............................................52 Processing parts automatically.....................................53 Trimming sheets ...........................................................54 Optimizing the processing sequence ...........................54 Simulating processing ..................................................55 Generating an NC Program.............................................56 Defining settings ................................................................56 Defining parameters ..........................................................58 Defining options for subroutine technique .........................60 Defining vaporizing with the laser......................................60 Defining options for outputting the setup plan ...................61 Sending the NC program to the machine ..........................61 Glossary............................................................................63

4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 5.

S580EN.DOC

Table of contents

Table of contents

S580EN.DOC

1.

Basics

The vast majority of all workpieces are single parts. The "Simple drawing" and "Simple programming" modules in the TruTops production system offer exactly the scope of functions that are needed for single workpieces. From drawing the workpiece to the reliable NC program - the userguided, graphical user interface guides you safely and quickly through the program. The design of the operating environment enables operation per touch or completely via the keyboard.
Simple drawing Elements

Corners

Inner contours

Flanges

Simple programming Layout, changing numbers of parts Editing

Repositioning

Optimizing

NC program, generating Table 1

S580EN.DOC

Basics

Note The simple modules are integrated in TruTops basic, for programming directly at the machine, and integrated in the TruTops full version. In addition, TruTops basic is also available as a PC version. TruTops basic does not have any nesting modules.

1.1

Opening simple modules

There are two variants for opening and closing the "Simple drawing and programming" modules: Opening via TruTops basic directly at the machine. Opening via TruTops full version at the PC workstation. Note In TruTops basic and in the TruTops full version, an extensive software documentation is available above the question mark in the form of online help.

Opening TruTops basic

1. Open TruTops basic at the machine. The initial screen is displayed. 2. Press on Drawing or Technology. "Simple drawing" or "Simple programming" is immediately opened.

Opening TruTops full version

1. Open the TruTops full version at the PC workstation. The initial screen is displayed. 2. Press on Drawing or Technology. The "Drawing" or "Technology" module is opened. 3. Select File> Simple drawing or >Simple programming. "Simple drawing" or "Simple programming" is opened.

10

Basics

S580EN.DOC

1.2

Subdivision of the user interface

1 2 3

Guidance Graphics window Information or entry

4 5

Main actions Prompt

6 7

Coordinates Navigation (continue, undo...) Fig. 47752EN

Subdivision of the user interface

S580EN.DOC

Basics

11

Zooming in the graphics window

The mouse pointer becomes a crosshair cursor when it is above the graphics window. A random, framed in cut out can be enlarged by using the left mouse button. The overall view is displayed again via the right mouse button.

1. Left click on the desired area. 2. Pull up a frame using the mouse. 3. Click once again with the left mouse button. The framed cut out is displayed in enlarged form. 4. Right click using the right mouse button. The overall view is displayed.

1.3

Operating simple modules using the keyboard

The "Simple drawing and programming" modules can be operated using the mouse, per touch screen, and via the keyboard. There is a subheading in square brackets beneath every touch button. The subheading matches the designation of a key in the number block on the keyboard.

Single hole

Row of holes/ Hole grid

Circle of holes

Select hole geometry

Coordinates system

Other flange

Delete/ Restore

Undo

Inner contours finished

[4]

[5]

[6]

[Picture up]

[Pos 1]

[Picture down]

[2]

[Esc]

[End] Table 2

12

Basics

S580EN.DOC

1.4

Configuration

Optimizing keyboard operation

To enable you to operate the "Simple drawing and programming" modules optimally using the keyboard, TruTops key functions must be set.

Select Data module >User >Configuration, "Set TruTops key functions".

1.5

Entering values using the formula calculator

Using the formula calculator, you can: Carry out basic calculator operations (point before dash). Transfer results into the entry fields.

Opening formula calculator

1. Either Double click on the entry field using the mouse. or Press the <+> key in the entry field.

Executing basic calculator operations

2. Enter for example (10+20)*5-(40/2)+10. Note A special feature of the formula calculator is that the formula stays displayed in the entry field and can be modified. 3. Press Calculate. The result 140 is displayed. 4. Press Accept. The result will be adopted in the entry field.

S580EN.DOC

Basics

13

1.6

Setting and operating the 3D-Viewer

The 3D-Viewer shows three-dimensional models of the drawn geometries.

Setting the 3D-Viewer

If the 3D model of the geometry is not displayed: select View >Filled in the menu line for the 3D-Viewer.

Rotating 3D model, changing size

1. To rotate the 3D model: keep the left mouse button pressed down. A double arrow is displayed. 2. Move the mouse with the left mouse button pressed down. The 3D model moves in the corresponding direction. 3. To enlarge or make the 3D model smaller: keep the right mouse button pressed down. A double arrow is displayed. 4. Move the mouse upwards with the right mouse button pressed down. The 3D model is made smaller. 5. Move the mouse downwards with the right mouse button pressed down. The 3D model is enlarged.

14

Basics

S580EN.DOC

1.7

Meaning of colors and symbols

In the standard settings, colors and symbols in the Technology module and in the "Simple drawing and programming" modules have the following meaning:
Color Geometries Cyan Yellow Yellow Red Red Red White or black White or black White or black Operations Blue Blue Blue Blue Cyan Cyan Cyan Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Line type: solid Line type: dashed Arrow Square Cross Line type: solid Square Line type: solid Coordinates X,Y Circle Cross Rectangle, solid line type

Symbol, line type

Meaning

Asterisk Line type: solid Line type: dotted All line types Frame Line Line type: solid Line type: solid Line type: dashed

Point for dot point marking Marking and/or engraving (adjustable) Vaporizing (adjustable) Geometry that is not to be processed Only "Simple drawing and programming": The subsequent action is related to the object framed in red Only "Simple drawing and programming": Automatic suggestion that can be confirmed or rejected

Sheet, geometry Circumscribing rectangle with symbolic parts display

Geometry that is to be processed normally (approach and cut) Geometry that is to be cut without being approached

Traversing paths between processed parts Machining operations in non-active clamping range

Travel limits of the machine; non-active station Repositioning of non-active clamping Ejection via chute Tool center for punching Punching operation Ejection via chute

Non-machined geometries/contours Current processing in the simulation

Zero point of the machine Collision point for processing definition

Positions on the transverse rail for tools and clamps Tool center when processing with presser foot

When standard tool is active: Clamping dead range for the standard tool When MultiTool is active: Maximum clamping dead range for the MultiTool type affected

S580EN.DOC

Basics

15

Color Yellow

Symbol, line type Rectangle, dashed line type

Meaning When standard tool is active: Maximum clamping dead range for MultiTools. When MultiTool is active: Clamping dead range for standard tools

Yellow Yellow Yellow

Trapezoid Circle in dashes Triangle (arrow)

Clamping surface for clamps Repositioning device In connection with positioning motion: Direction of the positioning motion Start point of the next processing Ejection via chute

Yellow Green Green

Square Line type: solid Line type: dashed

Laser processing All other machining operations of a compulsory sequence Approach flag for laser processing First processing in a compulsory sequence Traversing paths between the parts of a processing sequence

Green Green Magenta Magenta Magenta Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red

Square Cross Line type: solid Line type: dashed Square Line type: solid Line type: dashed Asterisk Square Square with diagonal Triangle Circle/Rectangle Arrow Frame Line

Ejection via punching flap Tool center when processing with delayed single stroke Selected objects Working range of the machine Ejection via laser flap Geometry and processing of the first part in the positioning sequence with interactive optimization Travel limits of the machine, active station Punching head position during loading

Ejection with chute during punching Initial processing with interactive optimization

Ejection with push-out subroutine Manual removal after machine stop Stop pin without/with sensor Repositioning of active clamping Only "Simple drawing and programming": The subsequent action is related to the object framed in red Only "Simple drawing and programming": Automatic suggestion that can be confirmed or rejected

Colors and symbols

16

Basics

S580EN.DOC

1.8

What is important for bending parts

Base plus flanges

A bending part comprises of a base and a random amount of flanges. The base is the surface in the drawing from where the most important or most bends start out. If the base is determined in the construction drawing of a bending part, then several flanges are added to this.

Base

Flanges Fig. 46376

Configuration of bending parts

S580EN.DOC

Basics

17

Bend factors and relief grooves

What do bend factors produce? During bending, the material is stretched or flattened. The change in the workpiece length during the bending process is compensated with the use of so-called bend factors. In "Simple drawing" the drawing is made with the original dimensions from the two dimensional construction drawing. To enable the finished bent workpiece to correspond with the required dimensions, the dimensions of the flat blank are automatically shortened or extended by the bend factors. Why are relief grooves necessary? A relief groove is a "small notch". It reduces deformation of the edge or corner during bending.

Example of a corner relief groove

Fig. 46548

18

Basics

S580EN.DOC

Data for bending

The database In accordance with the material ID and with the sheet thickness, the "Simple drawing" module selects the upper and lower tool combination from a database, and displays the bend factor associated with it. 1st way: An individual database has been created. Creating the bending data requires expert knowledge. The data from the individual database are always queried first. 2nd way: There is a connection to TruTops Bend. "Simple drawing" reads off the data from this database. 3rd way: "Simple drawing" calculates the bend factors in accordance with DIN if the individual database is empty or a connection to TruTops Bend does not exist.

Where do the data for bending come from?

Creating individual bend factors and relief grooves

1. Press Manage. 2. Press Manage bend factors or Manage relief grooves. 3. Press New. 4. Enter data for bend factors or relief grooves. 5. Press Enter. The new data are entered into the selection field and into the individual database.

S580EN.DOC

Basics

19

2. 2.1

Simple drawing Example: drawing a flat workpiece

Flat workpiece: "L-plate"

Fig. 46531

Creating new drawing

1. Press New drawing. 2. Enter or select material: "Designation": St37-20. "Thickness" 2 mm. 3. Press Continue. 4. Enter "Base measurements": "Horizontally": 120 mm. "Vertically": 120 mm. 5. Press Continue.

20

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing rectangular notch

1. Press Corners. 2. Press Rectangular notch. 3. Enter notch values: "Horizontally": 70 mm. "Vertically": 60 mm. "Relief groove": 0 mm. 4. Press Continue. A suggestion is displayed in red. 5. If the notch is not positioned at the correct place: press No repeatedly. 6. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. The notch is drawn.

Fig. 46471

7. Press Finished.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

21

Drawing square bevels

1. Press Square Bevel. 2. Enter bevel values: "Distance": 10 mm. 3. Press Continue. A suggestion is displayed in red. 4. If the bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press No repeatedly. 5. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. The bevel is drawn.

Fig. 46472

6. Press Finished.

22

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing roundings
1. Press Rounding. 2. Enter rounding data: "Radius": 10 mm. 3. Press Continue. A suggestion is displayed in red. 4. If the first rounding is not positioned at the correct place: press No repeatedly. 5. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 6. To position the second rounding at the correct place: press No repeatedly. 7. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. The roundings are drawn.

Fig. 46473

8. Press Finished.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

23

Drawing a circle
1. Press Inner contours. 2. Either

If an inner contour has not yet been drawn: Press Single hole, Circle. If an inner contour has already been drawn: Press Single hole, Select hole geometry, Circle.

or

3. Enter circle data: "Diameter": 10 mm. 4. Press Continue. 5. Enter the single hole position: "to the right": 10 mm. "to the top": 110 mm. 6. Press Finished. 7. Press Single hole, Select hole geometry, Circle. 8. Enter Circle data: "Diameter": 10 mm. 9. Press Continue. 10. Enter the single hole position: "to the right": 10 mm. "to the top": 10 mm. The single holes are drawn.

Fig. 46474

11. Press Finished.

24

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing oblong hole

1. Press Elements. 2. Press Oblong hole. 3. Enter oblong hole data: "Depth": 20 mm. "Width": 10 mm. 4. Press Continue. A suggestion is displayed in red. 5. If the edge on which the oblong hole is to be positioned is not correct: press Next or Previous repeatedly. 6. If the correct position has been reached: press Continue. Changing reference to edge 7. Press Change reference. 8. Press Right edge end. 9. Enter position of notch center: "Distance": 15 mm. 10. Press Continue. The oblong hole is drawn.

Fig. 46475

11. Press Element finished.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

25

Drawing rectangular bevels

1. Press Corners. 2. Press Rectangle Bevel. 3. Enter bevel values: "Horizontally": 5 mm. "Vertically": 10 mm. 4. Press Continue. A suggestion is displayed in red. 5. If the first bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press No repeatedly. 6. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 7. If the second bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press No repeatedly. 8. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. The bevels are drawn.

Fig. 46476

9. Press Finished.

26

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Closing and saving drawings

1. Press Corners finished. 2. Press All finished. 3. Save part: press Yes. "File information" is opened. 4. Enter file information. 5. Select OK. "Save file" is opened. 6. Enter L-plate next to "File name". 7. Select OK.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

27

2.2

Example: drawing a bending part

75

39.99 72.51

210

435

495

20

35 40

40

Bending part: "Box"

10

Fig. 46547

Creating new drawing

1. Press New drawing. 2. Enter or select material: "Designation": St37-20. "Thickness": 2 mm. 3. Press Continue. Note The base is the surface in the drawing from where the most important or most bends start out. 4. Enter "Base measurements": "Horizontally": 495 mm. "Vertically": 435 mm. 5. Press Continue.

28

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing flanges
1. Press Flanges. 2. Press Generate. The lower edge is marked in red. 3. If the correct edge upon which the flange is to be drawn is not selected: Press Previous or Next. 4. Press Continue. Drawing lower flange 5. Enter flange values: "Height": 75 mm. 6. Enter the distances: "from the left": 0 mm. "from the right": 0 mm. 7. Press Continue. 8. Specify flange direction: Press To the top. The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green. 9. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46477

10. Press Generate. 11. To select the upper edge: Press Previous or Next. 12. Press Continue.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

29

Drawing upper flange

13. Enter flange values: "Height": 75 mm. 14. Enter the distances: "from the left": 0 mm. "from the right": 0 mm. 15. Press Continue. 16. Specify flange direction: Press To the top. The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green. 17. Press Generate. 18. To select the left edge: Press Previous or Next. 19. Press Continue.

Drawing left flange

20. Enter flange values: "Height": 75 mm. 21. Enter the distances: "from the left": 0 mm. "from the right": 0 mm. 22. Press Continue. 23. Specify flange direction: Press To the top. The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green.

30

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Defining flange overlapping

24. To define flange overlapping: press Left. Notes The touch buttons for the overlapping are not pressed in. The overlapping of the flanges is represented with shaded bar displays. The overlapping can be controlled via the positioning of the bars to one another.

Overlapping of flanges

Fig. 46532

25. Press Continue. The "*" symbol is displayed at the next corner. 26. To define flange overlapping: press Left. 27. Press Continue. 28. Press Generate.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

31

Drawing first right flange

29. To select the right edge: Press Previous or Next. 30. Press Continue. 31. Enter flange values: "Height": 35 mm. 32. Enter the distances: "from the left": 0 mm. "from the right": 0 mm. 33. Press Continue. 34. Specify flange direction: Press To the top. The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green. 35. To define flange overlapping: press Bottom. 36. Press Continue. The "*" symbol is displayed at the next corner. 37. To define flange overlapping: press Top. 38. Press Continue. 39. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46478

32

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing second right flange

40. Press Generate. 41. To select the right edge: Press Previous or Next. 42. Press Continue. 43. Enter flange values: "Height": 40 mm. 44. Enter the distances: "from the left": 0 mm. "from the right": 0 mm. 45. Press Continue. 46. Specify flange direction: Press to the bottom. The flange is drawn. 47. To define flange overlapping: press None. 48. Press Continue.

Drawing third right flange

49. Press Generate. 50. To select the right edge: Press Previous or Next. 51. Press Continue. 52. Enter flange values: "Height": 40 mm. 53. Enter the distances: "from the left": 0 mm. "from the right": 0 mm. 54. Press Continue. 55. Specify flange direction: Press To the top. The flange is drawn.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

33

56. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46479

57. Press Flanges finished.

34

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing notches at elements

1. Press Elements. 2. If the correct lower flange is not selected: Press Other flange. Navigate to the lower flange using the navigation touch button. Press Continue. 3. Press Rectangle. Drawing rectangular notch at lower flange 4. Enter rectangular values: "Depth": 40 mm. "Width": 210 mm. Note The entered values are self-sustaining. They don't have to be reentered for more notches. 5. Press Continue, Continue. Changing reference for the notch 6. Press Change reference. Press Central. Press Continue. The "*" symbol marks the notch center at the element. 7. Press Continue. The notch is drawn. Drawing rectangular notch at upper flange 8. To select the upper flange: Press Other flange. Navigate to the upper flange using the navigation touch button. Press Continue. 9. Press Rectangle. 10. Press Continue, Continue, Continue. The notch is drawn. Drawing rectangular notch at left flange 11. To select the left flange: Press Other flange. Navigate to the left flange using the navigation touch button. Press Continue. 12. Press Rectangle. 13. Press Continue, Continue, Continue. The notch is drawn.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

35

14. Press Element finished. 15. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46480

36

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing rectangular bevels

1. To select the left flange: Press Other flange. Navigate to the left flange using the navigation touch button. 2. Press Corners. Drawing bevels for the upper, lower, and left flange 3. Press Square Bevel. 4. Enter bevel values: "Distance": 39.99 mm. 5. Press Continue. A red cross marks the corner for the next action. 6. If the first bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press No repeatedly.

Corners to be processed (red cross)

Fig. 46533

Note Make sure that the red cross is positioned at the correct corner. 7. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 8. If the second bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press No repeatedly. 9. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. The bevels are drawn. 10. Press Finished.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

37

11. Repeat steps for the upper and lower flange. Drawing bevels for the right flange 12. To select the right flange: Press Other flange. Navigate to the right flange using the navigation touch button. 13. Press Corners. 14. Press Square Bevel. 15. Enter bevel values: "Distance": 10 mm. 16. Press Continue. 17. If the first bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press No repeatedly. 18. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 19. If the second bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press No repeatedly. 20. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. The bevels are drawn. 21. Press Finished. 22. To display the 3D model of the bending part: Press Corners finished. Press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46534

23. Press Inner contours finished.

38

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Displacing coordinates system

1. Press Inner contours. 2. Press Other flange. 3. Press Base. 4. Press Continue. 5. Press Coordinates system. 6. Press Bottom left.

Fig. 46535

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

39

Drawing a circle of holes

1. Press Inner contours. 2. Either

If an inner contour has not yet been drawn: Press Circle of holes, Circle. If an inner contour has already been drawn: Press Circle of holes, Select hole geometry, Circle.

or

4. Enter circle data: "Diameter": 20 mm. 5. Press Continue. 6. Enter center of hole circle: "to the right": 247 mm. "to the top": 217.5 mm. 7. Press Continue. The center is marked with a red cross. 8. Press the lower symbol under "Point/Angle definition". 9. Enter hole circle dimensions: "Start angle": 0. "End angle": 360. "Radius": 100 mm. "Number": 8. 10. Press Circle of holes finished. The circle of holes is drawn. 11. Press Inner contours finished.

40

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

12. To display the 3D model of the bending part: Press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46536

13. Press All finished.

Managing bend factors and relief grooves

(see Section 1.8, p. 19)

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

41

Drawing relief grooves - saving bending part

1. Press the lower symbol under "Corner relief groove", and upper symbol under "Edge relief groove". 2. Enter corner relief groove: "Diameter": 4 mm. 3. Enter edge relief groove: "Length": 5 mm. "Width": 2 mm. 4. Press Continue. Note For the selected material ID and thickness, the entered values for the corner and edge relief grooves can be entered into the database. 5. Transfer values to database? Press Yes. Note The relief grooves are saved after saving the drawing. 6. Save part: press Yes. "File information" is opened. 7. Enter file information. 8. Select OK. "Save file" is opened. 9. Enter Box next to "File name". 10. Select OK.

42

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

The file is saved. The relief grooves are displayed. The bending part has been shrunk in accordance with the bend factor.

Fig. 46537

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

43

3. 3.1

Simple programming Example: programming L plate

Creating new sheet

1. Press New sheet. 2. Enter machine and sheet data: "Machine": TruPunch 1000. "Material ID": ST37-20. "XxYxZ": 2000x1000x2 mm. 3. Enter margins: "Left": 20 mm. "Right": 20 mm. "Top": 20 mm. 4. To set the lower margin: press on the lower icon under "Block clamping range". Enter 100 mm. 5. Press Continue. The empty sheet is displayed.

Load part
1. Press Load part. 2. Select file 'L-Platte.geo'. 3. Select OK. The part is displayed under "Part information". 4. Enter part information: "Number of pieces": 30. "Angle": 0. 5. Enter web width for parts: "X": 15 mm. "Y": 15 mm.

44

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

Laying out the sheet

1. To change the start corner: press Start corner. 2. Press Top left. 3. Press Continue. The sheet layout is displayed:

Fig. 46538

Changing block layout

4. Press Format block. 5. Press +X repeatedly. The modified sheet layout is displayed:

Fig. 46539

6. Press Continue.

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

45

Adding parts

7. Press Change numbers of parts. Press +X repeatedly. Press +Y repeatedly. The modified sheet layout is displayed:

Fig. 46540

8. Press Continue, Continue. The final sheet layout is displayed. 9. Press Continue to technology. "Separating strategy" is opened.

Defining slitting strategy

Press Grid. "Automatic processing" is displayed.

46

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

Processing parts automatically

1. To create your own tooling list: press Tooling lists. "Tooling list management" is opened. 2. Select New. "Create new tooling list" is opened. 3. Enter name: e.g. User1. 4. In the tooling list: select Circular 10 mm. 5. Select Undo. 6. Define the tooling lists for automatic processing: Select "Single hole": User1. Select "Notch": Trumpf. Select "Contour": Trumpf. 7. Press Edit. Automatic processing begins. The tools used are displayed in the information area on the right-hand side. Processings are marked in red. Note Tooling lists can still be changed at the present time for processings shown in red. Undo cancels the complete processing. All processings are shown in cyan after the next step. The named actions are then no longer an option.

Fig. 46543

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

47

8. To check whether the processing is complete: make a frame around a part using the left mouse button. The part is shown in enlarged form. Processing oblong hole manually 9. If the oblong hole is not processed: press Process one part. Press Elements, At element. The element not processed is framed in red (in this example: straight element at oblong hole). Press Tool. In the selection list: select Rectangle 10x5 mm. Select OK. Press "Confirm processing for this element": press Yes. The next element not processed is framed in red (in this example: circular element at oblong hole). Press Tool. In the selection list: select Circular 10 mm. Select OK. Press "Confirm processing for this element": press Yes. The next element not processed is framed in red (in this example: straight element at oblong hole). Proceed as described above for this element. Press "Confirm processing for this element": press Yes. Press Finished, Elements finished. The added processing is transferred to all equal elements. All processings are shown in cyan. 10. If the rounding has been processed with "Square 10": press Number of tools. To display the processing of the rounding: press Previous or Next repeatedly. In the Tools already used in part list, the tool for the rounding is marked with a star. Press Delete. Processing with this tool is removed. Press Add. "Tools" opens. In the selection list: select Square 5 mm. Select OK. Press Recalculate. Press Finished. The processing is recalculated. The processing of the rounding is executed using "Square 5".

Changing number of tools, processing rounding

48

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

Concluding processing

11. Press Part finished. The entire sheet is displayed. 12. Press Continue. "Trimming" is displayed. 13. Press Continue. 14. Confirm the message for repositioning with Yes. "Optimization" is displayed.

Optimizing the processing sequence

1. Press Slitting sequence. Press Meander top left. Press Continue. 2. Enter "Optimization parameters": "Grouping of rows": 2. "Tool sequence" opens. 3. Press Previous tool. In the list of tools already used, the "*" symbol wanders downwards by one position. The tool is marked. 4. Press Tool to the bottom. The marked tool is sorted in the list by one position downwards. 5. Press Continue. The "Simulation of tool change" message list is displayed. 6. Select OK. "Simulation" is displayed.

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

49

Simulating processing
1. Either Press Next processing. The simulation is displayed step-for-step. or Keep key <6> on the keyboard pressed down. The longer the key is pressed down, the quicker the simulation proceeds. 2. To the start the simulation from the beginning: press Simulation to start. 3. Press Continue. "Generate NC Program" is displayed (see Section 4, p. 56).

50

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

3.2

Example: programming bending part

Creating new sheet

1. Press New sheet. 2. Enter machine and sheet data: "Machine": TruPunch 1000. Material ID: ST37-20. "XxYxZ": 2000x1000x2 mm. 3. Enter margins: "Left": 20 mm. "Right": 20 mm. "Top": 20 mm. 4. To set the lower margin: press on the lower icon under "Block clamping range". Enter 100 mm. 5. Press Continue. The empty sheet is displayed.

Loading part
1. Press Load part. 2. Select the 'Kiste.geo' file. 3. Select OK. The part is displayed under Part information. 4. Enter part information: "Number of pieces": 2. "Angle": 0. 5. Enter web width for parts: "X": 15 mm. "Y": 15 mm.

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

51

Laying out the sheet

1. To change the start corner: press Start corner. 2. Press Top left. 3. Press Continue. The sheet layout is displayed:

Fig. 46545

4. Press Continue, Continue. The final sheet layout is displayed. 5. Press Continue to technology. "Separating strategy" is opened.

Defining slitting strategy

Press Grid. "Automatic processing" is displayed.

52

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

Processing parts automatically

1. To create your own tooling list: press Tooling lists. "Tooling list management" is opened. 2. Select New. "Create new tooling list" is opened. 3. Enter name: e.g. User1. 4. In the tooling list: select Circular 20 mm. 5. Select Undo. 6. Define the tooling lists for automatic processing: Single hole: select User1. Notch: select Trumpf. Contour: select Trumpf. 7. Press Edit. Automatic processing begins. The tools already used are displayed. The processed parts are shown in red. Note Tooling lists can still be changed at the present time for processings shown in red. Undo cancels the complete processing. All processings are shown in cyan after the next step. The named actions are then no longer an option.

Fig. 46546

8. Press Continue. "Trimming" is displayed.

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

53

Trimming sheets
1. Press Trimming, Strategy, U stripes. 2. Press Tool. 3. In the selection list: select Rectangle 70x5 mm. 4. Select OK. 5. Press Continue. The start part (magenta color) at which the trimming cut begins is suggested. 6. Press Continue. The start part is confirmed. 7. To define the end part at the bottom right on the sheet: press Previous repeatedly. The end part (magenta color) at which the trimming cut ends is suggested. 8. Press Continue. 9. Confirm the messages for the trimming edge with Yes and OK. The trimming edge is displayed. 10. Press Continue. 11. Confirm the message for repositioning with Yes. "Optimization" is displayed.

Optimizing the processing sequence

1. Press Slitting sequence. Press Meander top left. Press Continue. 2. Enter "Optimization parameters": "Grouping of rows": 1. "Tool sequence" opens. 3. Press Previous tool. In the list of tools already used, the "*" symbol wanders downwards by one position. The tool is marked.

54

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

4. Press Tool to the bottom. The marked tool is sorted in the list by one position downwards. 5. Press Continue. The "Simulation of tool change" message list is displayed. 6. Select OK. "Simulation" is displayed.

Simulating processing
1. Either Press Next processing. The simulation is displayed step-for-step. or Keep key <6> on the keyboard pressed down. The longer the key is pressed down, the quicker the simulation proceeds. 2. To the start the simulation from the beginning: press Simulation to start. 3. Press Continue. "Generate NC Program" is displayed (see Section 4, p. 56).

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

55

4. 4.1

Generating an NC Program Defining settings

Select "Settings".

Connection between name of "NC file" and "Program name" Machines with Bosch control systems TruTops uses the digits from the name of the NC file. If the name of the NC file contains no digits, then TruTops will use the date and the time in sequence to generate a name that is as unequivocal as possible. The program name and the name of the NC file can be modified at any time (see following pages). For machines with Bosch control systems, only numerical program names (digits) can be used. Machines with Siemens control systems For machines with Siemens control systems and alphanumeric program names, TruTops offers the name of the NC file as the default program name. Note With alphanumeric program names no distinction is made between lower case and upper case letters. Modifying the name of the NC file TruTops uses the following NC file names: The file name of the first loaded part when generating multicopy areas. The sheet name of the respective sheet when machining a nesting job.

1. Delete the names to be found under "NC file". 2. Enter New name.

Modifying NC program path TruTops offers in the default settings the NC program path '/TRUMPF.NET/Workfiles/user1/'. 1. Open "NC program path" with ">". The file browser opens. 2. Select New directory. 3. Select OK. TruTops shows the new path under "NC program path."

56

Generating an NC Program

S580EN.DOC

Defining path for saving setup plan TruTops offers in the default settings the path for setup plan '/TRUMPF.NET/Workfiles/user1/'. 1. Put a check mark at "Path for setup plan". 2. Open "Path for set-up plan" with >. The file browser opens. 3. Select New directory. 4. Select OK. TruTops shows the new path under "Path for setup plan".

Modifying program name 1. Delete old program name. 2. Enter new program name. Note For machines with Bosch control systems, only numerical program names (digits) can be used.

NC title, customer, programmer, remark ... TruTops writes this information in the setup plan. The remarks for the setup plan are self-holding until they are overwritten by new text. Enter the desired information.

Defining additional settings 1. Go to one of the tabs "Parameters", "Subroutine techn.", "Laser" or "Setup plan" (see following descriptions). 2. Select OK. TruTops generates the NC program.

S580EN.DOC

Generating an NC Program

57

4.2

Defining parameters

Select "Parameters".
Parameter Number of program runs Effect Indicates how often the NC program at the machine is to be executed. The information is outputted in the setup plan. If a production plan has been created with TruTops or NcLink, then the NC program will be executed accordingly often, one time after another, as specified in the NC program. Monitoring clamp positions Monitor space between clamps Prepare loading at end of program The machine executes the clamp checking program with position monitoring. The machine executes the clamp checking program with space monitoring. Useful when the NC program is to be executed several times in succession. The loading of the next identical sheet starts immediately at the end of the NC program even while the sheet is still being processed. Reload first tool at end of program Useful when the NC program is to be executed several times in succession. The first tool in the NC program will be automatically newly mounted at the end of the NC program. Use M24 Block numbering Transferring technology data Using high number of strokes. To reduce the file size of the NC program: deselect option. The laser technology data and the basic tooling data are transferred to the machine. Depending on the machine setting, the data is then adopted only if it is not yet present at the machine. The standard push-out subroutine Q9998 is outputted. The sheet layout subroutine "P9994" is applied to the control system of the machine with this option. It must be applied after each initial installation or after each update. The sheet layout subroutine is the user interface for the layout with single parts. The message "Do you wish to overwrite" will not be displayed. The post-processing program is started immediately after the generation of the NC program (see Section below). The mask for data transfer is automatically opened after the generation of the NC program. The NC program can be copied or moved into the transfer folder. Table 3

Transferring push-out subroutine Transferring sheet layout subroutine

Overwriting NC files without warning NC post-processing program Starting transfer immediately

58

Generating an NC Program

S580EN.DOC

Using NC post-processing programs

Entries for post-processing programs or complete post-processing programs are supplied with TruTops. Post-processing programs are started directly after the NC program is generated. TruTops Punch contains as default settings the following NC postprocessing programs:
Name of the NC post-processing program Open NC program using an editor. Print the NC program with the default printer.

LST_EDITOR STD_PRINTER STD_PRINTER_MO

(MO = modal, i.e. TruTops waits while the NC program is being printed) INTERNETEDITOR Collect data for printing labels. NC post-processing programs PREPARE_LABEL Table 4

Example: the NC text is to be opened and printed with the "Notepad" editor after the NC program is generated.

1. Select "NC post-processing program". 2. Open the input box with >. "Program selection" opens. 3. Make a check mark at NC post-processing program (here: STD_PRINTER). TruTops imports the STD_PRINTER in the input box.

Using one's own postprocessing programs

You can create your own NC post-processing programs and add them to the selection list (see TruTops software manual, Data module). TruTops then offers these post-processing programs here.

S580EN.DOC

Generating an NC Program

59

4.3

Defining options for subroutine technique

Subroutine technique means: certain processing sequences which are repeatedly executed on a single sheet are written in a separate program (subroutine). This subroutine can be called up repeatedly within the main program.

1. Select "Subroutine techn.". 2. Either Select "Part-oriented". The NC program is generated in a part-oriented manner. This means that the system is searched within a multi-copy area for identical processing sequences, which are written in the subroutine according to the defined rules. Enter "Minimum number of machining operations for a subroutine". Enter "Minimum number of activations for a subroutine". or Select "Compulsory sequence". The machining operations in compulsory sequences are written into subroutines.

4.4

Defining vaporizing with the laser

Prerequisite The "Vaporizing" option is activated (Rule).

1. Select "Laser". Note The options under "Vaporizing" control the automatic vaporizing of all laser contours. No manually programmed vaporizing is affected by this, neither "Sheetwise" nor "Partwise". 2. Select "Vaporizing" "No" or "Sheetwise" or "Partwise".

60

Generating an NC Program

S580EN.DOC

4.5

Defining options for outputting the setup plan

Select "Setup plan". (refer to TruTops software manual)

4.6

Sending the NC program to the machine

1. Select the "Parameters" tab. Select "Start transfer immediately". Select OK. TruTops displays the "NC file transfer" mask. Note 'C:\DH\ToPsmanu.dir' is the default directory for NC programs on the machine.

"NC file transfer"

Fig. 27067EN

Selecting the NC program

2. Open "Source file name" with >. The TruTops file browser is displayed. 3. Search the file if necessary. 4. Mark the NC program ('.lst') you are searching for. 5. Select OK. TruTops displays the "NC file transfer" mask again. The file name and the path of the NC program are entered under "Source file".

S580EN.DOC

Generating an NC Program

61

Changing the target directory on the machine

When transferring, TruTops always offers the directory that is entered for the machine (see TruTops software manual, Data module). Note 'C:\DH\ToPsmanu.dir' is the default directory for NC programs on the machine.

1. To define the target directory permanently: select Data module, Machines >Data, Basic machine, Data 7, "Name of transfer path". 2. To modify the destination directory on a short-term basis (until next time the machine is changed): open "Target directory" via >. TruTops displays the "Select directory" mask. 3. Select directory. 4. Select OK. The "NC file transfer" mask will be displayed again. The new target directory is entered. It remains in effect until the next time the machine is exchanged.

Starting transfer

1. To send a copy of the NC program to the machine: select "Copy". or To send the original of the NC program to the machine: select "Pan". 2. To transfer additional NC programs after transferring the first NC program, deactivate "Close dialog after transfer". 3. Select Transfer. The data is transferred to the machine.

62

Generating an NC Program

S580EN.DOC

5.
Term Bend factors Icon -

Glossary

Action/Explanation During bending, the material is stretched or flattened. The change in the workpiece length during the bending process is compensated with the use of socalled bend factors. To enable the finished bent workpiece to correspond with the required dimensions, the dimensions of the flat blank are automatically shortened or extended by the bend factors.

Manage bend factor

Opens the database for bend factors.

Other flange

Opens a navigation window for single selection of the flange to be changed:

Relief grooves

A relief groove is a "small notch". It reduces deformation of the edge or corner during bending. Opens the database for relief grooves.

Manage relief grooves

Base

A bending part comprises of a base and a random amount of flanges. The base is the surface in the drawing from where the most important or most bends start out. If the base is determined in the construction drawing of a bending part, then several flanges are added to this.

TruTops start menu

Goes to TruTops start mask.

Manage

Opens the database for bend factors or relief grooves.

Continue in TruTops

Goes to TruTops basic or into the TruTops full version.

Table 5

S580EN.DOC

Glossary

63

64

Glossary

S580EN.DOC